GRADUATE CATALOG 2013-2014 Academic Calendar 2013–2014

The graduate academic calendar is divided into fall, spring and summer semesters. The undergraduate academic calendar is divided into seven-week terms: the fall semester terms, A and B; the spring semester terms, C and D. Term E is the summer semester. Some graduate courses are offered on a term-basis, coincidental with the undergraduate­ calendar. Details of the WPI academic calendar, including dates on which graduate classes begin and end for each semester, appear below. 2013 2014 August 21-22 January 8 Teaching Assistants Training Graduate Student Orientation August 27 (for students beginning Spring 2014) Graduate Student Orientation January 8-9 August 29 Teaching Assistant Training (new TA’s only) Graduate classes begin, Fall semester January 16 September 2 Graduate classes begin, Spring semester Labor Day January 20 October 1 Martin Luther King Day (no classes) Deadline for filing application for February 3 graduation for February 2014 Deadline for filing application for October 17 graduation for May 2014 Last day of classes, Term A 7-week March 7 graduate courses Last day of classes, Term C 7-week October 21-25 graduate courses Semester Break March 10-14 October 28 Semester Break Semester classes resume, Term B 7-week March 17 graduate courses begin First day of classes, Term D 7-week November 26-29 graduate courses Thanksgiving recess March (TBD) December 20 Graduate Research Achievement Day Graduate classes end, Fall semester (GRAD 2013) and Term B April 21 Patriots Day (no classes) May 5 Graduate classes end, Spring semester and Term D May 17 Spring 2013 commencement July 1 Deadline for filing application for graduation for October 2014

2 Academic Calendar Return to Table of Contents Table of Contents

Academic Calendar ...... 2 Graduate Programs ...... 4 Graduate Programs by Degree...... 5 Graduate and Advanced Graduate Certificates...... 7 Corporate and Professional Education...... 9 Admission Information...... 11 Application Requirements...... 14 Financial Information ...... 15 Grading System and Academic Standards ...... 16 Registration Information and Procedures...... 19 Degree Requirements...... 21 Theses and Dissertations...... 23 Student Services...... 23 Academic Departments and Programs Bioinformatics and Computational Biology...... 26 Biology and Biotechnology...... 28 Biomedical ...... 31 School of Business...... 38 Chemical Engineering...... 48 and Biochemistry ...... 52 Civil and Environmental Engineering...... 55 Computer and Communications Networks...... 62 Computer Science...... 64 Computer Security...... 73 Electrical and Computer Engineering ...... 74 Fire Protection Engineering...... 84 Interactive Media and Game Development...... 87 Interdisciplinary Programs...... 89 Learning Sciences and ...... 93 Manufacturing Engineering...... 96 Materials Process Engineering ...... 99 and Engineering...... 100 Mathematical Sciences...... 106 ...... 117 Physics...... 131 Engineering...... 135 STEM for Educators...... 141 System Dynamics...... 143 Systems Engineering...... 147 Index ...... 149 Driving Directions...... 150

Table of Contents 3 Graduate Programs

Bioinformatics and Computer Science Materials Process Engineering Computational Biology Graduate Certificate Master of Science in Materials Process Master of Science in Bioinformatics and Master of Science in Computer Science Engineering Computational Biology Master of Science in Computer Science specializing in Computer and Materials Science and Biology and Biotechnology* Communications Networks Engineering Master of Science in Biology/ Master of Science in Computer Science Master of Science in Materials Science Biotechnology specializing in Computer Security and Engineering Ph.D. in Biology and Biotechnology Advanced Certificate Ph.D. in Materials Science and Ph.D. in Computer Science Engineering Biomedical Engineering* Electrical and Computer Mathematical Sciences Master of Engineering in Biomedical Engineering Engineering Master of Mathematics for Educators Master of Science in Biomedical Graduate Certificate Professional Master of Science in Engineering Master of Engineering in Electrical and Financial Mathematics Ph.D. in Biomedical Engineering Computer Engineering Professional Master of Science in Master of Engineering in Power Systems Industrial Mathematics Business Engineering Master of Science in Applied Mathematics Graduate Certificate Master of Science in Electrical and Master of Science in Applied Statistics Master of Business Administration Computer Engineering Ph.D. in Mathematical Sciences (M.B.A.) Advanced Certificate Master of Science in Information Ph.D. in Electrical and Computer Mechanical Engineering Engineering Graduate Certificate Master of Science in Mechanical Master of Science in Management Fire Protection Engineering Master of Science in Marketing and Engineering Technological Innovation Graduate Certificate Ph.D. in Mechanical Engineering Master of Science in Operations Design Master of Science in Fire Protection and Leadership Engineering Physics Ph.D. in Business Administration Advanced Certificate Master of Science in Physics Ph.D. in Fire Protection Engineering Ph.D. in Physics Chemical Engineering Interactive Media and Master of Science in Chemical Robotics Engineering Engineering Game Development Graduate Certificate Ph.D. in Chemical Engineering Master of Science in Interactive Media Master of Science in Robotics and Game Development Engineering Chemistry and Biochemistry Ph.D. in Robotics Engineering Master of Science in Biochemistry Interdisciplinary Studies Master of Science in Chemistry Master of Science in Interdisciplinary STEM for Educators Ph.D. in Biochemistry Studies Master of Science in Mathematics for Ph.D. in Chemistry – Impact Engineering Educators (MMED) – Manufacturing Engineering Master of Science in Physics for Civil and Environmental Management Educators (MPED) Engineering – Power Systems Management System Dynamics Graduate Certificate – Systems Modeling Master of Engineering in Civil Ph.D. in Interdisciplinary Studies Graduate Certificate in System Dynamics Master of Science in System Dynamics Engineering Learning Sciences and Master of Science in Civil Engineering Interdisciplinary Ph.D. in Social Science Master of Science in Environmental Technologies and Policy Studies Engineering Master of Science in Learning Sciences Systems Engineering Interdisciplinary Master of Science in and Technologies Construction Project Management Ph.D. in Learning Sciences and Graduate Certificate Advanced Certificate Technologies Advanced Certificate Ph.D. in Civil Engineering Master of Science in Systems Manufacturing Engineering Engineering Graduate Certificate Master of Science in Manufacturing Engineering Ph.D. in Manufacturing Engineering *Fall Semester admission only

4 Graduate Programs Return to Table of Contents Graduate Programs by Degree

WPI offers graduate study leading to the Master of Science (M.S.) Master of Engineering (M.E.) master of science, master of engineering, Programs Programs master of mathematics for educators, Available, on a full-time and part-time Offered in: master of business administration, and the basis, in the following disciplines: doctor of philosophy degrees. • Biomedical Engineering • Applied Mathematics • Civil Engineering The schedule of courses over a period of • Applied Statistics time generally allows a student taking – Environmental Engineering three or four courses per semester to • Biochemistry* – Master Builder Program complete the course requirements for • Bioinformatics and Computational • Electrical and Computer Engineering Biology most Master’s degree programs in about Master of Business two years. Students taking two courses per • Biology/Biotechnology* semester complete the course requirements Administration (M.B.A.) • Biomedical Engineering Program­ for the master of science or engineering • Chemical Engineering* degrees in about three years, or the master Provides students with strategies for the • Chemistry* of business administration degree in about successful application of technology to four years. • Civil Engineering complex business environments. The • Computer Science degree requirements are described in this The Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) – Specializing in Computer and catalog and in a separate brochure Programs* Communications Networks (CCN) available from the School of Business at Available in the following disciplines: – Specializing in Computer Security 508-831-5665, or on the web at http://business.wpi.edu. • Biochemistry • Construction Project Management • Biology and Biotechnology • Electrical and Computer Engineering Master of Mathematics for • Biomedical Engineering • Environmental Engineering ­Educators (M.M.E.) Program • Business Administration • Financial Mathematics WPI offers a Masters in Mathematics • Chemical Engineering • Fire Protection Engineering for Educators, a part-time program for • Chemistry • Industrial Mathematics teachers of mathematics at the middle school, secondary, and community college • Civil Engineering • Information Technology levels. Students in this program may earn a • Computer Science • Interactive Media & Game content-based degree afternoons and eve- • Electrical and Computer Engineering Development nings while still teaching full time. Taught • Fire Protection Engineering • Interdisciplinary Studies by professors of mathematics at WPI, the • Interdisciplinary Studies – Impact Engineering program is designed to permit the teachers • Learning Sciences and Technologies – Manufacturing Engineering to learn from professors’ research interests • Manufacturing Engineering Management and includes an understanding of current – Power Systems Management developments in the field. Scholarship aid, • Materials Science and Engineering which covers approximately 40% of the – Systems Modeling • Mathematical Sciences cost of tuition, is available to qualified par- • Mechanical Engineering • Learning Sciences and Technologies ticipants. The MME degree may be used • Physics • Management to satisfy the Massachusetts Professional • Robotics Engineering • Marketing and Technological License requirements, provided the person holds an Initial License. • Social Science and Policy Studies Innovation *available only on a full-time basis • Manufacturing Engineering Master of Science in • Materials Process Engineering Mathematics for Educators • Materials Science and Engineering (MMED) Program • Mechanical Engineering Designed especially for middle school, • Operations Design and Leadership high school and community college educa- • Physics tors, the Master of Science in Mathematics • Power Systems Engineering for Educators is a part-time, afternoon • Robotics Engineering and evening program of study that puts emphasis on math content courses while • System Dynamics also incorporating core assessment and • Systems Engineering evaluation theory coursework and a cul- *available only on a full-time basis minating project designed by the partici-

Return to Table of Contents Graduate Programs by Degree 5 pant. Participants are additionally able The specific course and MQP require- Program Requirements to keep up-to-date on the latest research ments for a BS/MS program are deter- Only registered WPI undergraduates may by working with professors in the field. mined individually, so students should apply for admission to the combined BS/ Financial support for educators is available consult with their own advisor as well as MS programs. Students are considered un- to qualified participants through a 40% the graduate coordinator in the depart- dergraduates, no matter what courses they tuition reduction. The MMED may satisfy ment in which they plan to pursue their have completed, until they have met all of Massachusetts requirements to move from MS degree early in their Junior year. the requirements for the Bachelor’s degree. an Initial License to a Professional License. This consultation, or series of consulta- In order to receive the BS and the MS, all tions, should produce a slate of approved of the requirements for both degrees must Master of Science in Physics for undergraduate courses that will be used for be completed. Educators (MPED) graduate credit. Sometimes the instructors In most departments a student may take Designed especially for middle school, of these courses will ask BS/MS students up to four years to complete the Master’s high school and community college to complete additional work, or will portion of the BS/MS program. There educators, the Master of Science in Physics otherwise hold them to higher standards of are exceptions, however, so students are for Educators is a part-time, afternoon achievement. advised to discuss their timetable with and evening program of study that puts A student’s advisor and graduate coordina- the appropriate advisor or graduate emphasis on physics content courses while tor will also determine what role the MQP coordinator. Students who stop registering also incorporating core assessment and will play in the BS/MS program. Some- for classes for an extended length of time evaluation theory coursework and a culmi- times the MQP provides a foundation for may be asked to petition the Committee nating project designed by the participant. a thesis. In cases where the BS and MS are for Graduate Studies and Research Participants are additionally able to keep not awarded in the same field, the MQP (CGSR) to continue their program. up-to-date on the latest research by work- usually relates to the graduate program’s ing with professors in the field. Financial discipline. Credit Equivalence and Distribution support for educators is available to quali- No more than 40% of the credit hours Once the specific course and MQP re- fied participants through a 40% tuition required for the Master’s degree, and quirements have been established, students reduction for educators. The MPED may which otherwise meet the requirements complete a Course Selection Form which satisfy Massachusetts requirements to for each degree, may be used to satisfy the is submitted to the relevant department(s) move from an Initial License to a Profes- requirements for both degrees. In some for approval. This written agreement con- sional License. departments, students may not double- stitutes the set of conditions that must be count more than 30% of their graduate Combined Bachelor/Master’s met for a student to complete the BS/MS credits. Consult the department entries in Program program. They are a plan for completing the graduate catalog for the requirements the requirements for both degrees and they of your program. Introduction will not supersede or otherwise obviate WPI undergraduates can begin work on a departmental and university-wide require- Double-counted courses are recorded on graduate degree by enrolling in a com- ments for either degree. The completed, the transcript using the credit hours/units bined Bachelor’s/Master’s program. This signed form must be submitted to the and grades appropriate at the graduate accelerated course of study allows students Registrar before the student may matricu- or undergraduate levels. For students in to obtain an MS degree after only five late in the combined program. the combined BS/MS program, approved­ years of full-time work (i.e., typically one undergraduate courses are assigned year after completion of the BS). Students How to Apply graduate credit with a conversion rate of often obtain the BS and MS in the same Students almost always apply for admis- 1/3 WPI undergraduate unit = 2 gradu- field or department, but with careful plan- sion to the BS/MS program in their Junior ate credit hours, while graduate courses ning some students complete the com- year, typically after they have established applied toward the undergraduate degree bined BS/MS program in two different their curriculum and other program are awarded undergraduate units with a fields; the combination of a BS in Civil requirements and completed the Course conversion rate of 1 graduate credit hour = Engineering and an MS in Fire Protec- Selection Form with their faculty advisors. 1/6 undergraduate unit. tion Engineering is a common example. Applications are submitted to the Office (Throughout this section, “MS” will be of Graduate Admissions and are processed Interdisciplinary Master’s and used to refer to all Master’s-level degrees; with all other graduate applications. Once Doctoral Programs most students who complete the com- a decision has been reached, the Office of WPI encourages the formation of bined program obtain the MS). Graduate Admissions will notify the stu- interdisciplinary master’s and doctoral dent, usually within six weeks of receiving programs to meet new professional Planning Your Program the application. needs or the special interests of particular Because BS/MS students use some ap- students. For specific information on proved courses to satisfy the requirements interdisciplinary master’s and doctoral of both degrees simultaneously, it is crucial programs (see page 89). for them to plan their curriculum early in their undergraduate career.

6 Graduate Programs by Degree Return to Table of Contents Graduate and Advanced Graduate Certificates

Keeping pace with technological advance- Advanced Certificate Program Admission and Matriculation ment today is a never-ending task. WPI’s The Advanced Certificate Program (ACP) Admission to a certificate program is innovative graduate certificate programs provides master’s degree holders with an granted by the faculty of the sponsor- help technical and business professionals opportunity to continue their studies in ing department through the Graduate keep up to date with advances in tech- advanced topics in the discipline in which Admissions Office. A student accepted nologies and business practices without they hold their graduate degrees or that is into a master’s or doctoral program cannot a commitment to a graduate degree pro- closely related to their graduate fields. The retroactively apply to a certificate program. gram. WPI offers two graduate certificate ACP includes four to six courses totaling Only two courses taken prior to appli- programs: the Graduate Certificate Pro- 12 to 18 credits, none of which were in- cation to a certificate program may be gram (GCP) and the Advanced Certificate cluded in the student’s prior master’s pro- counted toward a certificate program. If a Program (ACP). gram or in any other certificate program. student goes beyond the second course as Graduate Certificate Program Each participating department identifies a non-degree student, then those courses cannot be applied to a graduate certificate. The Graduate Certificate Program (GCP) one or more guideline programs; however, However, the credits may be applied to a provides opportunities for students hold- each student’s program of study may be WPI graduate degree program. A GCP ing undergraduate degrees to continue customized with the academic advisor’s or ACP Certificate will not be awarded their study in an advanced area. A bach- approval to satisfy the student’s unique without acceptance into a program. elor’s degree is the general prerequisite; interests. however, some departments also look for ACP’s are available in the following Registration Procedures related background when making admis- departments: GCP and ACP students register at the sion decisions. GCP students are required same time as other WPI graduate students, to complete four to six courses totaling 12 • Civil and Environmental Engineering • Computer Science follow the same registration procedures, to 18 credit hours in their area of inter- and participate in the same classes. est. GCP courses can be applied to a WPI • Electrical and Computer Engineering graduate degree if the student is subse- • Fire Protection Engineering Tuition and Fees • Mechanical Engineering quently admitted to a degree program in Tuition and fees for GCP and ACP • Systems Engineering the same discipline. students are the same as for all other WPI • Systems Engineering: Program graduate students. Graduate certificates are offered in the fol- Protection Planning lowing departments: Additional specializations may be devel- Plan of Study • Biomedical Engineering oped in consultation with an academic Following admission, certificate students • Civil and Environmental Engineering advisor. will be assigned an academic advisor. • Computer and Communications Within the first three months of admis- Networks Application Process sion, certificate students are required to • Computer Science Application to the GCP and ACP requires obtain approval for their Plan of Study • Electrical and Computer Engineering submission of an official application form, from their faculty advisor. The student, • Fire Protection Engineering official transcripts of all college-level work, the academic advisor and the department • Management and a $70 application fee (waived for will maintain copies of the Plan of Study. • Manufacturing Engineering WPI alumni) to the Office of Graduate Students may initiate written requests to • Materials Science and Engineering Admissions. Individual departments the advisor to modify the program. The • Power Systems Engineering may require additional information. student, the academic advisor and the • Power Systems Management International students may apply to department must retain copies of any ap- • Social Science and Policy Studies certificate programs. However, for WPI proved program modification(s). • Software Engineering and Interface to issue the I-20 form for a student visa, Design international students must be registered • Systems Engineering for a minimum of nine credits during their • Systems Engineering: Program first semester and must complete their Protection Planning program within one year. Students apply Additional programs may be developed in online at http://grad.wpi.edu/+apply. consultation with an academic adviser. For the most current listings go to http://grad.wpi.edu/+certificate.

Return to Table of Contents Graduate and Advanced­ Graduate Certificates 7 Academic Policies Transferring from a Certificate Earning a Second Certificate Academic policies regarding acceptable Program to a Graduate A student admitted into a certificate grade point averages for certificate stu- Degree Program ­program who wishes to work toward a sec- dents follow the same guidelines as those Admission to a certificate program is not ond certificate program must apply to that established for degree-seeking graduate equivalent to admission to a degree pro- second certificate program for admission. students with the following exception: If gram. However, many certificate students The application fee will be waived for the a GCP or ACP student’s grade point aver- eventually choose to pursue a WPI degree second application. Courses counted to- age falls below 2.5 after completing nine program. Students enrolled in a certifi- ward one certificate may not count toward credits, he/she will be withdrawn from the cate program who would like to pursue a any other certificate. program unless the academic department master’s or doctorate must meet the ap- intervenes. plication and admission requirements for Program Completion the specific degree program as described in the Graduate Catalog. All GCP and ACP Satisfactory completion of a GCP or ACP course credits will apply to a WPI graduate requires a cumulative grade point average degree provided that the student is admit- of 3.00 or better (A = 4.0) with individual ted to a graduate degree program and course grades of C or better. Upon satisfac- the courses are acceptable to that degree tory completion of the program, students program. will receive a certificate of Graduate Study or a Certificate of Advanced Graduate Study in the chosen discipline. Students are responsible for submitting the signed, completed Plan of Study to the Registrar’s Office to receive the certificate. U.S. citizens will have four years from the date of matriculation to complete their program. International students must complete their program within one academic year.

8 Graduate and Advanced­ Graduate Certificates Return to Table of Contents Corporate and Professional Education

WPI Corporate and Professional Educa- Corporate Graduate Degrees Offered tion works with leading organizations to maximize the value of their education and Programs Corporate and Professional Education works with corporate clients to deter- training investment by aligning program For decades WPI has worked with corpo- mine how WPI’s graduate certificates and content with specific business and industry rations to develop graduate and under- masters’ degrees can solve their educational needs. At WPI, we take a collaborative graduate programs to improve the skills needs. In partnership with WPI depart- approach to developing programs for our of their employees. WPI can offer custom ment heads and faculty, CPE custom- clients, realizing that every organization programs on-site, as well as online. has unique needs that are specific to its izes and delivers the appropriate degree competitive environment. Our portfolio Companies work with one of our experi- program or certificate. To date, CPE has of offerings range from one-day workshops enced staff to develop programs that meet collaborated with ten academic depart- to multi-year graduate degree programs, their needs. ments to offer over twelve different gradu- and all of our programs are built on the • Programs can range from a single ate degrees plus a number of graduate premise of delivering education that is course, to a tightly focused graduate or certificates. integrated, applied and relevant to both undergraduate certificate program, to a the participating student and sponsoring full graduate degree program. Online Graduate company. This practical approach further • Programs can focus in several disciplines Programs enhances the value derived by organiza- including science, engineering, technol- For more than thirty years, WPI has de- tions in providing employees with the ogy, and management. livered high-quality distance education to knowledge and skills that can be directly • Interdisciplinary programs can combine graduate students around the world. There applied to their workplace challenges. related content that spans many aca- is no differentiation between campus and In addition to the direct benefit of in- demic disciplines, resulting in programs online programs, and once admitted to dividual development, WPI’s corporate that meet an organization’s unique WPI, students may take any online course programs provide: requirements and challenges from both that is appropriate to their WPI program a technical and managerial perspective. thus taking their whole degree online if • Increased employee retention as a result available or combining campus and online of a demonstrated commitment and • All courses taught at corporate sites will courses. investment in employee education include the same material and concepts as on-campus courses, but examples • An effective recruiting tool to attract Quality Online Content used in courses can be customized for new talent in a competitive market each company’s needs. WPI delivers the same courses, content • Focused content that directs educational and material in its online courses and • Plans of study are designed to comply spending to the areas of highest need, at degrees that students receive on campus. with applicable state and federal educa- the right time The online and campus programs are not tion board requirements. • Increased interaction among employees two distinctive programs with separate Courses for WPI’s Corporate and Profes- from various functions across the admission and academic criteria. Admitted sional Education programs are taught by company­ students matriculate into a degree program fully qualified faculty appointed by WPI’s and, then, register for either online or WPI’s corporate programs take on many academic department heads. All of our forms. Programs can be focused on a single classroom courses depending upon their faculty members are experts in their fields needs. Online students have 24/7 access topic or expanded to encompass an entire and many are working on cutting-edge discipline or integrate complementary to their courses, are expected to maintain research in their disciplines. Many faculty a weekly presence in the WPI course web disciplines. We work with companies to members are also active members in the determine the content areas to meet their site, and follow a semester based syllabus professional community through research closely imaging a classroom based syllabus. needs and then develop programs to ef- partnerships, consulting services and busi- fectively deliver results. Regular access to a high speed Internet ness ventures. Corporate Education takes connection via a personal computer is care in selecting professors to match their required to keep pace with course content academic and professional acumen with and participate in the collaborative learn- the needs of individual organizations. ing environment.

Return to Table of Contents Corporate and Professional Education 9 Worcester Polytechnic Institute is reg- cations, provide students with an engag- Technology Based istered as a private institution with the ing, world-class learning experience. As a Minnesota Office of Higher Eduction business partner in executive education, we Professional Development pursuant to sections 136A.61 to 136A.71. strive to create and deliver corporate pro- WPI provides technically-based career Registration is not an endorsement of the grams that empower participants with im- training to individuals and organizations institution. Credit earned at the institution mediately actionable skills and knowledge. which is important to career advancement may not transfer to all other institutions. • Introductory Management and and success. There are a number of topical courses to choose from, all of which are Programs of Study ­Communications – Provides a founda- tion of knowledge for new supervisors designed to deliver the skills needed to stay The following graduate degrees are offered and managers enabling them with competitive in today’s technical market- completely online through Corporate and immediately applicable tool sets. place. Additionally, WPI collaborates Professional Education. with companies and organizations on the • Advanced Management – Provides a development of technical short courses for • Master of Science in Environmental mix of management tools and leadership company specific and general offerings. Engineering skills which allows the participant to For almost 30 years, WPI’s results-oriented • Master of Science in Fire Protection more effectively manage while increasing programs have been providing techni- Engineering their awareness of leadership qualities. cal professionals with proven tools and • Master of Science in Mechanical • Executive Leadership – Provides a techniques needed to exceed performance Engineering broadening perspective which allows the goals. Additionally, to better meet an orga- • Master of Engineering in Power Systems leader to understand their impact on nization’s specific training needs, all of the Engineering employees and the organization. Out- programs can be uniquely customized and • Master of Science in Power Systems comes include techniques for modifying delivered on-site at the corporate location. Management behavior resulting in more impactful leadership. A sampling of courses includes: • Master of Science in Robotics Engineering IT Leadership • Biomanufacturing Fundamentals • Master of Science in System Dynamics Development Program • Green Belt Six Sigma Certificate • Master of Science in Systems • Systems Engineering Engineering­ As a highly rated technological university, WPI offers professional development to Contact and Information: Student Services leaders in the field of information technol- Corporate and Professional Education Online students have access to the same ogy. A shortage of senior IT professionals +1-508-831-5517 services as students located on campus. prevents many IT teams from playing Cpe.wpi.edu Corporate and Professional Education pro- a strategic role in their organizations. Online.wpi.edu vides students with personalized assistance Through collaboration with a number of and acts as a conduit to all other university CIOs, WPI constructed an executive pro- offices. Among the University services gram that focuses specifically on the high available are academic advising, technical level skills and tools that IT managers need helpdesk, library services, bookstore, and to bring them to the strategic and execu- career placement and counseling for degree tive levels within their companies. seeking students. Contact can be made This eight day program is delivered in an through the web, by phone, and by e-mail. interactive environment combining both direct and online learning thus enabling Executive Education personal interaction with instructors and The Executive Education programs at other senior IT professionals. Personal WPI Corporate and Professional Educa- coaching, consultation and discussions tion offer participants three different levels with a CIO panel round out this exclusive to select from based on experience and and customized program. needs. Our outcome-based course designs, combined with practical real world appli-

10 Corporate and Professional Education Return to Table of Contents Admission Information

Applying to WPI • Several programs require a statement the forms online. It takes approximately of purpose (see page 14). This is a brief one week for the forms to be entered into Prospective graduate students submit their essay discussing background, interests, WPI’s database. After this time, the appli- applications for WPI’s science, engineer- academic intent, and the reasons the cant will have access to their information. ing, and management programs online. applicant feels s/he would benefit from Unless the student is otherwise notified, Links to the various applications can be the program. The statement of purpose found at http://grad.wpi.edu/+apply. the Graduate Admissions office will retain must be submitted electronically with incomplete applications for one year after Each department requires different the online application. the application was started. The Office credentials for admission. A table of each • The School of Business requires all reserves the right to cancel an incomplete department’s requirements can be found applicants to submit a resume with the application at anytime, but it will continue on page 14. electronic application. to hold the incomplete forms in its files for A completed undergraduate degree is a • Proof of English language proficiency a year. must be submitted by all applicants for pre-requisite for beginning all graduate All applications and all support material whom English is not the first language. degree programs at WPI. All graduate become the property of WPI once they In order to prove English language students are expected to have completed have been received by the Office of Gradu- proficiency, applicants must submit their undergraduate degree at the time of ate Admissions. matriculation. A final transcript showing an official score report from either the that the degree was awarded must be sub- TOEFL (Test of English as a Foreign Priority Dates Language) or IELTS (International mitted to the Office of Graduate Admis- Funding is disbursed by the admissions English Language Testing Service). The sions before the student enrolls. committees in each of the academic minimum scores for admission are: departments. These decisions are made WPI admission requirements include the TOEFL: 84 (internet-based test) in tandem with the admissions decision, following: 563 (paper-based test) so there is no separate application for as- • A completed Application for Admission IELTS: 7.0 overall band score with no sistantships or fellowships. to Graduate Study, available only online sub-score lower than 6.5 Prospective students must indicate that at http://grad.wpi.edu/+apply. Please These are the minimum scores for admission they want to be considered for fund- note: there are three separate applica- to WPI; higher scores are required for teach- ing when they apply for admission. The tions for (1) engineering, science, social ing assistants. sciences and interdisciplinary studies, application should be complete on or (2) management School of Business pro- Applicants who have completed two years before January 1st to ensure consideration. grams, and (3) Corporate and Profes- of full-time study at a college or university Applications that are completed during sional Education programs. in the U.S., the U.K., Ireland, Australia, the two weeks following January 1st will New Zealand, or the Anglophone regions • A non-refundable $70 application fee also receive the earliest consideration for of Africa, Canada, or the Caribbean, (waived for WPI alumni and current funding. within five years of matriculating at WPI WPI undergraduates). With each passing month the availability are not required to submit TOEFL or of funds decreases, so applications should • Official college transcripts in English IELTS scores. from all accredited degree-granting be completed, if possible, during the three- institutions attended. Admitted students WPI’s institutional code for the TOEFL is week processing period that runs from must provide final transcript with an 3969. Scores are valid for two years from January 1st to January 21st. the test date. For more information, or to indication that the bachelor’s degree has A small number of programs also offer take the TOEFL, go to: www.toefl.org. For been awarded before they matriculate. assistantships that begin in January. more information on the IELTS, or to take • Three letters of recommendation (and/ Applicants seeing admission to the Spring the exam, go to: www.ielts.org. or other references) from individuals semester with funding should submit who can comment on the applicant’s • Some departments require the Graduate their credentials by October 1st to receive qualifications for pursuing graduate Record Examination (GRE). Consult consideration for these funds. study in the chosen field.We strongly the table on page 14 to determine your Applicants who are not seeking funding encourage students to use the online department’s expectations. There is no may apply at any time. application program to invite their rec- WPI-wide minimum GRE score for ommenders to submit letters. Applicants admission. WPI’s school code for the If you are interested in securing a student are required to invite their recommend- GRE is 3969. loan, please contact the WPI Office of ers to submit letters of reference through Applicants will receive information Financial Aid after you have accepted your the online application program. explaining how they can check the status offer of admission. of their applications after they submit

Return to Table of Contents Admission Information 11 Admission Applicants who would like to be con­ Transfers and Waivers sidered for more than one degree program Each department, program, or sponsoring A student may petition to use graduate must complete and submit a separate courses completed at other accredited, group is responsible for making admissions application form for each program. decisions. Their decisions are communi- degree-granting institutions to satisfy cated by the Office of Graduate Admis- Conditional Admission WPI graduate degree requirements. A maximum of one-third of the credit sions. In general, offers of admission are Conditional admission is offered to requirements for a graduate degree may good for one year. students who satisfy many of the criteria be satisfied by courses taken elsewhere and for admission to a program, but who Sometimes a department will admit a not used to satisfy degree requirements at lack some specific pre-requisite or set of student to a degree program that differs other institutions. from the program specified in the student’s qualifications for graduate study. Typical application. Most typically, a department deficiencies include inadequate preparation Students should submit their petitions to will admit a PhD applicant to a Master’s in English (for international students), an their academic department or program; program. Students in such a position insufficient background in mathematics, once they are approved they are filed with should contact the graduate coordinator or incomplete training in the student’s the Registrar. in their program to find out what criteria desired field of study. To ensure that work completed at other they will have to meet to gain admission to The conditionally admitted student will be institutions constitutes current practice the PhD program in the future. apprised of the conditions which must be in the field, a WPI program may set an A current WPI graduate student who met — usually a course or series of courses expiration date on transfer credit. After would like to complete a second graduate completed with a specified minimum this date, the course may not be counted degree in another department must apply grade — before he or she can be fully towards a WPI degree. for admission to the second program. In admitted to a program. In many cases, stu- Transferred courses are recorded on the general, standard application procedures dents fulfill these conditions either before student’s WPI transcript with the grade are followed, but a copy of the first ap- they arrive at WPI or during their first year CR and are not included in the calculation plication and its supporting materials can of study. They should consult with their of grade point averages. Grades earned in sometimes be used as the basis for the graduate coordinator to discuss the best Biomedical Consortium courses, however, second. No application fee is required. option for meeting the conditions that are recorded on the transcript as if they have been set. Each department monitors were taken at WPI itself. An admitted MS student who wants to the progress of the conditionally admitted pursue a PhD in his or her home depart- student and determines when the condi- A student with one or more WPI mas- ment can be admitted to the PhD program tions of full admission have been met. ter’s degrees who is seeking an additional without completing a new application. master’s degree from WPI may petition Instead, the graduate coordinator or Confirmation of Admission to apply up to nine prior graduate credits department chair will write a letter to the The letter of admission from the Office towards the requirements for the subse- Dean of Graduate Studies, in care of his of Graduate Admissions indicates the quent degree. assistant in the Office of Graduate Studies, semester for which admission is granted. A student who withdraws from a graduate to the effect that the student has met the The letter also asks the student to either qualifications for admission to the PhD program and is later readmitted may apply accept or decline the offer of admission by courses and other credits completed before program. This letter will be copied to the a specified date by completing the Gradu- Office of Graduate Admissions, the Regis- the withdrawal toward the degree. The ate Admission Response Form online at admitting program will determine at the trar, and the departmental graduate studies http://grad.wpi.edu/admitted. Students committee. time of readmission which courses taken who plan to attend are required to submit by the student may be applied toward the Under some circumstances a student a non-refundable deposit of $500, which degree and the latest date those courses not yet admitted to a program may earn will be credited to their tuition when they may be applied. There is no limit, other graduate credit towards the requirements arrive. than that imposed by the program, on the for a graduate degree. But such students Deferred Enrollment number of credits a readmitted student must keep in mind that permission to may use from prior admissions to the same register does not constitute admission to An admitted student who wishes to defer degree program. a degree or certificate program, nor does enrollment must make a request in writing it guarantee admission. It is also impor- to the Office of Graduate Admissions. Stu- With the appropriate background, a tant to bear in mind that the number dents typically receive a one-time deferral student may ask permission to waive a credits that can be applied to the degree is of up to twelve months. Funded students required course and substitute a speci- limited. Students are thus encouraged to generally can not defer their funding. WPI fied, more advanced course in the same apply for admission to a program at the requires a $500 non-refundable deposit for discipline. Requests are subject to approval earliest possible date. all deferrals. This deposit will be credited by the student’s program and must be filed to the student’s tuition upon arrival. with the Registrar within one year of the

12 Admission Information Return to Table of Contents date of matriculation in the program. A Three-Year Bologna-Process Advanced Study for Non- program may waive (with specified substi- Degrees Degree Students tutions) up to three required courses for a WPI welcomes applications from prospec- Individuals with earned bachelor’s degrees single student. tive graduate students who have three- may wish to enroll in a single course or a Acceptability of Credit Applicable year Bologna-compliant undergraduate limited number of courses prior to apply- to an Advanced Degree degrees from European universities. ing for admission. Non-degree students Applicants who hold these credentials will may choose to be graded conventionally Graduate level credit, obtained from be evaluated for regular admission on a (A, B, C), or on a pass/fail basis. Pass/Fail courses, thesis and project work, may case-by-case basis. They may be admitted grading must be chosen at the time of reg- include: conditionally if they require further prepa- istration, and courses taken on the pass/fail • Coursework included in the approved ration for graduate study. Please consult basis are not transferable to any master’s Plan of Study. the departmental web pages to learn more degree program. • Coursework completed at the graduate about graduate admissions expectations Non-admitted students may take a level and successfully transferred to WPI and standards in your field of study. maximum of four graduate courses and from other accredited, degree-granting receive letter grades in most departments. institutions (see Transfers and Waivers). Admission to Interdisciplinary Doctoral Programs See department descriptions for specific • Graduate coursework completed at the information. Once these maximums are undergraduate level at WPI and not ap- WPI encourages interdisciplinary research. reached, additional course registrations plied toward another degree. Students may apply for admission to inter- will be changed to pass/fail and may not disciplinary studies directly, but students • A maximum of one-third of the credit be used for degree credit. interested in such options should do so requirements from a previous master’s with the assistance of WPI faculty, as these The fact that a student has been allowed degree at WPI may be used in partial programs require internal sponsorship to register for graduate courses (and earn fulfillment of the requirements for a (see Interdisciplinary Doctoral Programs, credit) does not guarantee that the student second master’s degree at WPI. pages 4 and 89). will be admitted to that department’s cer- • Coursework approved for the Com- tificate or degree program at a later date. bined WPI Bachelor’s/Master’s Program. Students are therefore encouraged to apply • Project work done at the graduate level for admission to a degree or certificate at WPI. program prior to any course registration. • Thesis work done at the graduate level at WPI. Departments and programs may limit the use of credit in any of these areas depend- ing upon their specific departmental requirements.

Return to Table of Contents Admission Information 13 Application Requirements

Graduate Certificates Master’s and Doctoral Degrees Applicants to all graduate certificate programs are required to submit Applicants to WPI’s masters and doctoral degree programs must submit the following three credentials to the Office of Graduate Admissions: the following credentials to the Office of Graduate Admissions: 1. Online application form 1. Online application form 2. Official transcripts from all colleges or universities attended, and 2. Official transcripts from all colleges or universities attended, and proof of a completed bachelor’s degree before matriculating. proof of a completed bachelor’s degree before matriculating. 3. Proof of English proficiency (for non-native English speakers) 3. Three letters of recommendation, submitted online 4. $70 application fee 4. Proof of English proficiency (for non-native English speakers) No other supporting material is required of certificate applicants. 5. Exams and essays as noted below 6. $70 application fee

Department/Program GRE Statement of Purpose Bioinformatics and Computational Biology Required for all applicants; Required for all applicants waived for WPI students and alumni Biology and Biotechnology Required for all applicants Required for all applicants Fall semester admission only Biomedical Engineering Required for all applicants; Required for all applicants Fall semester admission only waived for WPI students and alumni Business GRE or GMAT required for all applicants Required for all applicants; a resume is also required Chemical Engineering Required for all international students; Not required recommended for all others Chemistry and Biochemistry Required for all applicants; Required for all applicants waived for WPI students and alumni Civil and Environmental Engineering Required for all international applicants; Required for Ph.D. applicants recommended for all others; waived for WPI undergraduate students and alumni Computer Science Required for all applicants; Required for all applicants waived for WPI students and alumni Electrical and Computer Engineering Required for US applicants seeking funding Required for Ph.D. applicants only and all international students Fire Protection Engineering Required for PhD applicants and international Required for all applicants applicants; recommended for all others; Interactive Media & Game Development Recommended for all applicants Required for all applicants; a portfolio may be submitted in addition (this is optional) Interdisciplinary See page 89 of the Graduate Catalog See page 89 of the Graduate Catalog Learning Sciences and Technologies Strongly recommended for all applicants Required for all applicants; a brief sample of scholarly writing is also required Manufacturing Engineering Required for all international students; Not required recommended for all others Materials Process Engineering Required for all international students; Not required recommended for all others Materials Science Engineering Required for all international students; Not required recommended for all others Mathematical Sciences Recommended for all applicants Not required For Ph.D. and TA, GRE Mathematics Subject Test is required. Mechanical Engineering Recommended for all applicants Required for all applicants Physics Recommended for all applicants Required for all applicants Robotics Engineering Required for all applicants; waived for Required for all applicants WPI undergraduate students and alumni Social Science and Policy Studies Required for all applicants Required for all applicants STEM for Educators Not required Required for all applicants Systems Engineering Not required Required for all applicants

14 Application Requirements Return to Table of Contents Financial Information

Financial assistance to support graduate expectations. In general, TAs should be Completed fellowship applications are due students is available in the form of teach- available every day the university is open. in the Graduate Studies Office no later ing assistantships, research assistantships, TAs are expected to work approximately than January 15 for the class beginning fellowships, internships and loans. Enter- 20 hours per week. the following fall. Criteria for eligibility is ing students awarded either teaching or During the fall and spring breaks as well available in the Graduate Studies Office. research assistantships or fellowships will as the New Year’s break between semesters, Educator Discounts receive official notification pertaining to the TA may be required to be on campus Educator discounts are available for in-ser- the type and level of financial assistance for part of the break to assist in course vice educators taking courses in the Master from the Graduate Studies Office. preparation or grading. It is the respon- of Mathematics for Educators program, The academic standing of students hold- sibility of the faculty instructor to clearly the Master of Science in Mathematics ing awards for teaching and research communicate with the TAs well in advance for Educators program and the Master of assistantships is reviewed annually. To of the break when this work is required. Science in Physics for Educators program. remain eligible for a graduate assistantship, However, the department or program Educators may receive up to a 40% tuition a student must demonstrate acceptable heads and the faculty instructors should reduction on traditional graduate student progress toward degree requirements, be work to provide a break in the TA assign- rates. Please contact the STEM Education registered continuously, and maintain a ments to allow the opportunity for focused Center to determine eligibility. minimum GPA of 3.00 in courses and research work as well as a holiday for rest research work (A = 4.00). and recreation. The Academic calendars Internships are available on the registrar’s web site. Teaching Assistantships Graduate internship programs are offered http://www.wpi.edu/calendars/ in several disciplines. A graduate intern- Teaching assistantships are awarded to ship is a short-term work assignment (3 graduate students on a competitive basis. Research Assistantships to 9 months) in residence at a company They include tuition support for a maxi- Research assistants (RAs) are selected by or other external organization that forms mum of 10 credit hours per semester and a the faculty to participate in sponsored an integral part of a student’s educational monthly stipend. Teaching assistants (TAs) research projects in connection with program. are generally assigned duties that support their academic programs. Typical duties faculty in their teaching responsibilities. of RAs include (but are not limited Students participating in graduate intern- Typical duties of TAs include (but are to) conducting laboratory experiments ships must be registered in a specific not limited to) grading of undergraduate and assisting in the development of course. An internship will appear on the and graduate student course paperwork, theoretical advances related to faculty transcript either with or without credit. supervision of undergraduate science and research projects. Research projects are Students may not participate as interns at engineering laboratory course sections, typically supported by grants and contracts their place of employment. as well as individual and small-group awarded to the university by government Special Notes for conference sections associated with faculty agencies, industrial firms or other private International Students: lecture courses. organizations. An international student on an F-1 visa TAs are required to be on campus and RAs who perform research directly con- must maintain full-time status for the available for TA duties from August 15 nected to their thesis/dissertation must duration of their graduate program. If through May 15 of each academic year. recognize that research is a full-time pro- the student is participating in a full- These dates correspond to the employ- fessional commitment. time graduate internship (one that is ment dates for TAs. On or before August not administered through the Office of The financial support provided to graduate 15th of each year, the TA should report to Cooperative Education), the student must students who have been selected for an as- the department or program head to receive be registered for nine credits. International sistantship varies depending on the specific their TA assignments for the fall semes- students with F-1 visa status may apply for nature of the coursework, project and ter. The TA should report to the faculty two types of practical training: student’s status. instructors to discuss their TA assign- 1. Curricular Practical Training (CPT): ments including the dates that they need Fellowships CPT is used for internships and coop- to be available for course preparation and Fellowship assistance for graduate students erative education while students are pur- grading. The faculty instructors should is available in a number of areas. Some suing their degrees. CPT is authorized be prepared to explain their TA expecta- departments offer fellowships provided by by the university and the requirement is tions and the dates that the TA needs corporate gifts or philanthropic agen- that the internship or co-op is an inte- to be available. In early B term the TAs cies. The university also directly supports gral part of an established curriculum. should receive their assignment for the graduate research programs through Internships should be for credit. spring semester and meet with the faculty fellowship awards and Research Assistant- instructors to determine their schedule and ships. Fellowship awards are administered through the Graduate Studies Office.

Return to Table of Contents Financial Information 15 2. Optional Practical Training (OPT): Student Loans Private student loans are also available for OPT is typically used by students for students enrolled in certificate programs one year of employment after comple- Financial assistance is also available or for students who are not enrolled on an tion of degree. It can also be used in through the WPI Office of Financial Aid, at least half-time basis. A non-Citizen may part for summer jobs or part-time through the Federal Stafford Loan and qualify for some private loans if they have employment during the academic year Graduate PLUS loan programs. To qualify, a U.S. citizen as a co-applicant. if employment is in the student’s field students must be enrolled in a degree granting program on an at least a half-time For information on loan programs, contact of study. OPT requires approval by U.S. WPI’s Financial Aid Office at Customs and Immigration Services. basis and must be a U.S. citizen or perma- nent resident of the United States. +1-508-831-5469, or www.wpi.edu/offices/fa/graduate-students.html.

Grading System and Academic Standards

Grading System Academic Standards only once, the most recent grade received In order to assess progress throughout Students must maintain high academic for the course being used in the average. the graduate program, grades are assigned standards in all their program activities. A student’s overall GPA is calculated on to the student’s performance in course, After attempting 12 credit hours, all stu- the basis of all registered activities taken project and thesis work, except in doc- dents must maintain an overall grade point while enrolled as a graduate student at toral dissertation, which will be judged as average (GPA) above 2.75 to be considered WPI. WPI graduate courses taken before ACCEPTED or REJECTED. Academic as making satisfactory progress. If a stu- a student had status as a degree-seeking achievement in all other work is based on dent’s overall GPA falls to 2.75 or below, graduate student are included in the over- the following grading system: the student and advisor are notified by the all GPA. A student’s program GPA is cal- A Excellent Registrar that the student is not making culated on the basis of those WPI courses B Good satisfactory progress. listed by the student on the student’s C Pass If the overall GPA of any student falls Application for Graduation form. The transcript will report the overall GPA. D Unacceptable for graduate credit below 2.65, the Registrar will inform the F Fail student that all future registrations will be Courses transferred from elsewhere for given grades only on a pass/fail basis un- AU Audit graduate credit (for which a grade of CR less the department Graduate Committee is recorded on the WPI transcript), and NC No credit (only for thesis work); will intervenes. courses taken to satisfy undergraduate not be recorded on transcript degree requirements or to remove deficien- P Pass; unacceptable for graduate credit If the overall GPA of any student falls be- low 2.50, the student is removed from the cies in undergraduate preparation, are not I Incomplete; transition grade only; program unless the department Graduate included in either GPA. Registered activi- becomes grade of F if not changed by Committee intervenes. ties in which the student receives grades instructor within 12 months of AU, NC, P, I, W, SP or UP are not W Withdrawal Grade Point Average (GPA) included in either GPA. SP Satisfactory progress; continuing reg- Grades are assigned the following grade Only registered activities in which a grade istration in thesis/dissertation/directed points: of A, B, C or CR was obtained may be research A = 4.0, B = 3.0, C = 2.0, D = 1.0 and F = used to satisfy courses or credit require- CR Credit for work at another institution 0.0. The grade point average is calculated ments for a graduate degree. UP Unsatisfactory progress; this grade as the sum of the products of the grade Grade Appeal and Grade remains on the file transcript points and credit hours for each registered activity (including courses, independent Change Policy studies, directed research, thesis research The Student Grade Appeal Procedure and dissertation research) in the average, affirms the general principle that grades divided by the total number of credit should be considered final. The principle hours for all registered activities in the that grades for courses, thesis credit and average. If a student takes the same course dissertation credit should be considered more than once, the course enters the GPA final does not excuse an instructor from

16 Grading System and Academic Standards Return to Table of Contents the responsibility to explain his or her appropriate manner; it does not attempt to the matter informally with the instructor grading standards to students, and to grade or re-grade individual assignments of record. If the matter cannot be resolved assign grades in a fair and appropriate or projects. It is incumbent on the student informally, the student must present his manner. The appeal procedure also to substantiate the claim that his or her or her case in a timely fashion in the provides an instructor with the final grade represents unfair treatment, procedure outlined below. Under normal opportunity to change a grade for a course compared to the standard applied to other circumstances, the grade appeal process or project on his or her own initiative. The students. Only the final grade in a course must be started near the beginning of the appeal procedure recognizes that errors or project may be appealed. In the absence next regular academic semester after the can be made, and that an instructor who of compelling reasons, such as clerical disputed grade is received. decides it would be unfair to allow a final error, prejudice, or capriciousness, the grade to stand due to error, prejudice grade assigned by the instructor of record Student Grade Appeal Procedure or arbitrariness may request a change of is to be considered final. 1. A student who wishes to question a grade must first discuss the matter grade for a course or project without the Only arbitrariness, prejudice, and/or error with the instructor of record as soon as formation of an ad hoc committee. An will be considered as legitimate grounds possible, preferably no later than one instructor may request a grade change for a grade change appeal. by submitting a course, thesis credit or week after the start of the next regular dissertation credit grade change request in Arbitrariness: The grade awarded repre- academic semester after receiving the writing to the Registrar at any time prior sents such a substantial departure from ac- grade. In most cases, the discussion to a student’s graduation. cepted academic norms as to demonstrate between the student and the instructor that the instructor did not actually exercise should suffice and the matter will not The purpose of the Grade Appeal Policy professional judgment. need to be carried further. The student is to provide the student with a safeguard should be aware that the only valid basis against receiving an unfair final grade, Prejudice: The grade awarded was moti- for grade appeal beyond this first step is while respecting the academic responsibil- vated by ill will and is not indicative of the to establish that an instructor assigned a ity of the instructor. Thus, this procedure student’s academic performance. grade that was arbitrary, prejudiced or in recognizes that: Error: The instructor made a mistake in error. • Every student has a right to receive a fact. grade assigned upon a fair and unpreju- 2. If the student’s concerns remain un- diced evaluation based on a method that This grade appeal procedure applies only resolved after the discussion with the is neither arbitrary nor capricious; and, when a student initiates a grade appeal and instructor, the student may submit a not when the instructor decides to change written request to meet with the ap- • Instructors have the right to assign a grade on his or her own initiative. This propriate Department Head or Program a grade based on any method that is procedure does not cover instances where Coordinator within one week of speak- professionally acceptable, submitted students have been assigned grades based ing with the instructor. The appropriate in writing to all students, and applied on academic dishonesty or academic Department Head or Program Coordi- equally. misconduct. Academic dishonesty or nator will meet with the student within Instructors have the responsibility to misconduct are addressed in WPI’s Aca- one week and, if he or she believes that provide careful evaluation and timely demic Honesty Policy. Also excluded from the complaint may have merit, with the assignment of appropriate grades. Course this procedure are grade appeals alleging instructor. After consultation with the and project grading methods should be discrimination, harassment or retaliation appropriate Department Head or Pro- explained to students at the beginning in violation of WPI’s Sexual Harassment gram Coordinator, the instructor may of the semester. WPI presumes that the Policy, which shall be referred to the ap- choose to change the grade in question, judgement of the instructor of record is propriate office at WPI as required by law or leave the grade unchanged. The De- authoritative and the final grades assigned and by WPI policy. partment Head or Program Coordinator are correct. will communicate the result of these The Grade Appeal Procedure strives to discussions to the student. A grade appeal shall be confined to charges resolve a disagreement between student of unfair action toward an individual and instructor concerning the assignment 3. If the matter remains unresolved after student and may not involve a challenge of a grade in a collegial manner. The intent the second step, the student should of an instructor’s grading standard. A is to provide a mechanism for the informal submit a written request within one student has a right to expect thoughtful discussion of differences of opinion and week to the Provost’s Office to request and clearly defined approaches to course for the formal adjudication by faculty only an ad hoc Faculty Committee for Appeal and research project grading, but it must when necessary. In all instances, students of a Grade. The Provost will meet with be recognized that varied standards and who believe that an appropriate grade has the student and will ask the Faculty individual approaches to grading are not been assigned must first seek to resolve Review Committee (FRC) to appoint valid. The grade appeal considers whether the ad hoc Committee for Appeal of a a grade was determined in a fair and Grade. The FRC, in consultation with

Return to Table of Contents Grading System and Academic Standards 17 the Provost, will select the members 5. If the ad hoc committee determines that Project, Thesis, and of the ad hoc committee. The Chair compelling reasons exist for chang- Dissertation Advising of the FRC will convene the ad hoc ing the grade, it will request that the A graduate project, thesis, and/or disserta- committee and serve as its non-voting instructor make the change, providing tion must include a faculty advisor-of- chair. The ad hoc committee for appeal the instructor with a written explanation record at the time of initial registration. of a course, thesis credit or dissertation of its reasons. If the instructor is will- credit grade will be composed of three ing to voluntarily change the grade in The only faculty members who may, by faculty members. The Department view of the ad hoc committee’s recom- virtue of their appointment, automatically Chair, Program Coordinator or mendations, he or she submits a grade be the formal advisors-of-record for gradu- Departmental Graduate Coordinator change form to the Registrar, and sends ate projects or independent study activities from the instructor’s Department will copies to the ad hoc committee. Should (ISGs, theses, dissertations, etc.) are: be chosen as one member of the ad hoc the instructor decline to change the 1. tenure/tenure track faculty, committee. The other two appointees grade, he or she must provide a written 2. professors of practice, or to the ad hoc committee may be any explanation for refusing. The ad hoc other faculty member as long as there faculty committee, after considering 3. others who have at least a half-time, are no conflicts of interest with either the instructor’s explanation, and upon full-year faculty appointment, with the student or the instructor. Apparent concluding that it would be unjust to al- advising of independent work as part of conflicts of interest would include the low the original grade to stand, will then their contractual load. student’s thesis or dissertation advisor, determine what grade is to be assigned. Individuals holding other faculty ap- members of the student’s graduate The new grade may be higher than, pointments, such as part-time adjuncts or committee, or faculty members the same as, or lower than the original non-instructional research professors, may with close research collaborations or grade. Having made this determination, co-advise and indeed are encouraged to do project advising relationships with the the three members of the committee will so where appropriate. instructor. The ad hoc committee will sign the grade change form and transmit Department heads wishing to authorize examine available written information it to the Registrar. The instructor and anyone with appointments other than on the dispute, will be available for student will be advised of the new grade. these three categories as an advisor of meetings with the student, instructor, or Under no circumstances may persons record for projects, theses, or independent others as it sees fit. other than the original faculty member studies must first obtain agreement from 4. Through its inquiries and delibera- or the ad hoc faculty committee change the Dean of Graduate Studies. (In their tions, the ad hoc committee is charged a grade. The written records of these absence, please refer the request to the with determining whether the grade proceedings will be filed in the student’s Associate Provost for Academic Affairs.) was assigned in a fair and appropriate file in the Registrar’s Office. manner, or whether clear and convinc- Plan of Study ing evidence of unfair treatment such After consultation with and approval as arbitrariness, prejudice, and/or error by the advisor, each admitted student might justify changing the grade. The ad must file a formal Plan of Study with the hoc committee will make its decisions department within the first semester if by a majority vote. If the committee full-time, and within the first year if part- concludes that the grade was assigned in time. Program changes are implemented a fair and appropriate manner, this deci- by advisor and student. Copies of the sion is final and not subject to appeal. revised Plan of Study will be maintained in The ad hoc committee will report this department files. conclusion in writing to the student and the instructor, and the matter will be closed.

18 Grading System and Academic Standards Return to Table of Contents Registration Information and Procedures

The basic requirement for enrollment in Degree-Seeking Student Definition of Full-Time and a given course is a bachelor’s degree from Registration­ Part-Time Status an accredited institution in a relevant Graduate students must be registered for If a student is registered for 9 or more field of science or engineering. Although the semester in which degree require- credits, the student is deemed to be a full- those with management backgrounds may ments are completed. For master of science time student for that semester. If a student enroll in graduate management courses, programs requiring a thesis, the student needs fewer than 9 academic credits to no prior management study is required. must register for a minimum of 1 semes- complete degree requirements, registra- Persons who have been admitted to gradu- ter credit hour. For a Ph.D. program, the tion for the number of credits required for ate study at WPI are given first priority in student must register for a minimum of 1 completion of the degree gives the student course registration. Persons not holding a semester credit hours. full-time status. A student pursuing a mas- bachelor’s degree, but who might qualify ter’s degree, whose Plan of Study shows through training or experience, may be Students seeking degrees not requiring a completion of all degree requirements allowed to enroll on either a credit or audit thesis are not required to maintain con- within a single two-year period, retains basis with permission of the instructor. tinuous registration. full-time status so long as the student com- Registration for graduate courses is on plies with that Plan of Study. A student a space-available basis for nonadmitted Non-degree Student Course officially enrolled in a graduate internship students. Registration program has full-time status during the in- Nondegree-seeking students register Graduate students are expected to enroll ternship period. If a student has completed for courses in the same manner as all in graduate courses or thesis credit on the the minimum number of credits required other students. However, degree-seeking registration days designated in the WPI for a degree, and is certified by the depart- students have preference in registering for academic calendar. Registration on days ment or program to be working full-time courses with limited enrollments. not designated will result in additional toward the degree, enrollment in 1 credit fees. Audit Registration of dissertation research for a student seek- Enrollment in a course or courses, and sat- Students primarily interested in the ing the doctorate establishes full time sta- isfactory completion of those courses, does content of a particular course may register tus. For students seeking a master’s degree, not constitute acceptance as a candidate as auditors. Audit registration receives no 1 credit of thesis research establishes the for any graduate degree nor does it indi- credit and receives no grade. Audit regis- student’s full-time status with department cate admission to any graduate program. tration is controlled in limited enrollment certification. For the purposes of this rule, For students seeking advanced degrees, or courses. Thesis and project work cannot be the semesters are fall and spring. graduate certificates, formal admission to a taken with audit registration. Summer Semester graduate program is required. Audit registrants are encouraged to par- The Summer Session schedule will be Graduate Student Classifications ticipate in the courses, but typically do not available on the web by February of submit written work for evaluation. Often • Full-time Degree Seeking the same calendar year. Most graduate professors will accept written work of audit summer courses meet in the evening hours • Part-time Degree Seeking registrants, but this is left to the discretion from mid-May through the beginning of • Graduate Certificate or Advanced of the instructor. August. Many graduate students work on Graduate Certificate A student may change from credit to audit their research during Summer Session. • Student on Graduate Exchange or registration, but may not change from For information on summer registration, Internship audit to regular credit registration. To billing, and payment policies please visit • Nondegree Seeking/non matriculated change to audit registration for any gradu- the webpage (www.wpi.edu/+Summer) ate course, the student must complete an or call 508-831-4900, or view the online audit form (available in the Registrar’s summer school website. Office) within the first three weeks of Transcripts class. No tuition or fees will be returned to students who change to audit registration, WPI will issue one transcript of record i.e., the full tuition rate applies. to a student without charge. Additional transcripts may be requested, and there is a fee associated with each transcript. For more information, please visit http://www.wpi.edu/registrar/enrollverify.html.

Return to Table of Contents Registration Information and Procedures 19 Course Changes: Add/Drop/ Tuition and Fees Audit Rate Withdrawal from a Course A 50% reduced tuition rate per semester Tuition Rate Graduate schedule changes (add/drop) hour for the 2013-2014 academic year without penalty may occur prior to the Tuition for all courses taken by graduate is available for those who wish to audit third meeting of the course. A $100 late students is based on a $1281 fee per credit a course. Audit registration cannot be fee will be charged for schedule changes hour for the 2013-2014 academic year. changed to credit once the semester has made after the 3rd course meeting and WPI Alumni Tuition Incentive started. before the 4th. Dropping a course after the WPI alumni who completed a bachelor’s 4th course meeting will result in a grade Tuition Payments & Billing degree at WPI within the last five years are of W (withdrawal) and will be issued until WPI sends electronic bill statements (eBill) eligible for the tuition incentive program. the 10th week of the term for a 14 week to the WPI email address assigned to each The program is designed to help students course and until the 5th week of the term student. Bills are sent in the fall and spring complete their Master’s degree program at for a 7 week course. No tuition or fees will semesters. It is important to view each new an accelerated rate. be refunded for courses dropped after the eBill you receive as changes could have 4th course meeting. Please note that the To participate, you have to be admitted occurred in your account. student is responsible for notifying the and enrolled as a full-time student in one Tuition must be paid in full by the speci- Registrar’s office of any course withdrawal of WPI’s MS degree programs. In each se- fied due date on the electronic bill (eBill) that occurs after the 4th course meeting. mester of your first year of graduate study, statement. Students may pay in person at Notifying the instructor or discontinuance you will pay for nine credits of course the Busrar’s Office or online with a check- of attendance is not sufficient to receive a work, but you may register for as many as ing account or by MasterCard, American grade of W (withdrawal). eighteen credits in each semester. In other Express or Discover a 2.75% fee is charged words, you can take up to nine credits when using a credit card. Military Leave of Absence beyond the nine-credit, full-time threshold WPI graduate students who are called to in each semester of your first year at no Late Fees active duty by the United States mili- extra cost. Late fees of up to $250 will be assessed tary shall receive a 100% refund for the All eligible students are pre-coded to par- on balances and accounting holds will be uncompleted semester at the date of the ticipate, so all you have to do is register for placed on accounts. The first late fee is notice. If such students have a loan obliga- the courses you want. If you believe you assessed after the initial due date for the tion to WPI they will be granted an in- are eligible but have been charged for extra bills, the second is typically assessed mid school deferment status during the period courses, please contact the Bursar’s office. semester for outstanding balances. of active duty service, not to exceed a total of three years. To initiate the process to be The following restrictions apply: Monthly Payment Plan classified “on leave for military service,” a • Students in the MBA program are not A monthly payment plan is available for student must indicate in writing that he/ eligible each semester. Payments will be divided she is requesting school deferment status • Students are only eligible during their into equal monthly payments. There is an while being called to active duty. A copy of first year of full-time Masters-level annual enrollment fee for use. However, the official call to active duty notice from graduate study there are no additional charges or inter- the military must be included with this est. For more information, visit afford. request and be submitted to the Registrar’s • Students are only eligible during their com or contact the Bursar’s Office at Office. first two consecutive semesters of 508-831-5203. Masters-level study If the student has paid a tuition bill with • Funded students (TAs, RAs, etc) are not Health and Accident Insurance proceeds from either a subsidized or an eligible unsubsidized Federal Stafford Loan and All full-time graduate students must be has received a refund for either or both of This program is subject to annual renewal. covered by health and accident insurance the loans, the student shall be responsible It was last renewed in February 2013 for equivalent to that offered under the WPI for any overpayment of funds. It is there- the 2013/14 academic year. If you have Student Health and Accident Insurance fore necessary for the student to contact questions, please contact the Office of Plan. Students must complete a waiver the lender(s) upon withdrawal. Graduate Admissions at [email protected]. form online annually if they wish to not purchase the WPI offered plan. Optional coverage for a spouse or dependent is available. Please contact the Bursar’s Office (508-831-5203) for further information.

20 Registration Information and Procedures Return to Table of Contents Degree Requirements

The following are WPI’s minimum re- which determines if the student has satis- satisfaction of graduate degree require- quirements for advanced degrees. The gen- fied the letter and intent of the require- ments must be approved by the student’s eral requirements for all advanced degrees ments for advanced degrees. program. A 1/3-unit WPI undergraduate must be satisfied to earn any advanced course taken for graduate credit is assigned The Registrar’s Office submits a candidates degree. The additional requirements for 2 credit hours of graduate credit. A gradu- list to CGSR who make their recommen- specific degrees must be satisfied in order ate student registered for graduate credit in dations for the approval of advanced de- to earn the specified degree, regardless of an undergraduate course may be assigned grees to the faculty of the Institute, which the field in which the degree is earned. additional work at the discretion of the in turn recommends to the president Please review department requirements for instructor. and trustees for their final approval the more specific information. names of students who should be awarded General Requirements General Requirements for advanced degrees. for the Doctorate All Advanced Degrees Requirements for the master of business The student must demonstrate to the All degree requirements must be satisfied administration and master of mathematics faculty high academic attainment and the before the degree is awarded. Exceptions for educators appear under the descrip- ability to carry on original independent to general and specific degree requirements tions of the awarding programs. research. or to other rules may be made, but only by General Requirements for The student must complete a minimum of the Committee on Graduate Studies and 90 credit hours of graduate work beyond 1 Requests for excep- the Master of Science and Research (CGSR). the bachelor’s degree, or a minimum of 60 tions are to be made by written petition to Master of Engineering credit hours of graduate work beyond the that committee. The student must obtain a minimum of master’s degree, including in either case at 30 credit hours of acceptable course, thesis At the time the degree is awarded, the least 30 credit hours of research. student must have been admitted to the or project work. The student must establish residency by graduate program of the degree-granting If a thesis is required by the student’s being a full-time graduate student for at program. Administratively, a degree- program, it must include at least 6 credit least one continuous academic year. granting program may be a department or hours of research directed toward the the- a program. sis, in a project resulting in the completion The student must attain status as a doc- toral candidate by satisfying specific degree A minimum of two-thirds of the required of an M.S. thesis. requirements in the student’s field. graduate credit for an advanced degree A student completing a master’s degree must be earned at WPI. with a thesis option is required to make a The student must prepare a doctoral dis- sertation and defend it before a Disserta- For the master of mathematics, the student public presentation of the thesis. Depart- ments may, at their option, extend the tion Committee, at least two of whose must have a program GPA2 of 2.9 or great- ­presentation to include a defense of the members must be from the student’s er. For all other degrees, the student must thesis. program and at least one of whose mem- have a program GPA of 3.00 or greater. bers must be from outside the student’s The student must obtain a minimum of In applying for graduation, the student program. After a successful defense, 21 credit hours of graduate level courses or must specify by year which graduate cata- determined by a majority vote in the af- thesis (18 credit hours for students in the log contains the rules being satisfied. These firmative by the Dissertation Committee, Combined Bachelor’s/Master’s Program), rules may be those in place on the date of the dissertation must be endorsed by those including at least 15 credit hours of gradu- the student’s matriculation, those in place members of the Dissertation Committee ate level courses or thesis in the major field on the date of the student’s application for who voted to approve it. The completed of the student. Other courses (to make graduation, or those in place in a single dissertation must follow in format the up the minimum total of 30 credit hours) graduate catalog in effect between the instructions published by the library (see may include advanced undergraduate dates of matriculation and graduation. page 24). After final approval for format courses approved by the student’s program. of the dissertation, the Provost will notify After the Application for Degree is submit- Such courses are normally considered the Registrar that the dissertation has been ted, all advanced degrees are subject to to be those at the 4000 level. The use approved. the final approval of the Registrar’s Office, of advanced undergraduate courses for

1 CGSR—The Committee on Graduate Studies and Research (CGSR) is concerned with all post-baccalaureate programs of the University, and reviews and recommends changes in WPI policies on goals, student recruitment, admissions, academic standards, teaching and research assistantships, scholarships and fellowships. It also makes recommendations to the faculty and administration on new graduate programs and courses, and changes in programs and courses. The committee acts on admission of graduate students to degree candidacy, dismissal for failure to meet academic standards, and student petitions on academic matters. It brings to the faculty for action the names of students whom it has determined are eligible for post-baccalaureate degrees. The committee reviews and recommends changes in policy on the funding, promo- tion and conduct of research at WPI. 2 GPA—The Grade Point Average (GPA) is calculated as the sum of the products of the grade points and credit hours for each registered activity, in the average, divided by the total number of credit hours for all registered activities in the average. Grade points are as follows: A = 4.0; B = 3.0; C = 2.0; D = 1.0; and F = 0.0.

Return to Table of Contents Degree Requirements 21 Once a student has satisfied the depart- made by the faculty of the program that Students in the Combined Program may mental candidacy requirements, the awards the graduate degree. A student in use advanced undergraduate courses to student will be permitted to enroll for the Combined Program continues to be satisfy graduate degree requirements. dissertation credits. Prior to completion of registered as an undergraduate until the The academic department decides which candidacy requirements, a student may en- bachelor’s degree is awarded. courses may be used in this way. Fac- ulty members teaching these advanced roll for no more than 18 credits of directed While in the Combined Program, a stu- undergraduate courses may impose special research. dent may continue to enroll in courses or requirements. In addition to the general requirements projects toward the undergraduate degree; established by WPI for an interdisciplin- the student may also register for graduate If the programs awarding the bachelor’s ary doctoral degree, applicants must pass a courses, projects, directed research or thesis and master’s degrees are not the same, the qualifying examination. This examination credits toward the master’s degree. program awarding the graduate degree may require that the student’s major will test the basic knowledge and under- A student in the Combined Program may, qualifying project relate in some way to standing of the student in the disciplines within the program limit and with prior the graduate program’s discipline. The covered by the research as is normally ex- approval, use a limited number of the same graduate program may also make other re- pected of degree holders in the disciplines. courses toward the bachelor’s and master’s quirements as it deems appropriate in any It must be administered within the first 18 degrees. The limitation is computed from individual case. Additional requirements credits of registration in the interdisciplin- the graduate credit hours for each course. appear within each department’s section in ary Ph.D. program. The examination will Courses whose credit hours total no more this catalog. be administered by a committee of no less than 40% of the credit hours required for than three members, approved by CGSR, the master’s degree, and which meet all To obtain a master’s degree via the Com- representing the disciplines covered by the other requirements for each degree, may bined Program, the student must satisfy all research. Students are allowed at most two be used to satisfy requirements for both requirements for that master’s degree. To attempts at passing the examination, and degrees. Such courses are recorded on the obtain a bachelor’s degree via the Com- may take a maximum of 18 credits prior transcript using the credit hours/ units bined Program, the student must satisfy all to passage. and grades appropriate at the graduate or requirements for that bachelor’s degree. General Requirements undergraduate levels. For students in the The time limit for completing the for the Combined Bachelor’s/ Combined Program, approved undergrad- ­Combined Program varies by department Master’s Degree Program uate courses are assigned graduate credit from one to four years. See department with a conversion rate of 1/3 WPI under- description for full information. Only registered WPI undergraduates may graduate unit = 2 credit hours. Graduate enter the Combined Bachelor’s/Master’s courses applied toward the undergraduate Program. To enter, a student must submit degree are awarded undergraduate credit an application and required support with a conversion rate of 1 credit hour = materials to WPI’s Office of Graduate 1/6 undergraduate unit. Admissions, preferably in the junior year. Admission to the Combined Program is

22 Degree Requirements Return to Table of Contents Theses and Dissertations

WPI is a member of the Networked Digi- concerns. Students should discuss these In order to submit theses and dissertations tal Library of Theses and Dissertations. issues thoroughly with their advisors and electronically, students must have a WPI This organization is dedicated to “unlock- committee members as early in the process account, obtainable online using a PIN ing access to graduate education” by mak- as possible. provided by the Projects and Registrar’s Office. ing the full text of theses and dissertations The following are required for proper sub- available online. mission of electronic theses and disserta- Extensive information about creating and Students are required to submit an elec- tions (ETDs): submitting ETDs is available on the ETD Web site, www.wpi.edu/+etd. tronic version entirely through the Web. 1. The ETD Approval Form is a necessary Most documents will be made available part of the submission process Thesis Binding to the general public via the Web, but 2. A copy of the title page, with all appro- Students and departments may wish to individual authors and their advisors priate faculty and student signatures retain a bound paper copy of theses and may choose to restrict their works to be 3. The thesis or dissertation converted to dissertations. Gordon Library will be accessible only by members of the WPI PDF and uploaded via the ETD Web happy to do this for you at your expense. community or to be completely unavail- Site Information on thesis binding can be able for a period of up to five years. Factors found online at in this decision should include copy- http://wpi.edu/Pubs/ETD/binding.html. right, intellectual property and patenting

Student Services

Facilities and Services WPI Police undergraduate and graduate students and Personal safety information, security practic- alumni as well. Information and guid- Bookstore es at WPI and the University’s crime statistic ance is provided in the areas of full-time The bookstore, located on the second floor information can be obtained by visiting the employment, graduate school, part-time of the Campus Center, is open during the campus police Web site. Students can also employment, cooperative education and first days of classes from 8:00 a.m. to 7 p.m. obtain a copy of the University’s “Right To summer positions. Call 508-831-5260 or During the rest of the school year, hours Know” brochure by contacting the WPI go to www.wpi.edu/Admin/CDC/. of operation are 8 a.m. to 7 p.m. Monday Police Department at 508-831-5433. through Thursday, 8 a.m. to 5 p.m. Friday, Class Cancellation and 11 a.m. to 5 p.m. on Saturday. Graduate students are entitled to parking When all classes are cancelled (severe permits for the Boynton Street parking lot weather during the midday period, forecast Textbooks for off-campus courses may located behind the library for an annual to last through evening) cancellation will be purchased at the first meeting of each fee. Parking is on a first-come, first-served be broadcast on radio stations WTAG, course. Payment may be made by cash, basis. Parking is also available on the city WSRS, WAAF, WFTQ, WKOX and check or credit card. Additionally, text- streets surrounding the campus. Be sure WBZ. Information will also be posted on books may be purchased online at to obey parking signs, as enforcement in the university website and on the cancella- www.wpi.bkstore.com. Worcester is strict. The city’s winter park- tion hot line at 508-831-5744. For more information please call (508) ing regulations are available on the WPI 831-5247 or e-mail [email protected]. police Web site, as well. Information Technology Resources Student Health Center Decals may be purchased at the WPI Police Department located at Founders WPI Information Technology manages In addition to purchasing health insur- Hall in the Lower Level. WPI Police also a wide range of information technology ance, graduate students may also make use has prepared a brochure on parking regula- resources for the WPI community to of WPI’s Student Health Center for an an- tions that is available on-site or on-line at support teaching, learning, research and nual fee of $300. By choosing this option, www.wpi.edu/Admin/Police/parking/. student life. The WPI computer account you can have a doctor at the Center serve provides students access to technology as your primary care physician. You may Career Development Center resources including personal network file also then use the center on a walk-in basis The Career Development Center (CDC) storage and acts as their WPI virtual iden- during its normal hours (weekdays 8:00am at WPI assists students in the develop- tity while the student is actively registered. to 5:00pm). You can learn more about ment of lifelong skills related to careers WPI’s Student Health Center at and the job search process. CDC serves www.wpi.edu/+Health.

Return to Table of Contents Student Services 23 Software Technology Support and important student registration, advising, Numerous software packages includ- Instruction and financial information. It also enables ing academic courseware are available to students to update their biographical in- Technology Helpdesk students: formation, manage course registration, and Gordon Library, Main Floor; 508-831- check grades online. • in Public computer labs 5888; [email protected]; • via terminal services using Remote www.wpi.edu/+Helpdesk Gordon Library Desktop Connection from Windows, • In-person technology support provided The George C. Gordon Library is open Macs or Linux personal machines at the Helpdesk over one hundred hours each week during • via the Virtual Lab using a web browser • Requests for help via the web or email the academic year. The library provides re- • via network download for some with self-help content available online sources and innovative services in support applications of the teaching, learning and scholarship Academic Technology Center WPI partners with Microsoft to provide process at WPI. Fuller Labs, Room 117; 508-831-5220; students access to current Microsoft [email protected]; www.wpi.edu/+ATC The library’s collections support the cur- operating system and business produc- riculum and research needs of the WPI tivity software for use on their personal • In-person technology support on community. Currently the library holds computers. Students have similar access to audio-visual equipment loaned out for thousands of print and electronic jour- anti-virus protection software. multi-media projects and campus events nals, a vast collection of electronic books, sponsored by WPI student organizations print books, and research databases which Computer Labs • Large format poster printing support all areas of the WPI curricu- Hundreds of computers are available • Video bulletin board system for an- lum. The library collection also contains across campus for student use with many nouncements pertaining to campus undergraduate project reports, graduate located in open access labs within aca- events theses and dissertations, with recent years demic buildings and the Gordon Library. available online. Music CDs, DVDs and Each of these labs offers a consistent user Instruction & Research Support other media, and bestsellers are available interface, software profile, and network • Instructor-led software applications for educational and recreational purposes. access to centralized personal file storage. training offered in our computer-train- The WPI Archives and Special Collections The Gordon Library houses a Multimedia ing classrooms include the historic records and artifacts Lab for high-end digital editing as well as • Instructor-led training for some special- of the university and a growing collec- the centrally located Information Com- ized academic software applications tion that features the inventions of WPI mons print center that is available to meet • Individualized help with project-related alumni. students’ scanning and printing needs. research is available at the Gordon The library catalog, electronic journal Library Collaboration & Learning Resources and book collections, specialized research • Tech Suites: Technology-enhanced Infrastructure Services databases, course-specific information, meeting spaces designed for student Network Operations manages the complex and many other resources are available project group use WPI network, including: from the library’s web site • Learning Management Software: (http://www.wpi.edu/+library). The web • High speed fiber optic network connects site is the focal point for digital library Blackboard Course web sites, branded as campus buildings including residence myWPI resources and services. Access to WPI users halls who are off-campus is available through • Tools: Exchange (email,/calendar/con- • Point to point wireless connects par- the proxy server. tact management), Office Communica- ticipating Greek houses to the WPI tions Server (OCS), and SharePoint Network The staff of Gordon Library offer many services that support graduate students. • Equipment Loans: includes laptops, • Wireless networking is available in all The Research and Instruction Librarians digital cameras, camcorders, audio academic buildings, residence halls, and help students with research problems and recorders, hard drives, projectors, etc. participating Greek houses questions, offer library instruction and • Electronic classrooms and electronically • High speed Internet connectivity in- orientation sessions, and provide research enabled conference rooms cluding connection to Internet2 consultations to individual graduate stu- • Web-conferencing tools to allow remote • Virtual Private Network (VPN) access dents and to groups. Students can request participants to conduct meetings in real- provides secure remote access to WPI materials not held in Gordon Library time in a web-based environment from on-campus information technology through the interlibrary loan service. WPI any location with a computer and a high resources students also have access to the collections speed Internet connection of other academic libraries within Central Enterprise Solutions Services Massachusetts with the library’s mem- The Enterprise Solutions Services Team bership in the Academic and Research manages the enterprise wide technol- Collaborative (ARC). Students can obtain ogy solutions that enable administrative an ARC cross-borrowing card which al- departments to run the critical business lows direct borrowing at many regional functions of the University. These systems academic libraries. provide students and faculty access to

24 Student Services Return to Table of Contents The Gordon Library, Academic Technol- serves as a venue for a variety of programs The Sports and Recreation facilities ogy Center, and the Technology Help throughout the year, such as coffee hours, includes a two-story fitness center with Desk provide one stop shopping for gradu- movies, Midnight Breakfast, lectures and cardio equipment and free weights, a four- ate student research, information, and other social and cultural activities. The court gymnasium, a competition pool, technology support in the Information House, which provides wireless access to dance studios, a three-lane jogging track, Commons on the library’s main floor. The the network, has several facilities avail- racquetball and squash courts. Graduate adjacent Class of 1970 Library Café serves able to students and scholars and student students frequently join faculty groups for food and beverages. groups interested in international issues, noontime jogging, aerobics and basketball. including: The library’s four floors contain a wide A wide variety of entertainment is brought • International Seminar Room for discus- variety of individual and group study to the campus, ranging from small infor- sion groups, meetings and ESL classes spaces. Tech Suites, which are collabora- mal groups to popular entertainers in the tive work areas equipped with up-to-date • International Resources Room with 3,500-seat Harrington Auditorium. A technology, can be reserved for student cross-cultural material, travel infor- series of films is shown in Perreault Hall, use. Additional group study spaces are mation and ESL materials as well as and chamber concerts are presented in the located throughout the building. There are computer access Baronial Hall of Higgins House. also computer workstations configured for • lounge for students and visitors to relax The normal social activities of a medium- group and individual use, many with large and enjoy a cup of coffee or a game of sized city are readily accessible, many monitors for collaborative project work. backgammon within easy walking distance. Other The Multimedia Lab on the first floor • two guest rooms for temporary housing activities of interest to students are offered offers specialized multimedia software. The Office of International Students and by the many colleges in the Worcester Anderson Instruction Labs are used by Scholars: 508-831-6030. ESL Director: Consortium. staff for training during the day and can be 508-831-6033. scheduled by student groups for evenings Student ID Cards and weekends. The library features both Mail Services The WPI ID is also a student’s library card wireless and wired computer network ac- Located in the Campus Center, first floor. and is used in many departments for lab cess, and over 125 public-use computers. Student Mail Room 508-831-5317, access as well. Special exhibits are offered regularly in the Incoming/Receiving 508-831-5523, library’s galleries. For more information Mail Processing 508-831-5317. Students may also deposit money on their please visit the library web site at cards for use in the WPI dining locations http://www.wpi.edu/+library. • Package pick-up at a 10% discount. The ID office is located • Stamps sold in East Hall. The hours are: Monday Housing • Letters and packages weighed, metered through Friday 8 a.m. to 5 p.m. For infor- Most graduate students live in rooms or • Discounted Express Mail mation, call 508-831-5150. apartments in residential areas near the • Fax services campus. A limited amount of on-campus • Limited number of mailboxes available Dean of Graduate Studies The Dean of Graduate Studies is the housing may be available for single gradu- Printing Services ate students. Family housing is not avail- principal advocate for graduate programs able on campus. Located in Boynton Hall, lower level. across all disciplines at WPI. The Dean Telephone 508-831-5842 or -5571. oversees the distribution of graduate TAs, The Office of Residential Services, Hours (Monday through Friday) the annual graduate student orientations, 508-831-5645, provides information 8 a.m. to 4:30 p.m. and Graduate Research Achievement regarding both on-campus and off- • Offset printing Day. In addition, the Dean serves as the campus housing. A listing of off-campus • Photocopying (including color) chief academic advisor to the Graduate accommodations is available at • Binding of reports Student Government. Graduate students www.wpi.edu/Admin/RSO/Offcampus/. • Laminating are welcome to consult with the Dean on International Graduate • Print from disc, electronically sent files academic matters. or hard copy Student Services Dean of Students The Office of International Students and Sports and Recreation The Dean of Students’ office staff is avail- Scholars is located at WPI’s International The university provides a varied program able to students enrolled in all programs House at 28 Trowbridge Road. The office of sports and recreation. Graduate students to assist with any out-of-the-classroom provides information and assistance on usually enter teams in several intramural concerns that may arise. Staff members are immigration and other regulatory mat- sports and may participate in certain inter- available between 8:30 a.m. and 5 p.m. ters, information on cultural and social collegiate club sports as well as on-campus Appointments outside of these hours can programs and services, as well as general musical or theater groups. be arranged­ by calling 508-831-5201. counseling. The NEW Sports and Recreation Center With 677 international students from presents an opportunity for the whole 54 countries (Fall semester, 2012), WPI WPI community to be more active and is the embodiment of the diversity that practice healthier lifestyles. characterizes the United States. The House

Return to Table of Contents Student Services 25 Bioinformatics and Computational Biology

learning environment that characterizes who are pursuing a combined M.S./PhD Faculty with Research our program promotes easy exchange of degree. Courses and research projects Interests ideas, access to all the necessary resources, taken at the University of Massachusetts M. Ward, Professor of Computer Science and encourages creative solutions to Medical School (UMMS) may be applied and BCB Program Director, Ph.D., Con- pressing scientific questions. to this degree. Upon acceptance to the necticut, 1981. Data and information M.S. program, students will be assigned visualization, visual analytics of biological Admissions Requirements an academic advisor. In consultation with data. Students applying to the M.S. Degree the academic advisor, the student must program in Bioinformatics and Compu- prepare a Plan of Study outlining the selec- P. J. Flaherty, Assistant Professor; Ph.D., tational Biology (BCB) are expected to tions that the student will make to satisfy University of California at Berkeley; have a bachelor’s degree in either biology, the M.S. degree requirements among the Bioinformatics, statistical machine learn- computer science, mathematics, or a re- options offered. This Plan of Study must ing, experiment design, clinical genomics, lated field, and to have taken introductory then be approved by the Program’s Review computational biology, algorithms for courses in each of the three disciplines: bi- Committee, which consists of faculty decision-making with large-scale hetero­ ology, computer science, and mathematics. members from each of the three participat- geneous data sets. For example, a student with a bachelor’s ing WPI departments. C. Ruiz, Associate Professor of Computer degree in biology is expected to have also BS/MS: Students enrolled in the B.S./ Science, Ph.D., Maryland, 1996. Data completed courses in programming, data M.S. program must satisfy all the program mining, knowledge discovery in databases, structures, calculus, and statistics prior requirements of the B.S. degree and all machine learning. to submitting an application. A strong the program requirements of the M.S. E. Ryder, Associate Professor of Biology applicant who is missing background in Degree as described at the URL below. and Biotechnology, Ph.D., Harvard Uni- one of the three areas may be provision- They may count 4000-level courses whose versity, 1993. Nervous system develop- ally admitted, with the expectation that credit hours total no more than 40% of ment in computer simulations of biologi- he or she will take and pass one or more the 33 credit hours required for the M.S. cal systems. undergraduate courses in this area of defi- degree, and that meet all other require- ciency either during the summer prior to ments for each degree, towards both their Z. Wu, Assistant Professor of Mathemati- admission or within the first semester after undergraduate and graduate degrees. The cal Sciences, Ph.D., Yale, 2009. Biostatis- admission. The determination of what conversion rate between graduate credits tics, high-dimensional model selection, course or courses will satisfy this provi- and undergraduate units is stated in both linear and generalized linear modeling, sion will be made by the Program Review the undergraduate and graduate catalogs. statistical genetics, bioinformatics. Committee. Students must register for B.S./M.S. credit Program of Study prior to taking the courses, as faculty may Certificate Requirements assign extra work for those taking the The Bioinformatics and Computational A certificate program in BCB is not of- course as part of both degrees. In consulta- Biology (BCB) program offers graduate fered at present. tion with the academic advisor, the student studies toward the MS and BS/MS must prepare a Plan of Study outlining the degrees. With the advent of large Degree Requirements selections that the student will make to amounts of biological data stemming Masters: Students pursuing the M.S. de- satisfy the B.S./M.S. degree requirements, from research efforts such as the Human gree in Bioinformatics and Computational including the courses that the student Genome Project, there is a great need Biology must complete a minimum of 33 will double count. This Plan of Study for professionals working at the interface credits of relevant work at the graduate must then be approved by the Program’s of biology, computer science, and level. These 33 credits must satisfy the 6-9 Review Committee. Students must consult mathematics. A truly interdisciplinary credit M.S. thesis / internship require- their advisors and the graduate catalog as program, the BCB degree requires ment, and the 24-27 credit coursework individual departments may have restric- advanced course work in all three of these requirement described in detail at the tions on which undergraduate courses areas. Our faculty and strong relationships URL below. These M.S. degree require- might be taken for graduate credit, and on with the University of Massachusetts ments have been designed to provide a which pairs of undergraduate and graduate Medical School provide students with the comprehensive yet flexible program to courses cannot both be taken for credit. resources to perform innovative scientific students who are pursuing an M.S. degree research at the highest level. The diverse URL for details: exclusively, students who are pursuing a http://www.wpi.edu/+BCB combined B.S./M.S. degree, and students

26 Bioinformatics and Computational Biology Return to Table of Contents BCB 502/CS 582. Biovisualization BCB 504/MA 584. Statistical Methods in Facilities/Research Labs/ This course will use interactive visualization Genetics and Bioinformatics Research Centers to model and analyze biological information, This course provides students with knowledge and structures, and processes. Topics will include the understanding of the applications of statistics in The BCB Program is supported by a wide fundamental principles, concepts, and techniques modern genetics and bioinformatics. The course assortment of resources within the partici- of visualization (both scientific and information generally covers population genetics, genetic pating departments, the campus computa- visualization) and how visualization can be used epidemiology, and statistical models in bioinfor- tion center, and the research laboratories to study bioinformatics data at the genomic, matics. Specific topics include meiosis modeling, at Gateway Park and the University of cellular, molecular, organism, and population stochastic models for recombination, linkage and Massachusetts Medical School. Grid and levels. Students will be expected to write small to association studies (parametric vs. nonparametric cloud computing, along with high-speed moderate programs to experiment with different models, family-based vs. population-based mod- visual mappings and data types. Students may not els) for mapping genes of qualitative and quantita- networking, provides substantial computa- receive credit for both BCB 4002 and BCB 502. tive traits, gene expression data analysis, DNA and tional infrastructure. Access to most major (Prerequisite: strong programming skills, an un- protein sequence analysis, and molecular evolu- biological databases is available to students dergraduate or graduate course in algorithms, and tion. Statistical approaches include log-likelihood and researchers, and a wide range of bio- one or more undergraduate biology courses.) ratio tests, score tests, generalized linear models, EM algorithm, Markov chain Monte Carlo, informatics software packages are installed BCB 503/CS 583. Biological and and maintained. Wet labs at Gateway Park hidden Markov model, and classification and Biomedical Database Mining regression trees. Students may not receive credit and UMASS Medical School are available This course will investigate computational for both BCB 4004 and BCB 504. (Prerequisite: by permission of BCB faculty members. techniques for discovering patterns in and across knowledge of probability and statistics at the complex biological and biomedical sources undergraduate level.) Course Descriptions including genomic and proteomic databases, clinical databases, digital libraries of scientific All courses are 3 credits unless otherwise noted. articles, and ontologies. Techniques covered will BCB 501/BB 581. Bioinformatics be drawn from several areas including sequence This course will provide an overview of bioin- mining, statistical natural language processing formatics, covering a broad selection of the most and text mining, and data mining. Students may important techniques used to analyze biological not receive credit for both BCB 4003 and BCB sequence and expression data. Students will ac- 503. (Prerequisite: strong programming skills, an quire a working knowledge of bioinformatics ap- undergraduate or graduate course in algorithms, plications through hands-on use of software to ask an undergraduate course in statistics, and one or and answer biological questions. In addition, the more undergraduate biology courses.) course will provide students with an introduction to the theory behind some of the most important algorithms used to analyze sequence data (for example, alignment algorithms and the use of hid- den Markov models). Topics covered will include protein and DNA sequence alignments, evolu- tionary analysis and phylogenetic trees, obtaining protein secondary structure from sequence, and analysis of gene expression including clustering methods. Students may not receive credit for both BCB 4001 and BCB 501. (Prerequisite: knowl- edge of genetics, molecular biology, and statistics at the undergraduate level.)

Return to Table of Contents Bioinformatics and Computational Biology 27 Biology and Biotechnology www.wpi.edu/+bio

Faculty J. Rulfs, Associate Professor; Ph.D., Tufts Development, Neurobiology, University; cell culture model systems of J. B. Duffy, Associate Professor and and Organismal Biology and signal transduction, metabolic effects of Biotechnology Department Head; Ph.D., University of phytoestrogens, cultured cells in tissue Texas; signal transduction and cell adhesion engineering. Areas of focus: Cancer biology, regen- mechanisms in development and disease, erative medicine, neuronal migration, cancer biology, neurobiology. E. F. Ryder, Associate Professor; Ph.D., circuits, and degeneration, pathogenic Harvard University; M.S., Harvard School mechanisms, and plant biology D. S. Adams, Professor; Ph.D., University of Public Health; nervous system develop- of Texas; design of neurotrophic factors for ment using C. elegans as a genetic model, Model systems: C. elegans, Drosophila, M. treating Alzheimer’s disease. simulation of development using agent- Musculus, Physcomitrella, Bombus spp., and C. albicans/S. cerevisae T. Dominko, Associate Professor; D.V.M., based computational modeling. Ph.D., University of Wisconsin-Madison; J. Srinivasan, Assistant Professor; Ph.D., Faculty: Dave Adams, Tanja Dominko, regenerative cell biology, stem cells, role of University of Tuebingen, Germany; genet- Joe Duffy, Rob Gegear, Sam Politz, Reeta oxygen and FGF2 in nuclear reprogram- ics, behavioral neuroscience, evolutionary Rao, Liz Ryder, Jagan Srinivasan, Luis ming, epigenetics, reproductive/develop- ecology, chemical biology Vidali and Pam Weathers. mental biology. L. Vidali, Assistant Professor; Ph.D., Behavioral and Environmental R. J. Gegear, Assistant Professor; Ph.D., University of Massachusetts-Amherst; Biology and Biotechnology University of Western Ontario; behavioral/ plant cell biology and molecular genetics, Areas of focus: Animal behavior, biologi- evolutionary ecology, neuroethology, pol- live cell microscopy, molecular motors/ lination biology. cal diversity, brain plasticity, pollinator cytoskeleton. ecology, and plant biology L. M. Mathews, Associate Professor; P. J. Weathers, Professor; Ph.D., Michi- Ph.D., University of Louisiana; population Model systems: Bombus spp., Danaus gan State University; biology of in vitro plexippus, Orconectes, and Drosophila genetics and evolution of marine and cultured plants and their tissues, plant aquatic invertebrates, design and applica- secondary metabolism, bioreactor develop- Faculty: Joe Duffy, Rob Gegear, Lauren tion of molecular genetic tools for ment for plant and animal tissues, process Mathews, Jagan Srinivasan and Pam ecological research, conservation biology. development for plant products. Weathers. K. K. Oates, Professor and Dean of Arts & Sciences; Ph.D., The George Wash- Research Interests Programs of Study ington University Biochemistry; thymic Faculty in the Biology and Biotechnol- With the advent of genomics, the 21st hormone characterization, monoclonal ogy Department has research interests in Century has been termed a “revolutionary” antibody production, immunology of a range of areas including but not limited era in Biology and Biotechnology. The disease, undergraduate STEM education, to the research foci listed below. Students Department of Biology and Biotechnology STEM Education for Development. seeking a graduate degree in biology and (BB) is perfectly situated for this transition biotechnology engage in directed study with the construction of the Interdisci- E. W. Overström, Professor and Provost; plinary Life Sciences and Bioengineering Ph.D., University of Massachusetts-­ with one of the department’s faculty in his or her research specialty area. The Center at Gateway Park. This state-of- Amherst; oocyte biology, developmental the-art building integrates Life Sciences cell biology, animal somatic cell cloning. department strongly recommends that, prior to applying, students review the and Bioengineering at WPI in addition to S. M. Politz, Associate Professor; Ph.D., information at the department’s Web site housing a number of technology centers UCLA. genetic control of surface glyco- (www.wpi.edu/+bbt) to help identify and biotechnology start-ups. protein expression in the nematode Cae- potential faculty advisors. The Department offers a fulltime research- norhabditis elegans; chemosensory control oriented program for incoming graduate of nematode behavior and development; Molecular and Cellular Biology students, leading to either a doctor of host immune responses to parasitic nema- and Biotechnology philosophy (Ph.D.) in biotechnology or tode infections. Areas of focus: Cytoskeletal dynamics, Masters (M.S.) degree in biology and R. P. Rao, Associate Professor; Ph.D., epigenetics/gene regulation, and signal biotechnology. These programs require Penn State University-Medical School; transduction mechanisms students to successfully complete a set of M.S (Dual), Drexel University; under- Model systems: C. elegans, Drosophila, M. required courses in the field and a thesis standing and managing fungal infections, Musculus, Physcomitrella, and S. cerevisae project or dissertation that applies the in vitro and in vivo high screening for basic principles of biology and biotechnol- novel virulence factors as antifungal drugs. Faculty: Dave Adams, Tanja Dominko, ogy using hypothesis driven experimental Joe Duffy, Rob Gegear, Lauren Mathews, methods to address a specific research Eric Overström, Sam Politz, Reeta Rao, problem. Jill Rulfs, Liz Ryder, Jagan Srinivasan and Luis Vidali.

28 Biology and Biotechnology Return to Table of Contents Graduates will have a broad knowledge (oral and written), pedagogical approaches, tissue work. Additional shared common of the field of biology and biotechnol- experimental design, and professional spaces include centralized facilities for ogy, a detailed knowledge in their area of ethics within the life sciences. Specific waste disposal, media preparation as well specialization, a working knowledge of operational details of the program, includ- as dishwashing. The facility is part of the modern research tools, a strong apprecia- ing the qualifying exam and dissertation WPI-University of Massachusetts Con- tion for scientific research in theoretical defense, can be found in the Biology and sortium which allows researchers at both and experimental areas, and a foundation Biotechnology graduate handbook. institutions to access facilities and services for lifelong learning and experimenting, Publications at the other institution at “in-house” rates. both individually and as part of a team. In order to graduate, at least one manu- Bioprocess Center (BPC) Students who complete these programs script should be submitted for publication Researchers at the BPC design and develop will be well prepared for careers in the in a refereed journal and at least one paper scalable processes for drug manufactur- academics and private sectors or further must have been presented at a national or ing. The BPC contracts with biotechnol- graduate education. international conference. ogy companies, to supply drug targets in Application and Admission Qualifying Exam, Reports and Dissertation research quantities and conduct lab- and Applications should be made to either the Defense pilot-scale process development. M.S. program in biology and biotechnol- A Ph.D. qualifying exam is required and ogy or the Ph.D. program in biotechnol- should be taken prior to the end of the Biomanufacturing Education ogy. The department accepts applications second year of study. A majority of the and Training Center (BETC) for admission to the Fall semester only. Examining Committee must be members WPI’s Biomanufacturing Education and Admission Requirements of the biology and biotechnology depart- Training Center, the first of its kind in the ment faculty. The committee must also Northeast, provides innovative workforce See page 11. approve the student’s dissertation research development solutions customized to the proposal and review student’s progress specific needs of an industry. Serving life Degree Requirements through committee meetings. Candidates sciences companies from across the region M.S. in Biology and for the Ph.D. degree must give annual and the globe, the center represents an Biotechnology presentations of their research work to the innovative partnership of academia and in- department as part of the graduate seminar dustry by offering hands-on and classroom Students pursuing the M.S. degree in biol- course. A public defense of the completed ogy and biotechnology must complete a training by experts in a wide-range of roles dissertation is required of all students and and disciplines. minimum of 30 credit hours of course and will be followed immediately by a defense thesis work, six of which must be thesis before the Examining Committee. All research credits. In addition, M.S. students Course Descriptions members of the Examining Committee All courses are 3 credits unless otherwise noted. must successfully complete (grade of B must be present for the defense. or higher) a minimum of three graduate BB 501. Seminar courses appropriate to their area of study Research Facilities 1 credit per semester (subject to pre-approval by their thesis BB 505. Fermentation Biology committee) and the graduate seminar and Centers Material in this course focuses on biological (BB501, 1 credit in every semester regis- Life Sciences and (especially microbiological) systems by which tered for full-time study). Students must Bioengineering Center (LSBC) materials and energy can be interconverted (e.g., assemble an Advisory Committee of three waste products into useful chemicals or fuels). The faculty members of which a minimum Located in Gateway Park, the world-class, processes are dealt with at the physiological and the system level, with emphasis on the means by of two must be biology and biotechnol- 124,600-square-foot LSBC was built in 2007 and serves as the school’s focal point which useful conversions can be harnessed in a ogy program faculty members. One of biologically intelligent way. The laboratory focuses the biology and biotechnology faculty for graduate education and research in the life sciences and related bioengineer- on measurements of microbial physiology and on members will chair the committee and be bench-scale process design. the student’s faculty advisor. The Advisory ing fields. It’s also home to life sciences companies, state-of-the-art core facilities, BB 509. Scale Up of Bioprocessing Committee must review and approve each Strategies for optimization of bioprocesses for M.S. student’s program of study and thesis and WPI’s Corporate and Professional Education division. scale-up applications will be explored. In addition research. to the theory of scaling up unit operations in The Core facilities include an Imaging bioprocessing, students will scale up a bench- scale Ph.D. in Biology and core providing a wide range of imaging bioprocess (5 liters), including fermenta- tion Biotechnology capabilities for live and fixed samples in- and downstream processing to 55 liters. Specific topics include the effects of scaling up on: mass In addition to the WPI requirements, a cluding Confocal microscopy with FRET transfer and bioreactor design, harvesting dissertation (minimum of 30 credit hours) and FRAP, , and techniques including tangential flow filtration and dissertation defense is required of all microinjection/manipulation and histol- and centrifugation, and chromatography (open Ph.D. students. It is the intention of the ogy capabilities; an Analytical core, with column and HPLC). (Prerequisites: BB 4050/505 faculty that doctoral students develop NMR, Atomic-absorption (AA) spectros- and BB 4060/560 as a working knowledge of the skills not only in their research area, but copy, LC-MS and GC-MS capabilities; bench-scale processes will be assumed. Otherwise, instructor permission is required.) also receive training in interdisciplinary and Molecular Cores for DNA/RNA/ approaches to research, presentation skills

Return to Table of Contents Biology and Biotechnology 29 BB 515. Environmental Change: Problems comparisons of groups, and regression analysis. BB 562. Cell Cycle Regulation and Approaches Both parametric and non-parametric tests will be This course focuses on molecular events that This seminar course will examine what is known discussed. Students will use computer packages regulate cell cycle transitions and their relevance about ecological responses to both natural and to analyze their own experimental data. Students to mammalian differentiated and undifferenti- human-mediated environmental changes, and may receive credit for either BB553 or a BB570 ated cells. Topics include control of the G1/S and explore approaches for solving ecological problems course entitled Experimental Design and Statistics G2/M transitions, relationships between tumor and increasing environmental sustainability. in the Life Sciences but not both. suppressor genes such as p16, Rb, p53 or onco- Areas of focus may include, and are not limited genes such as cyclin D, cdc25A, MDM2 or c-myc BB 554. Journal Club to, conservation genetics, ecological responses to and cell cycle control. Where appropriate, the (1 credit) global climate change, sustainable use of living focus is on understanding regulation of cell cycle natural resources, and the environmental impacts This course is offered every semester covering control through transcriptional induction of gene of agricultural biotechnology. different topics, both basic and applied, in Biology expression, protein associations, posttranslational and Biotechnology and rotates among the faculty. modifications like phosphorylation or regulation BB 551. Research Integrity in the Sciences Students read and discuss the literature in relevant of protein stability like ubiquitin degradation. (1 credit) topics. Students may receive credit for either BB562 or a Students are exposed to various issues related to BB 556. Mentored Teaching Experience BB570 course entitled Cell Cycle Regulation but integrity in doing research to enable development (1 credit) not both. of an appropriately reasonable course of action in order to maintain integrity on a variety of This course is arranged with an individual faculty BB 565. Virology research-related performance and reporting activi- member within the student’s discipline. The This advanced level course uses a seminar format ties. These activities include, but are not limited to graduate student is involved in the development based on research articles to discuss current topics data fabrication, authorship, copyright, plagia- of course materials, such as a syllabus, projects, related to the molecular/cell biology of viral struc- rism, unintended dual use of technology, and or quizzes, and course delivery, such as lecturing ture, function, and evolution. Particular emphasis responsibilities towards peers who may request or facilitating a conference session (20% delivery is placed on pathological mechanisms of various your confidential review or feedback. The course limit). In addition to covering course pedagogy, human disorders, especially emerging disease, and will use class discussion, case studies, and exercises the faculty member arranges for the student the use of viruses in research. to facilitate an understanding of the responsibili- teacher to be evaluated by students enrolled in the BB 570. Special Topics ties of scientists to their profession. Students may course and reviews the student reports with the Specialty subject courses are offered based on the receive credit for either BB551 or a BB570 course student teacher. expertise of the department faculty, example topics entitled Research Integrity in the Sciences but not BB 560. Methods of Protein Purification include: Stem Cell Biology, Cell Cycle Regulation, both. and Downstream Processing and Model Systems in Biology. BB 552. Scientific Writing and Proposal This course provides a detailed hands-on survey BB 575. Advanced Genetics and Cellular Development of state-of-the-art methods employed by the biotechnology industry for the purification of Biology (2 credit) products, proteins in particular, from fermenta- Topics in this course focus on the basic building This course will cover key elements to writing tion processes. Focus is on methods that offer the blocks of life: , genes and cells. The successful grant proposals and manuscripts. This best potential for scale-up. Included is the theory course will address areas of the organization, includes project development, identification of of the design, as well as the operation of these structure, function and analysis of the genome funding agencies or journals, proposal and manu- methods both at the laboratory scale and scaled and of cells. (Prerequisite: A familiarity with fun- script writing and editing, as well as aspects of the up. It is intended for biology, biotechnology, damentals of recombinant DNA and molecular submission and review process. Students will be chemical engineering and biochemistry students. biological techniques as well as cell biology.) expected to develop a NIH/NSF style postdoc- (Prerequisite: knowledge of basic biochemistry is toral proposal outside their dissertation field and BB 581/BCB 501. Bioinformatics assumed.) participate in a mock proposal review panel. Stu- This course will provide an overview of bioin- dents are expected to complete this course prior BB 561. Model Systems: Experimental formatics, covering a broad selection of the most to their Qualifying Exam. Students may receive Approaches and Applications important techniques used to analyze biologi- credit for either BB552 or a BB570 course entitled (2 credit) cal sequence and expression data. Students will Scientific Writing and Proposal Development but The course is intended to introduce students to acquire a working knowledge of bioinformatics not both. the use of model experimental systems in modern applications through hands-on use of software to biological research. The course covers prokaryotic ask and answer biological questions. In addition, BB 553. Experimental Design and Statistics the course will provide students with an intro- in the Life Sciences and eukaryotic systems including microbial (Esch- ) and single cells eukaryotes (fungi); duction to the theory behind some of the most (2 credit) erichia coli invertebrate (Caenorhabditis elegans, Drosophila important algorithms used to analyze sequence This applied course introduces students to the melanogaster) and vertebrate (mice, zebra fish) data (for example, alignment algorithms and the basics of experimental design and data analysis. systems and plants (moss, algae and Arabidopsis use of hidden Markov models). Topics covered Emphasis will be placed on designing biological thaliana). Use of these systems in basic and applied will include protein and DNA sequence align- experiments that are suitable for statistical analysis, research will be examined. Students may receive ments, evolutionary analysis and phylogenetic choosing appropriate statistical tests to perform, credit for either BB561 or a BB570 course entitled trees, obtaining protein secondary structure from and interpreting the results of statistical tests. We Model Systems: Experimental Approaches and sequence, and analysis of gene expression includ- will cover statistical methods commonly used by Applications but not both. ing clustering methods. (Prerequisite: knowledge biologists to analyze experimental data, including of genetics, molecular biology, and statistics at the testing the fit of data to theoretical distributions, undergraduate level.) Students may not receive credit for both BB 581 and BB 4801. BB 598. Directed Research BB 599. Master’s Thesis BB 699. Ph.D. Dissertation

30 Biology and Biotechnology Return to Table of Contents www.wpi.edu/+bme Biomedical Engineering

Faculty R. L. Page, Assistant Professor; Ph.D., tational models and bioinformatic tools Virginia Tech; molecular characterization to analyze phenotypic and neural data, (4) K. H. Chon, Professor and Department and manipulation of primary human cells map neuropeptide signaling pathways. Head; Ph.D., University of Southern for applications in regenerative medicine, California; medical instrumentation for development of engineered in vitro culture Biomaterials/Tissue Engineering noninvasive and wireless physiological and therapeutic cell/tissue construct Prof. Pins monitoring, identification and modeling delivery systems and analysis using in vivo Research focuses on understanding the of physiological systems, biomedical signal model systems, primary cell dedifferentia- interactions between cells and precisely processing with applications to diabetic tion and transdifferentiation. bioengineered scaffolds that modulate cel- autonomic neuropathy, atrial fibrillation lular functions such as adhesion, migration, G. D. Pins, Associate Professor; Ph.D., detection, blood volume loss detection, proliferation, differentiation and extracellu- Rutgers University; Cell and tissue and detection of decompression sickness. lar matrix remodeling. Understanding cell- engineering, biomaterials, bioMEMS, matrix interactions that regulate wound D. R. Albrecht, Assistant Professor; scaffolds for soft tissue repair, cell-material healing and tissue remodeling will be used Ph.D., University of California, San interactions, wound healing, cell culture to improve the design of tissue-engineered Diego; bioMEMS, microfluidics, quan- technologies. titative systems analysis and modeling, analogs for the repair of soft and hard tissue biodynamics, neural circuits and behavior, M. W. Rolle, Associate Professor, Ph.D., injuries. Research areas include: (1) studies optogenetics, high-throughput chemical/ University of Washington, Seattle; investigating the roles of microfabricated­ genetic screens, tissue engineering, 3-D Cardio-vascular tissue engineering, scaffolds on keratinocyte function for tis- cell micropatterning, dielectrophoresis. bioreactor design, cell-based tissue repair, sue engineering of skin, (2) development cell and molecular engineering, cell-de- of tissue scaffolds that mimic the micro- K. L. Billiar, Associate Professor; Ph.D., rived extracellular matrix scaffolds, delivery structural organization and mechanical University of Pennsylvania; Biomechanics and control of extracellular matrix genes. responsiveness of native tissues, and (3) of soft tissues and biomaterials, mechano- development of microfabricated cell culture biology, wound healing, tissue growth and M. Su, Associate Professor; Ph.D., Northwestern University; nanomedicines, systems to understand how extracellular development; functional tissue engineer- matrix molecules regulate epithelial cell ing, regenerative medicine. biomedical , biological sensing, biomaterials, biological heat trans- growth and differentiation. P. J. Flaherty, Assistant Professor; Ph.D., fer, deep brain cooling, analytical devices University of California at Berkeley; Biomedical Sensors and for quantitative biology, nanoparticle- Bioinstrumentation Bioinformatics, statistical machine learn- enhanced radiation therapy and medical ing, experiment design, clinical genomics, imaging. Prof. Mendelson computational biology, algorithms for The development of integrated biomedical decision-making with large-scale hetero­ K.L. Troy, Assistant Professor; Ph.D., sensors and electronic instrumentation for geneous data sets. University of Iowa; orthopedic biome- invasive and noninvasive blood monitor- chanics, multi-scale modeling, finite ing. Research areas include: G. R. Gaudette, Associate Professor; element analysis, medical image analysis, • Design and in vivo evaluation of Ph.D., SUNY Stony Brook; Cardiac bone and joint structure. reflective pulse oximeter sensors. biomechanics, myocardial regeneration, • Microcomputer-based medical biomaterial scaffolds, tissue engineering, Research Interests instrumentation stem cell applications, optical imaging • Fiberoptic sensors for medical techniques. Biological and Neuroengineering instrumentation A. Jain, Assistant Professor; Ph.D., • Application of optics to biomedicine Georgia Institute of Technology; Bioma- Prof. Albrecht • Signal processing terials, cellular and tissue engineering, Research is focused on development of • Telesensing drug delivery, optical imaging, neural stem high-content, high-throughput micro- • Wearable physiological monitoring cells, regeneration and repair of the central technologies to investigate the function, nervous system and glioblastomas. development, degeneration, and remodel- ing of neural circuits and biochemical Y. Mendelson, Associate Professor, Ph.D., networks. Projects aim to: (1) understand Case Western Reserve University; Biomed- the molecular and genetic basis of neural ical sensors for invasive and noninvasive circuit function and dynamics, (2) develop physiological monitoring, pulse oximeters, rapid cellular and whole-organism screens microcomputer-based medical instrumen- for therapeutic drugs and genetic modula- tation, signal processing, wearable wireless tors of neural disease, (3) develop compu- biomedical sensors, application of optics to biomedicine, telemedicine.

Return to Table of Contents Biomedical Engineering 31 Biomedical Signal Processing, function. We are also developing cell deliv- Tissue Engineering & Matrix Instrumentation and ery vehicles involving natural biopolymers Scaffolds to increase cell survival, engraftment and Physiological System Modeling Prof. Rolle functional skeletal muscle tissue regenera- Research focuses on the role of extracel- Prof. Chon tion for treatment of volumetric muscle lular matrix proteins on tissue mechanical Research involves medical instrumenta- loss in vivo. tion, biosignal processing, modeling, and functional properties in the context of simulation and development of novel Neural Tissue Engineering/ tissue engineering and regenerative medi- signal processing algorithms to understand Biomaterials cine. Research interests include (1) genetic engineering strategies to control cell-me- dynamic processes and extract distinct Prof. Jain diated matrix synthesis and assembly, (2) features of physiological systems. Research Research is focused on therapeutic strate- cell-based approaches to generating tissue areas include: gies to repair and regenerate the nervous engineered blood vessels, (3) evaluating • Evaluation of the effects of oxygen toxic- systems after physical injuries, as well as the contribution of matrix molecules to ity and hyperbaric environments on the understand the mechanism of tumor cell the mechanical and functional properties autonomic nervous system migration leading to invasion and metasta- of scaffolds, and tissues, (4) developing • Real-time detection of atrial fibrillation, sis. Research areas include: 1) imaging and matrix gene delivery systems to promote atrial flutter and atrial tachycardia from assessing extent of traumatic brain injury tissue regeneration. surface ECG and then apply therapeutic strategies, 2) • Spatio-temporal analysis of renal auto- transplantation of neural stem cells to pro- regulation Cancer and Neurological mote axonal regeneration after spinal cord Nanomedicines • Noninvasive assessment of diabetic injury, and 3) using biomaterial scaffolds Prof. Su cardiovascular autonomic neuropathy to mimic brain tumors to understand the Research is focused on development of (DCAN) from surface ECG or pulse mechanism of tumor cell migration. oximeter cancer nanomedicines for early detection, • Vital sign monitoring from optical Soft Tissue Biomechanics/ prevention and treatment of cancers, as recordings with a mobile phone Tissue Engineering well as neurological nanomedicines for brain functional imaging, temperature Prof. Billiar Clinical Genomics Lab mapping and effective cooling. Projects Research focused on understanding the Prof. Flaherty aim to: (1) establish thermal biosensing growth and development of connective Research focuses on developing algorithms and related algorithm for multiplex detec- tissues and on the influence of mechani- for using large-scale genomic data to tion of cancer biomarkers, (2) develop sur- cal stimulation on cells in native and improve diagnosis and treatment of cancer face engineered nanoparticles for enhanced engineered three-dimensional constructs. and other diseases. Research areas include: radiation therapy of tumor, (3) develop Research areas include: (1) micromechani- • Detection of rare mutations in clinical tissue engineering tools to study tumor cal characterization of tissues, (2) constitu samples using next-generation sequenc- heterogeneity and multi-drug resistance, tive modeling, (3) creation of bioartifi- ing technology and (4) develop multi-functional nano- cial tissues in vitro, and (4) the effects of • Integration of genomic mutation data medicines as emergency treatments after mechanical stimulation on the functional including: copy-number variation, stroke and traumatic brain injury. properties of cells and tissues. point mutation, methylation state, gene Musculoskeletal Biomechanics expression to form a comprehensive Cardiac Tissue Engineering ­picture of genetic drivers for an indi- & Regeneration Prof. Troy vidual tumor Dr. Troy’s research takes a biomechanics • Statistical algorithms to interpret Prof. Gaudette approach to understanding how physi- genomic data for longitudinal patient Research is focused on revascularizing and cal forces applied to the musculoskeletal monitoring and therapy targeting regenerating functional myocardial tissue system (generated through exercise or to replace dysfunctional heart tissue. Proj- other physical activity) influence bone and In Vitro Propogation of Adult ects focus on understanding the interac- joint structure, health, and disease. Her Tissue Specific Stem Cells tion of the local mechanical and electrical experimental approach utilizes cadaveric environment with the mechanisms of car- Prof. Page experimentation, medical image analysis, diac regeneration include myocyte prolif- Research is focused on understanding the patient-specific computational models, eration and adult stem cell differentiation. factors that affect in vitro propagation of and living human subjects. The laboratory Research areas include (1) development of adult tissue specific stem cells particularly currently focuses on three projects: (1) scaffolds to induce myocardial regenera- as they relate to cell types involved in skel- Development, validation, and application tion, (2) differentiation of progenitor cells etal muscle regeneration. Projects focus on of noninvasive and sensitive methods to into cardiac cells, (3) determination of understating the effect of environmental measure bone strength in living human cues in the microenvironment that affect influences such as ambient oxygen concen- subjects. (2) Quantifying the mechanical myocardial regeneration. tration, cell culture substrate and growth signals that are applied to the skeleton factor signaling that direct and maintain through physical activity and understand- human adult stem cell phenotype and

32 Biomedical Engineering Return to Table of Contents ing their influence on bone structure. (3) program is that it allows for certain courses For the M.E. Quantifying the effect of disease-related to be counted towards both degree require- A minimum of 33 credit hours is required changes to bone structure and joint kinet- ments, thereby reducing total class time. for the Master of Engineering degree. ics on tissue mechanical loading environ- With careful planning and motivation, Course requirements include 12 credits of ment. Other collaborative projects relate the Combined Program typically allows a biomedical engineering, 3 credits of life to using biomechanics-based outcome student to complete requirements for both science, 3 credits of advanced mathemat- measures to assess the effect of interven- degrees with only one additional year of ics, 3 credits of life science or advanced tions affecting the musculoskeletal system full-time study (five years total). However, mathematics, and 12 credits of electives in humans and other organisms. because a student must still satisfy all (any WPI graduate-level engineering, graduate degree requirements, the actual physics, math, biomedical engineering, or Programs of Study time spent in the program may be longer equivalent course, subject to approval of The goal of the biomedical engineering than five years. There are two degree the department Graduate Studies Com- (BME) graduate programs is to apply options for students in the Combined mittee). Students may substitute 3 to 6 engineering principles and technology as Program: a thesis- based master of sci- credits of directed research for 3 credits of solutions to significant biomedical prob- ence (B.S./M.S.) option and a non-thesis biomedical engineering and/or 3 credits lems. Students trained in these programs master of engineering (B.S./M.E.) option. of electives. Students are required to pass have found rewarding careers in major The Combined B.S./Master’s Degree BME 591: Graduate Seminar twice. medical and biomedical research centers, Program in BME adheres to WPI’s general academia, the medical care industry and requirements for the Master of Science and For the Ph.D. entrepreneurial enterprises. Master of Engineeering. The Ph.D. program has no formal course requirements. However, because research Master’s Degree Programs Admission Requirements in the field of biomedical engineering There are two master’s degree options in Biomedical engineering embraces the requires a solid working knowledge of a biomedical engineering: the Master of application of engineering to the study of broad range of subjects in the life sci- Science (M.S.) in Biomedical Engineering, medicine and biology. While the scope ences, engineering and mathematics, and the Master of Engineering (M.E.) in of biomedical engineering is broad, ap- course credits must be distributed across Biomedical Engineering. While the expect- plicants are expected to have an under- the following categories with the noted ed levels of student academic performance graduate degree or a strong background minimums: 12 credits of biomedical engi- are the same for both options, they are in engineering and to achieve basic and neering, 3 credits of life science, 3 credits oriented toward different career goals. The advanced knowledge in engineering, life of advanced mathematics, 3 credits of life master of science option in biomedical sciences, and biomedical engineering. Spe- science or advanced mathematics, and 12 engineering is oriented toward the student cial programs are available for outstanding credits of electives (any WPI graduate-level who wants to focus on a particular facet graduates lacking the necessary prerequi- engineering, physics, math, biomedical of biomedical engineering practice or sites or with a background in the physical engineering, or equivalent course, subject research. The master of science can serve as or life sciences. These special programs to approval of the department Gradu- a terminal degree for students interested in typically involve an individualized plan of ate Studies Committee). Ph.D. program an indepth specialization. coursework at the advanced undergradu- students must also complete 6 credits of ate level, with formal admittance to the laboratory rotations, 1 credit of responsible Doctoral Programs program following the successful comple- conduct of research, and 30 credits of dis- The degree of doctor of philosophy in tion (with grades of B or higher) of this sertation research. Biomedical Engineering is conferred on coursework. candidates in recognition of high attain- The student’s Academic Advisory Com- ments and the ability to carry on original Degree Requirements mittee may require additional coursework independent research. Graduates of the to address specific deficiencies in the stu- program will be prepared to affiliate For the M.S. dent’s background. Students are required with academic institutions and with the A minimum of 30 credit hours is required to pass BME 591: Graduate Seminar four growing medical device and biotechnol- for the Master of Science degree, of which times. ogy industries which have become major at least 6 credit hours must be a thesis. No later than the start of the third year economic clusters in the Commonwealth Course requirements include 9 credits of after formal admittance to the Ph.D. pro- of Massachusetts. biomedical engineering, 3 credits of life gram, students are required to pass a Ph.D. science, 3 credits of advanced mathemat- qualifying examination. This examination Combined B.S./Master’s Degree ics, 3 credits of life science or advanced is a defense of an original research propos- Program mathematics, and 6 credits of electives al, made before a committee representative This program affords an opportunity for (any WPI graduate-level engineering, of the area of specialization. The exami- outstanding WPI undergraduate students physics, math, biomedical engineering, or nation is used to evaluate the ability of to earn both a B.S. degree and a master’s equivalent course, subject to approval of the student to pose meaningful engineer- degree in biomedical engineering con- the department Graduate Studies Com- ing and scientific questions, to propose currently, and in less time than would mittee). Students are required to pass experimental methods for answering those typically be required to earn each degree BME 591: Graduate Seminar twice. separately. The principal advantage of this

Return to Table of Contents Biomedical Engineering 33 questions, and to interpret the validity and Research Laboratories Soft Tissue Biomechanics/ significance of probable outcomes of these Tissue Engineering experiments. It is also used to test a stu- and Facilities Research focused on understanding the dent’s comprehension and understanding Research is primarily conducted in a new growth and development of connective of their formal coursework in life sciences, four-story, 124,600-square-foot Life Sci- tissues and on the influence of mechani- biomedical engineering and mathematics. ences and Bioengineering Center (LSBC) cal stimulation on cells in native and Admission to candidacy is officially con- located at Gateway Park. This space is engineered three-dimensional constructs. ferred upon students who have completed largely dedicated to research laboratories Research areas include: (1) micromechani- their course credit requirements, exclusive that focus on non-invasive biomedical cal characterization of tissues, (2) constitu- of dissertation research credit, and passed instrumentation design, signal process- tive modeling, (3) creation of bioartificial the Ph.D. qualifying examination. ing, tissue biomechanics, biomaterials tissues in vitro, and (4) the effects of Students in the Ph.D. program are re- synthesis and characterization, myocardial mechanical stimulation on the functional quired to participate in at least two differ- regeneration, cell and molecular engineer- properties of cells and tissues. ent laboratory rotations during their first ing, regenerative biosciences and tissue two years in the program. Laboratory rota- engineering. The LSBC research facility Biomaterials/Tissue Engineering tions—short periods of research experience also maintains a modern core equipment Research focuses on understanding the under the direction of program faculty facility that includes cell culture, histol- interactions between cells and precisely members—are intended to familiarize ogy, imaging and mechanical testing suites bioengineered scaffolds that modulate students with concepts and techniques in to support cellular, molecular, and tissue cellular functions such as adhesion, migra- several different engineering and scientific engineering research activities. tion, proliferation, differentiation and ex- fields. They allow faculty members to A brief description of BME research labo- tracellular matrix remodeling. Understand- observe and evaluate the research apti- ratories is given below. ing cell-matrix interactions that regulate tudes of students and permit students to wound healing and tissue remodeling will evaluate the types of projects that might Biological Microtechnology and be used to improve the design of tissue- be developed into dissertation projects. Neuroengineering engineered analogs for the repair of soft Upon completion of each rotation, the The laboratory develops microtechnolo- and hard tissue injuries. Research areas in- student presents a seminar and written gies to understand complex biological clude: (1) studies investigating the roles of report on the research accomplished. Each networks towards improving the treatment microfabricated scaffolds on keratinocyte rotation is a 3- or 4-credit course and lasts of human disease. A particular focus is function for tissue engineering of skin; (2) a minimum of eight weeks if the student uncovering the molecular and genetic basis development of tissue scaffolds that mimic participates full time in the laboratory, or of neural dynamics in normal, injured, the microstructural organization and me- up to a full semester if the student takes and diseased nervous systems. Projects chanical responsiveness of native tissues; courses at the same time. involve quantitative, high-content analysis and (3) development of microfabricated cell culture systems to understand how All candidates for the Ph.D. degree must of animal behavior and neural activity, extracellular matrix molecules regulate demonstrate teaching skills by prepar- noninvasive and genetic neuromodulation, epithelial cell growth and differentiation. ing, presenting and evaluating a teaching and integrated microfluidics for precise exercise. This experience may involve a stimulus delivery. Research equipment Cardiovascular Regeneration research seminar, lecture, demonstration includes fast ultrasensitive fluorescence Research projects focus on regenerating or conference in the context of a medical microscopes for optogenetic recordings, functional cardiac muscle tissue. Research school basic science course. Formal parts molecular biology and microinjection areas include: (1) stimulating adult cardiac of the presentation may be videotaped as systems for generating transgenic animals, myocytes, a cell previously considered to appropriate. The presentation and associ- microfabrication systems for microfluidic be post-mitotic, to enter the cell cycle; (2) ated materials are critiqued and evalu- arenas, and robotic fluid handling for differentiating adult stem cells into cardiac ated by program faculty members. The chemical screening. myocytes; and (3) scaffold based cardiac department Graduate Studies Committee Biomedical Sensors and regeneration. The efficacy of these tech- is responsible for evaluating the teach- nologies are tested with in vitro and in vivo ing exercise based on criteria previously Bioinstrumentation models using molecular and cellular tools defined. The teaching requirement can be The development of integrated biomedical and the functionality is assessed using high fulfilled at any time, and there is no limit sensors for invasive and noninvasive physi- spatial resolution mechanical and electrical to the number of attempts a student may ological monitoring. Design and in-vivo method. make to fulfill this requirement. It must, evaluation of reflective pulse oximeter however, be completed successfully before sensors, microcomputer-based biomedical the dissertation defense can be held. instrumentation, digital signal process- ing, wearable wireless biomedical sensors, The Ph.D. program requires a full-time ef- application of optics to biomedicine, fort for a minimum of three years and does telemedicine. not require a foreign language examination.

34 Biomedical Engineering Return to Table of Contents Cardiovascular Tissue equipment includes differential scanning shortcomings of medical devices. This course spe- Engineering and Extracellular calorimeter for thermal biosensing and cifically addresses the unique role of biomaterials drug anti-counterfeiting, X-ray radiation in medical device design and the use of emerging Matrix Biology biomaterials technology in medical devices. The generator and fluorescence spectrometer need to understand design requirements of medi- The extracellular matrix (ECM) produced for nanoparticle based enhancement of by cells dictates tissue architecture and cal devices based on safety and efficacy will be radiation therapy, computed tomography addressed. Unexpected device failure can occur if presents biochemical signals that direct cell and magnetic resonance imaging, molecu- testing fails to account for synergistic interactions proliferation, differentiation and migra- lar and functional responses of cultured from chronic loading, aqueous environments, tion. Generating an appropriate ECM neural cells to temperature change after and biologic interactions. Testing methodologies is critical for proper physiological and blast and hypoxic damages, brain histology are readily available to assess accelerated effects of loading in physiologic-like environments. This mechanical performance of engineered tis- and cross-section electrophysiology. sues. Research projects include: (1) design combined with subchronic effects of animal im- and testing of genetic and biochemical plants is a potential tool in assessing durability. It Musculoskeletal Biomechanics is difficult to predict the chronic effects of the to- engineering strategies to stimulate cellular Laboratory tal biologic environment. The ultimate determina- ECM synthesis and organization, (2) The laboratory develops and validates tion of safety comes not only from following the cell-based approaches to generate tissue image analysis and computational model- details of regulations, but with an understanding engineered blood vessels (TEBV), (3) of potential failure modes and designs that lowers ing techniques to noninvasively estimate the risk of these failures. This course will evaluate evaluation of ECM production and its ef- stresses and strains occurring within the fect on TEBV mechanical properties, and biomaterials and their properties as related to the skeleton of living humans. Quantitative design and reliability of medical devices. (4) ECM gene delivery approaches for in computed tomography (QCT) analysis is situ tissue regeneration. BME 532. Medical Device Regulation a primary tool for measuring the amount This course provides an overview of regulations Clinical Genomics Lab and distribution of hydroxyapatite mineral that guide the medical devices industry. Primary present within bone. These images can be Research is focused on developing com- focus is on the Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act used as a basis for generating subject or (FD&C Act) and its associated regulations. putational methods to apply large-scale specimen-specific finite element models The course covers the FD&C Act, including genomic data towards the improvement to predict mechanical behavior. Simula- definitions, prohibited acts, penalties and general of diagnosis and treatment of disease. By tion experiments are used to determine authority. The course also covers regulations, making sense of large-scale, heterogenous including establishment registration, premarket the consequences of clinical conditions data set for an individual patient, we are approval (PMA) and current good manufacturing or interventions that affect bone and able to characterize the genetic makeup practices. Requirements of other federal agencies joint structure and boundary conditions. of the disease and the changes that occur (NRC, FCC, EPA) will also be discussed. Specialized research equipment includes during disease development. Understand- BME/ME 550. Tissue Engineering high resolution peripheral quantitative ing the causative changes for each patient This biomaterials course focuses on the selection, CT instrumentation, which can acquire allows for the tailoring of the treatment processing, testing and performance of materi- near micro-resolution CT data within the for maximal benefit and minimal cost. als used in biomedical applications with special extremities of living human subjects. A emphasis upon tissue engineering. Topics include Research includes: (1) statistical algorithms materials testing machine and strain gages material selection and processing, mechanisms for integrating heterogenous data (2) com- are used for cadaveric experimentation. and kinetics of material degradation, cell-material putational methods for continuous real- interactions and interfaces; effect of construct ar- time monitoring and (3) interpretation of Course Descriptions chitecture on tissue growth; and transport through genomic data for clinical decision-making. engineered tissues. Examples of engineering tissues All courses are 3 credits unless otherwise noted. for replacing cartilage, bone, tendons, ligaments, Cancer and Neurological BME 523. Biomedical Instrumentation skin and liver will be presented. (Prerequisites: A first course in biomaterials equivalent to Origins and characteristics of bioelectric signals, Nanomedicines BME/ME 4814 and a basic understanding of cell recording electrodes, biopotential amplifiers, The laboratory develops innovative nano- biology and physiology. Admission of under- basic sensors, chemical, pressure, sound, and flow graduate students requires the permission of the medicines for detection and treatment transducers, noninvasive monitoring techniques instructor.) of cancer and for emergency treatment and electrical safety. (Prerequisites: Circuits and after brain injury. A particular focus is to electronics, control engineering or equivalent.) BME/ME 552. Tissue Mechanics explore the use phase change nanoparticles BME 531. Biomaterials in the Design This biomechanics course focuses on advanced for cancer detection, biological heat trans- of Medical Devices techniques for the characterization of the structure and function of hard and soft tissues and their fer, and drug authentication. A second Biomaterials are an integral part of medical devic- relationship to physiological processes. Applica- focus is to use responsive nanoparticles for es, implants, controlled drug delivery systems, and tions include tissue injury, wound healing, the cancer treatment, tissue engineering and tissue engineered constructs. Extensive research effect of pathological conditions upon tissue efforts have been expended on understanding brain cooling. Projects involve design, syn- properties, and design of medical devices and how biologic systems interact with biomateri- thesis and modification of nanomedicines, prostheses. (Prerequisite: An understanding of als. Meanwhile, controversy has revolved around quantitative thermal and biological analy- basic continuum mechanics.) biomaterials and their availability as a result of sis, cancer imaging and radiation therapy, the backlash to the huge liability resulting from brain cooling and functional analysis, controversies related to material and processing tissue scaffold generations and hetero- geneity/connectivity mapping. Research

Return to Table of Contents Biomedical Engineering 35 BME/ME/MTE 554. Composites with BME 582. Principles of In Vivo Nuclear The following undergraduate courses may Biomedical and Materials Applications Magnetic Resonance Imaging be of interest to graduate students. Please Introduction to fiber/particulate-reinforced, This course emphasizes the applications of Fourier note that 1/3-unit undergraduate credit engineered and biologic materials. This course transform nuclear magnetic resonance (FTNMR) equals 2 graduate credits. focuses on the elastic description and application imaging in medicine and biology. Course topics of materials that are made up of a combination include review of the basic physical concepts of BME/ECE 4011. Biomedical Signal of submaterials, i.e., composites. Emphasis will NMR (including the Bloch equations), theoretical Analysis. be placed on the development of constitutive and experimental aspects of FTNMR, theory of Introduction to biomedical signal processing equations that define the mechanical behavior of relaxation and relaxation mechanisms in FTNMR, and analysis. Fundamental techniques to analyze a number of applications, including: biomaterial, instrumentation for FTNMR, basic NMR imag- and process signals that originate from biologi- tissue and materials science. (Prerequisites: Un- ing techniques. (Prerequisites: Differential and cal sources: ECGs, EMGs, EEGs, blood pressure derstanding of stress analysis and basic continuum integral calculus, ordinary differential equations.) signals, etc. Course integrates physiological mechanics.) knowledge with the information useful for physi- BME 591. Graduate Seminar ologic investigation and medical diagnosis and BME/ME 558. Biofluids and Biotransport Topics in biomedical engineering are presented processing. Biomedical signal characterization, The emphasis of this course is on modeling fluid both by authorities in the field and graduate time domain analysis techniques (transfer func- flow within the cardiovascular and pulmonary sys- students in the program. Provides a forum for tions, convolution, auto- and cross-correlation), tems, and the transport processes that take place the communication of current research and an frequency domain (Fourier analysis), continuous in these systems. Applications include artificial opportunity for graduate students to prepare and and discrete signals, deterministic and stochastic heart valves, atherosclerosis, arterial impedance deliver oral presentations. Students may meet the signal analysis methods. Analog and digital filter- matching, clinical diagnosis, respiration, aerosol attendance requirement for this course in several ing. Recommended background: ECE 2311, ECE and particle deposition. Depending upon class ways, including attendance at weekly biomedical 2312, or equivalent. interest, additional topics may include reproduc- engineering seminars on the WPI campus, atten- tive fluids, animal propulsion in air and water, and dance at similar seminar courses at other universi- BME/ECE 4023. Biomedical viscoelastic testing. (Prerequisite: A first course in ties or biotech firms, attendance at appropriate Instrumentation Design. biofluids equivalent to BME/ME 4606.) conferences, meetings or symposia, or in any other This course builds on the fundamental knowledge way deemed appropriate by the course instructor. of instrumentation and sensors. Lectures cover the BME 560. Physiology for Engineers principles of designing, building and testing ana- An introduction to fundamental principles in BME 595. Special Topics in Biomedical log instruments to measure and process biomedi- cell biology and physiology designed to provide Engineering cal signals. The course is intended for students the necessary background for advanced work in Topics in biomedical engineering. Presentations interested in the design and development of elec- biomedical engineering. Quantitative methods of and discussions of the current literature in an area tronic bioinstrumentation. Emphasis is placed on engineering and the physical sciences are stressed. of biomedical engineering. developing the student’s ability to design a simple Topics include cell biology, DNA technology and medical device to perform real-time physiological the physiology of major organ systems. BME 596. Research Seminar Presentations on current biomedical engineering measurements. Recommended background: BME NOTE: This course can be used to satisfy a life research. 3012, BME 3013, ECE 2010 and ECE 2019. science requirement in the biomedical engineering BME 598. Directed Research BME 4201. Biomedical Imaging program. It cannot be used to satisfy a biomedical This course is a practical introduction to biomedi- engineering course requirement. BME 599. Master’s Thesis cal image processing using examples from various branches of medical imaging. Topics include: BME 562. Laboratory Animal Surgery BME 698. Laboratory Rotation in point operations, filtering in the image and Fou- A study of anesthesia, surgical techniques and Biomedical Engineering rier domains, image reconstruction in computed postoperative care in small laboratory animals. Offered fall, spring and summer for students tomography and magnetic resonance imaging, and Anatomy and physiology of species used included doing laboratory rotations on the WPI campus. data analysis using image segmentation. Review of as needed. Class limited to 15 students. Approxi- Available for 3 or 4 credits. (Prerequisite: Ph.D. linear-systems theory and the relevant principles mately 15 surgical exercises are performed by student in biomedical engineering.) each student. (Prerequisite: Graduate standing. of physics. Coursework uses examples from mi- Admission of undergraduate students requires BME 699. Ph.D. Dissertation croscopy, computed tomography, X-ray radiogra- the permission of the department head and the phy, and magnetic resonance imaging. A working instructor.) knowledge of undergraduate signal analysis, and linear algebra is desirable. Facility with a high-level NOTE: This course can be used to satisfy a life programming language is recommended. science requirement in the biomedical engineering program. It cannot be used to satisfy a biomedical engineering course requirement. BME 581. Medical Imaging Systems Overview of the physics of medical image analysis. Topics covered include X-Ray tubes, fluoroscopic screens, image intensifiers; nuclear medicine; ultrasound; computer tomography; nuclear mag- netic resonance imaging. Image quality of each modality is described mathematically, using linear systems theory (Fourier transforms, convolutions). (Prerequisite: Signal analysis course BME/ECE 4011 or equivalent.)

36 Biomedical Engineering Return to Table of Contents BME/ME 4504. Biomechanics BME 4701. Cell and Molecular BME 4828. Biomaterial - Tissue This course emphasizes the applications of Bioengineering Interactions mechanics to describe the material properties of Cat. I This course examines the principles of materials living tissues. It is concerned with the description This course examines the principles of mo- science and cell biology underlying the design of and measurements of these properties as related lecular and cell biology applied to the design of medical devices, artificial organs, and scaffolds for to their physiological functions. Emphasis on engineered molecules, cells and tissues. Topics will tissue engineering. Molecular and cellular interac- the interrelationship between biomechanics and include the basic structural, chemical and physical tions with biomaterials are analyzed in terms physiology in medicine, surgery, body injury and properties of biomolecules (proteins, lipids, DNA of cellular processes such as matrix synthesis, prosthesis. Topics covered include review of basic and RNA), application of biomolecules to moni- degradation, and contraction. Principles of wound mechanics, stress, strain, constitutive equations tor and alter cellular processes in vitro and in vivo, healing and tissue remodeling are used to study and the field equations encountered in fluids, and design considerations for engineering cell and biological responses to implanted materials and viscoelastic behavior and models of material molecular therapeutics. Case studies will be used devices. Case studies will be analyzed to compare behavior. The measurement and characteriza- to examine specific applications of molecular and tissue responses to intact, bioresorbable and tion of properties of tendons, skin, muscles and cellular bioengineering technologies to treat dis- bioerodible biomaterials. Additionally, this course bone. Biomechanics as related to body injury and ease and promote tissue repair and regeneration. will examine criteria for restoring physiological the design of prosthetic devices. (Recommended function of tissue and organs, and investigate background: Differential and integral calculus, Recommended background: Cell biology (BB strategies to design implants and prostheses based ordinary differential equations, familiarity with 2550). Additional coursework in molecular biol- on control of biomaterial-tissue interactions. (Pre- the concepts of mechanics, including continuum ogy (BB 2950) and/or genetics (BB 2920) would requisites: BME 2604, BB 2550 or equivalent, mechanics [ES 2501, ES 2502, ME 3501, be beneficial. ES 2001 or equivalent, PH 1120 or PH 1121.) MA 2051].) Students who earned credit for BME 37XX can- not receive credit for BME 4701. BME/ME 4606. Biofluids This course emphasizes the applications of fluid BME/ME 4814. Biomedical Materials mechanics to biological problems. The course This course discusses various aspects pertaining to concentrates primarily on the human circulatory the selection, processing, testing (in vitro and in and respiratory systems. Topics covered include: vivo) and performance of biomedical materials. blood flow in the heart, arteries and veins, and The biocompatibility and surgical applicability microcirculation and air flow in the lungs and of metallic, polymeric and ceramic implants and airways. Mass transfer across the walls of these sys- prosthetic devices are discussed. The physico- tems is also presented. (Prerequisite: A background chemical interactions between the implant mate- in continuum mechanics [ME 3501] and fluid rial and the physiological environment will be mechanics equivalent to ME 3602 is assumed.) described. The use of biomaterials in maxillofacial, orthopedic, dental, ophthalmic and neuromus- cular applications is presented.(Recommended background: BB 3101 or equivalent introduction to human anatomy, ES 2001 or equivalent intro- duction to materials science and engineering.)

Return to Table of Contents Biomedical Engineering 37 School of Business www.mgt.wpi.edu Faculty R. Konrad, Assistant Professor; Ph.D., A. Trapp, Assistant Professor; Ph.D., Uni- Purdue University; health systems engi- versity of Pittsburgh; industrial engineer- M. P. Rice, Dean; Ph.D., Rensselaer neering, patient flow optimization, health ing, combinatorial optimization, stochastic Polytechnic Institute; innovation, entre- informatics, industrial engineering. programming, operations research. preneurship, business development. D. Koutmos, Assistant Professor; Ph.D., B. Tulu, Associate Professor; Ph.D., S. Djamasbi, Associate Professor; Ph.D., University of Durham; finance, asset pric- Claremont Graduate University; medical University of Hawaii at Manoa; decision ing, risk management. informatics, V.O.I.P., information security, making, decision support systems, infor- telecommunications and networking, E. T. Loiacono, Associate Professor; mation overload, decision making under systems analysis and design. crisis, affect and decision making. Ph.D., University of Georgia; website quality, information system accessibility, H. G. Vassallo, Professor; Ph.D., Clark M. B. Elmes, Professor; Ph.D., Syracuse e-commerce, affect in information systems. University; organizational behavior, project University; workplace resistance and management, management of planned K. Mendoza-Abarca, Assistant Professor; ideological control, critical perspectives on change, management of biotechnology, Ph.D., Kent State University; social entre- spirituality-in-the-workplace, implementa- medical product liability. tion of IT in organizations, organizations preneurship, international entrepreneur- in the natural environment, narrative and ship, creativity and innovation. J. Wang, Assistant Professor; Ph.D., Lehigh University; health economics, cor- aesthetic perspectives on organizational F. Miller, Associate Professor; Ph.D., porate governance, applied econometrics, phenomena, psychodynamics of group and Michigan State University; managerial applied microeconomics. intergroup behavior. accounting and contracting in inter- and A. Gerstenfeld, Professor; Ph.D., Massa- intra-firm relationships. E. V. Wilson, Visiting Associate Professor; Ph.D., University of Colorado; informa- chusetts Institute of Technology; industrial J. Sarkis, Professor and Department Head; tion systems, cognitive science. engineering, innovation. Ph.D., State University of New York at A. Hall-Phillips, Assistant Professor; Buffalo; operations management, green S.A. Wulf, Professor of Practice; Ph.D., Ph.D., Purdue University; consumer supply chain management, sustainability. Columbia Pacific University; organization- al behavior, leadership, business develop- behavior, business-to-business marketing, J. Schaufeld, Professor of Practice in ment, group dynamics. small business. Entrepreneurship; MBA, Northeastern K. Hebert-Maccaro, Associate Dean and University; entrepreneurship, technology A. Zeng, Professor; Ph.D., Pennsylvania Professor of Practice; Ph.D., Boston Col- commercialization, business acquisition State University; modeling and analysis lege; talent management, high perfor- and development. of decisions in supply and/or distribu- tion networks, applications of operations mance teams, innovative pedagogies. P. Shah, Assistant Professor; Ph.D., Texas research and operations management Tech University; marketing, brand strat- H. Higgins, Associate Professor; Ph.D., techniques to supply chain process design egy, product disposal strategy. Georgia State University; financial ac- and improvement, global supply chain counting, focusing on earnings expectation W. Stitt, Professor of Practice; MBA, management and international business. and international accounting. Harvard University; entrepreneurship and J. Zhu, Professor; Ph.D., University of innovation. F. Hoy, Beswick Professor of Entrepre- Massachusetts; information technology neurship; Director, Collaborative for D. Strong, Professor; Ph.D., Carnegie- and productivity, e-business, performance Entrepreneurship and Innovation; Ph.D., Mellon University; advanced information evaluation and benchmarking. Texas A&M University; entrepreneurship, technologies, such as enterprise systems, family and small business management, and their use in organizations, MIS quality Department Research strategy, international entrepreneurship. issues, with primary focus on data and In addition to teaching, School of Busi- S. A. Johnson, Associate Professor and information quality. ness faculty are involved in a variety of Director of I.E. Program; Ph.D., Cornell K. Sweeney, Professor of Practice; J.D., sponsored research and consulting work. University; lean process design, enterprise University of Wisconsin; finance. A sampling of current research includes: engineering, process analysis and model- quality control in information-handling S. Taylor, Associate Professor; Ph.D., ing, reverse logistics. processes, supply chain management, ­Boston College; aesthetics of organiza- management of biotechnology, decision/ C. Kasouf, Associate Professor; Ph.D., tional action. Syracuse University; product management, risk analysis, conflict management, Latin marketing strategy in fragmented indus- W. Towner, Teaching Assistant Professor; American economic development, capacity tries, innovation management, marketing Ph.D., Worcester Polytechnic Institute; planning, international accounting differ- information use, strategic alliances. operations management, lean manufactur- ences, strategy and new venture teams, and ing, six-sigma. family and small business management.

38 School of Business Return to Table of Contents The Collaborative for on the management of technology comes The following 7 required courses, should Entrepreneurship and from the recognition that rapidly changing be completed before BUS 501: Innovation technology is driving the pace of business. • BUS 500 Business Law, Ethics and Social Responsibility The Collaborative for Entrepreneurship Students enjoy extensive opportunities to • FIN 500 Financial Information and and Innovation (CEI) is a program of the expand their networks through associa- Management School of Business, designed to inspire tions with their peers and leading high- and nurture people to discover, create tech organizations. They also benefit from • FIN 501 Economics for Managers and commercialize new technology-based the latest available technologies and one of • MIS 500 Innovating with Information products, services and organizations. It the nation’s most wired universities. The Systems coordinates all entrepreneurship-related program’s strong emphasis on interper- • MKT 500 Marketing Management activity at WPI, including graduate and sonal and communications skills prepares • OBC 500 Group and Interpersonal undergraduate courses; the CEI@WPI students to be leaders in any organization, Dynamics in Complex Organizations ALL-OUT $50K Business Plan Challenge; and the global threads throughout the cur- riculum ensure that students understand • OIE 500 Analyzing and Designing the Venture Forum workshops, monthly Operations to Create Value lecture and case presentation programs, the global imperative facing all businesses. radio show and newsletter; networking; a Whether dealing with information tech- To complete the core requirements, student-run entrepreneurs organization; nology, biotechnology, financial mar- students must also take the following 3 the New England Collegiate Entrepreneurs kets, information security, supply chain courses: Award; Web site administration of the management, manufacturing, or a host • ACC 503 Financial Intelligence for Coalition for Venture Support; and, on a of other technology-oriented industries, Strategic Decision-Making periodic basis, the CEI will offer confer- the real world is part of the classroom, • ETR 500 Entrepreneurship and ences, workshops and seminars on topics and students explore up-to-the-minute Innovation of interest to entrepreneurs. Programs for challenges faced by actual companies, • OBC 501 Interpersonal and Leadership high school outreach, social entrepreneur- through hands-on projects and teamwork. Skills ship, internship opportunities, business WPI promotes an active learning process, The MBA program culminates with a incubation, various awards, an Entrepre- designed to develop the very best manag- capstone Graduate Qualifying Project neurship Fair and a Consortium-wide ers, leaders and executives in a technology- (BUS 517) which provides students with a business plan contest are in the planning dependent world. hands-on, real-world opportunity to apply stage. Please call 508-831-5075 or 5218 and enhance their classroom experience. for more information. Graduate Certificates Graduate business certificates are designed MBA students are required to complete 12 Programs of Study for technical and business profession- credit hours of free elective coursework. als seeking focused, in-depth knowledge Elective concentration areas include: The interaction between business and within a specific area of technology man- • Entrepreneurship technology drives every aspect of our agement. Certificates include: Informa- • Information Security Management Graduate Business Programs. We believe tion Security Management; Information the future of business lies in leveraging the • Information Technology Technology; Management of Technology; power of technology to optimize business • Operations Management and Technology Marketing, and range in opportunities. WPI stays ahead of the • Process Design length from 5-6 courses. Students may curve, giving students the ability to com- also customize their own graduate • Supply Chain Management bine sound strategies with cutting edge in- business certificate program. For more • Technological Innovation novation, and the confidence to contribute information please see meaningfully within a global competitive • Technology Marketing http://business.wpi.edu/+certificates. environment. The superior record of our MBA Options graduates’ successes highlight why WPI Master of Business Students may pursue the WPI MBA by a enjoys a nationally-recognized reputation Administration (MBA) variety of paths to best suit their individual as one of the most respected names in needs. In addition to being able to com- technology-based business education. WPI’s MBA program features a set of ten core courses, designed to develop the skills plete the MBA on a full- or part-time basis WPI offers a variety of graduate business managers need to develop business op- on our Worcester Campus, students may programs focusing on the integration of portunities, analyze and improve business complete the entire program via a blended business and technology. The Master of performance, and become leaders. In addi- format that mixes online learning with Business Administration (MBA) is a highly tion, the program includes two integrating on-campus face-to-face meetings every 7 integrated, applications-oriented program project experiences: BUS 501 a course that weeks (3 per course). Students may also that provides students with both the ‘big challenges students to use the skills devel- join one of WPI’s MBA Cohorts, which picture’ perspective required of success- oped in the required core courses to make launch each August and January, where ful upper-level managers and the hands- business decisions; and BUS 517 - the students complete the MBA in 32 months on knowledge needed to meet the daily Capstone Graduate Qualifying project. with a defined group of their peers. For demands in the workplace. WPI’s focus more information on MBA options, please see http://business.wpi.edu/+mba.

Return to Table of Contents School of Business 39 M.S. in Information Technology • MSMG students complete the following • MKT 567 Integrated Marketing (MSIT) 10 courses: Communications The demand for knowledgeable IT • BUS 500 Business Law, Ethics, and • MKT 568 Data Mining Business professionals who understand business Social Responsibility Applications has never been greater. The MSIT • FIN 500 Financial Information and • MKT 598 Consumer Behavior program guarantees a solid foundation in Management • OBC 533 Negotiations information technology, with a wide range • FIN 501 Economics for Managers • OBC 535 Managing Creativity in of cutting-edge concentrations, and the • MIS 500 Innovating with Information Knowledge Intensive Organizations management principles critical to success Systems • OBC 536 Organizational Design in a technology-driven environment. • MKT 500 Marketing Management • OBC 537 Leading Change MSIT students must complete the follow- • OBC 500 Group and Interpersonal • OIE 546 Managing Technological ing 5 required courses: Dynamics in Complex Organizations Innovation • MIS 500 Innovating with Information • OIE 500 Analyzing and Designing • OIE 548 Productivity Management Systems Operations to Create Value • MIS 571 Database Applications • 3 Electives M.S. in Operations Design Development and Leadership (MSODL) • MIS 573 Systems Design and M.S. in Marketing and Today’s business environments deal con- Development Technological Innovation stantly with changes requiring leadership • MIS 578 Telecommunications (MSMTI) for operational solutions. The MSODL is Management A highly specialized program specifically a comprehensive Operations Management • OBC 500 Group and Interpersonal designed for individuals employed in or program that provides balance between Dynamics in Complex Organizations aspiring to work in marketing positions service and production management, and and/or positions responsible for innovation offers the option to concentrate in either MSIT students then must complete elec- within technology- oriented environments. Supply Chain Management or Process tives, distributed as follows: The M.S. in marketing and technologi- Design, or to customize the degree with • Choose 1 of the following: cal innovation features 6 required courses a broad selection of electives focusing in- FIN 500 Financial Information and including: depth on issues in operations management Management • ETR 500 Entrepreneurship and and related business areas. OBC 501 Interpersonal and Leadership Innovation MSODL students complete the following Skills • FIN 500 Financial Information and required courses: • Choose 4 of the following: Management • OBC 500 Group and Interpersonal MIS 576 Project Management • FIN 501 Economics for Managers Dynamics in Complex Organizations MIS 581 Information Technology • MKT 500 Marketing Management • OIE 500 Analyzing and Designing Policy and Strategy • OBC 500 Group and Interpersonal Operations to Create Value MIS 582 Information Security Dynamics in Complex Organizations • OIE 552 Modeling and Optimizing Management • OBC 501 Interpersonal and Leadership Processes MIS 583 User Experience Applications Skills Choose 1: MIS 584 Business Intelligence Students then select 6 electives from the • MIS 500 Innovating with Information • Two free electives, which may include following courses: Systems courses outside of business and a maxi- • BUS 522 Global Business Experience • OBC 501 Interpersonal and Leadership mum of 3 credits of internship. • BUS 597 Internship Skills M.S. in Management (MSMG) • ETR 593 Technology Commercialization: Students then select 8 electives from the The MSMG offers students a flexible yet Theory, Strategy and Practice list below, or choose one of two concentra- tion tracks, Supply Chain Management or focused program that will improve your • ETR 596 Selling and Sales Process Design: business skills while excelling in technol- • MIS 576 Project Management ogy-based organizations. The MSMG • BUS 522 Global Business Experience • MIS 578 Telecommunications also provides a compelling pathway to • BUS 597 Internship Management an MBA, recognizing the value of work • MIS 571 Database Applications experience. Upon earning your MSMG, MIS 583 User Experience Applications Development and after 2 – 6 years of professional experi- • MIS 584 Business Intelligence • MIS 573 System Design and ence, you may return to WPI to complete • MKT 563 Marketing of Emerging Development the requirements for an MBA with just 7 Technologies • MIS 576 Project Management additional courses, including the hallmark • MKT 564 Global Technology • MIS 581 Information Technology project experience of WPI (MBA admis- Marketing Policy and Strategy sion required). • MKT 566 Marketing and Electronic • MIS 584 Business Intelligence Commerce

40 School of Business Return to Table of Contents • OBC 533 Negotiations Program continues to be registered as an Degree Requirements • OBC 536 Organizational Design undergraduate until the bachelor’s degree • OBC 537 Leading Change is awarded. For the M.B.A. • OIE 541 Operations Risk Management To obtain a bachelor’s degree via the 48 credits distributed as follows (credits in parentheses): • OIE 544 Supply Chain Analysis and Combined Program, the student must Design satisfy all requirements for the bachelor’s • 10 Core Courses • OIE 546 Managing Technological degree, including distribution and project ACC 503, BUS 500, ETR 500, Innovation requirements. FIN 500, FIN 501, MIS 500, MKT 500, OBC 500, OBC 501, • OIE 548 Productivity Management To obtain an M.S. via the Combined OIE 500 (30 credits) • OIE 553 Global Purchasing and Program, the student must satisfy all M.S. • Integrating Course Logistics degree requirements. BUS 501 (3 credits) • OIE 554 Global Operations Strategy Please refer to the section on the Com- • Graduate Qualifying Project (GQP) • OIE 555 Lean Process Design bined Programs or contact the director of business programs for more information. BUS 517 (3 credits) • OIE 557 Service Operations • 4 Elective Courses (12 credits) Management Admission Requirements • OIE 558 Designing and Managing For the M.S. in Information Six-Sigma Processes For the Master’s program, applicants Technology (MSIT) should have the analytic aptitude and aca- Supply Chain Management Track: 36 credits, distributed as follows (credits in demic preparation necessary to complete parentheses): • OIE 541 Operations Risk Management a technology-oriented business program. • OIE 544 Supply Chain Analysis and This includes a minimum of three semes- • 5 Required Courses Design ters of college level math or two semesters MIS 500, MIS 571, MIS 573, MIS • OIE 553 Global Purchasing and of college level calculus. Applicants are 578, OBC 500 (15 credits) Logistics also required to have an understanding of • 7 Electives Courses • OIE 555 Lean Process Design computer systems. 1 of the following: FIN 500 or • Plus 4 elective courses from the Applicants must have the earned equiva- OBC 501 (3 credits) approved list lent of a four-year U.S. bachelor’s degree 4 of the following: MIS 576, MIS 581, Process Design Track: to be considered for admission. Admission MIS 582, MIS 583, MIS 584 (12 credits) • OIE 541 Operations Risk Management decisions are based upon all the informa- • 2 free electives, which may be any • OIE 555 Lean Process Design tion required from the applicant. GMAT graduate course at WPI and a maximum of 3 credits of internship (6 credits) • OIE 557 Service Operations or GRE required for all applicants. Management For the Ph.D. an applicant must be a grad- For the M.S. in Management • OIE 558 Designing and Managing uate of an accredited U.S. college or uni- (MSMG) Six-Sigma Processes versity or an approved foreign equivalent 30 credits, distributed as follows (credits in • Plus 4 elective courses (12 credit hours) institution, and have earned a grade point parentheses): from the approved list average of 3.0 or better in all prior under- • 7 Required Courses graduate and graduate studies. A student BUS 500, FIN 500, FIN 501, MIS 500, Combined B.S./M.S. Program with a master’s degree will be expected to MKT 500, OBC 500, OIE 500 This program is available to WPI under- have successfully demonstrated graduate (21 credits) graduate students wishing to combine level knowledge in a traditional business • 3 Elective Courses one of the School of Business’ four M.S. discipline such as Accounting, Finance, (9 credits) degrees with their B.S. A separate and Marketing, Organizational Behavior, complete application to the M.S. pro- Entrepreneurship, Information Technol- For the M.S. in Marketing gram must be submitted. Admission to ogy, or Operations Management; or in a and Technological Innovation the Combined Program is determined discipline that is relevant to the student’s (MSMTI) by the faculty of the School of Business. proposed concentration. Additionally, the 36 credits, distributed as follows (credits in The student should begin the curriculum applicant will demonstrate undergraduate parentheses): planning process at the time he/she com- competency in Calculus, Statistics and/or • 6 Required Courses mences his/her undergraduate studies to Micro/Macro Economics. ETR 500, FIN 500, FIN 501, MKT 500, ensure that all of the required prerequisite OBC 500, OBC 501 (18 credits) undergraduate courses are completed Locations within the student’s four years of under- Tailored to meet the challenges of working • 6 Elective Courses graduate study. professionals, WPI offers full- and part- Selected from the following: time graduate business study at our cam- BUS 222, BUS 597, ETR 593, It is recommended that the M.S. applica- pus in Worcester, Massachusetts, as well as ETR 596, MIS 576, MIS 578, MIS 583, tion be submitted at the beginning of world-wide via our Blended courses. MKT 563, MKT 564, MKT 566, the student’s junior year of undergradu- MKT 567, MKT 568, MKT 598, ate study. A student in the Combined OBC 533, OBC 535, OBC 536, OBC 537,OIE 546, OIE 548 (18 credits)

Return to Table of Contents School of Business 41 For the M.S. in Operations Other: 18 credits Operations Management concentration: Design and Leadership Additional coursework Students will pursue research in the areas (MSODL) Additional Dissertation Research of management sciences, operations (BUS 699) research, business analytics, health care 36 credits, distributed as follows (credits in Supplemental Research management, supply chain management, parentheses): (BUS 698) and decision analysis. The operations • 4 Required Courses TOTAL 60 credits area undertakes research on decision- OBC 500, OIE 500, OIE 552, and making through quantitative modeling either OBC 501 or MIS 500 (12 credits) In either case, the result of the dissertation of operations functions in businesses. • 8 Elective Courses (3 credits each) research must be a completed doctoral Research topics cover all levels of business Students may select 8 of the following dissertation. Only after admission to can- decision-making, from operation systems electives, or may choose one of two didacy may a student receive credit toward design and technology choices to day- concentration tracks, Supply Chain dissertation research under BUS 699. Prior to-day scheduling and performance Management or Process Design: to admission to candidacy, a student may measurement. The program emphasizes BUS 222, BUS 597, MIS 571, MIS 573, receive up to 18 credits of pre-dissertation research that focuses on real business MIS 576, MIS 581, MIS 584, OBC research under BUS 698. All full-time problems and maintains a balance between 533, OBC 536, OBC 537, OIE 541, students are required to register for the theory and practice. This concentration OIE 544, OIE 546, OIE 548, OIE 553, zero credit BUS 691 Graduate Seminar is designed to train Ph.D. students OIE 554, OIE 555, OIE 557, OIE 558 every semester. in fundamental and applied business Supply Chain Management Track: Students formally accepted as a doctoral modeling and analytical thinking. OIE 541, OIE 544, OIE 553, OIE 555, candidate must select a concentration in Plus 4 elective courses from the previous which to pursue their dissertation research. Academic Advising list. The available concentrations are listed Upon admission to the Doctoral Program, Process Design Track: below: each student is assigned or may select a OIE 541, OIE 555, OIE 557, OIE 558, temporary advisor to arrange an academic Entrepreneurship concentration: En- Plan of Study covering the first 9 credits Plus 4 elective courses from the previous trepreneurship encompasses opportunity list. of study. This plan should be arranged seeking and identification, financing new before the first day of registration. Prior Ph.D. Program enterprises, corporate venturing and other to registering for any additional credits, The course of study leading to the Ph.D. related topics. Research subjects address the student must identify a permanent degree in Business Administration requires the conceptualization of new venture dissertation advisor who assumes the role the completion of 90 credits beyond the business models through to formulating of academic advisor and with whom a suit- bachelor’s degree, or 60 credits beyond the exit strategies. Special areas of emphasis able dissertation topic and the remaining master’s degree. For students proceeding include intellectual property commercial- Plan of Study are arranged. Prior to com- directly from B.S. degree to Ph.D. degree, ization, international and cross-cultural pleting 18 credits, the student must form the 90 credits should be distributed as studies, and issues associated with trans- a dissertation committee that consists of follows: generational entrepreneurship in family the dissertation advisor, at least two other Coursework: business. business administration faculty members, Courses in BA Information Technology concentration: and at least one member from outside (incl. Special Topics and ISP) 15 credits Students will learn to use qualitative and the student’s area of concentration. These Courses in or outside of BA 15 credits quantitative methods to develop and apply committee members should be selected Dissertation Research theories regarding design, implementa- because of their abilities to assist in the (BUS 699) 30 credits tion, and use of advanced information student’s dissertation research. Other: 30 credits systems and technologies with the goal of The schedule of advising is as follows: Additional coursework developing and publishing new Informa- • Temporary advisor—meets with student Additional Dissertation Research tion Technology knowledge. Students will prior to first registration to plan first 9 (BUS 699) study information technology and how credits of study. Supplemental Research it affects individuals, organizations and (BUS 698) society. By working closely with WPI’s • Dissertation advisor—selected by stu- dent prior to registering for more than 9 TOTAL 90 credits Information Technology scholars, students will learn to conduct theoretically sound credits. For students proceeding from master’s to Information Technology research that ad- • Program of study—arranged with dis- Ph.D. degree, the 60 credits should be dresses real business problems, to apply for sertation advisor prior to registering for distributed as follows: research grants, and to teach Information more than 9 credits. Coursework: Technology courses. WPI’s Information • Dissertation committee—formed by Courses in BA Technology scholars will involve Ph.D. student prior to registering for more (incl. Special Topics and ISP) 12 credits candidates in their research activities in than 18 credits. Consists of dissertation Dissertation Research various organizations in the region, includ- advisor, at least two BA faculty mem- (BUS 699) 30 credits ing those in the technology, healthcare, bers, and at least one outside member. financial, and public sectors.

42 School of Business Return to Table of Contents This schedule ensures that students are Dissertation Defense BUS 501. Integrating Business Concepts well advised and actively engaged in Each doctoral candidate is required to to Lead Innovation their research at the early stages of their defend the originality, independence and This course will be help students practice integra- programs. quality of research during an oral disserta- tion of the concepts learned in the core courses in team based projects. There will be case studies, tion defense that is administered by an simulations and other activities emphasizing Admission to Candidacy examining committee that consists of the different aspects of business problems. These ac- Admission to candidacy will be granted dissertation committee and a representa- tivities will challenge teams to provide innovative when the student has satisfactorily passed tive of the School of Business Graduate solutions. Important strategy theories and con- a written exam intended to measure Policy and Curriculum Committee who cepts will be discussed to help students integrate fundamental ability in the area of concen- is not on the dissertation committee. The varying knowledge domains. (Prerequisites: FIN tration and at least one additional business 500, BUS 500, FIN 501, MIS 500, MKT 500, defense is open to public participation OBC 500 and OIE 500 or equivalent content, or discipline. The two areas are selected by and consists of a 45-minute presentation instructor consent) the student. The exam is given in January. followed by a 45-minute open discussion. For students who enter the program with a At least one week prior to the defense, BUS 517. Graduate Qualifying Project bachelor’s degree, the exam must be taken in Management (GQP) each member of the examining committee This course integrates management theory and after three semesters if they began their must receive a copy of the dissertation. At practice, and incorporates a number of skills and studies in the fall, and after two semesters the same time, an additional copy must tools acquired in the M.B.A. curriculum. The if they began in the spring. For students be made available for members of the medium is a major project, often for an external who enter the program with a master’s WPI community wishing to read the dis- sponsor, that is completed individually or in degree, the exam must be taken after one sertation prior to the defense, and public teams. In addition to a written report, the project semester if they began in the fall, and after notification of the defense must be given will be formally presented to members of the two semesters if they began in the spring. department, outside sponsors and other interested by the School of Business Graduate Policy parties. (Prerequisites: ACC 503, BUS 500, BUS Students in a WPI M.S. program who and Curriculum Committee. The examin- 501, ETR 500, FIN 500, FIN 501, MIS 500, plan to apply for fall admission to the ing committee will determine the accept- MKT 500, OBC 500, OBC 501 and OIE 500 or Ph.D. program are strongly advised to take ability of the student’s dissertation and oral equivalent content, or instructor consent) the candidacy exam in January before that performance. The dissertation advisor will BUS 522. Global Business Experience fall. The details of the examination proce- determine the student’s grade. Business is increasingly global. To be successful dure can be obtained from the School of one must understand the customs and traditions Business Graduate Policy and Curriculum Course Descriptions of the regions in which they are operating. This All courses are 3 credits unless otherwise noted. course provides students with insight into dif- Committee. ferent countries and business environments and ACC 503. Financial Intelligence for includes an international trip where students will Dissertation Proposal Strategic Decision-Making spend a week to 10 days on the ground in the fea- Each student must prepare a brief written This course builds on Financial Information and tured region meeting with business, government proposal and make an oral presentation Management. It takes a managerial approach and and/or academic leaders; touring company sites; that demonstrates a sound understand- combines publicly available and internal financial and learning about the region. Prior to the trip ing of the dissertation topic, the relevant reports to help managers measure and manage students will study business history, culture and firm performance. Accounting, economics, and literature, the techniques to be employed, current topics related to the featured region. Guest psychology theories provide the framework for speakers will often be incorporated. Following the the issues to be addressed, and the work planning, evaluating performance, understand- trip students will typically write reflective papers done on the topic by the student to date. ing moral hazard and how choices of what to and deliver presentations. The proposal must be made within a year measure affect behaviors and outcomes. The of admission to candidacy. Both the writ- course will emphasize cost behaviors and the use BUS 597. Internship The internship is an elective-credit option ten and oral proposals are presented to the of assumptions in the calculations of cost of goods sold and other significant revenue and expense designed to provide an opportunity to put into dissertation committee and a representa- accounts. Students will apply statistical methods practice the principles that have been studied in tive from the School of Business Graduate to the analysis of cost behavior and the balanced previous courses. Internships will be tailored to Policy and Curriculum Committee. The scorecard. (Prerequisite: FIN 500 or equivalent the specific interests of the student. Each intern- prepared portion of the oral presentation content, or instructor consent) ship must be carried out in cooperation with a should not exceed 30 minutes, and up to sponsoring organization, generally from off cam- BUS 500. Business Law, Ethics and pus, and must be approved and advised by a WPI 90 minutes should be allowed for discus- Social Responsibility faculty member in the School of Business. Intern- sion. If the dissertation committee and the This course combines analysis of the structure, ships may be proposed by the student or by an graduate committee representative have function and development of the law most off-campus sponsor. The internship must include concerns about either the substance of important to the conduct of business with an proposal, design and documentation phases. Fol- the proposal or the student’s understand- examination of the ethical and social context in lowing the internship, the student will report on ing of the topic, the student will have one which managers make decisions. Emphasizing the his or her internship activities in a mode outlined social responsibility considerations of all business month to prepare a second presentation by the supervising faculty member. Students are stakeholders, the course focuses on practical appli- limited to counting a maximum of 3 internship that focuses on the areas of concern. This cations via extensive use of case studies. Students credits toward their degree requirements. The presentation will last 15 minutes with an will gain a sound understanding of the basic internship may not be completed at the student¹s additional 45 minutes allowed for discus- areas of U.S. and international law including: place of employment. sion. Students can continue their research intellectual property law; business formation and only if the proposal is approved. organization; international business law; securities regulation; cyber law and e-commerce; antitrust law; employment law and environmental law.

Return to Table of Contents School of Business 43 BUS 598. Independent Study ETR 596. Selling and Sales course also explores the implications of increased The student should have a well-developed pro- Selling is a major part of our business and profes- competition from the BRICs (Brazil, Russia, posal before approaching a faculty member about sional lives. This is especially important for those India, and China) and “frontier” economies. an independent study. who are launching new ventures. Business propo- (Prerequisite: FIN 500 or equivalent content, or sitions need to be presented to (and need to be consent of instructor) BUS 599. Thesis sold to) potential investors, employees, colleagues, MIS 500. Innovating with Information 6 to 9 credits and certainly potential employers. Later there is Systems Research study at the master’s level. a need to sell products or services to customers. This course focuses on information technology Common to all is a sales process and organization BUS 691. Graduate Seminar and innovation. Topics covered are informa- model that can be developed that is focused on 0 credits tion technology and organizations, information meeting customer and other stakeholder needs Seminars on current issues related to entrepre- technology and individuals (privacy, ethics, job through effective selling disciplines. neurship, information technology and operations security, job changes), information technology management are presented by authorities in their FIN 500. Financial Information and and information security, information technology fields. All full-time Ph.D. students in Business Management within the organization (technology introduction Administration are required to register and attend. This course develops expertise in financial and implementation), business process engineer- ing and information technology between organiza- BUS 697. Independent Study decision-making by focusing on frequently used financial accounting information and the concep- tions (electronic data interchange and electronic 1-3 credits tual framework for managing financial problems. commerce).This course provides the knowledge For Ph.D. students wishing to conduct inde- Students are introduced to the accounting and and skills to utilize existing and emerging infor- pendent study on special topics related to their financial concepts, principles and methods for mation technology innovatively to create business concentration. (Prerequisite: Consent of research preparing, analyzing and evaluating financial in- opportunities. advisor) formation, for the purpose of managing financial MIS 571. Database Applications resources of a business enterprise and investment BUS 698. Directed Research Development decisions. The course adopts a decision-maker Credits TBD Business applications are increasingly centered perspective by emphasizing the relations among For Ph.D. students wishing to gain research expe- on databases and the delivery of high-quality financial data, their underlying economic events, rience peripheral to their thesis topic. (Prerequi- data throughout the organization. This course corporate finance issues, and the responses by site: Consent of research advisor) introduces students to the theory and practice of market participants. BUS 699. Dissertation Research computer-based data management. It focuses on Credits TBD FIN 501. Economics for Managers the design of database applications that will meet Intended for Ph.D. students admitted to candi- This course covers fundamental microeconomic the needs of an organization and its managers. dacy wishing to obtain research credit toward their and macroeconomic theories to help managers The course also covers data security, data integrity, dissertations. (Prerequisite: Consent of research formulate effective business decisions. Current data quality, and backup and recovery procedures. advisor) events are used in addition to economic theories Students will be exposed to commercially available to explain the concepts of the market system, database management systems, such as MS/Access ETR 500. Entrepreneurship and Innovation gains from trade, supply and demand, consumer and Oracle. As a project during the course, stu- Entrepreneurship involves many activities, includ- behavior, firm behavior, market structure, long- dents will design and implement a small database ing identifying and exploiting opportunities, run economic growth, economic cycle, financial that meets the needs of some real-world business creating and launching new ventures, introducing system, monetary policy, and fiscal policy. Stu- data application. The project report will include new products and new services to new markets. dents will complete a “Market Watch” project to recommendations for ensuring security, integrity, It is based on implementing innovations within learn to explain and predict changes in macroeco- and quality of the data. existing organizations and creating new oppor- nomic indicators, including gross domestic prod- MIS 573. System Design and Development tunities. This course is intended to introduce uct, interest rates, global stock indices, commodity This course introduces students to the concepts students to entrepreneurial thinking and methods prices and foreign exchange rates. of executing their ideas. Topics include recogniz- and principles of systems analysis and design. ing and evaluating opportunities, forming new FIN 521. Financial Management in It covers all aspects of the systems development venture teams, preparing business and technology a Global Environment life cycle from project identification through commercialization plans, obtaining resources, This course builds from Financial Information project planning and management, requirements identifying execution action scenarios, and devel- and Management, and extends closed-economy identification and specification, process and oping exit strategies. financial management to the international market data modeling, system architecture and security, environment. Drawing from theories based on interface design, and implementation and change ETR 593. Technology Commercialization: culture, corporate finance, and investor protec- management. Object-oriented analysis techniques Theory, Strategy and Practice tion laws, this course examines differences in are introduced. Students will learn to use an upper In the modern world of global competition the corporate governance, financial information, and level CASE (computer-aided software engineer- ability to utilize technological innovation is in- financial markets in global settings. The first focus ing) tool, which will be employed in completing creasingly important. This course will examine the is on accountability of financial resources, the a real-world systems analysis and design project. sources of new technology, the tools to evaluate implications of globalization on firms’ financial (Prerequisite: MIS 571 or equivalent content, or new technologies, the process of intellectual prop- reporting and decision-making. The second focus instructor consent) erty transfer, and the eventual positioning of the is on international markets and institutions, resultant products and services in the commercial MIS 576. Project management how the access and exposure to different market This course presents the specific concepts, tech- market. Its purpose is to improve the probability environments can affect the firm’s financial and of success of this discipline in both existing orga- niques and tools for managing projects effectively. investment decisions. Major topics include the The role of the project manager as team leader is nizational models and early stage ventures. Specific relationship between foreign exchange and other cases studies of successful technology commercial- examined, together with important techniques financial variables; measurement and management for controlling cost, schedules and performance ization processes will be used to supplement the of the exchange risk exposure of the firm; interna- course materials. parameters. Lectures, case studies and projects tional investment decisions by firms and investors; are combined to develop skills needed by project and financing the global operations of firms. This managers in today’s environment.

44 School of Business Return to Table of Contents MIS 578. Telecommunications MIS 583. User Experience Applications duction timing and competitive positioning. Par- Management The course provides an introduction to various ticular emphasis is placed on how new products This course provides students with the technical methods to study user experience, which includes can be used to generate firm growth and renewal and managerial background for developing and the newest research in user experience theory and in a dynamic environment, and on the challenges managing an organization’s telecommunications practice (e.g., the use of eye tracking in inform- of incorporating in new infrastructure. On the technical side, it covers ing the design of webpages). Students will learn products. (Prerequisite: MKT 500 or equivalent the fundamentals of data transmission, local area how businesses can benefit from user experience content, or instructor consent) networks, local internetworking and enterprise research to develop new or improve existing prod- MKT 564. Global Technology Marketing internetworking, and security. Coverage includes ucts and services. Both theoretical concepts and Extending technology to global markets requires data communications and computer networking; practical skills will be addressed within the scope an understanding of consumer behavior in dif- local area communications topics such as cabling, of the class through hands-on projects and assign- ferent cultures, and effective management of risk and local area network hardware and software; and ments. (Recommended background: ability to and overseas infrastructures. This course addresses topics involved in wide area networking, such as program in a higher level programming language) the issues associated with technology application circuit and packet switching, and multiplexing. in new markets and includes the following topics: On the managerial side, this course focuses on MIS 584. Business Intelligence consumer behavior differences in international understanding the industry players and key orga- Today’s business computing infrastructures are markets and the implications for the market- nizations, and the telecommunications investment producing the large volumes of data organizations ing mix, cultural differences that affect business decisions in a business environment. Coverage need to make better plans and decisions. This practices in new markets, managing exchange rate includes issues in the national and international course provides an introduction to the technolo- fluctuation, factors that affect manufacturing and legal and regulatory environments for telecommu- gies and techniques for organizing and analyzing research location, the impact of local government nications services. data about business operations in a way that creates business value, and prepares students to on marketing decision making, and the use of MIS 581. Information Technology Policy be knowledgeable producers and consumers of strategic alliances to acquire expertise and manage and Strategy business intelligence. During the course, students risk in global market development. Knowledge of Fast-paced changes in technology require suc- will study a variety of business decisions that can marketing management is assumed. cessful IS managers to quickly understand, adapt, be improved by analyzing large volumes of data MKT 566. Marketing and Electronic and apply technology when appropriate. They about customers, sales, operations, and business Commerce must recognize the implications new technologies performance. Students will apply commercially This course discusses the tools and techniques have on their employees and the organization as available business intelligence software to analyze being used today to harness the vast marketing a whole. In particular, they must appreciate the data sets and make recommendations based on potential of the Internet. It examines various internal (e.g., political and organizational culture) the results. The course explores the technical Web-based business models for effectively and and external (e.g., laws, global concerns, and challenges of organizing data for analysis and the efficiently using the net as a strategic marketing cultural issues) environments that these changes managerial challenges of creating and deploying tool for new products, market research, direct occur within and plan accordingly. This course business intelligence expertise in organizations. and indirect distribution channels, and market- focuses on the core IS capabilities that IS manag- The course includes business cases, in-class discus- ing communications. The course considers both ers must consider when managing technology sion, and hands-on analyses of business data. It is business-to- consumer and business-to-business within their organization: business and IT vision, designed for any student interested in analyz- applications, and explores the major opportuni- design of IT architecture, and IT service delivery. ing data to support business decision making, ties, limitations and issues of profiting from the This course will build on the knowledge and skills including students whose primary focus is IT, Internet. gained from previous MIS courses. (Prerequisite: Marketing, Operations, or Business Management. MIS500 or equivalent content, or instructor (Prerequisite: MIS 571, or equivalent content, or MKT 567. Integrated Marketing consent) consent of the instructor.) Communications This course provides students with an understand- MIS 582. Information Security MKT 500. Marketing Management ing of the role of integrated marketing communi- Management This course addresses consumer and industrial cations in the overall marketing program and its This course introduces students to the funda- decision-making, with emphasis on the develop- contribution to marketing strategy. The tools of mentals of Information Security Management. ment of products and services that meet customer marketing communications include advertising, It is designed to develop in students an under- needs. Topics covered include management and sales promotion, publicity, personal selling, public standing of and appreciation for the importance the development of distinctive competence, seg- relations, trade shows, direct, and online market- of information security to all enterprises, and to mentation and target marketing, market research, ing. Understanding the concepts and processes enable current and future managers to understand competitor analysis and marketing information that organizations use in developing effective and the important role that they must play in secur- systems, product management, promotion, price synergistic marketing communications is useful ing the enterprise. This course is appropriate for strategy, and channel management. Students will for managers across functional disciplines. This any student interested in gaining a managerial- learn how the elements of marketing strategy are course will also consider ethical issues of IMC. level understanding of information security. A combined in a marketing plan, and the challenges combination of readings, lectures, case studies, associated with managing products and services MKT 568. Data Mining Business guest speakers, and discussion of real world events over the life cycle, including strategy modification Applications will be used to bridge the gap between theory and market exit. This course provides students with the key con- and practice. The course will primarily explore cepts and tools to turn raw data into useful busi- MKT 563. Marketing of Emerging the Common Body of Knowledge (CBK) of ness intelligence. A broad spectrum of business Technologies information security, along with other related situations will be considered for which the tools This course focuses on the new product develop- topics. It will also explore the interaction between of classical statistics and modern data mining have ment process in high-tech corporations, from People, Process and Technology as the cornerstone proven their usefulness. Problems considered will idea generation through launch. Topics include: of any effective information security program. include such standard marketing research activities understanding customer responses to innovation, Upon completion of this course, the student will as customer segmentation and customer prefer- engaging customers in the innovation process, have an in-depth understanding of the essential ence as well as more recent issues in credit scoring, developing the marketing mix for new products components of a comprehensive information churn management and fraud detection. Roughly (product features and benefits, pricing, channel security program, as well as an understanding of half the class time will be devoted to discussions the technology at work behind the scenes. selection, communications), new product intro-

Return to Table of Contents School of Business 45 on business situations, data mining techniques, will build a conceptual understanding of creating, OIE 544. Supply Chain Analysis their application and their usage. The remaining creativity, and knowledge based in the philosoph- and Design time will comprise an applications laboratory in ic, academic, and practitioner literatures. We will This course studies the decisions and strate- which these concepts and techniques are used and critically apply this conceptual understanding to gies in designing and managing supply chains. interpreted to solve realistic business problems. organizational examples of managing creativity in Concepts, techniques, and frameworks for better Some knowledge of basic marketing principles support of practical action. supply chain performance are discussed, and and basic data analysis is assumed. how e-commerce enables companies to be more OBC 536. Organizational Design efficient and flexible in their internal and external MKT 598. Consumer Behavior A key role for organizational leaders is to design operations are explored. The major content of the This course provides an in-depth analysis of fac- their organization to achieve their desired results. course is divided into three modules: supply chain tors that affect purchase decisions and consump- This course applies design thinking and methods integration, supply chain decisions, and supply tion in the marketplace. Topics covered include to the practical problems of designing various chain management and control tools. A variety consumer behavior theory, an examination of sized organizations for optimal results in a com- of instructional tools including lectures, case attitude formation and value creation, the chal- plex environment. This is based on a foundation discussions, guest speakers, games, videos, and lenges of consumer protection, market research, of organizational theory, design methodology, and group projects and presentations are employed. and the influence of technology on consumer organizational strategy. (Prerequisite: OBC 500 or (Prerequisite: OIE 500 or equivalent content, or decision making. Students will learn how the equivalent content, or instructor consent) instructor consent) elements of consumer behavior impact marketing OBC 537. Leading Change strategy and decisions through case analysis and OIE 546. Managing Technological This course focuses on the role of leadership in other activities. Innovation the design and implementation of organizational This course studies successful innovations and OBC 500. Group and Interpersonal change. Topics include visioning, communication, how firms must enhance their ability to develop Dynamics in Complex Organizations social influence, power, resiliency, and resistance and introduce new products and processes. This practice-based course simulates a complex to change. Teaching methods include classroom The course will discuss a practical model of the organization with critical interdependencies at in- discussion of readings and cases, simulations, and dynamics of industrial innovation. Cases and terpersonal, group, and intergroup levels. Students experiential exercises. (Prerequisite: OBC 500 or examples will be discussed for products in which will be asked to make sense of their experiences equivalent content, or instructor consent) cost and product performance are commanding through class discussions, individual reflection and factors. The important interface among R&D/ readings in organization studies. This course is OIE 500. Analyzing and Designing manufacturing/marketing is discussed. Interna- intended to be a student’s first course in organiza- Operations to Create Value tional technology transfer and joint venture issues tional studies. The operations of an organization focus on the transformation processes used to produce goods or are also considered. OBC 501. Interpersonal and provide services. In this course, a variety of statisti- OIE 548. Productivity Management Leadership Skills cal and analytical techniques are used to develop Productivity management and analysis techniques This course considers effective interpersonal and deep understanding of process behavior, and to and applications are covered from engineering and leadership behaviors in technological organiza- use this analysis to inform process and operational management perspectives. Topics include bench- tions. Course material focuses on understanding, designs. Topics such as measures of dispersion marking, production functions, and the concept changing and improving our behaviors and those and confidence descriptions, correlation and of relative efficiency and its measurement by of others by examining our own practices and regression analysis, and time series mathematics data envelopment analysis. Application examples analyzing examples of leadership behaviors. The will be explored. Operations design is driven by include efficiency evaluations of bank branches, course also considers interpersonal and leadership strategic values, and can be critical to developing sales outlets, hospitals, schools and others. (Prereq- behaviors in relation to teams, cultural diversity, and sustaining competitive value. Philosophies uisite: OIE 500, or equivalent content, or consent and ethics in organizations. Assignments may such as lean thinking, as well as technology-based of the instructor.) include personal experiments, case analyses, indi- techniques such as optimization and simulation, vidual and group projects and/or presentations. are explored as a means of developing robust and OIE 552. Modeling and Optimizing effective operations. (Prerequisite: OBC 500 or equivalent content, or Processes This course is designed to provide students with a instructor consent) OIE 541. Operations Risk Management variety of quantitative tools and techniques useful Operations risk management deals with decision OBC 533. Negotiations in modeling, evaluating and optimizing opera- making under uncertainty. It is interdisciplinary, This course focuses on improving the student¹s tion processes. Students are oriented toward the drawing upon management science and manage- understanding of the negotiation process and creation and use of spreadsheet models to support rial decision-making, along with material from effectiveness as a negotiator. Emphasizes issues decision-making in industry and business. negotiation and cognitive psychology. Classic related to negotiating within and on behalf of methods from decision analysis are first covered organizations, the role of third parties, the sources OIE 553. Global Purchasing and Logistics and then applied, from the perspective of business of power within negotiation, and the impact of This course aims to develop an in-depth process improvement, to a broad set of applica- gender, culture and other differences. Conducted understanding of the decisions and challenges tions in operations risk management and design in workshop format, combining theory and related to the design and implementation of a including: quality assurance, supply chains, practice. firm’s purchasing strategy within a context of an information security, fire protection engineering, integrated, global supply chain. Topics centering OBC 535. Managing Creativity in environmental management, projects and new on operational purchasing, strategic sourcing, and Knowledge Intensive Organizations products. A course project is required (and chosen strategic cost management will be covered. The This course considers creativity in its broadest by the student according to his/her interest) to global logistics systems that support the purchas- sense from designing new products and processes develop skills in integrating subjective and objec- ing process will be analyzed, and the commonly to creating our own role and identity as managers tive information in modeling and evaluating risk. used techniques for designing and evaluating an and leaders in knowledge-intensive organizations. (An introductory understanding of statistics is effective logistics network will be studied. In this course we will look actively at our own assumed.) creative process and how we might more fully realize our creative potential. At the same time we

46 School of Business Return to Table of Contents OIE 554. Global Operations Strategy OIE 557. Service Operations Management OIE 598. Optimization Methods for This course focuses on operations strategy from Successful management of service organizations Business Analytics a global perspective. Topics such as strategy of often differs from that of manufacturing organiza- This course covers mathematical optimization in logistics and decisions to outsource are examined. tions. Service business efficiency is sometimes greater detail beyond the foundational concepts As an example, the strategic issues concerned with difficult to evaluate because it is often hard to de- of linear programming. A variety of optimization firms that are doing R&D in the United States, termine the efficient amount of resources required problem classes will be addressed, likely including circuit board assembly in Ireland and final as- to produce service outputs. This course introduces integer programming, nonlinear programming, sembly in Singapore. Cases, textbooks and recent students to the available techniques used to evalu- stochastic programming and global optimization. articles relating to the topic are all used. Term ate operating efficiency and effectiveness in the While ensuring an appropriate level of theory, the paper based on actual cases is required. service sector. The course covers key service busi- main emphasis will be the methodological and ness principles. Students gain an understanding computational aspects of solving such problems OIE 555. Lean Process Design of how to successfully manage service operations arising in the operational, manufacturing, and ser- Lean thinking has transformed the way that or- through a series of case studies on various service vice sectors. (Recommended background: Previous ganizational processes are designed and operated, industries and covering applications in yield course(s) in linear algebra, basic knowledge about using a systematic approach that eliminates waste management, inventory control, waiting time optimization and linear programming, or consent by creating flow dictated by customer pull. In this management, project management, site selection, of the instructor) course we explore the lean concepts of value, flow, performance evaluation and scoring systems. The demand-pull, and perfection in global, multistage course assumes some familiarity with basic prob- processes. The tactics that are used to translate ability and statistics through regression. these general principles into practice, such as cre- ating manufacturing cells, are also discussed. The OIE 558. Designing and Managing design process is complicated because in reality Six-Sigma Processes not all wastes can be eliminated. To learn effective This course teaches Six-Sigma as an organiza- design, students will practice applying lean ideas tional quality system and a set of statistical tools in case studies and simulations, exploring how that have helped the world’s leading companies variability affects process dynamics and combining save millions of dollars and improve customer this knowledge with analysis of process data. satisfaction. This course is organized in three parts: part one covers the essentials of Six-Sigma, including fundamental concepts, the advantages of Six-Sigma over Total Quality Management, and a five-phase model for building a Six-Sigma organization; part two of the course covers the Six-Sigma training, including technical topics such as capability and experimental design as well as how to train “Black Belts” and other key roles; part three describes the major activities of the Six- Sigma Roadmap, from identifying core processes to executing improvement projects to sustaining Six-Sigma gains.

Return to Table of Contents School of Business 47 Chemical Engineering www.wpi.edu/+che

Faculty M. T. Timko, Assistant Professor, PhD MIT: Renewable Energy; Liquid and D. DiBiasio, Associate Professor and Catalyst and Reaction Engineering Biomass Fuels; Reaction Engineering; Fuel Research in this area is centered on the Department Head; Ph.D., Purdue Univer- Refining and Desulfurization sity. Engineering education, teaching and physical and chemical behavior of fluids, learning, assessment H. S. Zhou, Assistant Professor; Ph.D., especially gases, in contact with homo- University of California-Irvine. Bioano- geneous and heterogeneous catalysts. T. A. Camesano, Professor; Ph.D., Penn­- technology, bioseparations, micro- and Projects include diffusion through porous sylvania­ State University. Bacterial adhesion nano-bioelectronics, bioMEMS, micro­ solids, multicomponent adsorption, mech- and interaction forces, biopolymers, , polymer thin films, surface anism studies; microkinetics, synthesis and bacterial/natural organic matter interactions ­modification, microelectronic and characterization of catalysts; catalytic re- W. M. Clark, Associate Professor; Ph.D., photonic packaging formers; heat and mass transfer in catalytic Rice University. Separations, biosepara- reactors; and reactor dynamics. tion, two-phase electrophoresis, filtration Emeritus using inorganic membranes W. R. Moser, Professor Emeritus; Ph.D., Zeolite Science and Technology Massachusetts Institute of Technology Research in the area of zeolite science R. Datta, Professor; Ph.D., University of involves synthesis, characterization and A. H. Weiss, Professor Emeritus; Ph.D., California, Santa Barbara. Catalysis and applications of molecular sieve zeolites. University of Pennsylvania reaction engineering as applied to fuel cells In particular, developing an understand- and hydrogen Research Interests ing of the fundamental mechanisms of N.A. Deskins, Assistant Professor; Ph.D., zeolite nucleation and crystal growth in The Chemical Engineering Department’s Purdue University. Energy production, hydrothermal systems is of interest. Uses research effort is concentrated in the nanomaterials research and development, of zeolites as liquid and gas phase adsor- following­ major areas: nanotechnology/ pollution control and abatement, catalysis bents, and as catalysts, are being studied. nano­materials, environmental engineering, and chemical kinetics, and computational Incorporation of zeolites into membranes energy research, bioengineering, process chemistry for separations is being investigated due to control and safety, and reaction engineering. zeolites’ very regular pore dimensions on A. G. Dixon, Professor; Ph.D., University Bioengineering research in the depart- the molecular level. of Edinburgh. Transport in chemical reac- ment focuses on biomaterials, cell-surface tions, applications of CFD to catalyst and interactions, development of DNA- Biological Engineering reactor design, microreactors based biosensors, and modeling of HIV Bioseparations N. K. Kazantzis, Professor; Ph.D, Univer- interactions with the immune system. Full realization of biotechnology’s poten- sity of Michigan. Analysis, sustainable Environmental Engineering encompasses tial to produce useful products will require design and control of chemical processes, air pollution and pollution prevention in the engineering of efficient and, in some environmental and energy systems, process chemical processes, environmentally be- cases, large-scale production and recovery safety and chemical risk analysis, process nign chemical reactor technology, fuel cell processes. Research in the bioseparations performance monitoring and industrial risks technology, and molecular modeling of laboratory is aimed at understanding S. J. Kmiotek, Assistant Teaching catalyst materials. Process control involves and exploiting the thermodynamic and Professor, PhD WPI: Chemical Process analysis and control of nonlinear processes. transport properties of biological materials Safety; Air Pollution Control; Pollution Master’s and doctoral candidates’ research such as genetic materials underlying their Prevention in these areas involves the application of all separation, to improve existing purification fundamental aspects of chemical engineer- methods and develop new separation tech- Y. H. Ma, Professor; Ph.D. Massachusetts ing, as well as interdisciplinary projects niques. Recent projects include partition- Institute of Technology. Synthesis, char- that encompass environmental engineer- ing in aqueous two-phase systems, affinity acterization, and application of inorganic ing and science, biomedical engineering, partitioning, extractive fermentation, membranes, including composite Pd and materials science, and math. filtration using inorganic membranes, and Pd-alloy porous stainless steel membranes a new large-scale electrophoretic separation Of the 20 to 25 graduate students, ap- for hydrogen separation method. proximately 75% are Ph.D. candidates. A. M. Peterson, Assistant Professor, PhD Research groups tend to be small; because Drexel University: Biomaterials; Multi- Lab-on-chip and BioMEMS of this, students find considerable interac- Research in the area of lab on chip and functional Smart Materials; Polymer Films tion with faculty advisors as well as among and Interfaces BioMEMS involves developing a funda- various research groups. In such an atmo- mental understanding of microfluidics R. W. Thompson, Professor; Ph.D., Iowa sphere, graduate students have exceptional transport and surface reaction kinetics in State University. Applied kinetics and opportunities to contribute to their field. the micro-and nano-domain to design reactor analysis, especially as applied to the Studies may be pursued in the following and fabricate chip-based bioseparation analysis of particulate systems areas: and biosensing devices and application of

48 Chemical Engineering Return to Table of Contents bionanotechnology for rapid and sensitive include improving in situ bioremediation Programs of Study molecular diagnostics. Novel nanoma- efforts, prevention of water contamination terials for biomedical applications are of with pathogenic microbes, and the design Students have the opportunity to do interest. of better treatment options for wastewater. creative work on state-of-the-art research projects as a part of their graduate study in Bacterial Adhesion to Biomaterials Air & Water Remediation chemical engineering. The program offers The mechanisms governing bacterial adhe- Research is being carried out to evaluate excellent preparation for rewarding careers sion to biomaterials, including catheters the use of hydrophobic molecular sieves in research, industry or education. Selec- and other implanted devices, are poorly to clean air and water contaminated with tion of graduate courses and thesis project understood at this time. However, it is organic compounds. Benefits of using is made with the aid of a faculty advisor known that the presence of a biofilm on hydrophobic molecular sieves have been with whom the student works closely. All a biomaterial surface will lead to infec- demonstrated, and our investigations in graduate students participate in a seminar tion and cause an implanted device to fail. the laboratory have been confirmed by during each term of residence. Often, removal of the device is the only Molecular Dynamics calculations as well as The master’s degree program in chemical option since microbes attached to a surface equilibrium calculations using an equation engineering is concerned with the ad- are highly resistant to antibiotics. Work in of state for fluids confined in nano-meter vanced topics of the field. While specializa- our laboratory is aimed at characterizing sized pores. tion is possible, most students are urged bacterial interaction forces and adhesion to advance their knowledge along a broad to biomaterials, and developing anti- Hydrogen Fuel front. All students select a portion of their bacterial coatings for biomaterials. We are Hydrogen may be the energy currency of studies from core courses in mathematics, using novel techniques based on atomic the future due to environmental benefits thermodynamics, reactor design, kinetics force microscopy (AFM) to quantify the and potential use of fuel cells. Palladium and catalysis, and transport phenomena. nanoscale adhesion forces between bacteria and palladium alloy membranes and In addition, they choose courses from a and surfaces. membrane reactors are being developed wide range of elective. While a master’s that produce pure hydrogen in a single degree can be obtained with coursework Process Analysis, Performance step, simplifying the multi-step reforming alone, most students carry on research Monitoring, Control and Safety processes that require additional separation terminating in a thesis. Current research efforts lie in the broader processes to produce pure hydrogen. areas of nonlinear process analysis, per- In the doctoral program, a broad knowl- formance monitoring, control and safety. Fuel Cell Technology edge of chemical engineering topics is In particular, the following thematic areas Fuel cells have potential as clean and ef- required for success in the qualifying may be identified in our current research ficient power sources for automobiles and examination. Beyond this point, more plan: (1) synthesis of robust optimal digital stationary appliances. Research is being intensive specialization is achieved in the feedback regulators for nonlinear processes conducted on developing, characterizing student’s field of research through course- in the presence of model uncertainty; and modeling of fuel cells that are robust work and thesis research. (2) design of state estimators for digital for these consumer applications. This process performance monitoring and fault includes development of CO-tolerant an- Admission Requirements detection/ diagnosis purposes; (3) chemi- odes, higher temperature proton-exchange An undergraduate degree in chemical en- cal risk assessment and management with membranes and direct methanol fuel cells. gineering is preferred for master’s and doc- applications to process safety; (4) develop- In addition, reformers are being investigat- toral degree applicants. Those with related ment of the appropriate software tools for ed to produce hydrogen from liquid fuels. backgrounds will also be considered, but the effective digital implementation of the may be required to complete prerequisite above process control, monitoring and risk Molecular Modeling of Catalytic coursework in some areas. assessment schemes. Reactions Computer technologies have advanced Degree Requirements Environmental and to the point of being able to simulate For the M.S. Sustainable Engineering chemical reactions and transformations with molecular detail and high accuracy. Thesis Option Bacterial and Biopolymer Interactions A total of 30 credit hours is required, in the Aquatic Environment This is useful for catalytic processes which may involve a number of reactions that are including 18 credit hours of coursework Our interests are directed to identifying and at least 12 credit hours of thesis work. the roles bacteria and bacterial extracel- difficult to determine using experimental techniques. Research is being conducted The coursework must include 15 credit lular polymers play in environmental hours of graduate level chemical engineer- processes. Experimental work is focused in the areas of photocatalysis, industrial catalysis, and environmental catalysis, all ing courses and 9 of these must be chosen on characterizing biocolloid systems at from the core curriculum. A satisfactory the nanoscale. The main areas of interest with the goal of producing environmental- ly-safe energy and chemicals. Several types oral seminar presentation must be given are in studying the nanoscale interactions every year in residence. between bacterial surface molecules and of materials are studied, including metals, natural organic materials in the environ- metal oxides, and zeolites. ment. Applications of this work involve natural and engineered systems, and

Return to Table of Contents Chemical Engineering 49 Non-Thesis Option Zeolite Crystallization the laboratory. The available equipment is A total of 30 credit hours is required, Laboratory used for the design, synthesis and charac- including a minimum of 24 credit hours terization of novel catalytic materials, and This laboratory is equipped for hydrother- in graduate level courses. At least 21 course for reactor analysis. mal syntheses of molecular sieve zeolites credit hours must be in chemical engineer- over a wide range of temperature, chemical ing and 9 of these must be chosen from Fuel Cell Laboratory (FCL) composition and hydrodynamic condi- the core curriculum. A maximum of 6 A 5 cm2 and a 25 cm2 proton-exchange tions. The objective is to understand how credit hours of independent study under membrane (PEM) fuel cell test station- zeolites nucleate and grow. the faculty advisor may be part of the complete with flow, pressure, humid- program. Synthesis results are characterized by opti- ity and temperature controllers, and an cal and electron microscopy, X-ray diffrac- external electronic load (HP Model No. For the Ph.D. tion and particle size analysis. 6060B) with a power supply (Lambda Upon completion of the comprehensive LFS-46-5)-are available. In addition, a qualifying examination, candidates must Heat and Mass Transfer direct methanol fuel cell (DMFC) is avail- present a research proposal in order to Laboratory able. A hot press, Carver Model C-along acquaint members of the faculty with the This laboratory is mainly computational. with other equipment for casting mem- chosen research topic. Workstations are dedicated to the appli- branes and for fabricating membrane-elec- cation of computational fluid dynamics trode assemblies (MEAs) including catalyst Chemical Engineering (CFD) to transport problems in chemical preparation equipment-is available. Laboratories and reaction engineering. Current research A cell for studying conductivity at differ- interests include simulation of flow and Centers ent relative humidities and temperatures heat transfer in packed-bed reactors and is available. Other equipment includes a Biological Interaction Forces membrane reactors. Capabilities also exist Solartron SI 1260 AC Impedance Analyzer Laboratory in this lab for simulation of gas dynamics and a rotating disc electrode. The available in microchannels. Experimental facilities All of the experimental work in this lab is equipment allows design and thorough include the measurement of heat and mass characterization of new fuel cells, includ- geared at characterizing microbiological transfer coefficients in packed columns. and biological systems (bacterial cells, bio- ing cyclic voltammetry and frequency polymers, other types of cells, etc.) at the Catalyst and Reaction analysis. nanoscale. The main piece of equipment Engineering Laboratory (CREL) Center for Inorganic Membrane used is an atomic force microscope, which A large variety of equipment is available can operate in liquids or under ambient Studies (CIMS) in CREL for catalyst preparation and The goals of the Center for Inorganic conditions. Computers with sophisticated characterization, and detailed kinetic image analysis software are used to quan- Membrane Studies are to develop industry studies. This includes various reactors and university collaboration for inorganic tify phenomena observed in the images. such as several packed-bed reactors, a Parr A laminar flow hood is used for working membrane research, and to promote and reactor, a slurry reactor, a membrane reac- expand the science of inorganic mem- with sterile cultures with ample wet chem- tor, a porous-walled tubular reactor and istry space to do preparative work. branes as a technological base for indus- an adiabatic tubular reactor with several trial applications through fundamental Microfluidics and Biosensors thermocouples for monitoring tempera- research. An interdisciplinary approach has Laboratory ture. All necessary analytical instruments been taken by the center to assemble all are also available, such as several microbal- of the essential skills in synthesis, model- The research work in this laboratory fo- ances, volumetric BET apparatus, mercury cuses on integrated microfluidic platform ing, material characterization, diffusion porosimeter, several gas chromatographs, measurements and general properties for biomedical applications. Finite element a Perkin-Elmer GC-MS with Q-Mass 910 simulation is applied for the study of determinations of inorganic membranes. mass spectrometer, Nicolet Magna-IR 560 Current projects include dense Pd and Pd/ microfluidics transport and surface reac- FTIR with DRIFT cell for catalyst surface tion kinetics and the design of chip based alloy membrane synthesis, and reactive characterization, Rosemount Chemilumi- membrane studies, fouling and transport device. Fabrication of microfluidic biochip nescence NO/NOx Analyzer NGA 2000 by micro/nano manufacturing technolo- studies, and characterization of membrane and a TEOM Series 1500 PMA Pulse stability. Facilities including SEM with gies is of interest in this laboratory. Avail- Mass Analyzer for TPD/TGA experiments. able equipments include ac impedance EDX , XRD, and several membrane test- Other available equipment in CREL ing units are available. analyzer and surface plasmon resonance includes hoods, several HPLC liquid feed for the electrical and optical characteriza- pumps; several vacuum pumps; tempera- Fuel Cell Center (FCC) tion of the biomolecules assembly at the ture, pressure and flow monitors and con- The Fuel Cell Center is a University/ chip surface. Novel micro-and nano- trollers, furnaces, vacuum oven, diffusion materials and fabrication technology for industry alliance comprising industrial cell, and all necessary glassware and other members, faculty members, staff, and neuron science and novel nanoassembly laboratory supplies for catalyst preparation for petroleum purification are other two graduate and undergraduate students. The and testing. In addition, several Macintosh faculty members of FCC come from the thrusts of interest. computers and PCs are available within

50 Chemical Engineering Return to Table of Contents various departments at WPI. The research CHE 506. Kinetics and Catalysis* ming is necessary; however, a backround at the is performed in the various laboratories Theories of reaction kinetics and heterogeneous introductory level in quantum mechanics is highly of the faculty members. The industrial catalysis for simple and complex reactions. desirable. Methods to be explored include density functional theory, ab initio methods, semiempiri- members represent companies or other ­Kinetics and mechanisms of catalyzed and uncatalyzed reactions, and effects of bulk and cal molecular orbital theory, and visualization organizations with interest in fuel cell pore diffusion. Techniques for experimentation, software for the graphical display of molecules. technology, including fuel cell companies, reaction data treatment, and catalyst preparation CHE 561. Advanced Thermodynamics* automobile manufacturers, utilities, pe- and characterization. Examination of the fundamental concepts of troleum companies, chemical companies, CHE 507. Chemical Reactor Design* classical thermodynamics and presentation of ex- catalysis companies, etc. Includes a review of batch, tubular and stirred istence theorems for thermodynamics properties. The objectives of the FCC are: (1) to tank reactor design. Kinetics review including Inequality of Clausius as a criterion for equi- perform research and development of fuel advanced chemical kinetics and biochemical kinet- librium in both chemical and physical systems. ics, and transport processes in heterogeneous reac- Examination of thermodynamic equilibrium for cells, fuel reformers and related compo- tions. In-depth reactor analysis includes fixed bed a variety of restraining conditions. Applications nents for mobile and stationary applica- reactors, multiplicity and stability of steady states, to fluid mechanics, process systems and chemical tions; (2) to educate graduate and under- reactor dynamics, optimal operation and control, systems. Computation of complex equilibria. graduate students in fuel cell technology; biological reactors, nonideal flow patterns, and CHE 571. Intermediate Transport fluidized bed and multiphase reactors. and (3) to facilitate technology transfer Phenomena* between the University and industry. The CHE 510. Dynamics of Particulate Systems Mass, momentum and energy transport; analytic current projects include development of Analyzes discrete particles which grow in size or in and approximate solutions of the equations of proton-exchange membrane (PEM) fuel some other characteristic variable (e.g., age, molec- change. Special flow problems such as creeping, cells, direct methanol fuel cells (DMFCs), ular weight). Reaction engineering and population potential and laminar boundary-layer flows. Heat molten carbonate fuel cells (MCFCs), balance analyses for batch and continuous sys- and mass transfer in multicomponent systems. Es- timation of heat and mass transfer rates. Transport microbial fuel cells, fuel cell stacks, mem- tems. Steady state and transient system dynamics. Topics may include crystallization, latex synthesis, with chemical reaction. brane reformers, microreformers, reformer polymer molecular weight distribution, fermenta- CHE 573. Separation Processes* catalysis, fuel cell electrocatalysis, compos- tion/ ecological systems and gas-solid systems. ite proton-exchange membranes, inorganic Thermodynamics of equilibrium separation ­processes such as distillation, absorption, adsorp- membranes, and transport and reaction CHE 521. Biochemical Engineering Ligand binding and membrane transport tion and extraction. Multistaged separations. modeling. processes, growth kinetics of animal cells and Principles and processes of some of the less com- micro-organisms, kinetics of interacting multiple mon separations. Course Descriptions populations, biological reactor design and analysis, CHE 574. Fluid Mechanics* soluble immobilized enzyme kinetics, optimiza- All courses are 3 credits unless otherwise noted. Advanced treatment of fluid kinematics and tion and control of fermentation, biopolymer *Core chemical engineering courses. dynamics. Stress and strain rate analysis using structure and function, properties of biological vectors and tensors as tools. Incompressible and CHE 501-502. Seminar molecules, biological separation processes, scale-up compressible one-dimensional flows in channels, 0 credits of bioprocesses; laboratory work may be included ducts and nozzles. Nonviscous and viscous flow Reports on current advances in the various when possible. branches of chemical engineering or on graduate fields. Boundary layers and turbulence. Flow research in progress. Must be taken during every CHE 531. Fuel Cell Technology through porous media such as fixed and fluidized semester in residence. The course provides an overview of the various beds. Two-phase flows with drops, bubbles and/or types of fuel cells followed by a detailed discus- boiling. Introduction to non-Newtonian flows. CHE 503. Colloquium sion of the proton-exchange membrane (PEM) CHE 580. Special Topics 0 credits fuel cell fundamentals: thermodynamics relations This course will focus on various topics of current Presentations on scientific advances by recognized including cell equilibrium, standard potentials, interest related to faculty research experience. experts in various fields of chemical engineering and Nernst equation; transport and adsorption in and related disciplines. The course will be graded proton-exchange membranes and supported liquid CHE 594/FP 574. Process Safety on a Pass/Fail basis. electrolytes; transport in gas-diffusion electrodes; Management kinetics and catalysis of electrocatalytic reactions This course provides basic skills in state-of-the-art CHE 504. Mathematical Analysis in including kinetics of elementary reactions, the process safety management and hazard analysis Chemical Engineering* Butler-Volmer equation, reaction routes and techniques including hazard and operability Methods of mathematical analysis selected from mechanisms; kinetics of overall anode and cathode studies (HAZOP), logic trees, failure modes and such topics as vector analysis, matrices, complex reactions for hydrogen and direct methanol fuel effects analysis (FMEA) and consequence analysis. variables, eigenvalue problems, Fourier analysis, cells; and overall design and performance charac- Both qualitative and quantitative evaluation meth- Fourier transforms, Laplace transformation, teristics of PEM fuel cells. ods will be utilized. Following a case study format, solution of ordinary and partial differential equa- these techniques, along with current regulatory tions, integral equations, calculus of variation and CHE 554/CH 554. Molecular Modeling requirements, will be applied through class proj- numerical analysis. Emphasis on application to the This course trains students in the area of molecu- ects addressing environmental health, industrial solution of chemical engineering problems. lar modeling using a variety of quantum mechani- hygiene, hazardous materials, and fire or explosion cal and force field methods. The approach will be hazard scenarios. (Prerequisite: An undergraduate toward practical applications, for researchers who engineering or physical science background.) want to answer specific questions about molecular geometry, transition states, reaction paths and photoexcited states. No experience in program-

Return to Table of Contents Chemical Engineering 51 Chemistry and Biochemistry www.wpi.edu/+chemistry

Faculty J. MacDonald, Associate Professor; Ph.D., Degree Requirements University of Minnesota; porous crystal- A. Gericke, Professor and Department line materials composed of organic & Because graduate education in chemistry Head; Dr.rer.nat., University of Hamburg; coordination compounds, polymorphism and biochemistry is primarily research biophysical characterization of lipid-­ of pharmaceutical drugs, crystallization oriented, there are few formal departmen- mediated protein function, development of proteins, surpramolecular assembly on tal course requirements in the graduate of vibrational spectroscopic tools to surfaces. program. However, it is expected that each characterize biological tissue. graduate student will take graduate level courses in areas of chemistry and bio- J. M. Argüello, Professor; Ph.D., Univer- Research Interests chemistry that are relevant to their field of sidad Nacional de Río Cuarto, Argentina; The three major areas of research in the specialization, as well as seminar courses. transmembrane ion transport, metal- department are: Entering students who have deficiencies in ATPases structure-function, bacterial metal • Biochemistry and biophysics. Within specific areas (inorganic, organic, physical, homeostasis, role os metals in bacterial this area there is active research on a or biochemistry), as revealed by prelimi- pathogenesis. number of topics including heavy metal nary examinations, will take appropriate transport and metal homeostasis of S. C. Burdette, Assistant Professor; Ph.D., courses to correct these deficiencies. Massachusetts Institute of Technology; both plants and bacteria, computational PhD students should select a research synthesis of fluorescent sensors for iron, biochemistry/biophysics of membrane advisor no later than at the end of the first photoactive chelators for delivery of metal proteins, enzyme structure and function, semester of residence, and MS students ions in cells, applications of azobenzene and others. should select an advisor no later than at derivatives with unusual optical properties, • Molecular Design and Synthesis. Within the end of the first term (first seven weeks). polymers to detect metal contaminants in this area there is active research on top- the environment. ics encompassing organic synthesis and For the M.S. medicinal chemistry, supramolecular R. E. Connors, Professor; Ph.D., North- materials, metal ion sensors and chela- Each student should select a research eastern University; photochemistry, tors, polymorphism in pharmaceutical advisor by the end of the first semester spectroscopy, time-resolved fluorescence, drugs, spectroscopy and photophysical of residence. Special requirements of the photocatalysis, molecular modeling, singlet properties of molecules, catalysis for Chemistry and Biochemistry Department oxygen production and storage. C-H functionalization, and more. are that MS candidates must submit and defend a thesis based on research con- R. E. Dempski, Assistant Professor; • Nanotechnology. This research area en- ducted under the direction of a faculty Ph.D., Massachusetts Institute of Tech- compasses such projects as photonic and member during his or her tenure at WPI. nology; structure-function of membrane nonlinear optical materials, nanoporous The thesis committee consists of at least proteins in situ, fluorescence resonance and microporous crystals of organic and three members, two of whom must belong energy transfer, biochemical and biophysi- coordination compounds, molecular to the CBC Department faculty. cal approaches to ion transport. interactions at surfaces, and others. J. P. Dittami, Professor; Ph.D., Rensselaer For the Ph.D. Polytechnic Institute; medicinal chemistry, Programs of Study Each student should select a research organic synthesis, new synthetic methods The Department of Chemistry and advisor by the end of the first semester of development. ­Biochemistry offers the M.S. and Ph.D. residence. At the end of the first semester in both Chemistry and Biochemistry. The of the second year of residence, the student M. H. Emmert, Assistant Professor; major areas of research in the department Ph.D., Universität Münster, Germany; must submit a written and an oral progress are biochemistry and biophysics, molecular report in the dissertation committee of transition metal catalysts for C-H func- design and synthesis, and nanotechnology. tionalization and CO2 reduction, sustain- at least four faculty members, including able syntheses, and new reagents for direct Admission Requirements the Research Advisor, at least two more aminations of C-H bonds. members of the Department, and at least A B.S. degree with demonstrated profi- one person from outside the Department. G. A. Kaminski, Associate Professor; ciency in chemistry or biochemistry is The committee will consider the student’s Ph.D., Yale University; computational required for entrance to Chemistry and progress and will recommend to the physical and biophysical chemistry, force Biochemistry graduate programs. department whether the student should be field development, protein structure and allowed to continue toward a Ph.D. binding, host-guest complex formation, solvation effects.

52 Chemistry and Biochemistry Return to Table of Contents Qualifying Examination CH 536. Theory and Applications CH 554/CHE 554. Molecular Modeling Before formal admission to the doctoral of NMR Spectroscopy This course trains students in the area of molecu- candidacy, Ph.D. students must take the This course emphasizes the fundamental aspects lar modeling using a variety of quantum mechani- qualifying examination in their field of of 1D and 2D nuclear magnetic resonance spec- cal and force field methods. The approach will be troscopy (NMR). The theory of pulsed Fourier toward practical applications, for researchers who specialization. The examination should transform NMR is presented through the use of want to answer specific questions about molecular take place before the end of the second vector diagrams. A conceptual nonmathemati- geometry, transition states, reaction paths and year of residence. cal approach is employed in discussion of NMR photoexcited states. No experience in program- theory. The course is geared toward an audience ming is necessary; however, a backround at the Dissertation which seeks an understanding of NMR theory introductory level in quantum mechanics is highly To fulfill the final PhD degree requirement and an appreciation of the practical applications of desirable. Methods to be explored include density the candidate must submit and defend a NMR in chemical analysis. Students are exposed functional theory, ab initio methods, semiempiri- to hands-on NMR operation. Detailed instruc- cal molecular orbital theory, and visualization satisfactory dissertation to the dissertation tions are provided and each student is expected to software for the graphical display of molecules. committee. carry out his or her own NMR experiments on a Bruker AVANCE 400 MHz NMR spectrometer. CH 555. Advanced Topics Chemistry and 1 to 3 credits as arranged CH 538. Medicinal Chemistry A course of advanced study in selected areas whose Biochemistry Research This course will focus on the medicinal chemistry content and format varies to suit the interest and aspects of drug discovery from an industrial phar- needs of faculty and students. This course may be Laboratories maceutical research and development perspective. repeated for different topics covered. The Chemistry and Biochemistry Research Topics will include chemotherapeutic agents (such as antibacterial, antiviral and antitumor agents) CH 560. Current Topics in Biochemistry Laboratories are located in Goddard Hall 1 credit per semester and at Gateway Park. Department facilities and pharmacodynamic agents (such as antihyper- tensive, antiallergic, antiulcer and CNS agents). In this seminar course, a different topic is selected and instrumentation in individual research (Prerequisite: A good foundation in organic chem- each semester. Current articles are read and laboratories include 500 and 400 MHz istry, e.g., CH 2310 Organic Chemistry I and analyzed. FT-NMR, GC-MS, GC, HPLC, capillary CH 2320 Organic Chemistry II.) CH 561. Functional Genomics electrophoresis, DSC (differential scanning CH 540. Regulation of Gene Expression 1 credit per semester In this seminar course, students will present and calorimeter), TGA (thermogravometric 2 credits analysis), polarizing optical stereomicro- This course covers the biochemical mecha- critically analyze selected, recent publications in scope, FT-IR, UV-VIS absorption, fluores- nisms involved in regulation of gene expression: functional genomics. The course will conclude cence and phosphorescence spectroscopy; modifications of DNA structures that influence with a written project, either a mini-grant transcription rates, transcriptional regulation, proposal or an analysis of publicly available data in powder and single crystal x-ray diffrac- a research manuscript format. The course will be tometers, cyclic voltammetry, impedence post-transcriptional processing of RNA includ- ing splicing and editing, nuclear/cytoplasmic offered in alternate years in lieu of CH 560, may spectroscopy, ellipsometer, quartz crystal transport, regulation of translation, and factors be repeated as many times as offered, and satisfies microbalance, grazing incidence IR, that control the half-lives of both mRNA and the department’s requirement for a graduate atomic force microscope (AFM), and other protein. During the course, common experimental seminar in biochemistry. This course is offered by surface-related facilities. Additional equip- methods are explored, including a discussion of special arrangement only, based on expressed student interest. ment in the biochemistry area include: the information available from each method. centrifugues, ultra-centrifugues, PCR, CH 541. Membrane Biophysics CH 571. Seminar phospho imager, scintillation counter, 2 credits 1 credit per semester FPLC, bacteria and eukaryotic cell culture This course will focus on different areas of Reports on current advances in the various branches of chemistry. and plant growth facilities. The depart- biophysics with special emphasis on membrane ment is exceptionally well set up with phenomena. The biomedical-biological impor- CH 598. Directed Research computer facilities and is also linked to the tance of biophysical phenomena will be stressed. The course will begin with an introduction to CH 599. M.S. Thesis University’s network. the molecular forces relevant in biological media CH 699. Ph.D. Dissertation and subsequently develop the following topics: Course Descriptions membrane structure and function; channels, carri- All courses are 3 credits unless otherwise noted. ers and pumps; nerve excitation and related topics; and molecular biophysics of motility. Topics will CH 516. Chemical Spectroscopy be developed assuming a good understanding of The emphasis is on using a variety of spectroscop- protein and lipid chemistry, enzyme kinetics, cell ic data to arrive at molecular structures, particu- biology, and electricity. larly of organic molecules. Major emphasis is on H- and C-NMR, IR and MS. There is relatively little emphasis on theory or on sampling handling techniques.

Return to Table of Contents Chemistry and Biochemistry 53 The following graduate/undergraduate CH 4330. Organic Synthesis CH 4520. Chemical Statistical Mechanics chemistry courses are also available for A discussion of selected modern synthetic This course deals with how the electronic, transla- graduate credit. methods including additions, condensations and tional, rotational and vibrational energy levels of cyclizations. Emphasis is placed on the logic and individual molecules, or of macromolecular sys- CH 4110. Biochemistry I strategy of organic synthesis. (Recommended tems are statistically related to the energy, entropy The principles of protean structure are presented. background: CH 2310, CH 2320 and CH 2330, and free energy of macroscopic systems, taking Mechanisms of enzymatic catalysis, including or the equivalent.) This course will be offered in into account the quantum mechanical properties those requiring coenzymes, are outlined in detail. 2012-13 and in alternate years thereafter. of the component particles. Ensembles, partition The structures and biochemical properties of functions, and Boltzmann, Fermi/Dirac and Bose- carbohydrates are reviewed. Bioenergetics, the role CH 4420. Inorganic Chemistry II Einstein statistics are used. A wealth of physical of ATP, and its production through glycolysis and Complexes of the transition metals are discussed. chemical phenomena, including material related the TCA cycle are fully considered. Covered are the electronic structures of transition to solids, liquids, gases, spectroscopy and chemical metal and ions, and the topological and reactions are made understandable by the concepts CH 4120. Biochemistry II electronic structures of their complexes. Symmetry Oriented around biological membranes, this term learned in this course. This course will be offered concepts are developed early in the course and in 2011-12 and in alternate years thereafter. begins with a discussion of electron transport used throughout to simplify treatments of elec- and the aerobic production of ATP, followed tronic structure. The molecular orbital approach by a study of photosynthesis. The study of the to bonding is emphasized. The pivotal area of biosynthesis of lipids and steroids leads to a dis- organotransition metal chemistry is introduced, cussion of the structure and function of biological with focus on complexes of carbon monoxide, membranes. Finally, the membrane processes in metal-metal interactions in clusters, and catlysis neurotransmission are discussed. (Recommended by metal complexes. (Recommended background: background: CH 4110.) CH 2310 and CH 2320, or equivalent.) This CH 4130. Biochemistry III course will be offered in 2011-12 and in alternate This course presents a thorough analysis of the years thereafter. biosynthesis of DNA (replication), RNA (tran- scription) and proteins (translation), and of their biochemical precursors. Proteins and RNAs have distinct lifetimes within the living cell; thus the destruction of these molecules is an important biochemical process that is also discussed. In ad- dition to mechanistic studies, regulation of these processes is covered.

54 Chemistry and Biochemistry Return to Table of Contents www.wpi.edu/+cee Civil and Environmental Engineering

Faculty B. J. O’Rourke, Adjunct Instructor; J.D., Master of Science and Boston College, M.S., Cornell University T. El-Korchi, Professor and Department Doctor of Philosophy Head; Ph.D., University of New R. Pietroforte, Associate Professor; Ph.D., The graduate programs in civil engineer- Hampshire; glass fiber reinforced cement Massachusetts Institute of Technology; ing and environmental engineering are composites, tensile testing techniques, construction management, construction arranged to meet the interests and objec- materials durability. economics, architectural engineering. tives of the individual student. Through consultation with an advisor and appropri- L. D. Albano, Associate Professor; Ph.D., J. D. Plummer, Associate Professor and Schweber Professorship in Environmental ate selection from the courses listed in this Massachusetts Institute of Technology; catalog, independent graduate study and performance-based design of buildings, Engineering; Ph.D., University of Mas- sachusetts, Amherst; surface water quality, concentrated effort in a research or project design and behavior of building structures activity, a well-planned program may be in fire conditions, integration of design fecal source tracking, alternative disinfec- tion strategies. achieved. Students may take acceptable and construction. courses in other departments or those ap- W. Bates, Adjunct Instructor; Ph.D., N. Rahbar, Assistant Professor; Ph.D.; proved for graduate credit. The complete Worcester Polytechnic Institute Princeton University; atomistic simula- program must be approved by the stu- tions, bioinspired design of materials, dent’s advisor and the Graduate Program U. Berardi, Assistant Teaching Professor; contact mechanics and adhesion, compu- Coordinator. Ph.D., Politecnico di Bari; building acous- tational analysis. tics, green technologies, sustainability. The faculty have a broad range of teaching A. Sakulich, Assistant Professor; Ph.D., and research interests. Through courses, J. Bergendahl, Associate Professor; Ph.D., Drexel University; sustainability of infra- projects and research, students gain excel- University of Connecticut; industrial and structure materials, alternative binders, lent preparation for rewarding careers in domestic wastewater treatment, particulate and advanced civil engineering systems. many sectors of engineering including processes in the environment, chemical consulting, industry, government and oxidation of contaminants. G. F. Salazar, Associate Professor; Ph.D., Massachusetts Institute of Technology; education. B. Beverly, Adjunct Instructor; M.S., integration of design and construction, Worcester Polytechnic Institute models and information technology, Graduate programs may be developed L. Burdi, Adjunct Instructor; Doctor of cooperative agreements. in the following areas: Design, Harvard University. W. Sung, Adjunct Instructor; Ph.D., Cali- Structural Engineering F. L. Hart, Professor; Ph.D., University fornia Institute of Technology Courses from the structural offerings, of Connecticut; water quality changes M. Tao, Associate Professor; Ph.D., Case combined with appropriate mathemat- in distribution systems, tracer analysis of Western Reserve University; soil mechan- ics, mechanics and other courses, provide reactors, water quality changes in wet pipe ics, geotechnical-pavement engineer- opportunities to pursue programs ranging fire sprinklers. ing, geo-material characterization and from theoretical mechanics and analysis to W. F. Kearney Jr., Adjunct Instructor; modeling. structural design and materials research. M.S., Worcester Polytechnic Institute. There are ample opportunities for research S. Van Dessel, Assistant Teaching and project work in mechanics, structures Y. Kim, Assistant Professor; Ph.D., Texas Professor; Ph.D., University of Florida, and construction utilizing campus facilities A&M University; smart structures, struc- Gainesville. and in cooperation with area consulting tural health monitoring, control theory and and contracting firms. The integration of applications, modeling of complex systems, Programs of Study design and construction into a cohesive fuzzy logic theory and applications. The Department of Civil and Environ- master builder plan of studies is available. R. B. Mallick, Professor and White Chair; mental Engineering (CEE) offers graduate (See page 56). Ph.D., Auburn University; nondestructive programs leading to the degrees of master of science, master of engineering and doc- The structural engineering research topics testing, highway design, pavement mate- in the recent past at WPI are as follows – rial characterization. tor of philosophy. The department also offers graduate and advanced certificate structural vibration control; structural P. P. Mathisen, Associate Professor; Ph.D., programs. Full- and part-time study is health monitoring; system identification; Massachusetts Institute of Technology; wa- available. design and analysis of smart structures; ter resources and environmental fluid dy- high impact response analysis; control and namics, contaminant fate and transport in monitoring; three-dimensional dynamic groundwater and surface water, exchanges response of tall buildings to stochastic across the sediment-water interface. winds; the inelastic dynamic response of tall buildings to earthquakes; evaluation of

Return to Table of Contents Civil and Environmental Engineering 55 structural performance during fire Engineering and Construction engineering program include micro/nano conditions; structural design agents for Designed to assist the development of characterization and micro/nano mechan- building design; finite element methods professionals knowledgeable in the design/ ics of construction materials, synthesizing for nonlinear analysis; finite element construction engineering processes, labor ‘greener’ cementitious materials (geopoly- analysis of shell structures for dynamic and and legal relations, and the organization mers) from industrial wastes, understand- instability analysis; and box girder bridges. and use of capital. The program has been ing fundamental behavior of granular ma- terials, energy harvesting from pavements, Environmental Engineering developed for those students interested in the development and construction of reduction of pavement temperatures and The environmental engineering program large-scale facilities. The program includes urban heat island effects, high reclaimed is designed to meet the needs of engineers four required courses: CE 580, CE 584, asphalt pavement (RAP) recycling, use and scientists in the environmental field. CE 587 and FIN 500. (FIN 500 can be of geosynthetics, phase changing materi- Coursework provides a strong founda- substituted by an equivalent 3-credit-hour als, Superpave technology, pavement tion in both the theoretical and practical course approved by the department.) It smoothness and ride quality measurement, aspects of the environmental engineering must also include any two of the following recycled asphalt materials, and implemen- discipline, while project and research ac- courses: CE 581, CE 582, CE 583 and tation of innovation in transportation tivities allow for in-depth investigation of CE 586. The remaining courses include a management and other transportation- current and emerging topics. Courses are balanced choice from other civil engineer- related topics. offered in the broad areas of water quality ing and management courses as approved and waste treatment. Topics covered in Interdisciplinary M.S. Program by the advisor. It is possible to integrate classes include: hydraulics and hydrol- in Construction Project a program in design and construction to ogy; physical, chemical and biological develop a cohesive master builder plan of Management treatment systems for water, wastewater, studies. Active areas of research include The interdisciplinary M.S. program in hazardous waste and industrial waste; integration of design and construction, construction project management com- modeling of contaminant transport and models and information technology, bines offerings from several disciplines transformations; water quality and water cooperative agreements, and international including civil engineering, management resources. construction. science, business and economics. Re- Current research interests in the environ- quirements for the degree are similar to mental engineering program span a wide Transportation Engineering the master of science in engineering and range of areas. These areas include micro- The transportation engineering program is construction management program. bial contamination of source waters, col- to provide a center for learning and educa- loid and surface chemistry, physiochemical tion for the engineers who will design, Master of Engineering treatment processes, disinfection, pollution build and maintain tomorrow’s highway The master of engineering degree is a prevention for industries, treatment of haz- infrastructure. professional practice-oriented degree. The degree is available both for WPI under- ardous and industrial wastes, hydraulic and The transportation engineering program environmental fluid dynamics and coastal graduate students who wish to remain at is a multidisciplinary interdepartmental the university for an additional year to ob- processes, contaminant fate and trans- program designed to prepare students port in groundwater and surface water, tain both a bachelor of science and a mas- for careers designing, maintaining and ter of engineering, as well as for students exchanges between surface and subsurface managing highway infrastructure systems. waters, and storm water quality control. possessing a B.S. degree who wish to enroll Students gain proficiency in transportation in graduate school to seek this degree. At Research facilities include the Environ- engineering in two complementary ways: mental Laboratory and several computing present, the M.E. program is offered in the projects and coursework. Projects focus on following two areas of concentration: laboratories. Additional opportunities are developing improved practical methods, provided through collaborative research procedures and techniques. Coursework Master Builder projects with nearby Alden Research Labo- is focused on practical aspects of infra- ratory, an independent hydraulics research The master builder program is designed structure technology needed by practicing for engineering and construction profes- laboratory with large-scale experimental engineers. facilities. sionals who wish to better understand Research in the transportation engineer- the industry’s complex decision-making Geotechnical Engineering ing program is sponsored by a variety of environment and to accelerate their career Course offerings in soil mechanics, geo- private and governmental organizations paths as effective project team leaders. technical and geoenvironmental engineer- including the U. S. Federal Highway This is a practice-oriented program that ing may be combined with structural Administration, the National Cooperative builds upon a project-based curriculum engineering and engineering mechanics Highway Research Program, the Mas- and uses a multidisciplinary approach to courses, as well as other appropriate uni- sachusetts Highway Department, The problem solving for the integration of versity offerings. Maine Department of Transportation, the planning, design, construction and facility New England Transportation Consortium, management. It emphasizes hands-on the National Science Foundation and experience with information technology others. Some of the more active research and teamwork. areas being pursued in the transportation

56 Civil and Environmental Engineering Return to Table of Contents Environmental For the Ph.D. The primary subfield will provide the The environmental master of engineering Ph.D. applicants must have earned a student with competence required for program concentrates on the collection, bachelor’s or master’s degree. Applicants the analysis of problems encountered in storage, treatment and distribution of will be evaluated based on their academic practice and the design of engineering ­industrial and municipal water resources background, professional experience, and processes, systems and facilities. Sub- and on pollution prevention and the other supporting application material. As fields are currently available in structural treatment and disposal of industrial and the dissertation is a significant part of the engineering, engineering and construction municipal wastes. Ph.D., applicants are encouraged, prior to management, highway and transportation submitting an application, to make con- engineering, geotechnical engineering, Admission Requirements tact with CEE faculty performing research materials engineering, geohydrology, water in the area the applicant wishes to pursue. quality management, water resources, For the M.S. waste management, and impact engineer- An ABET accredited B.S. degree in civil Degree Requirements ing. The sub-field requirements are satis- engineering (or another acceptable engi- fied by completing two thematically relat- neering field) is required for admission For the M.S. ed graduate courses that have been agreed to the M.S. program in civil engineering. The completion of 30 semester hours of upon by both the student and the advisor Applicants are expected to have the neces- credit, of which 6 credits must be research as appropriate to the program of study. sary academic preparation and aptitude to or project work, is required. A non-thesis In addition to the subfields noted above, succeed in a challenging graduate pro- alternative consisting of 33 semester other appropriate areas may be identified gram. Students who do not have an ABET hours is also available. In addition to civil as long as it is clear that the courses repre- accredited B.S. degree may wish to enroll and environmental engineering courses, sent advanced work and complement the in the inderdisciplinary M.S. program. students also may take courses relevant to program. Coursework and other academic experiences to fulfill this requirement will For the environmental engineering their major area from other departments. be defined in the integrated Plan of Study program, a B.S. degree in civil, chemical Students who do not have the appropri- at the start of the program. or mechanical engineering is normally ate undergraduate background for the required. However, students with a B.S. graduate courses in their program may be required to supplement the 30 semes- Transfer between M.S. and in other engineering disciplines as well M.E. Program as physical and life sciences are eligible, ter hours with additional undergraduate provided they have met the undergraduate studies. A student may transfer from the M.E. program to the M.S. program at any math and science requirements of the civil For the M.E. and environmental engineering program. time. A student may transfer from the The master of engineering degree requires A course in the area of fluid mechanics is M.S. program to the M.E. program only the completion of an integrated program also required. As for the civil engineering after an integrated program of study has of study that is formulated with a CEE degree program, applicants are expected to been agreed upon by the student and the faculty advisor at the start of the course have the necessary background preparation advisor in the area of concentration and of study. The program and subsequent and aptitude to succeed in a challenging approved by the CEE department head or modifications thereof must be submitted graduate program. All graduates of this the Graduate Program Coordinator. to and approved by the CEE department option will receive a master of science in head or the Graduate Program Coordina- For the Ph.D. environmental engineering. tor, when they are developed or changed. Doctoral students must satisfactorily For the interdisciplinary M.S. program The program requires the completion of complete a qualifying examination ad- in construction project management, 30 semester hours of credit. The following ministered within the first 18 credits of students with degrees in areas such as activities must be fulfilled through comple- admission into the Ph.D. program. The architecture, management engineering and tion of the courses noted or by appropriate purpose of the qualifying examination is civil engineering technology are normally documentation by the department head or to assess the student’s ability to succeed accepted to this program. Management graduate program coordinator: experience at the Ph.D. level and also to identify engineering students may be required to with complex project management (CE strengths and weaknesses in order to plan complete up to one year of undergraduate 593 Advanced Project), competence in an appropriate sequence of courses. The civil engineering courses before working integration of computer applications and exam is administered by a four member on the M.S. information technology (CE 587 Building committee consisting of the major advisor Information Modeling), and knowledge in and three other members selected by the For the M.E. the area of professional business practices major advisor. A B.S. degree in civil engineering (or and ethics (CE 501 Professional Practice). In addition to the university requirements another acceptable engineering field) is re- The program shall also include course- for the Ph.D. degree, the CEE department quired for admission to the M.E. program work in at least two subfields of civil and requires students to establish a minor and in civil engineering. environmental engineering that are related to pass a comprehensive examination. to the M.E. area of specialization. Students must establish a minor outside

Return to Table of Contents Civil and Environmental Engineering 57 their major area. This may be accom- Fuller Environmental Laboratory Geo/Water Resources plished with three courses in the approved The Fuller Laboratory is designed for Laboratory minor area. One member of the student’s state-of-the-art environmental analyses, The geo-water resources laboratory is a dissertation committee should represent including water and wastewater testing flexible teaching and research space that the minor area. The student’s disserta- and treatability studies. Major equipment provides support for research, undergradu- tion committee has the authority to make includes an atomic absorption spectro- ate and graduate projects, and courses in decisions on academic matters associated photometer, total organic carbon ana- the areas of geotechnical engineering and with the Ph.D. program. To become a lyzer, UV-Vis spectrophotometer, particle water resources. The laboratory provides candidate for the doctorate, the student counter, an ion chromatograph, and two bench-top laboratory space for complet- must pass a comprehensive examination gas chromatographs. Along with ancillary ing soil and water quality analyses, a administered by the student’s dissertation equipment (such as a centrifuge, auto- flexiblearea for working with larger lab committee. The candidate, on completion clave, incubators, balances, pH meters and configurations that cannot be placed on the and submission of the dissertation, must water purification system), the laboratory bench-top, space for preparing equipment defend it to the satisfaction of the disserta- is equipped for a broad range of physical, and supplies for field investigations, and tion committee. chemical and biological testing. The labo- a secure area for testing, developing, and Civil and Environmental ratory is shared by graduate research proj- storing both field and laboratory equip- ects, graduate and undergraduate courses ment. Laboratory equipment includes Engineering Laboratories (e.g. CE 4060 Environmental Engineering fully automated stress-path-control triaxial The department has three civil and Laboratory) and undergraduate projects. testing system, flexible wall permeameter, and other devices for determining basic environmental engineering laboratories Pavement Research Laboratory (Environmental Lab, Geotechnical Lab, soil properties, and an aquarium and vari- and Materials/Structural Lab), plus The pavement research laboratory provides ety of tanks for demonstrating and testing three computer laboratories located support for graduate research and courses. equipment in water. Field equipment within Kaven Hall, as well as a structural The state of the art array of equipment includes flowmeters, pumps for groundwa- mechanics impact laboratory. The CEE includes compactor, moisture susceptibil- ter sampling, water quality testing probes, laboratories are used by all civil and ity testing equipment, loaded wheel tester and a variety of equipment for hydrologic environmental engineering students and and extraction and recovery equipment. monitoring and water quality testing. faculty. The computer laboratories are The laboratory contains some of the open to all WPI students and faculty. Uses most advanced testing equipment - most Computer Laboratories for all laboratories include formal classes, notable of these are the material testing The CEE Department has a number of student projects, research projects and system, the Model Mobile Load Simulator, computer laboratories that are located in unsupervised student activities. and an array of Non Destructive Test- Kaven Hall and connected to WPI’s net- ing equipment consisting of the Portable work. The computer laboratories contain Structural Mechanics Impact Seismic Property Analyzer, Falling Weight up-to-date computers, network connec- Laboratory Deflectometer and Ground Penetrating tions, and presentation systems. They are The Structural Mechanics Impact Labora- Radar. A major focus of the pavement used for courses, group project work and tory is a teaching and research laboratory. engineering program is on the integration research. The impact laboratory is used to explore of undergraduate and graduate curricu- the behavior of materials and components lum with research projects funded by the Course Descriptions in collisions. Maine Department of Transportation, All courses are 3 credits unless otherwise noted. Federal Highway Administration, New The Structural Mechanics Impact Labora- England Transportation Consortium and CE 501. Professional Practice tory consists of the following major pieces Professional practices in engineering. Legal issues National Science Foundation. of business organizations, contracts and liability; of equipment: business practice of staffing, fee structures, • An Instron Dynatup Model 8250 Materials/Structural Laboratory accounts receivable, negotiation and dispute Instrumented Impact Test System, The Materials/Structural Laboratory is resolution, and loss prevention; marketing and • A high-speed video camera system, set up for materials and structures testing. proposal development; project management involving organizing and staffing, budgeting, • A data acquisition system, The laboratory is utilized for undergradu- ate teaching and projects, and graduate scheduling, performance and monitoring, and • A large-mass drop tower, presentation of deliverables; professionalism, research. The laboratory is equipped for ethics and responsibilities. • A space control desk, and research activities including construction • National Instrument Lab View. materials processing and testing. Materials CE 510. Structural Mechanics tested in this lab include portland cement, Analysis of structural components: uniform and nonuniform torsion of structural shapes, analysis concrete, asphalt, and fiber composites. of determinate and indeterminate beams (includ- The laboratory has several large-load me- ing elastic foundation conditions) by classical chanical testing machines. methods, finite difference equations, numerical integrations, series approximation, elastic stability of beams and frames, lateral stability of beams, beams-columns, analysis of frames including the effect of axial compression.

58 Civil and Environmental Engineering Return to Table of Contents CE 511. Structural Dynamics sufficient for them to understand the workings CE 536. Construction Failures: Analysis Analysis and design of beams and frames under of such programs and the ability to use such and Lessons dynamic loads; dynamics of continuous beams, programs to build models and perform analyses This course develops an understanding of the inte- multistory building frames, floor systems and of contact/impact problems. Topics will include gration process of technical, human, capital, social bridges; dynamic analysis and design of structures explicit time integration, penalty and constraint and institutional aspects that drive the life cycle subjected to wind and earthquake loads; approxi- contact methods, under-integrated element of a construction project. The study of failures mate methods of analysis and practical design formulations, hourglass control, developing finite provides an excellent vehicle to find ways for the applications. element models and performing and interpreting improvement of planning, design and construc- finite element anlaysis results. tion of facilities. Student groups are required to CE 519. Advanced Structural Analysis complete a term project on the investigation of a CE 531. Advanced Design of Energy methods in structural analysis, concepts of failure and present their findings and recommen- Steel Structures force method and displacement methods, methods dations. This investigation includes not only the Advanced design of steel members and con- of relaxation and numerical techniques for the technical analysis of the failure but also requires a nections; ultimate strength design in structural solution of problems in buildings, and long-span comprehensive analysis of the organizational, con- steel; codes and specifications; loads and working structures and aircraft structural systems. Effects tractual and regulatory aspects of the process that stresses; economic proportions; and buckling of of secondary stress in structures. Course may be lead to the failure. The course uses case studies to slender elements and built-up sections, torsion, offered by special arrangement. (Prerequisites: illustrate different types of failure in the planning, lateral-torsional buckling, beam-columns, design Structural mechanics and undergraduate courses design, construction and operation of constructed for lateral forces, and connections for building in structural analysis, differential equations.) facilities. Students taking this course are expected frames. CE 523. Advanced Matrix to have a sound academic or practical background Structural Analysis CE 532. Advanced Design of Reinforced in the disciplines mentioned above. Concrete Structures Matrix methods of structural analysis, displace- CE 538. Pavement Analysis and Design Advanced design of reinforced concrete members ment and flexibility methods; substructuring, for Highways and Airports and structural systems; effect of continuity; codes tall buildings, energy methods, finite elements, This course is designed for civil engineers and will and specifications; ultimate strength theory of including plane stress and strain elements, ap- provide a detailed survey of analysis and design design; economic proportions and constructibility proximate methods, solution of linear systems. concepts for flexible and rigid pavements for considerations; and deep beams, torsion, beam- highways and airports. The materials will cover CE 524/ME 533. Finite Element Method columns, two-way slabs, design for lateral forces, elastic and inelastic theories of stress pavement and Applications and beam-to-column joints. This course serves as an introduction to the basic components and currently used design methods, theory of the finite element method. Topics CE 534. Structural Design for Fire i.e., Corps of Engineers, AASHTO, etc. The use covered include matrix structural analysis variation Conditions of finite element methods for pavement stress and form of differential equations, Ritz and weighted The development of structural analysis and design deformation analysis will be presented. A review residual approximations, and development of methods for steel and reinforced concrete mem- of pavement rehabilitation methods and processes the discretized domain solution. Techniques are bers subjected to elevated temperatures caused by will be presented. (Prerequisites: differential developed in detail for the one- and two-dimen- building fires. Beams, columns and rigid frames equations, construction materials, soil mechanics, sional equilibrium problem. Examples focus on will be covered. The course is based on research computer literacy.) conducted during the past three decades in Eu- elasticity and heat flow with reference to broader CE 542. Geohydrology rope, Canada and the United States. Course may applications. Students are supplied microcom- This course addresses engineering problems as- be offered by special arrangement. (Prerequisites: puter programs and gain experience in solving real sociated with the migration and use of subsurface Knowledge of statically indeterminate structural problems. (Prerequisites: Elementary differential water. An emphasis is placed on the geology of analysis, structural steel design and reinforced equations, solid mechanics and heat flow. Note: water-bearing formations including the study of concrete design.) Students cannot receive credit for both this pertinent physical and chemical characteristics of course and CE/ME 5303 Applied Finite Element CE 535. Integration of Design soil and rock aquifers. Topics include principles of Methods. and Construction groundwater movement, geology of groundwater CE 527/ME 5327. Impact Strength As an interactive case study of the project develop- occurrence, regional groundwater flow, subsurface of Materials ment process, student groups design a facility and characterization, water well technologies, ground- This course provides the student with a basic prepare a construction plan, including cost and water chemistry and unsaturated flow. schedule, to build the project. The students pres- understanding of the mechanics of impact and CE 543. Highway Design and ent their design-build proposal to participating contact as well as the behavior of materials Traffic Safety industrial clients. Emphasis is on developing skills subjected to dynamic loadings. Topics will include This course is an in-depth study of highway safety to generate, evaluate and select design alternatives elastic and plastic stress waves in rods; longitu- as it affects the geometric design of highways. that satisfy the needs of the owner and the con- dinal, torsional and flexure waves; shock waves; Topics include the classification and purposes straints imposed by codes and regulations, as well impulsively loaded beams and plates; impact of of roadway systems, developing safety design as by the availability of construction resources. rough bodies in three dimensions, impact of bod- criteria, the design of safe vertical and horizontal Emphasis is also in developing team-building skills ies with compliance, impact of slender deformable alignments, proper selection of cross-sectional ele- and efficient communication. Computer-based rods, continuum modeling of contact regions and ments, providing adequate sight distance, selection methods for design, construction cost estimating progressive collapse of structures. of appropriate speed limits, control of speeds, and and scheduling, and personal communications are other highway design issues. While there is no CE 529/ME 5329. Impact Finite extensively used. The interactive case study is spe- formal prerequisite, the course presumes a basic Element Analysis cifically chosen to balance the content between de- knowledge of undergraduate highway design as Modern practical contact/impact problems like sign, construction engineering and management. taught in CE 3050. This course is usually offered the design of auotobiles, aircraft, ships, packag- Students taking this course are expected to have a in alternate spring semesters. ing, etc. depend on the use of nonlinear dynamic background in at least two of these disciplines. large-deformation high-strain rate explicit finite element computer programs. The purpose of this course is to provide the student with background

Return to Table of Contents Civil and Environmental Engineering 59 CE 553. Advanced Foundation CE 565. Surface Water Quality Modeling CE 571. Water Chemistry Engineering This course provides a quantitative analysis of This course covers the topics of chemical equilib- This course covers advanced methods of sub- the fate and transport of contaminants in surface rium, acid/base chemistry, the carbonate system, surface exploration and recent developments in water systems. Water quality models are developed solubility of metals, complexation and oxidation- prediction of bearing capacity and settlement of using a mass balance approach to describe the reduction reactions. These principles will be ap- shallow foundations. It includes design of mat transport, dispersal, and chemical/biological reac- plied to understanding of the chemistry of surface foundations, analysis and design of pile and drilled tions of substances introduced into river and lake waters and groundwaters, and to understanding shaft foundations, and discussion of case studies. systems. Topics covered include water quality stan- the behavior of chemical processes used in water The course content is determined in part by the dards, model formulation and application, waste and wastewater treatment. student’s interests and often also includes design of load allocation, and water quality parameters such lateral support systems, reinforced earth, dewater- as biochemical oxygen demand, dissolved oxygen, CE 572. Physical and Chemical ing systems and buried structures. nutrients, and toxic chemicals. Treatment Processes This course presents the physical and chemi- CE 560. Advanced Principles of CE 566. Groundwater Flow and Pollution cal principles for the treatment of dissolved and Water Treatment This course provides a review of the basic prin- particulate contaminants in water and wastewater. Theory and practice of drinking water treat- ciples governing ground water flow and solute These concepts will provide an understanding of ment. Water quality and regulations; physical and transport, and examines the models available the design of commonly used unit operations in chemical unit processes including disinfection, for prediction and analysis including computer treatment systems. Applications will be discussed coagulation, clarification, filtration, membranes, models. Topics covered include mechanics of flow as well. Topics covered include water characteris- air stripping, adsorption, softening, corrosion in porous media; development of the equations of tics, reactor dynamics, filtration, coagulation/floc- control, and other advanced processes. motion and of conservation of solute mass; analyt- culation, sedimentation, adsorption, gas stripping, ical solutions; and computer-based numerical ap- disinfection, and chemical oxidation. CE 561. Advanced Principles of proaches and application to seepage, well analysis, Wastewater Treatment artificial recharge, groundwater pollution, salinity CE 573. Treatment System Hydraulics Theory and practice of wastewater treatment. intrusion and regional groundwater analyses. Hydraulic principles of water, domestic wastewa- Natural purification of streams; screening; ter and industrial wastewater systems. Hydraulic sedimentation; flotation, thickening; aerobic CE 567. Hazardous Waste: Containment, analysis and design of collection, distribution and treatment methods; theory of aeration; anaerobic Treatment and Prevention treatment systems and equipment. Topics covered digestion; disposal methods of sludge including This course provides a survey of the areas as- include pipe and channel flow, pump character- vacuum filtration, centrifugation and drying beds; sociated with hazardous waste management. istics and selection, friction loss, corrosion and wet oxidation; removal of phosphate and nitrogen The course materials deal with identification of material selection. compounds; and tertiary treatment methods. hazardous waste legislation, containment, storage, transport, treatment and other hazardous wastes CE 574. Water Resources Management CE 562. Biosystems in Environmental management issues. Topics include hazardous This course provides an introduction to water Engineering movement and containment strategies, barrier resources engineering and management, with an Application of microbial and biochemical un- design considerations, hazardous waste risk assess- emphasis on water resources protection and water derstanding to river and lake pollution; natural ment, spill response and clean-up technologies, supply. Course content addresses technical aspects purification processes; biological conversion of centralized treatment facilities, on-site treatment, as well as the legal, regulatory and policy aspects important elements such as C, N, S, O and P; in situ treatment, and industrial management and of water resources management. Topics include biological aspects of wastewater treatment; disease- control measures. Design of selected containment surface water hydrology and watershed protection, producing organisms with emphasis on water- and treatment systems, and a number of industrial development of water supplies, conjunctive use of borne diseases; and quantitative methods used in case studies are also covered. This course is offered groundwater and surface water, management of indicator organism counts and disinfection. to students with varying backgrounds. Students reservoirs and rivers, the role of probability and interested in taking this course must identify a statistics, systems analysis techniques, and plan- CE 5621. Open Channel Hydraulics ning of water resources projects. This course begins with fundamentals of free specific problem that deals with either regulation, surface flow, and includes engineering and containment of hazardous waste, treatment of CE 580. Advanced Project Management environmental applications. Development of basic hazardous waste or industrial source reduction of This course develops an understanding of the principles, including specific energy, momen- hazardous waste. This problem becomes the focal managerial principles and techniques used tum and critical flow. Rapidly varied, uniform point for in-depth study. The arrangement of top- throughout a construction project as they are and gradually varied steady flow phenomena ics between the students and the instructor must applied to its planning, preconstruction and and analysis. Density-stratified flow. Similitude be established by the third week. A knowledge of construction phases. The course emphasizes the considerations for hydraulic models. Optional basic chemistry is assumed. integrative challenges of the human, physical topics: dispersion and heat transfer to atmosphere. CE 570. Contaminant Fate and Transport and capital resources as experienced from the Course may be offered by special arrangement. This course introduces the concepts of contami- owner’s point of view in the preconstruction phase of a project. Through assignments and case CE 563. Industrial Waste Treatment nant fate and transport processes in the environ- ment, with consideration to exchanges across studies, the course reviews the complex environ- Legislation; the magnitude of industrial wastes; ment of the construction industry and processes, effects on streams, sewers and treatment units; phase boundaries and the effects of reactions on environmental transport. Topics include equi- project costing and economic evaluation, project physical, chemical and biological characteris- organization, value engineering, time schedul- tics; pretreatment methods; physical treatment librium conditions at environmental interfaces, partitioning and distribution of contaminants in ing, contracting and risk allocation alternatives, methods; chemical treatment methods; biologi- contract administration, and cost and time control cal treatment methods; and wastes from specific the environment, transport and exchange pro- cesses in surface water; dispersion, sorption, and techniques. (Prerequisites: CE 3020, CE 3025, industries. Lab includes characterization and or equivalent.) treatment of typical industrial wastes. the movement of non-aqueous phase liquids in ground-water, and local, urban and regional scale transport processes in the atmosphere.

60 Civil and Environmental Engineering Return to Table of Contents CE 581. Real Estate Development CE 586. Building Systems CE 591. Environmental Engineering Principles of real estate development, emphasizing This course introduces design concepts, Seminar the system approach to the process of conception, components, materials and processes for major Participation of students in discussing topics of design, construction and operation; organization building projects. The topics analyze the choice of interest to environmental engineers. and control systems for real estate development, foundations, structures, building enclosures and value and decision analysis. other major building subsystems as affected by en- CE 592. Constructed Facilities Seminar vironmental and legal conditions, and market and Participation of students, faculty and recognized CE 582. Engineering and Construction project constraints. Consideration is given to the experts outside of WPI in developing modern Information Systems functional and physical interfaces among building and advanced topics of interest in the constructed This course provides an understanding of the subsystems. Emphasis is given to the processes facilities area. various subjects involved in the use, design, through which design decisions are made in the CE 593. Advanced Project development, implementation and maintenance evolution of a building project. of computer- based information systems in the This capstone project is intended for students construction industry. Theoretical and hands-on CE 587. Building Information Modeling completing the M.E. degree. The student is review of basic building blocks of information and (BIM) expected to identify all aspects of the M.E. cur- decision support systems including user interfaces, This course introduces the concept of Building riculum and an integrative, descriptive systems database management systems, object-oriented Information Modeling (BIM) which is a relatively approach. The project activity requires the student approaches and multimedia. Applications include new approach in planning, design, construc- to describe the development, design construction, project scheduling and cost control, budgeting, tion and operation of constructed facilities in a maintenance and operation process for an actual project risk analysis, construction accounting, technologically enabled and collaborative fashion. facility; to evaluate the performance of the facility materials management and procurement systems, The course reviews fundamental concepts for with respect to functional and operational objec- project document tracking and resource manage- collaboration and integration; it also reviews tives; and to examine alternative solutions. Specific ment. Commercial software—such as PRIMA- technologies that support the BIM approach areas of study are selected by the student and VERA Project Planner, TIMBERLINE, and and provides discipline specific as well as global approved by the faculty member. The work may spreadsheets and databases—is extensively used. perspectives on BIM. The course format includes be accomplished by individuals or small groups of Students are required to complete a term project formal lectures, computer laboratory sessions, students working on the same project. (Prerequi- reviewing an existing information system and student presentations based on assigned readings site: consent of instructor.) presenting recommendations for improvement. and a project developed collaboratively by the CE 599. M.S. Thesis (Prerequisites: A knowledge of the material cov- students throughout the course. Guest speakers Research study at the M.S. level. ered in CE 580 and CE 584 is expected). Course may be invited based on the topics covered and may be offered by special arrangement. discussed in class. CE 699. Ph.D. Thesis Research study at the Ph.D. level. CE 583. Contracts and Law for Prerequisites: Basic knowledge of computers. Civil Engineers Exposure to professional practice in any area of An introduction to the legal aspects of construc- the Architecture / Engineering / Construction / tion project management, emphasis on legal Facilities Management (A/E/C/FM) industry is problems directly applied to the practice of project desirable. Students are not permitted to receive management, contracts and specifications docu- credit for CE 587 if they have previously received ments, codes and zoning laws, and labor laws. credit for CE 585 or CE 590A-BIM. CE 584. Advanced Cost Estimating CE 590. Special Problems Procedures 2 to 4 credits This course examines cost estimating as a key Individual investigations or studies of any phase process in planning, designing and construct- of civil engineering as may be selected by the ing buildings. Topics include the analysis of the student and approved by the faculty member who elements of cost estimating; database develop- supervises the work. ment and management, productivity, unit costs, quantity surveys and pricing, and the application of these tools in business situations; marketing, sales, bidding, negotiating, value engineering, cost control, claims management and cost history. Computerization is evaluated as an enhancement to the process.

Return to Table of Contents Civil and Environmental Engineering 61 Computer and Communications Networks Program of Study CCN Project Admission Requirements A specialization in computer and commu- Each student in the CCN specialization The program is conducted at an advanced nications networks is available within the must complete an in-depth project dem- technical level and requires, in addition to master’s degree program of the Computer onstrating the ability to apply and extend the WPI admissions requirements, a solid Science (CS) Department. the material studied in their coursework. background in computer science (CS). Students have the option of completing a Students enrolled in this specialization Normally a B.S. degree in CS is expected; practice-oriented internship or a research- however, applicants with comparable back- will receive the master of science degree in oriented thesis. computer science, with a notation on their grounds, together with expertise gained transcript “Specialization in Computer The internship is a high-level network through work experience, will also be and Communications Networks (CCN).” engineering experience, tailored to the considered. Admission is highly selective The program is focused on preparing stu- specific interests and background of the and decisions will be based both on previ- dents for professional positions in industry, student. Each internship is carried out in ous academic performance and on relevant but the education also provides excellent cooperation with a sponsoring organiza- technical experience. Admission decisions preparation for Ph.D. study in networks. tion, and must be approved and advised are made by the CS department. by a WPI faculty member in the CS This program prepares graduates for tech- department. Internships may be proposed Degree Requirements nical leadership positions in the design and by a faculty member, by an offcampus 33 credits implementation of computer and commu- sponsor or by the student. The intern- nications networks, including local- and Required Courses ship must include proposal, design and (4 courses, 12 credits): wide-area computer networking, distrib- documentation phases, and generally uted computation, telecommunications • Analysis of Probabilistic Signals and includes implementation and testing. The Systems or Analysis of Computations (including voice, data and video services), student will prepare a report describing wireless networking and personal mobile and Systems (ECE 502, CS 504, or the internship activities, and will make a CS 524) communications. All of the fundamental presentation before a committee including • Computer Networks (CS 513) hardware and software aspects of networks the faculty advisor and a representative will be treated in the program: of the sponsoring organization. Intern- and two of the following courses: 1. The seven layers of the ISO network ship examples include transceiver design • Telecommunications Transmission model for new media, security and encryption Technologies (ECE 535) 2. Transmission media and terminals protocols, protocol converters, databases • High Performance Networks (CS 530) (including fiber optics, cable and radio) to support efficient routing, and network system designs. • Advanced Computer and Communica- 3. Switching and routing methods tions Networks (CS 577) (including packet switching) The thesis option for the CCN project is • Modeling and Performance Evaluation 4. Systems modeling and performance a research-oriented experience in an area of Networks and Computer Systems analysis of current research in an area of computer (CS 533) 5. Methods of distributed computation and communications networks. The thesis must be pursued under the direction of 6. Current and evolving standards and a WPI faculty member in the CS depart- protocols ment. The result of the thesis is a thesis 7. Impacts of the information type (voice, document, describing the results of the video, text, etc.) on optimal transmis- research, and a public presentation. sion and routing methods An accelerated part-time option is avail- able with cooperating corporations, with program completion possible in two years.

62 Computer and Communications Networks Return to Table of Contents Elective Courses CCN Project Important Note (at least three from list): The student must complete one of the Since the CCN specialization is a special- • Digital Communications: Modulation following: ization in the master’s programs of the and Coding (ECE 532) 1. Computer and Communications Net- Computer Science Department, students • Advances in Digital Communication works Internship (CS 595) (6 credits) in the CCN specialization must also satisfy (ECE 533) This project requirement may be waived all requirements of the computer science • Multiple Processor and Distributed with documentation of relevant indus- master’s program. While ECE courses may Systems (CS 515) trial experience. The waiver must be be used to satisfy some of the CCN re- • Advanced Operating System Theory approved by the CS Graduate Program quirements, there is a limit to the number (CS 535) Committee in consultation with the of courses outside of Computer Science • Design of Software Systems (CS 509) CCN director. If this requirement is that students may apply towards their waived, the student must take two ad- Computer Science master’s degree. • Multimedia Networking (CS 529) ditional courses from the list of elective • Wireless Information Networks courses above, or two additional courses (ECE 538) approved by the department’s Graduate • Cryptography and Data Security Program Committee. (CS 578) 2. Master’s thesis in the area of computer • Advanced Cryptography (ECE 579R) and communications networks • Telecommunication Policy (ECE 508) (9 credits) • Mobile Data Networking (ECE 539S) Free Electives • Any of the courses ECE 535, Free electives may be used to bring the CS 530, CS 577, and CS 533 not taken total to 33 credits. Courses may be chosen to satisfy the required courses above. from relevant graduate-level courses in computer science, electrical and computer engineering, mathematics or management. Some students will need to use these elec- tives to satisfy the area requirements for the CS master’s degree core.

Return to Table of Contents Computer and Communications Networks 63 Computer Science www.cs.wpi.edu

Faculty M. A. Gennert, Professor; Sc.D., S. Selkow, Professor Emeritus; Ph.D., Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Pennsylvania, 1970. Combinatorial­ C. E. Wills, Professor and Department 1987. Image processing; image under­ algorithms, graph theory, analysis of Head; Ph.D., Purdue, 1988. Distributed standing; artificial intelligence; robotics. algorithms. systems, networking, user interfaces. J. D. Guttman, Professor; Ph.D., C. A. Shue, Assistant Professor; Ph.D., E. O. Agu, Associate Professor; Ph.D., Chicago, 1984. Information security, Indiana, 2009. Computer networking, Massachusetts, 2001. Computer graph- logic and formal methods, mechanized security, distributed systems. ics, wireless networking, and mobile reasoning, programming languages. computing. C. L. Sidner, Research Professor; Ph.D., N. T. Heffernan, Associate Professor; Massachusetts Institute of Technology, J. E. Beck, Assistant Professor; Ph.D., Ph.D., Carnegie Mellon, 2001. Intelligent 1979. Discourse processing, collaboration, Massachusetts, 2001. Machine learning, tutoring agents, artificial intelligence, cog- human-robot interaction, intelligent user educational data mining, intelligent tutor- nitive modeling, machine learning. interfaces, natural language processing, ing systems, human learning and problem artificial intelligence. solving. G. T. Heineman, Associate Professor; Ph.D., Columbia, 1996. Component- E. Torres-Jara, Assistant Professor; Ph.D., D. Berenson, Assistant Professor; Ph.D., based software engineering, formal ap- Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Carnegie Mellon, 2011. Design, integra- proaches to compositional design. 2007. Biomimetric framework for tion, control, sensing, and planning for robotics – developing algorithms related to M. Hofri, Professor; Ph.D., Technion multi-legged robots, helicopters, mobile robots in contact with their environment, (Israel), 1972. Analysis of algorithms, manipulators, humanoids, and surgical microfabrication of dense arrays of sensors performance evaluation, applied prob- robots. (especially tactile), design of compliant ability, the use of statistics in algorithms, actuators, and fabrication of robotic D. C. Brown, Professor; Ph.D., Ohio asymptotics. State, 1984. Knowledge-based design elements (such as arms and legs). R. E. Kinicki, Professor; Ph.D., Duke, systems, artificial intelligence. K. Venkatasubramanian, Assistant Profes- 1978. Computer network performance, sor; Ph.D., Arizona State, 2009. Secure S. Chernova, Assistant Professor; Ph.D., wireless networks, multimedia streaming. Carnegie Mellon University, 2009. Arti- cyber-physical systems, body area net- ficial intelligence, autonomous systems, K. A. Lemone, Professor Emeritus; Ph.D., works, trust management, medical device robot learning, human-robot interaction, Northeastern, 1979. Electronic docu- security. ments, language translation. adjustable autonomy, multi-robot systems. M. O. Ward, Professor; Ph.D., Connec­ M. L. Claypool, Professor; Ph.D., Minne- R. W. Lindeman, Associate Professor; ticut, 1981. Data and information sota, 1997. Distributed systems, network- Ph.D., George Washington, 1999. visualization, spatial data analysis and ing, multimedia and online games. Human-computer interaction, haptics, management. virtual environments. D. J. Dougherty, Professor; Ph.D., Mary- Research Interests land, 1982. Logic in computer science. C. Rich, Professor; Ph.D., Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1980. Artificial The current departmental activities M. Y. Eltabakh, Assistant Professor; intelligence and its intersections with include, among other areas, analysis of Ph.D., Purdue University, 2010. Data- human-computer interaction, interactive algorithms, applied logic, artificial intel- base management systems, information media and game development, robotics, ligence, computer vision, computer graph- management. intelligent tutoring systems, knowledge- ics, database and information systems, data D. Finkel, Professor; Ph.D., Chicago, based software tools. mining, distributed systems, graph theory and computational complexity, intelligent 1971. Computer system performance C. Ruiz, Associate Professor; Ph.D., tutoring systems, network performance evaluation, distributed computing systems, Maryland, 1996. Data mining, knowledge evaluation, programming languages, ro- focusing on the performance of computer discovery in databases, machine learning. networks and distributed systems. botics, security, software engineering, user E. A. Rundensteiner, Professor; Ph.D., interfaces, virtual reality, visualization, and K. Fisler, Associate Professor; Ph.D., California, Irvine, 1992. Database and Web-based systems. Research groups meet Indiana, 1996. Interplay of human reason- information systems, stream and sensor weekly and focus on topics related to the ing and formal logic in the context of query processing, and information above areas. Students are encouraged to hardware and software systems; current integration. participate in the meetings related to their projects explore access-control policies and area(s) of interest. Research and develop- diagrams. G. N. Sarkozy, Affiliate Associate Profes- sor; Ph.D., Rutgers, 1994. Graph theory, ment projects and theses are available in combinatorics, algorithms. these areas. Computer science students may also participate in computer applica- tions research work being conducted in

64 Computer Science Return to Table of Contents a number of other departments includ- Certificate Programs indicate the conditions that the student ing electrical and computer engineering, WPI’s Graduate Certificate Program must satisfy in order to receive BS/MS mechanical engineering, biomedical and provides an opportunity for students credit for the course, such as earning a fire protection engineering. Students are holding undergraduate degrees to continue specific grade or doing additional assigned also encouraged to undertake projects and their study in an advanced area. A B.S. or work. Faculty may offer, at their discre- theses in cooperation with neighboring B.A. degree is the general requirement. tion, an additional 1/6 undergraduate computer manufacturers or commercial Certificate programs require a student to unit, or equivalently a 1 graduate credit, organizations. complete 4-5 thematically related courses for completing additional work in the in their area of interest. Each student’s course. To obtain this credit, the student Programs of Study program of study must be approved by the must register for 1/6 undergraduate unit Graduate programs in Computer Science academic advisor. Academic advisors are of independent study at the 4000-level or provide opportunites for advanced course- assigned upon admission to the program a 1 graduate credit independent study at work and research for highly qualified stu- but may be changed in accordance with the 500-level, with permission from the dents. Graduate Certificates, recognizing departmental policies. instructor. completion of a cohesive set of advanced courses, are offered in several areas of Details about the certificates available in Regulations Computer Science. The Master of Science the Department of Computer Science The CS department allows only selected degree is more comprehensive; with thesis can be found online at 4000-level undergraduate courses to and non-thesis (coursework-only) options, http://www.wpi.edu/academics/cs/grad-certprograms.html. count towards the BS/MS. The 4000-level courses that may be counted towards both it is the degree of choice for many full-time BS/MS Program students and working professionals. The degrees are: Doctor of Philosophy degree emphasizes Overview The university rules for the BS/MS • CS 4120 Analysis of Algorithms deeper study and discovery in preparation • CS 4123 Theory of Computation for a career in research or education. program are described in Section 5 of the undergraduate catalog and on page 22 of • CS 4233 Object-Oriented Analysis and Graduate programs may be undertaken on the graduate catalog. Design a full-time or part-time basis. For all stu- • CS 4241 Webware: Computational dents, challenging courses and demanding Students enrolled in the BS/MS program may count certain courses towards both Technology for Network Information research projects, with high expectations of Systems accomplishment, are the standard. their undergraduate and graduate degrees. The Undergraduate Catalog states that for • CS 4341 Introduction to Artificial Admission Requirements the BS/MS the conversion equivalence is: Intelligence • CS 4401 Software Security Engineeri ng Applicants are expected to demonstrate • 1/3 WPI undergraduate unit = 2 WPI sufficient background in core Computer graduate credit hours • CS 4432 Database Systems II Science for graduate-level work. Back- Note: Courses, whose credit hours total • CS 4445 Data Mining and Knowledge ground in both theoretical and applied no more than 40% of the credit hours Discovery in Databases Computer Science, with significant pro- required for the master’s degree, and which • CS 4513 Distributed Computing gramming experience and some college- meet all other requirements for each de- Systems level mathematics, is required. A bachelor’s gree, may be used to satisfy requirements • CS 4515 Computer Architecture degree in Computer Science or a closely for both degrees. • CS 4516 Advanced Computer related field should be adequate prepara- The Regulations section (below) details Networks tion. Students from other backgrounds are which courses may be shared between the • CS 4533 Techniques of Programming welcome to apply if they can demonstrate two degrees. Language Translation their readiness through other means, such • CS 4536 Programming Languages as the Computer Science GRE Subject exam. Process • CS 4731 Computer Graphics Work experience will be considered if it Students may formally apply for admission covers a broad spectrum of Computer Sci- to the BS/MS program during or after • CS 4732 Computer Animation ence at a technical or mathematical level. taking their second 4000-level Computer • Undergraduate Independent Studies, A student may apply to the Ph.D. program Science course. Forms are available with permission of instructor and upon completion of either a bachelor’s (in through the graduate admissions either the Graduate Committee or the which case the master’s degree must first be office or via their web site Department Chair completed as part of the Ph.D. studies) or http://www.wpi.edu/admissions/ graduate/about.html. • CS graduate courses except CS 505 master’s degree in computer science, or Students who have entered the BS/MS Some undergraduate and graduate courses with an equivalent background. program, or are considering it, qualify for cover similar material. Students may Non-matriculated students may enroll in BS/MS credit for the courses listed below. receive credit for both when the graduate up to two courses prior to applying for course covers extensive material beyond In order to receive BS/MS credit for a the undergraduate course. admission to a Computer Science Gradu- course, the student must complete a ate Program. Course Selection Form; the instructor will

Return to Table of Contents Computer Science 65 The table below lists courses with significant overlap. A student can receive credit for at most one of the two courses in any row of this table.

Undergraduate Course Graduate Course CS 4341 Introduction to Artificial Intelligence CS 534 Artificial Intelligence CS 4432 Database Systems II CS 542 Database Management Systems CS 4513 Distributed Systems CS 502 Operating Systems CS 4516 Advanced Computer Networks CS 513 Computer Networks CS 4533 Techniques of Programming Language Translation CS 544 Compiler Construction CS 4536 Programming Languages CS 536 Programming Language Design CS 4731 Computer Graphics CS 543 Computer Graphics

A BS/MS student may use 1/3 unit of Theory, Algorithms, and either Systems For each bin, a bin committee is responsi- undergraduate course or independent or Networks. The other bins are Design, ble for the administration of requirements study/project work taken for BS/MS credit Compilers/Languages, Graphics/Imaging, related to that bin. These responsibilities to satisfy an MS bin requirement, if either AI, and Databases. include: recommending courses to be of the following conditions is met: (1) Courses with a 5000 number (e.g., 5003, added or removed from their bin; deter- The undergraduate course covers mate- 5084) are preparatory courses, designed mining which independent studies and rial similar to that of a graduate course specifically for students with insufficient special topics courses should be included that satisfies the MS bin. The table above background knowledge or skills. Gradu- in their bin; and deciding on student peti- provides pairs of undergraduate and gradu- ate credit can be earned for these courses tions concerning their bin. Further regula- ate courses that cover similar material. The and M.S. students may use them to satisfy tions regarding the Breadth Requirement undergraduate course under consideration bin requirements. However, students with are posted in the Graduate Regulations on must appear in this table, and the corre- a solid undergraduate degree in CS are the CS Department Web site sponding graduate course must satisfy the strongly encouraged to take more ad- http://web.cs.wpi.edu/Intranet/Graduate/guide.html. MS bin requirement. (2) The course or vanced courses within the bins. Please note that the Breadth Requirement independent study/project work is deemed for the Ph.D. is more demanding. Master’s to satisfy the MS bin by the instructor, Bin The Bins students who are planning to pursue a Committee, and Graduate Program Chair The following list shows the M.S. bins Ph.D. degree should satisfy the Ph.D. as indicated on the Graduate Bins Petition and the courses in them. Courses listed in ­version of the breadth requirements. Form. multiple bins may only be used to satisfy The department will accept at most 9 the requirements of one bin. Degree Requirements credit hours of transfer credit from other Theory: 5003 (Intro. Theory), 503 For the M.S. accredited, degree-granting graduate (Found.), 521 (Logic), 559 (Adv. Th.) programs. If appropriate, this transferred These degree requirements are effective for credit may be used to satisfy Breadth all students matriculating after November Algorithms: 5084 (Intro. Algorithms), 504 (Analysis), 584 (Algs) Requirement bins. These credits must not 1, 2006. Those students who matriculated have been used to satisfy the requirements prior to this date may choose to use the Systems: 502 (OS), 533 (Perf. Eval.), 535 of another academic degree earned by the degree requirements stated in the graduate (Adv. OS) candidate. With rare exceptions, these catalog effective at the time of matricula- Networks: 513 (Intro LAN/WAN), 529 credits are limited to courses taken before tion. The student may choose between (Multi. Net.), 530 (HP Net.), 577 (Adv. matriculation at WPI. two options to obtain the master’s degree: Net.) thesis or coursework. Each student should A student may count a total of at most two carefully weigh the pros and cons of these Design: 509 (SE), 546 (HCI), 562 (Adv. courses towards their M.S. degree from alternatives in consultation with his or SE) the following categories: preparatory CS her advisor prior to selecting an option, courses and courses from other depart- Compilers/Languages: 536 (Langs.), 544 ments. For example: 2 preparatory courses; typically in the second year of study. The (Compilers) department will allow a student to change or 2 courses from another department; or options only once. Graphics/Imaging: 543 (Graph.), 545 1 preparatory course plus 1 course from (Im. Proc.), 549 [Vision], 563 (Adv. Gr.) another department. M.S. Breadth Requirement AI: 534 (AI), 538 (Ex. Sys.), 539 (Learn- All M.S. students must complete the Thesis Option ing), 540 (AI Design), 548 (Data Mining), At least 33 credit hours, including the Breadth Requirement. M.S. students are 549 [Vision] required to achieve a passing grade in thesis, must be satisfactorily completed. A courses from four different bins, as listed Databases: 542 (DB), 561 (Adv. DB) thesis consisting of a research or develop- below. Those four bins must include the ment project worth a minimum of 9 credit three essential bins; the essential bins are hours must be completed and presented

66 Computer Science Return to Table of Contents to the faculty. A thesis proposal must be requirements are described in the Graduate Facilities approved by the department by the end of Regulations on the CS department web site the semester in which a student has reg- http://web.cs.wpi.edu/Intranet/Graduate/guide.html. WPI boasts excellent computing resources istered for a third thesis credit. Proposals and network connectivity through the uni- Upon successful completion of the Ph.D. will be considered only at regularly sched- versity’s Computing & Communications qualifying requirement, the student be- uled department meetings. Students must Center and the CS Department’s own sys- comes a computer science Ph.D. candi- take four courses satisfying the Breadth tems. A wide range of machines provides date. The student’s Dissertation Commit- Requirement; these courses should be web, mail, file, high-performance compu- tee must be formed within the first year of taken as early as possible in the student’s tation, and security services. An extensive candidacy. The student selects a research program. The remaining courses may, software library is available free of charge advisor from within the CS department, with prior approval of the student’s advi- to all campus users. Other specialized re- and together they select, with the approval sor, consist of computer science courses, sources include multiple high performance of the CS Graduate Committee, three independent study, or courses elected from and parallel-computing clusters. WPI’s additional members, at least one of whom other disciplines. At most, two courses in campus network consists of a 10 Gigabit must be from outside the WPI CS depart- other disciplines will be accepted. Courses (on campus) backbone with multiple con- ment. The Dissertation Committee will nections to the global internet. High speed in college teaching may not be counted be responsible for supervising the compre- towards the 33 credits required for a CS wireless connectivity is available virtually hensive examination, and approving the everywhere on campus. Master’s degree. dissertation proposal and final report. Students funded by a teaching assistant- The Ph.D. degree requirements consist of Computer Science Research ship, research assistantship or fellowship a coursework component and a research Groups/Laboratories must complete the thesis option. component, which together must total at Applied Logic and Security Group least 60 credit hours beyond the master’s Non-thesis Option (ALAS) Lab degree requirement. The coursework A total of at least 33 credit hours must be Profs. Dougherty, Fisler, Guttman, Shue, component consists of at least 27 gradu- satisfactorily completed, including four Venkatasubramanian & Wills ate credits, including 3 credits of graduate courses which satisfy the Breadth Require- The ALAS group explores various prob- level mathematics. These 27 coursework ment. Students should endeavor to take lems related to security and applied logic, credits must contain at least 15 graduate these four courses as early as possible including research on privacy, network credits in computer science. Coursework so as to provide the background for the security, software engineering, software credits taken outside computer science remaining graduate work. The remaining verification, security, and programming must be approved by the student’s advisor. seven courses may, with prior approval of languages. the student’s advisor, consist of computer The student may also enroll for research science courses, independent study, or credits, but is only allowed up to 18 Artificial Intelligence Research Group courses elected from other disciplines. research credits prior to the acceptance (AIRG) Courses in college teaching may not be of the written dissertation proposal by Profs. Beck, Berenson, Chernova, Brown, counted towards the 33 credits required for a the Dissertation Committee. With the Gennert, Heffernan, Rich, Ruiz & CS Master’s degree. approval of the Dissertation Commit- Torres-Jara tee, the student applies for and takes the AIRG members share interests in the Students funded by a teaching assistant- Ph.D. comprehensive examination. This theory and applications of knowledge- ship, research assistantship or fellowship examination must be passed prior to the based systems. Current research includes must complete the thesis option. completion of the dissertation defense and intelligent tutoring systems, intelligent For the Ph.D. is normally taken after some initial disser- design, machine learning, data mining, robotics, multi-agent systems, and intel- Students are advised to contact the tation research has been performed. With ligent interfaces. department for detailed rules, as there are approval of the Dissertation Committee, the student applies for and takes the dis- departmental guidelines, in addition to the Congestion Control (CC) university’s requirements, for the Ph.D. sertation proposal examination, usually within one year of the Ph.D. candidacy. Profs. Claypool & Kinicki degree. The CC research group investigates Upon admission, the student is assigned The Ph.D. research component consists of research issues in Internet congestion an academic advisor and together they at least 30 credits (including any research control. It is a discussion-oriented group, design a Plan of Study during the first credits earned prior to the acceptance of where related papers are chosen each week semester of the student’s Ph.D. program. the dissertation proposal and excluding and discussed. any research credits applied toward a mas- The student must satisfy the Ph.D. ter’s degree) leading to a dissertation and Qualifying Requirement, consisting a public defense, which must be approved of the Breadth Requirement and the by the student’s Dissertation Committee. Research Qualifying Requirement. These

Return to Table of Contents Computer Science 67 Database Systems Research Group Knowledge Discovery and Data Theory Umbrella Group (THUG) (DSRG) Lab ­Mining (KDDRG) Lab Profs. Dougherty, Fisler, Guttman & Selkow Profs. Rundensteiner & Eltabakh Prof. Ruiz THUG is a group dedicated to the discus- This group focuses on research issues and KDDRG conducts research in data min- sion of theory. The group meets each week project work related to very large database ing, machine learning, and knowledge for the Theory Seminar, which features and information systems in support of discovery in databases. Current research talks on all aspects of theoretical com- advanced applications including busi- projects include applications of data min- puter science. Students and faculty in all ness, engineering, and sciences. Currently ing to clinical medicine, genomic data, areas of computer science are welcome to on-going projects include intelligent event sequence mining, and web mining. participate. analytics, scalable data stream processing systems, map-reduce technologies, biologi- Mobile Graphics Research Group Tutor Research Group (TRG) Lab cal databases, stream mining and discovery, (MGRG) Profs. Beck & Heffernan large-scale visual information exploration, Profs. Agu & Lindeman TRG researches intelligent tutoring medical process tracking, and distributed MGRG is investigating architectures and systems and tutoring strategies. Topics heterogeneous information sources. techniques that enable high-end serv- include artificial intelligence, machine ers to assist heterogeneous mobile hosts learning, educational data mining, and Human Interaction in Virtual in rendering large geometric models. cognitive science. Environments (HIVE) Lab Wireless networked graphics applications Prof. Lindeman are becoming more pervasive on mobile Off-Campus Research This group is concerned with the study of devices. Computer graphics applications Opportunities vibrotactile feedback for use in Human- are computationally intensive and resource Computer science graduate students have Computer Interaction. We are using a hungry, while mobile devices have limited opportunities for research and develop- holistic approach: providing feedback resources, low bandwidths and high error ment in cooperation with several neigh- to multiple senses in concert to improve rates. boring organizations, both for the master’s the use of the high bandwidth of which thesis and Ph.D. dissertation. These and humans are capable during real interac- Performance Evaluation of Distributed other opportunities provide real-world tions. Virtual environment research is one Systems (PEDS) Lab problems and experiences consistent with of the areas that we see as having great Profs. Agu, Finkel, Claypool, Kinicki, Shue WPI’s policy of extending learning beyond promise as a technological framework & Wills the classroom. for supporting simulation (e.g., surgical, PEDS is interested in the design and anal- military), collaboration, communication, ysis of distributed systems, with a special Course Descriptions and visualization. focus on the performance of distributed All courses are 3 credits unless otherwise noted. operating systems. CS 502. Operating Systems Human-Robot Interaction (HRI) Lab The design and theory of multiprogrammed oper- Profs. Rich, Sidner & Chernova Robot Autonomy and Interactive ating systems, concurrent processes, process com- If human-like robots are ever going to Learning (RAIL) munication, input/output supervisors, memory move freely among us, we will need to Prof. Chernova management, resource allocation and scheduling understand how to program them to col- The Robot Autonomy and Interactive are studied. (Prerequisites: knowledge of computer laborate with us smoothly and naturally. Learning research group focuses on the organization and elementary data structures, and a Our research spans robotics, artificial development of interactive robotic and strong programming background.) intelligence, computational linguistics and software systems. Our work aims to CS 5003. Foundations of Computer human-computer interaction. provide everyday people with the ability Science: an Introduction to customize the functionality of autono- This is the study of mathematical foundations Image Science Research Group (ISRG) mous devices. Our research spans the fields of computing, at a slower pace than that of CS 503 and with correspondingly fewer background Profs. Agu, Claypool, Gennert, Lindeman & of robot learning, adjustable autonomy, assumptions. Topics include finite automata Ward crowdsourcing, multi-robot teaming and and regular languages, pushdown automata and The ISRG conducts interdisciplinary human-robot interaction. context-free languages, Turing machines and de- research into the theory and application cidability, and an introduction to computational of graphics, visualization, image process- Software Engineering Research Group complexity. (Prerequisite: an undergraduate course ing and computer vision techniques. The (SERG) in discrete mathematics.) group’s current projects include data and Profs. Heineman, Fisler & Rundensteiner CS 503. Foundations of Computer Science information visualization, visual data min- SERG meets to discuss issues related to This is the study of mathematical foundations ing, stereo vision, medical image process- the discipline of Software Engineering. of computing. Topics include finite automata ing, tomography, modeling of natural SERG has several goals: to provide a forum and regular languages, pushdown automata and phenomena, and appearance modeling. for discussion of the research of group context-free languages, Turing machines and de- cidability, and an introduction to computational members; to attract graduate students and complexity. (Prerequisites: Knowledge of discrete prospective MQPs in Software Engineer- mathematics and algorithms at the undergraduate ing; and to generate new areas of software level, and some facility with reading and writing engineering research. mathematical proofs.)

68 Computer Science Return to Table of Contents CS 504. Analysis of Computations analysis, is treated. Current network types CS 533/ECE 581. Modeling and and Systems including local area and wide area networks are Performance Evaluation of Network The following tools for the analysis of computer introduced, as are evolving network technologies. and Computer Systems programs and systems are studied: probabil- The theory, design and performance of local area Methods and concepts of computer and commu- ity, combinatorics, the solution of recurrence networks are emphasized. The course includes an nication network modeling and system perfor- relations and the establishment of asymptotic introduction to queueing analysis and network mance – evaluation. Stochastic processes; measure- bounds. A number of algorithms and advanced programming. (Prerequisites: knowledge of the ment techniques; monitor tools; statistical analysis data structures are discussed, as well as paradigms C programming language is assumed. CS 504 or of performance experiments; simulation models; for algorithm design. (Prerequisites: CS 5084 or equivalent background in CS 5084 or CS 584.) analytic modeling and queueing theory; M/M, equivalent.) Erlang, G/M, M/G, batch arrival, bulk service CS 514/ECE 572. Advanced Systems and priority systems; work load characterization; Architecture CS 505. Social Implications of Computing performance evaluation problems. (Prerequisites: See ECE 572 course description on page 83. This course is concerned with the effects of com- CS 5084 or CS 504 or equivalent background in puter technology on society. It will explore a wide CS 521. Logic in Computer Science probability and some background in statistics.) range of topics including privacy, liability, propri- This course is an introduction to mathematical etary protection, the effects of artificial intelligence CS 534. Artificial Intelligence logic from a computer science perspective. Topics on humanity’s view of itself and globalization. It This course gives a broad survey of artificial intel- covered include the exploration of model theory, will also consider the issues of professional ethics ligence. Several basic techniques such as search proof theory, and decidability for propositional and professional responsibility, as well as dis- methods, formal proofs and knowledge represen- and first-order classical logics, as well as various crimination in the workplace, in education and in tation are covered. Selected topics involving the non-classical logics that provide iseful tools for user interfaces. Papers, presentations, discussions, applications of these tools are investigated. Such computer science (such as temporal and intuition- extensive readings and a course project are possible topics might include natural language understand- alistic logics). The course stresses the application components of this course. (Prerequisites: a college ing, scene understanding, game playing, learning of logic to various areas of computer science such degree and either two computer science classes and planning. (Prerequisites: familiarity with data as computability, theorem proving, programming or a year’s experience in the computer industry structures and a recursive high-level language. languages, specification,and verification. The spe- including sales and management.) Knowledge of LISP is an advantage.) cific applications included will vary by instructor. CS 5084. Introduction to Algorithms: (Prerequisites: CS 503, or equivalent background CS 535. Advanced Topics in Design and Analysis in basic models of computation.) Operating Systems This course is an introduction to the design, This course discusses advanced topics in the CS 522/MA 510. Numerical Methods analysis and proofs of correctness of algorithms. theory, design and implementation of operating See MA 510 course description. Examples are drawn from algorithms for many ar- systems. Topics will be selected from such areas eas. Analysis techniques include asymptotic worst CS 525. Topics in Computer Science as performance of operating systems, distributed case and average case, as well as amortized analysis. A topic of current interest is covered in detail. operating systems, operating systems for multi- Average case analysis includes the development of Please consult the department for a current listing processor systems and operating systems research. a probability model. Techniques for proving lower of selected topics in this area. (Prerequisites: vary (Prerequisites: CS 502 and either CS 5084, bounds on complexity are discussed, along with with topic.) CS 504, CS 584, or equivalent background in NP-completeness. Prerequisites: an undergradu- probability.) ate knowledge of discrete mathematics and data CS 529. Multimedia Networking structures. Note: students with a strong background This course covers basic and advanced topics relat- CS 536. Programming Language Design in design and analysis of computer systems, at the ed to using computers to support audio and video This course discusses the fundamental concepts level equal to a BS in computer science, should not over a network. Topics related to multimedia and general principles underlying current pro- take CS 5084 and should consider taking will be selected from areas such as compression, gramming languages and models. Topics include CS 504 or CS 584. network protocols, routing, operating systems control and data abstractions, language processing and human computer interaction. Students will and binding, indeterminacy and delayed evalua- CS 509. Design of Software Systems be expected to read assigned research papers and tion, and languages and models for parallel and This course introduces students to a methodology complete several programming intensive projects distributed processing. A variety of computational and specific design techniques for team-based de- that illustrate different aspects of multimedia paradigms are discussed: functional programming, velopment of a software system. Against the back- computing. (Prerequisites: CS 502 and CS 513 or logic programming, object-oriented programming drop of the software engineering life-cycle, this the equivalent and strong programming skills.) and data flow programming. (Prerequisites: stu- course focuses on the object-oriented paradigm dent is expected to know a recursive programming and its supporting processes and tools. Students CS 530/ECE 530. High-Performance language and to have an undergraduate course in will be exposed to industrial-accepted standards Networks data structures.) and tools, such as requirements elicitation, This course is an in-depth study of the theory, specification, modeling notations, design patterns, design and performance of high-speed networks. CS 538. Knowledge-Based Systems software architecture, integrated development en- Topics include specific high-performance network The course will review knowledge-based problem- vironments and testing frameworks. Students will implementations and emerging technologies, solving systems. It will concentrate on an analysis be expected to work together in teams in the com- including multimedia networks and quality of of their architecture, knowledge and problem- plete specification, implementation and testing of service issues. Topics associated with interconnect- solving style in order to classify and compare a software application. Prerequisites: knowledge of ing networks such as bridges and routers will also them. An attempt will be made to evaluate the a recursive high-level language and data structures. be discussed. Performance analysis of networks contribution to our understanding of problems An undergraduate course in software engineering will include basic queueing models. (Prerequisite: that such systems can tackle. (Prerequisite: CS 534 is desirable. CS 513/ECE 506.) or equivalent or permission of the instructor.) CS 513. Computer Networks CS 531. System Simulation This course provides an introduction to the The theory and design of discrete simulations theory and practice of the design of computer and are discussed. Other topics are random number communications networks, including the ISO generations, analysis of output and optimization. seven-layer reference model. Analysis of network (Prerequisites: CS 504 or equivalent background topologies and protocols, including performance in probability and some background in statistics.)

Return to Table of Contents Computer Science 69 CS 539. Machine Learning may include implementation of a small com- CS 556. Foundational Aspects of The focus of this course is machine learning for piler for a recursive or special-purpose language. Database Systems knowledge-based systems. It will include reviews (Prerequisites: knowledge of several higher-level This course will cover the logic-based foundations of work on similarity-based learning (induc- languages and at least one assembly language. The of database systems. The theory and implementa- tion), explanation-based learning, analogical and material in CS 503 is helpful.) tion of advanced query languages such as datalog case-based reasoning and learning, and knowledge will be a central focus: typical topics include fixed- CS 545/ECE 545. Digital Image Processing compilation. It will also consider other approaches point semantics of recursive queries, checking This course presents fundamental concepts of to automated knowledge acquisition as well as safety of queries, implementation techniques such digital image processing and an introduction to connectionist learning. (Prerequisite: CS 534 or as fix-point and magic sets, and advanced optimi- machine vision. Image processing topics will in- equivalent, or permission of the instructor.) zation techniques such as join-minimization and clude visual perception, image formation, imaging decorrelation. Other topics covered will include geometries, image transform theory and applica- CS 540. Artificial Intelligence in Design theoretical foundations of data integration, as well tions, enhancement, restoration, encoding and The main goal of this course is to obtain a deeper as algorithms and techniques for data warehousing compression. Machine vision topics will include understanding of what “design” is, and how AI and view maintenance. (Prerequisites: CS 542 or feature extraction and representation, stereo vi- might be used to support and study it. Students equivalent.) will examine some of the recent AI-based work on sion, model-based recognition, motion and image design problem-solving. The course will be run flow, and pattern recognition. Students will be CS 557. Software Security Design and in seminar style, with readings from the current required to complete programming assignments Analysis literature and with student presentations. The in a high-level language. (Prerequisites: working Software is responsible for enforcing many central domains will include electrical engineering design, knowledge of undergraduate level signal analysis security goals in computer systems. These goals mechanical engineering design, civil engineer- and linear algebra; familiarity with probability include authenticating users and other external ing design and software design (i.e., automatic theory is helpful but not necessary.) principals, authorizing their actions, and ensuring programming). This course will be of interest to the integrity and confidentiality of their data. CS 546. Human-Computer Interaction those wanting to prepare for research in design, or This course studies how to design, implement, This course prepares graduate students for research those wishing to increase their understanding of and analyze mechanisms to enforce these goals in in human-computer interaction. Topics include expert systems. Graduate students from depart- both web systems and programs in traditional lan- the design and evaluation of interactive computer ments other than computer science are welcome. guages. Topics include: identifying programming systems, basic psychological considerations of (Prerequisite: knowledge of artificial intelligence is choices that lead to reliable or flawed security interaction, interactive language design, interac- required. This can only be waived with permission outcomes, successful and unsuccessful strategies tive hardware design and special input/output of the instructor). for incorporating cryptography into software, techniques. Students are expected to present and and analysis techniques that identify security review recent research results from the literature, CS 542. Database Management Systems vulnerabilities. The course will cover both practi- and to complete several projects. (Prerequisites: An introduction to the theory and design of data- cal and theoretical aspects of secure software, and students are expected to have mature program- base management systems. Topics covered include will include a substantial secure software design ming skills. Knowledge of software engineering internals of database management systems, funda- project. (Prerequisites: Programming and software would be an advantage.) mental concepts in database theory, and database engineering experience (commensurate with an application design and development. In particular, CS 548. Knowledge Discovery and undergraduate Computer Science major), and logical design and conceptual modeling, physical Data Mining background in foundational models of computing database design strategies, relational data model This course presents current research in Knowl- systems (on par with CS 5003 or CS 503).) and query languages, query optimization, transac- edge Discovery in Databases (KDD) dealing tion management and distributed databases. CS 558. Computer Network Security with data integration, mining, and interpretation Typically there are hands-on assignments and/or This course covers core security threats and of patterns in large collections of data. Topics a course project. Selected topics from the current mitigations at the network level. Topics include: include data warehousing and data preprocessing database research literature may be touched upon denial-of-service, network capabilities, intrusion techniques; data mining techniques for classifica- as well. (Prerequisite: CS 5084, CS 504, or detection and prevention systems, worms, botnets, tion, regression, clustering, deviation detection, CS 584.) Web attacks, anonymity, honeypots, cybercrime and association analysis; and evaluation of patterns (such as phishing), and legality and ethics. The minded from data. Industrial and scientific appli- CS 543. Computer Graphics course prepares students to think broadly and con- cations are discussed. Recommended background: This course examines typical graphics systems, cretely about network security; it is not designed Background in artificial intelligence, databases, both hardware and software; design of low-level to teach students low-level tools for monitoring and statistics at the undergraduate level, or software support for raster displays; 3-D surface or maintaining system security. Assignments and permission of the instructor. Proficiency in a high and solids modeling; hidden line and hidden projects will assess each student’s ability to think level programming language. surface algorithms; and realistic image render- both conceptually and practically about network ing including shading, shadowing, reflection, CS/RBE 549. Computer Vision security. (Prerequisites: a strong background in refraction and surface texturing. (Prerequisites: This course examines current issues in the com­ computer networking and systems, either at the familiarity with data structures, a recursive high- puter implementation of visual perception. Topics undergraduate or graduate level, and moderate level language and linear algebra. CS 509 would include image formation, edge detection, seg- programming experience.) be helpful.) mentation, shape-from-shading, motion, stereo, CS 559. Advanced Topics in Theoretical texture analysis, pattern classification and object CS 544. Compiler Construction Computer Science recognition. We will discuss various representa- A general approach to the design of language This course has an instructor-dependent syllabus. processors is presented without regard for either tions for visual information, including sketches the source language or target machine. All phases and intrinsic images. (Prerequisites: CS 534, of compilation and interpretation are investigated CS 543, CS 545, or the equivalent of one of these in order to give the student an appreciation for the courses.) overall construction of a compiler. Typical projects

70 Computer Science Return to Table of Contents CS 561. Advanced Topics in preferences. In this class, the focus is on obtaining selection, and Artificial Intelligence (AI) planning. Database Systems a general understanding of user modeling, and Students will read papers that apply AI techniques This course covers modern database and informa- an understanding of how to apply user modeling for the purpose of adapting to users. Students will tion systems as well as research issues in the field. techniques. Students will read seminal papers in complete a project that applies these techniques to Topics and systems covered may include object- the user modeling literature, as well as complete a build an adaptive educational system. (Prerequi- oriented, workflow, active, deductive, spatial, tem- course project where students build a system that sites: CS 534 Artificial Intelligence or permission poral and multimedia databases. Also discussed explicitly models the user. (Prerequisites: Knowl- of the instructor.) will be recent advances in database systems such edge of probability.) CS 571. Case Studies in Computer Security as data mining, on-line analytical processing, CS/SEME 566. Graphical Models for This course examines security challenges and data warehousing, declarative and visual query Reasoning Under Uncertainty failures holistically, taking into account technical languages, multimedia database tools, web and This course will introduce students to graphical concerns, human behavior, and business decisions. unstructured data sources, and client-server and models, such as Bayesian networks, Hidden Mar- Using a series of detailed case studies, students will heterogeneous systems. The specific subset of kov Models, Kalman filters, particle filters, and explore the interplay among these dimensions in topics for a given course offering is selected by the structural equation models. Graphical models are creating secure computing systems and infrastruc- instructor. Research papers from recent journals applicable in a wide variety of work in computer ture. Students will also apply lessons from the and conferences are used. Group project required. science for reasoning under uncertainty such as case studies to emerging secure-systems design (Prerequisites: CS 542 or equivalent. Expected user modeling, speech recognition, computer problems. The course requires active participation background includes a knowledge of relational vision, object tracking, and determining a robot’s in class discussions, presentations, and writing database systems.) location. This course will cover 1) using data to assignments. It does not involve programming, CS 562. Advanced Topics in Software estimate the parameters and structure of a model but assumes that students have substantial prior Engineering using techniques such as expectation maximiza- experience with security protocols, attacks, and This course focuses on the nondesign aspects of tion, 2) understanding techniques for performing mitigations at the implementation level. This software engineering. Topics may include require- efficient inference on new observations such as course satisfies the behavioral component of the ments specification, software quality assurance, junction trees and sampling, and 3) learning about MS specialization in computer security. (Prereq- software project management and software main- evaluation techniques to determine whether a uisites: A prior course or equivalent experience in tenance. (Prerequisite: CS 509.) particular model is a good one. (Prerequisites: CS technical aspects of computer security, at either 534 Artificial Intelligence or permission of the the software or systems level.) CS 563. Advanced Topics in Computer instructor.) Graphics CS 577/ECE 537. Advanced Computer This course examines one or more selected cur- CS/SEME 567. Empirical Methods for and Communications Networks rent issues in the area of image synthesis. Specific Human-Centered Computing This course covers advanced topics in the theory, topics covered are dependent on the instructor. This course introduces students to techniques for design and performance of computer and Potential topics include: scientific visualization, performing rigorous empirical research in com- communications networks. Topics will be selected computational geometry, photo-realistic image puter science. Since good empirical work depends from such areas as local area networks, metropoli- rendering and computer animation. (Prerequisite: on asking good research questions, this course will tan area networks, wide area networks, queueing CS 543 or equivalent.) emphasize creating conceptual frameworks and us- models of networks, routing, flow control, new ing them to drive research. In addition to helping technologies and protocol standards. The current CS 564. Advanced Topics in Computer students understand what makes a good research literature will be used to study new networks Security question and why, some elementary statistics will concepts and emerging technologies. (Prerequisite: This course examines one or more selected current be covered. Furthermore, students will use and CS 533/ECE 581 and either CS 513 or ECE 506) issues in the area of computer security. Specific implement computationally intensive techniques topics covered are dependent on the instructor. such as randomization, bootstrapping, and CS 578/ECE 578. Cryptography and Potential topics include: modeling and analyz- permutation tests. The course also covers experi- Data Security ing security protocols, access-control, network ments involving human subjects, and some of the See ECE 578 course description. security, and human-centered security. (Prerequi- statistical and non-statistical difficulties research- CS 582/BCB 502. Biovisualization sites: a graduate level security course or equivalent ers often encounter while performing such work This course will use interactive visualization experience. (e.g., IRB (Institutional Review Board), correlated to model and analyze biological information, CS/SEME 565. User Modeling trials, and small sample sizes). While this course structures, and processes. Topics will include the User modeling is a cross-disciplinary research is designed for students in Human Computer fundamental principles, concepts, and techniques field that attempts to construct models of human Interaction, Interactive Media and Game Devel- of visualization (both scientific and information behavior within a specific computer environ- opment, and Learning Sciences and Technologies, visualization) and how visualization can be used ment. Contrary to traditional artificial intel- it is appropriate for any student with program- to study bioinformatics data at the genomic, ligence research, the goal is not to imitate human ming experience who is doing empirical research. cellular, molecular, organism, and population behavior as such, but to make the machine able to (Prerequisites: MA 511 Applied Statistics for Engi- levels. Students will be expected to write small to understand the expectations, goals, knowledge, in- neers and Scientists or permission of instructor.) moderate programs to experiment with different formation needs, and desires of a user in terms of CS/SEME 568. Artificial Intelligence for visual mappings and data types. (Prerequisite: a specific computing environment. The computer Adaptive Educational Technology strong programming skills, an undergraduate or representation of this information about a user is Students will learn how to enable educational graduate course in algorithms, and one or more called a user model, and systems that construct technology to adapt to the user and about typical undergraduate biology courses.) Students may not and utilize such models are called user modeling architectures used by existing intelligent tutor- receive credit for both CS 582 and CS 4802. systems. A simple example of a user model would ing systems for adapting to users. Students will be an e-commerce site which makes use of the see applications of decision theoretic systems, user’s and similar users’ purchasing and browsing reinforcement learning, Markov models for action behavior in order to better understand the user’s

Return to Table of Contents Computer Science 71 CS 583/BCB 503. Biological and CS 584. Algorithms: Design and Analysis communications networking and will conclude Biomedical Database Mining This covers the same material as CS5084 though with a substantial written report. A public oral This course will investigate computational at a more advanced level. As background, students presentation must also be made, to both the techniques for discovering patterns in and across should have experience writing programs in a host organization and a committee consisting complex biological and biomedical sources includ- recursive, high-level language and should have of the supervising faculty member, the on-site ing genomic and proteomic databases, clinical the background in mathematics that could be liaison and one additional WPI faculty member. databases, digital libraries of scientific articles, expected from a BS in Computer Science. Successful completion of the internship will be and ontologies. Techniques covered will be drawn verified by this committee. For a student from from several areas including sequence mining, CS 595/ECE 595. Computer and industry, an internship may be sponsored by his statistical natural language processing and text Communications Networks Internship or her employer. (Prerequisite: completion of 12 mining, and data mining. (Prerequisite: strong 6 credits credits of the CCN program; CS 598 Directed programming skills, an undergraduate or graduate This project will provide an opportunity to put Research, CS 599 Master’s Thesis, or CS 699 course in algorithms, an undergraduate course in into practice the principles which have been Ph.D. Dissertation.)­ statistics, and one or more undergraduate biology studied in previous courses. It will generally be CS 598. Directed Research courses.) Students may not receive credit for both conducted off campus and will involve a real- CS 583 and CS 4803. world networking situation. Overall conduct of CS 599. Master’s Thesis the internship will be supervised by a WPI faculty member and an on-site liaison will direct day-to- CS 699. Ph.D. Dissertation day activity. The project must include substantial analysis and/or design related to computer or

72 Computer Science Return to Table of Contents Computer Security

Program of Study Degree Requirements • CS 564 (Advanced Topics in Computer Security) A specialization in computer security 33 credits • Special topics courses with the approval is available within the master’s degree The Computer Security specialization has of the specialization director program of the Computer Science (CS) both coursework-only and thesis options. Department. At least one course counted towards The program distribution requirements are security electives must provide significant Students enrolled in this specialization as follows: coverage of behavioral dimensions of will receive the master of science degree • Security Core: 6 credits cyber security. Permanent course offer- in computer science, with a notation on • Security Electives: 6 credits for the ings that satisfy the behavioral dimensions their transcript “Specialization in Com- requirement are designated as such in their puter Security.” The program is focused on coursework option, or 3 credits for the thesis option. At least one elective course catalog descriptions. The instructors of preparing students for both industrial posi- topics courses (CS525 and CS5XX) and tions and Ph.D. study related to computer must emphasize Behavioral Dimensions of security. independent study courses may designate security. particular offerings as satisfying the behav- • Business/Management: 3 credits WPI’s cyber-security programs place the ioral requirement with the approval of the • Computer Science Bins: 12 credits science and engineering of security within Specialization Director. • Either 6 credits of general CS electives the broader holistic frameworks of institu- Business/Management: Courses covering (coursework option) or 9 credits of MS tions and society. The specialization in business or management issues that bear thesis (thesis option) Computer Science prepares students to ap- on security concerns. Current applicable proach technical computer security prob- The following courses satisfy each courses are: lems in the context of users and organiza- requirement: tions. The MS specialization in computer • MIS 582 (Information Security Security Core: Courses covering two of Management) security strives to produce students who software, systems/networks, and wireless/ • OIE 541 (Operations Risk Management) • can assess which security-related threats internet level security. Current applicable to address in a computing problem courses are: Computer Science Bins: Courses as re- quired to satisfy the breadth requirements • understand technical security vulnerabil- • CS 557 (Software Security Design and (“bins”) for the CS MS degree. Details ities and technologies at least two differ- Analysis) appear in the CS MS degree requirements. ent abstraction levels within computing • CS 558 (Network Security) systems Electives: Any courses allowable within • ECE 579W (Wireless and Internet the requirements for CS MS degrees, • appreciate behavioral and human factors Security) in creating feasible security systems including thesis credits. Students with BS/MS credit for CS 4401 Thesis Approval: If a student applies Admission Requirements (Software Security Engineering) or CS 4404 (Tools and Techniques in Computer thesis credits towards a degree bearing the The program is conducted at an advanced Network Security) may apply at most one computer security specialization, his or her technical level and requires, in addition to of these courses towards the security core thesis topic must be approved as security- the WPI admissions requirements, a solid requirement for the MS specialization. related by one of the core specialization background in computer science (CS). faculty. Theses need not be advised by core Normally a B.S. degree in CS is expected; Security Electives: Includes all security- specialization faculty; in such cases, the however, applicants with comparable related courses offered in Computer reader should be one of the core specializa- backgrounds, together with expertise Science and Electrical and Computer tion faculty. gained through work experience, will also Engineering. Up to three credits from be considered. Interested students should thesis work on a security-related topic may Important Note apply to the CS master’s degree program. count towards this requirement, with the Since the security specialization is within Admission decisions are made by the CS approval of the specialization director. the master’s programs of the Computer department. Current applicable courses are the security Science Department, students in this core courses as well as: specialization must also satisfy all • CS 571 (Case Studies in Computer requirements of the computer science Security) [satisfies Behavioral Dimen- master’s program. There is a limit to the sions requirement] number of courses outside of Computer Science that students may apply towards • CS 578 (Cryptography) their Computer Science master’s degree. • ECE 673 (Advanced Cryptography)

Return to Table of Contents Computer Security 73 Electrical and Computer Engineering www.ece.wpi.edu

Faculty and Research H. Hakim, Associate Professor; Ph.D., K. Pahlavan, Professor; Ph.D., Worcester Purdue University. Digital signal process- Polytechnic Institute. Wireless networks. Interests ing, system engineering. P. C. Pedersen, Professor Emeritus and Y. Massoud, Professor and Department A. Klein, Assistant Professor; Ph.D., Director of the Denmark Project Center; Head; Ph.D., Massachusetts Institute Cornell University. Signal processing for Ph.D., University of Utah. Ultrasound in of Technology. Embedded systems, communication systems, cooperative telemedicine, ultrasound training systems, signal processing, nanotechnology, networks, adaptive parameter estimation, 3D imaging and visualization, elastogra- biotechnology. and equalization. phy, automated image analysis, ultrasound based atherosclerotic plaque classification.. D. R. Brown, Associate Professor; Ph.D., L. Lai, Assistant Professor; Ph.D., Ohio Cornell University. Wireless communica- State University. Wireless network security, B. Sunar, Associate Professor; Ph.D., tions and networks, cooperative commu- information theory and statistical signal Oregon State University. Security; cryptog- nication systems, synchronization, efficient processing. raphy; computer arithmetic; finite fields; resource allocation, distributed decision high-speed computing. making, game-theoretic analysis of net- F. J. Looft, Professor; Ph.D., Michigan. works, peer-to-peer networks, cognitive Digital and analog systems, microproces- R. F. Vaz, Associate Professor, Dean of radio, software defined radio, computa- sor and embedded systems, space-flight the Interdisciplinary and Global Studies tionally efficient signal processing, security systems, robots and robotic systems, robot Division, Co-Director of the Bangkok and in wireless communication systems. sensors, alternative energy systems, systems Limerick Project Centers; Ph.D., Worces- engineering capstones and education. ter Polytechnic Institute. Technological E. A. Clancy, Associate Professor; Ph.D., education reform, internationalization of R. Ludwig, Professor; Ph.D., Colorado MIT. Biomedical signal processing and higher education, project-based educa- State University. Design of RF and surface modeling, biomedical instrumentation. tion, sustainable design and appropriate gradient coils for magnetic resonance technology. D. Cyganski, Professor and Dean of Engi- imaging; computational modeling of mi- neering ad interim; Ph.D., Worcester Poly- cropatch antennas; DC-coupled RF/MW A. M. Wyglinski, Assistant Professor; technic Institute. Precision indoor location wideband amplified design; nondestructive Ph.D., McGill University. Wireless com- systems, sensor systems for first responder material evaluation of critical components. munications, cognitive radio, software- safety, radar, sonar, and optical phased ar- defined radio, transceiver optimization, S. N. Makarov, Professor; Ph.D., St. rays for automatic target recognition. dynamic spectrum access networks, signal Petersburg State University (Russia). Elec- processing for digital communications, R. J. Duckworth, Associate Professor; tromagnetic field devices; electromagnetic wireless networks. Ph.D., Nottingham University. Embed- sensors; knowledge-based data processing. ded computer system design, computer architecture, real-time systems, wireless J. A. McNeill, Associate Professor and Programs of Study instrumentation, rapid prototyping, logic Associate Department Head; Ph.D., The Electrical and Computer Engineering synthesis, location and tracking systems. Boston University. Analog IC design; (ECE) Department offers programs lead- high-speed imaging; mixed-signal circuit ing to M.Eng., M.S. and Ph.D. degrees in T. Eisenbarth, Assistant Professor; Ph.D., characterization. Ruhr University Bochum. IT security, electrical and computer engineering, an with a focus on the security of embedded W. R. Michalson, Professor; Ph.D., M.Eng. degree in power systems engineer- systems and applied cryptology. Topics of Worcester Polytechnic Institute. Naviga- ing (PSE), as well as graduate and ad- special interest include embedded security tion and tracking; high-performance vanced certificates. The following general design, physical security and side channel embedded computer systems. areas of specialization are available to help students structure their graduate courses: cryptanalysis, and efficient implementa- J. A. Orr, Professor; Ph.D. University of biomedical signal processing/instrumenta- tion of cryptographic algorithms. Illinois at Urbana-Champaign. Digital tion, communications and signal process- signal processing and communications A. E. Emanuel, Professor; D.Sc., Israel ing, computer engineering, electromagnet- as applied to indoor navigation systems Institute of Technology. Power quality, ics and ultrasonics engineering, electronics and electrical power systems, engineering power electronics, electromagnetic design, and solid state, power engineering, and education. high-voltage technology. systems and controls. T. Padir, Visiting Assistant Professor; X. Huang, Associate Professor; Ph.D., The M.S. ECE degree is designed to Ph.D., Purdue University; Modeling and Virginia Tech. Reconfigurable computing; provide an individual with advanced control of robotic systems, kinematics and VLSI and SoC design; parallel processing. knowledge in one or more electrical and dynamics of robot manipulators, redun- computer engineering areas via successful dancy resolution and trajectory planning, completion of at least 21 credits of WPI automated system design, machine vision. ECE graduate courses (including M.S.

74 Electrical and Computer Engineering Return to Table of Contents thesis credit), combined with up to 9 Ph.D. Program engineering (course prefix ECE) offered by credits of coursework from computer Students with a Master’s degree in WPI. The remaining credits may be either science, mathematics, physics and other electrical and computer engineering may at the 4000 (maximum of six credits) or engineering disciplines. apply for the doctoral program of study. the 500 level in computer science (CS), The M.Eng. ECE and M.Eng. PSE Admission to the Ph.D. program will be physics (PH), engineering (BME, CHE, degrees are tailored for individuals seeking based on a review of the application and CE, ECE, FP, MFE, MTE, ME, RBE, an industrial career path. Similar to the associated references. Students with a and SYS) and/or mathematics (MA). The M.S. degree, the M.Eng. degree requires Bachelor of Science degree in electrical and complete program must be approved by the successful completion of at least 21 computer engineering may also apply to the student’s advisor and the Graduate credits of WPI ECE graduate courses the Ph.D. program. Students with a strong Program Committee. (specific course requirements for the M.S. background in areas other than Electrical Students pursuing the M.Eng. ECE degree ECE and M.S. PSE degrees are discussed and Computer Engineering will also be require 30 graduate credits in course work, below). In contrast to the M.S. degree, the considered for admission into the Ph.D. independent study, or directed research. M.Eng. degree allows up to 9 credits on program. If admitted (based on review There is no thesis option for the M.Eng. non-ECE courses to be chosen as manage- of the application and associated refer- ECE degree program. At least 21 of the ment courses and does not include a thesis ences), the applicant may be approved for 30 credits must be graduate level activity option. direct admission to the Ph.D. program, (designated 500-, 5000-, or 600-level) or to an M.S.-Ph.D.. program sequence. in the field of electrical and computer Admission Requirements Applicants possessing and M.S. degree in engineering (course prefix ECE) offered by electrical and computer engineering from Master’s Program WPI. The remaining credits may be either WPI that have not been directly admitted at the 4000 level (maximum of six credits) Students with a B.S. degree in electrical to the Ph.D. program are still required to or at the graduate level in computer engineering or electrical and computer submit an application and associated refer- science (CS), physics (PH), engineering engineering may submit an application ences for consideration, with the exception (BME, CHE, CE, ECE FP, MFE, MTE, for admission to the Master’s program. of GRE scores, TOEFL scores, and the ME, RBE, and SYS), mathematics (MA), There are three degree options in the application fee. and/or from the School of Business (ACC, Master’s program: An M.S. in Electrical Certificate Requirements BUS, ETR, FIN, MIS, MKT, OBC, and and Computer Engineering, an M.Eng. in OIE). The complete program must be The ECE Department offers advanced Electrical and Computer Engineering, and approved by the student’s advisor and the certificate and graduate certificate an M.Eng. in Power Systems Engineering. Graduate Program Committee. Admission to the Master’s program will be programs. Please visit based on a review of the application and http://www.wpi.edu/academics /ece/certificate-program.html The M.Eng. PSE is primarily delivered to associated references. for more details about these certificate industry professionals at a variety of off- programs. campus locations; students should contact the Applicants without a B.S. degree in electri- ECE office staff regarding course availability. cal engineering or electrical and computer Degree Requirements Students pursuing the M.Eng. PSE degree engineering, but who hold a B.S. degree in require 30 graduate credits in course work, mathematics, computer engineering, phys- For the Master’s Degree independent study, or directed research. ics or another engineering discipline, may Program There is no thesis option for the M.Eng. also apply for admission to the Master’s There are three degree options within the PSE degree program. At least 21 of the program in the Electrical and Computer Master’s program in the Electrical and 30 credits must be graduate level activ- Engineering Department. If admitted, the Computer Engineering Department: A ity in the field of electrical and computer applicant will be provided with required Master of Engineering in Electrical and engineering offered by WPI; of these 21 courses necessary to reach a background Computer Engineering (M.Eng. ECE), credits, at least 15 must be in the field of equivalent to the B.S. degree in electrical a Master of Science in Electrical and power system engineering (course prefix engineering or electrical and computer Computer Engineering (M.S. ECE), and ECE with course numbers from 5500 engineering, which will depend on the ap- a Master of Engineering in Power Systems through 5599). The remaining courses plicant’s specific background. Engineering (M.Eng. PSE). Students may be either at the 4000 level (maximum Applicants with the bachelor of technology pursuing the M.S. ECE degree may of six credits) or at the graduate level or the bachelor of engineering technol- take either the non-thesis option, which (designated as 500-, 5000-, or 600-level) ogy degree must typically complete about requires 30 graduate credits in course in computer science (CS), physics (PH), 1-1/2 years of undergraduate study in work, independent study, or directed engineering (BME, CHE, CE, ECE, FP, electrical engineering before they can research, or the thesis option, with a total MFE, MTE, ME, RBE, and SYS), math- be admitted to the graduate program. If of 30 graduate credits including a 9-credit ematics (MA), and/or from the School of admitted, the applicant will be provided thesis. In either case, at least 21 of the Business (ACC, BUS, ETR, FIN, MIS, with required courses necessary to reach a 30 credits must be graduate level activity MKT, OBC, and OIE). background equivalent to the B.S. degree (designated 500-, 5000-, or 600-level) in electrical engineering or electrical and in the field of electrical and computer computer engineering, which will depend on the applicant’s specific background.

Return to Table of Contents Electrical and Computer Engineering 75 Program of Study PSE students, all M.Eng. and M.S. stu- listed in the course offerings of another dents are encouraged to include a research department cannot be used toward fulfill- Each student must submit a program of component in their graduate program. A ing the requirements of a minor area. study for approval by the student’s advisor, directed research project, registered under All doctoral students are required to at- the ECE Department Graduate Program the designation ECE 598, involves a tend and pass two offerings of the ECE Committee and the ECE Department minimum of 3 credit hours of work under graduate seminar courses, ECE 596A (fall Head. To ensure that the Program of Study the supervision of a faculty member. The semester) and ECE 596B (spring semes- is acceptable, students should, in consulta- task is limited to a well-defined goal. Note ter). These students may either enroll in tion with their advisor, submit it to the that the Graduate Program committee will the same ECE graduate seminar course ECE Department Graduate Secretary not allow credit received under the thesis offered in two different semesters, or enroll prior to the end of the semester follow- designation (ECE 599) to be applied to- in each of the two different ECE graduate ing admission into the graduate program. ward an M.Eng. ECE degree, M.Eng. PSE seminar courses. Note that enrollment in Students must obtain prior approval from degree, or non-thesis M.S. ECE degree. the ECE Department Graduate Program these two courses is required regardless if the student has already successfully passed Committee for the substitution of courses Transfer Credit these courses and counted them towards in other disciplines as part of their aca- Students may petition to transfer a maxi- the requirements of an M.S. degree or demic program. mum of 15 graduate semester credits, with equivalent credit. All full-time students in the Master’s a grade of B or better, after they have en- degree program (with the exception of rolled in the degree program. This may be Full-time residency at WPI for at least one B.S./M.S. students as noted below) are re- made up of a combination of up to 9 cred- academic year is required while working quired to attend and pass the two graduate its from the WPI ECE graduate courses toward a Ph.D. degree. seminar courses, ECE 596A (fall semester) taken prior to formal admission and up to and ECE 596B (spring semester). See 9 credits from other academic institutions. Research Advisor and course listings for details. Transfer credit will not be allowed for Committee Selection undergraduate level courses taken at other The doctoral student is required to select Thesis Option institutions. In general, transfer credit will a Research Advisor and their Committee Students pursuing an M.S. ECE de- not be allowed for any WPI undergradu- prior to scheduling their Diagnostic Ex- gree that are financially supported by ate courses used to fulfill undergraduate amination. This will usually occur prior to the department in the form of teaching degree requirements; however note that the start of the student’s second semester assistantship, research assistantship, or there are exceptions in the case of students in the graduate program. The Research fellowship are required to complete a enrolled in the B.S./M.S. program. Advisor and all members of the Com- thesis. The thesis option is not available mittee must hold doctoral degrees. The for students pursuing an M.Eng. ECE or For the Ph.D. Research Advisor must be a full-time ECE M.Eng. PSE degree. M.S. thesis research The degree of doctor of philosophy is faculty member. The Committee must involves 9 credit hours of work, registered conferred on candidates in recognition of consist of at least two faculty members, at under the designation ECE 599, normally high scientific attainments and the ability least one of which must be an ECE faculty spread over at least one academic year. For to carry on original research. The follow- member and at least one of which must be students completing the M.S. thesis as ing is a list of requirements for students from outside the ECE department or from part of their degree requirements, a thesis intending to obtain a Ph.D. in Electrical outside WPI. The Committee is usually committee will be set up during the first and Computer Engineering. selected by the student in consultation semester of thesis work. This committee with the Research Advisor. All members will be selected by the student in consul- Coursework and Residency of the committee must be approved by the tation with the major advisor and will Requirements Research Advisor. Students must complete 60 or more consist of the thesis advisor (who must be A completed Research Advisor and Com- credits of graduate work beyond the credit a full-time WPI ECE faculty member) and mittee Selection form must be filed with required for the Master of Science degree at least two other faculty members whose the ECE department prior to taking the in Electrical and Computer Engineering. expertise will aid the student’s research Diagnostic Exam. A student may change Of the 60 credits, at least 30 credits must program. An oral presentation before the their Research Advisor or members of their be research registered under the designa- Thesis Committee and a general audience Committee by submitting a new Research tion ECE 699. The doctoral student must is required. In addition, all WPI thesis Advisor and Committee Selection form also establish two minors in fields outside regulations must be followed. to the Graduate Secretary. Changes to the of electrical engineering. Physics, mathe- student’s Research Advisor after comple- matics and/or computer science are usually Non-Thesis Option tion of the diagnostic examination must be recommended. Each student selects the Although the thesis is optional for M.S. approved by the ECE Graduate Program minors in consultation with their Research ECE students not financially supported by Committee. Changes to the student’s Advisor. At least 6 credits of graduate work the department, and there is no thesis op- Committee after completion of the area is required in each minor area. Courses tion available for M.Eng. ECE or M.Eng. examination must be approved by the with an ECE designation which are cross- ECE Graduate Program Committee.

76 Electrical and Computer Engineering Return to Table of Contents Diagnostic Examination Requirement the ECE Department Graduate Secretary originality of the dissertation research, the The doctoral student is required to for approval by the student’s research satisfactory execution of the dissertation complete the diagnostic examination advisor, the ECE Department Gradu- and the preparedness of the defense. requirement during the first year beyond ate Program Committee and the ECE The Graduate Secretary must be notified the M.S. degree (or equivalent number of Department Head. The program of study of a student’s defense at least seven days credits, for students admitted directly to should be completed in consultation with prior to the date of the defense, without the Ph.D. program) with a grade of Pass. the student’s research advisor and should exception. A student may not schedule a The diagnostic examination is scheduled include specific course work designed to defense until at least three months after with the student’s Research Advisor and address any shortcomings identified in the they have completed the area examination. Committee. Prior to scheduling the diag- student’s background during the Diagnos- nostic examination, a student must have a tic Examination. For the Combined B.S./M.S. completed Research Advisor and Com- Program Area Examination Requirement mittee Selection form on file in the ECE A WPI student accepted into the B.S./ department. The doctoral student is required to pass the area examination before writing a M.S. program may use 12 credit hours of The diagnostic examination is adminis- dissertation. The area examination is work for both the B.S. and M.S. degrees. tered by the student’s Research Advisor intended to be an opportunity for the stu- Note that students will not be able to and at least one member of the Commit- dent’s Advisor and Committee members to receive an M.Eng. ECE or M.Eng. PSE tee. Full participation of the Committee evaluate the suitability, scope, and novelty degree via this particular program. At least is recommended. At the discretion of the of the student’s proposed dissertation 6 credit hours must be graduate courses research advisor, additional faculty outside topic. The format of the area examination (including graduate level independent of the student’s committee may also is at the discretion of the student’s Advisor study and special topics courses), and none participate in the diagnostic examination. and Committee but will typically include may be lower than the 4000-level. No The diagnostic examination is intended to a presentation by the student describing extra work is required in the 4000-level be an opportunity to evaluate the stu- the current state of their research field, courses. A grade of B or better is required dent’s level of academic preparation and their planned research activities, and the for any course to be counted toward both identify any shortcomings in the student’s expected contributions of their work. degrees. A student must define the 12 background upon entrance to the PhD credit hours at the time of applying to program. The format and duration of the Students are eligible to take the area the B.S./M.S. program. Applications will diagnostic examination is at the discre- examination after they have successfully not be considered if they are submitted tion of the student’s Research Advisor and completed the diagnostic examination and prior to the second half of the applicant’s Committee. The examination may be have completed at least three semesters of junior year. Ideally, applications (including written or oral and may include ques- coursework in the graduate program. All recommendations) should be completed tions to test the general background of the PhD students are required to successfully by the early part of the last term of the student as well as questions specific to the complete the area examination prior to the junior year. student’s intended area of research. completion of their seventh semester in the graduate program. Failure to successfully At the start of Term A in the senior year, The Research Advisor and Committee complete the area examination prior to the but no later than at the time of applica- determine the outcome of the diagnostic end of the student’s seventh semester will tion, students are required to submit to examination (Pass, Repeat, or Fail) and be considered a failure to make satisfactory the graduate coordinator of the Electrical any required remediation intended to academic progress. and Computer Engineering Department address shortcomings identified in the a list of proposed courses to be taken student’s background. A grade of Fail The Research Advisor and Committee de- as part of the M.S. degree program. A will result in dismissal from the gradu- termine the Pass/Fail outcome of the area copy of the student’s academic transcript ate program. A grade of Repeat requires examination. A grade of Fail will result in (grade report) must be included with the the student to reschedule and retake the dismissal from the graduate program. Area application. examination completion forms must be diagnostic examination. A grade of Pass All students in the B.S./M.S. program in is expected to also include a summary of signed by the student’s Research Advisor and Committee Members and filed with Electrical and Computer Engineering who any prescribed remediation including, have completed their B.S. degree must but not limited to, coursework, reading the ECE department upon completion of the examination. register for at least six credits per semester assignments, and/or independent study. until they complete 30 credits toward their Irrespective of outcome of the examina- M.S. degree. If fewer than six credits are tion, a diagnostic examination completion Dissertation Requirement All Ph.D. students must complete and required to complete the M.S. degree, then form, signed by the student’s Research the student must register for at least the Advisor and committee, must be filed with orally defend a dissertation prepared under the general supervision of their Research number of credits required to complete the the ECE department upon completion of degree. If a student double counts a full 12 the examination. Advisor. The research described in the dis- sertation must be original and constitute credits for both the M.S. and B.S. degrees, Upon successful completion of the a contribution to knowledge in the major then the remaining 18 credits must be Diagnostic Examination, each doctoral field of the candidate. The Research Advi- completed within 3 semesters of graduate student must submit a program of study to sor and Committee certify the quality and work (1.5 years). Students who double

Return to Table of Contents Electrical and Computer Engineering 77 count less than 12 credits for both the Analog/Mixed Signal networking and in particular localization M.S. and B.S. degree will be allowed an Microelectronics Laboratory of wireless video capsule endoscope inside additional semester (2 years) to complete the small intestine. The past focus of the Prof. McNeill the degree. center were on indoor geolocation and The Analog and Mixed Signal Micro- Wi-Fi localization for application in smart All B.S./M.S. students are required to at- electronics Laboratory focuses on the devices and robots. The center was estab- tend and pass one of the graduate seminar continuation of research in self-calibrating lished in 1985 as the world’s first research courses, either ECE 596A (fall semester) or analog to-digital converter architectures center for the design of wireless local area ECE 596B (spring semester). and low-jitter clock generation; funded by networks. More details on the center are NSF, Allegro Microsystems, and Analog Students enrolled in the B.S./M.S. pro- available at www.cwins.wpi.edu. gram in Electrical and Computer Engi- Devices. http://ece.wpi.edu/analog/ neering may petition for permission to use Antenna Laboratory Embedded Computer a single graduate course (3 credits maxi- Laboratory Prof. Makarov mum) taken at other institutions to satisfy The Antenna Laboratory uses modeling Prof. Huang ECE B.S./M.S. degree requirements. The and hardware design of UHF, L-band, The mission of the Embedded Comput- course must be at the graduate level and and X-band antennas including wearable ing Lab is to solve important problems the student must have earned a grade of antennas (low UHF), base station of embedded computer systems, includ- B or better to be considered for transfer wideband GPS/modernized GPS antennas ing theories, architectures, circuits, and credit. (L-band), the broadband rib-cage dipoles, systems. Our current research is focused and the UHF non-scanning antenna arrays on ASIC, FPGA and SoC design for signal Certificate in Power Systems processing, wireless communications, error Engineering for directed power applications. http://ece.wpi.edu/ant/ correction coding, reconfigurable comput- This specialized program raises profession- ing, and computing acceleration. Our al competency levels of protection engi- Center for Advanced Integrated research goal is to create new architectures neers and focuses solely on the protection Radio Navigation (CAIRN) and circuit designs to facilitate high-speed and control aspects of the power industry. Prof. Michalson information processing at minimum This certificate consists of 12 credits of The Center for Advanced, Integrated, power consumption. graduate coursework. Radio Navigation (CAIRN) mission is http://computing.wpi.edu/ the development of radio systems that Information Processing, Electrical and Computer integrate communications and navigation Networking and Security functions. Basic research into radio design Engineering Research (analog and digital), wireless ad hoc (IPNS) Lab Laboratories/Centers networking and positioning is performed Prof. Lai The main research focus of the IPNS Lab Adaptive Signal Processing for both indoor and outdoor radio environments. The laboratory develops, is information theory, stochastic signal and Emerging Communications designs, implements, and field-tests a processing and their applications in com- Technologies (ASPECT) variety of radio and navigation systems. munications, complex networks, security, Laboratory Housed within the laboratory is the Public and other related areas. We are particularly Prof. Klein Safety Integration Center, which focuses interested in how to extract, process and The mission of the ASPECT Lab is study- on the development and deployment transmit useful information efficiently, ing a range of problems relating to both of communications, information, and reliably and securely. In the IPNS Lab, the basic theory as well as practical design navigation technologies for public safety we strive to understand the fundamental strategies for next-generation wireless applications. Representative projects: limits and are also interested in designing communication networks. The research Radio systems for indoor positioning, practical schemes to approach or achieve employs tools from a variety of areas, in- Digital radios for public safety systems, these fundamental limits. cluding communication and information Simulation of wireless ad hoc networks for Laboratory for Sensory and theories, statistical signal processing, and public safety applications. http://www.wpi.edu/academics/ece/cairn/index.html Physiologic Signal Processing – adaptive parameter estimation. Represen- 2 tative research: exploiting frequency selec- L(SP) tivity in cooperative communication links, Center for Wireless Information Prof. Clancy practical transceiver design for cooperative Networking Studies (CWINS) The mission of the Laboratory for Sensory and relay communication systems, and Prof. Pahlavan and Physiologic Signal Processing L(SP)2 adaptive digital compensation of RF front- The mission of the Center for Wireless In- is to employ signal processing, math- end non-idealities. http://aspect.wpi.edu/ formation Network Studies is the analysis ematical modeling, and other electrical of wideband radio propagation for design and computer engineering skills to study and performance evaluation of wireless applications involving electromyography access and localization techniques. The (EMG — the electrical activity of skeletal current focus of research is on body area muscle). Researchers are improving the

78 Electrical and Computer Engineering Return to Table of Contents detection and interpretation of EMG for Kunst, excellence, close faculty/student Ultrasound Research such uses as the control of powered pros- interaction, collaborative learning and re- Laboratory thetic limbs, restoration of gait after stroke search, respect for all members of the WPI Prof. Pedersen or traumatic brain injury, musculoskeletal community, our projects bring science The mission of the Ultrasound Research modeling, and clinical/scientific assess- and technology together with real-world Lab is to enable a wider use of medical ul- ment of neurologic function. problems. For more information, please trasound so that it can be used by medical http://www.csp2.wpi.edu/ visit the RIVeR Lab website: personnel with modest training. To that http://robot.wpi.edu/. Precision Personnel Locator end, we are developing a virtual reality- Project and Convergent RF-Electronic and Medical based, low cost, yet realistic PC based Technologies Center (CTC) Imaging Laboratory system for providing training in the skills of ultrasound imaging. In addition, we Prof. Ludwig Prof. Cyganski and Prof. Duckworth have promising research in quantitative ul- The RF-Electronics and Medical Imag- The mission of the Precision Personnel trasound elastography, in order to image in ing Laboratory uses clinical and animal Locator Project is to protect the lives of 2D and 3D the elastic rather than acoustic research in such diverse fields as neurol- emergency responders and to enhance properties of soft tissue. To make the ogy and oncology. The lab has access to their ability to accomplish their missions ultrasound image easier to interpret, we high-field and ultra high-field magnetic through research and development of are developing image analysis algorithms, resonance imaging (MRI) systems for use systems for personnel location and to aid the interpretation of the image for in functional and anatomical imaging. tracking, physiological status monitoring, trauma situations. Complementing this Major research focuses on visualization environmental sensing, and command and work, we are implementing a mobile ul- of elastic vibrations in the female breast. control. This project brings together trasound imaging system, augmented with A novel coil geometry was designed that diverse technical capabilities from other an exam camera and physiological sensors, proved more efficient at generating these centers and laboratories at WPI to address with the ability to wirelessly stream ultra- strong gradients when compared with con- important problems for emergency sound and visual images as well as voice ventional coil technology. Research has re- responders, the most critical of which is over 3G phone networks. Finally, we have sulted in the design of special-purpose ra- precise location knowledge for each ongoing research atherosclerotic plaque dio frequency array coil systems for breast person. The primary center involved in the classification. cancer diagnosis, bone density determina- current work is the Convergent Technol- http://www.wpi.edu/academics/ece/ultrasound/index.html ogy Center (CTC). The Convergent tion, and stroke. The lab has successfully Technology Center contributes expertise in tested its single-tuned and dual-tuned Vernam Group advanced signal and image processing, prototypes at various sites throughout the Profs. Eisenbarth, Lai, Sunar, Martin information fusion, algorithm design, U.S. in clinical MRI systems. (Mathematics), and Venkatasubramanian communication and computer networks. http://ece.wpi.edu/~gene/index.html (CS) Another important aspect of this work is The mission of the Vernam Group is to ad- that, as an academic enterprise, this project Signal Processing and Information Networking dress both short-term and long-term secu- involves graduate students as research rity problems spanning several disciplines. assistants, and undergraduate students as Laboratory (SPINLab) Group members are focused on developing summer interns. The opportunity for Prof. Brown new security technologies to ensure the research and development at the state of SPINLab was established in 2002 to inves- safety of all facets of the communication the art in communications, computation, tigate fundamental and applied problems and computation infrastructure bridging and positioning, is an unparalleled in signal processing, communication sys- the gap between cutting edge research and experience for our students. tems, and networking. Our current focus solid engineering practices, thus, providing http://www.wpi.edu/academics/ece/ppl/index.html is on the development of network carrier the perfect setting for the education of next synchronization schemes to facilitate Robotics and Intelligent Vehicles generation security experts. distributed beamforming and space-time http://ecewp.ece.wpi.edu/wordpress/vernam/faculty/ Research (RIVER) Laboratory coded cooperative transmission. We are Prof. Padir also working on techniques for optimal Wireless Innovation Laboratory The Robotics and Intelligent Vehicles resource allocation in multiuser com- (WILab) Research Laboratory (RIVeR Lab) at WPI munication systems and the application Prof. Wyglinski was founded in 2010 by Professor Taskin of game-theoretic tools to analyze selfish The Wireless Innovation Laboratory Padir. Our research is aimed at advancing behavior in cooperative communication (WILab) was established in 2007 in order the capabilities of autonomous robots and systems. SPINLab offers research oppor- to advance our understanding of technolo- intelligent vehicles. Research activities in tunities at both the graduate and under- gies and algorithms that can help improve the RIVeR Lab are centered around design, graduate levels. For more details, please see society’s usage of radio frequency spectrum analysis, implementation and control of the SPINLab Web page at for a wide range of wireless applications. intelligent vehicles, mobile robots, walking http://spinlab.wpi.edu. Several research activities currently robots, manipulators and adaptive systems. underway at WILab include the following: Aligned with WPI’s core values, Lehr and (1) Development and realization of high-speed spectrally agile waveforms for opportunistic spectrum access networks.

Return to Table of Contents Electrical and Computer Engineering 79 (2) Implementation of practical wireless ECE 505. Computer Architecture analysis, oscillators circuits, mixers and microwave device optimization techniques for rapidly This course introduces the fundamentals of com- antennas for wireless communication systems. selecting near-optimal operating parameters puter system architecture and organization. Topics (Prerequisites: ECE 504 or equivalent, undergrad- uate course in electromagnetic field analysis.) to enhance overall system performance. include CPU structure and function, addressing modes, instruction formats, memory system ECE 523. Power Electronics (3) Prototyping of innovative and novel organization, memory mapping and hierarchies, The application of electronics to energy conver- wireless networking system designs using concepts of cache and virtual memories, storage sion and control. Electrical and thermal charac- software-defined radio development systems, standard local buses, high-performance teristics of power semiconductor devices—diodes, I/O, computer communication, basic principles of platforms. (4) Creation of novel distrib- bipolar transistors and thyristors. Magnetic com- operating systems, multiprogramming, multipro- uted network architectures exploiting the ponents. State-space averaging and sampled-data cessing, pipelining and memory management. The agility of cognitive radios and the dynamic models. Emphasis is placed on circuit techniques. architecture principles underlying RISC and CISC spectrum access paradigm. (5) Introduction Application examples include dc-dc conversion, processors are presented in detail. The course also controlled rectifiers, high-frequency inverters, of “learning” into cognitive radio platforms includes a number of design projects, including resonant converters and excitation of electric ma- for complete automation of the operating simulating a target machine, architecture using chines. (Prerequisites: ECE 3204 and undergradu- parameter selection process. (6) Creation a high-level language (HLL). (Prerequisites: ate courses in modern signal theory and control Undergraduate course in logic circuits and mi- of vehicular communication network theory; ECE 504 is recommended.) architectures that opportunistically seek croprocessor system design, as well as proficiency out unoccupied frequency spectrum for in assembly language and a structured high-level ECE 524. Advanced Analog Integrated language such as C or Pascal.) performing secondary wireless transmis- Circuit Design This course is an advanced introduction to the ECE 506. Introduction to Local and Wide sions. Research infrastructure for WILab design of analog and mixed analog-digital inte- Area Networks consists of several high-performance grated circuits for communication and instrumen- This course provides an introduction to the computer workstations, sixteen software- tation applications. An overview of bipolar and theory and practice of the design of computer and CMOS fabrication processes shows the differences defined radio development platforms, an communications networks, including the ISO between discrete and integrated circuit design. Agilent CSA N1996A spectrum analyzer, seven-layer reference model. Analysis of network The bipolar and MOS transistors are reviewed an array of discone and horn antennas, topologies and protocols, including performance with basic device physics and the development of and several simulation software packages. analysis, is treated. Current network types and circuit models in various operating regions. The evolving network technologies are introduced, For more details, please see the WILab use of SPICE simulation in the design process including local, metropolitan and wide area website at http://www.Wireless.WPI.edu. will be covered. Integrated amplifier circuits are networks. The theory, design and performance of developed with an emphasis on understanding local area networks are emphasized. The course performance advantages and limitation in such ar- Course Descriptions includes an introduction to queueing analysis and eas as speed, noise and power dissipation. Simple All courses are 3 credits unless otherwise noted. network programming. (Prerequisites: A knowl- circuits are combined to form the basic functional edge of the C programming language is assumed. ECE 502. Analysis of Probabilistic building blocks such as the op-amp, comparator, CS 504 or ECE 502 or equivalent background in Signals and Systems voltage reference, etc. These circuit principles will probability; may be taken concurrently. NOTE: Applications of probability theory and its engi- be explored in an IC design project, which may Students who receive credit for ECE 573 may not neering applications. Random variables, distribu- be fabricated in a commercial analog process. receive credit for ECE 506.) tion and density functions. Functions of random Examples of possible topics include sample-and- variables, moments and characteristic functions. ECE 512. Acoustic and Ultrasound hold (S/H) amplifier, analog-to-digital (A/D) and Sequences of random variables, stochastic conver- Engineering digital-to-analog (D/A) converters, phase-locked gence and the central limit theorem. Concept of a Fundamentals of vibration. The acoustic wave loop (PLL), voltage-controlled oscillator, phase stochastic process, stationary processes and ergo- equation, transmission phenomena, absorption detector, switched capacitor and continuous-time dicity. Correlation functions, spectral analysis and and attenuation. Radiation from acoustic sources, filters, and sampled current techniques. (Prereq- their application to linear systems. Mean square dipole and line source radiation, planar piston uisite: Background in analog circuits both at the estimation. (Prerequisite: Undergraduate course in source, radiation patterns, beam width, directivity, transistor and functional block [op-amp, compara- signals and systems.) fields from pulsed transducers, Green’s function, tor, etc.] level. Also familiarity with techniques such as small-signal modeling and analysis in the ECE 503. Digital Signal Processing diffraction, reciprocity. Techniques for ultrasound s-plane using Laplace transforms. Undergraduate Discrete-time signals and systems, frequency modeling. Acoustic waveguides. Ultrasound course equivalent background ECE 3204; ECE analysis, sampling of continuous time signals, the transducer types and transducer modeling. Trans- 4902 helpful but not essential.) z-transform, implementation of discrete time sys- ducer characterization and calibration. Acoustic measurement techniques. (Prerequisites: ECE 502 tems, the discrete Fourier transform, fast Fourier ECE 529. Selected Topics in Electronic and ECE 504 or equivalent, undergraduate course transform algorithms, filter design techniques. System Design in modern signal theory, undergraduate course in (Prerequisites: Courses in complex variables, basic Courses in this group are devoted to the study of E/M field theory, or permission of the instructor.) signals and systems.) advanced topics in electronic system design. ECE 514. Fundamentals of RF and ECE 504. Analysis of Deterministic ECE 530/CS 530. High Performance MW Engineering Signals and Systems Networks This introductory course develops a comprehen- Review of Fourier series and linear algebra. Fourier This course is an in-depth study of the theory, sive understanding of Maxwell’s field theory as transforms, Laplace transforms, Z transforms design and performance of high-speed networks. applied to high-frequency radiation, propagation and their interrelationship. State space modeling Topics include specifi c high-performance net- and circuit phenomena. Topics include radio- of continuous-time and discrete-time systems. work architectures and protocols and emerging frequency (RF) and microwave (MW) propaga- Canonical forms, solution of state equations, con- technologies including multimedia networks and tion modes, transmission line aspects, Smith trollability, observability and stability of linear sys- quality-of- service issues. Topics associated with Chart, scattering parameter analysis, microwave tems. Pole placement via state feedback, observer interconnecting networks such as bridges and filters, matching networks, power flow relations, design, Lyapunov stability analysis. (Prerequisite: routers will also be discussed. Performance analysis unilateral and bilateral amplifier designs, stability Undergraduate course in signals and systems.) of networks will include basic queueing models. (Prerequisite: ECE 506/CS 513.)

80 Electrical and Computer Engineering Return to Table of Contents ECE 531. Principles of Detection and models of networks, routing, flow control, new topics covered are Power Quality measurements Estimation Theory technologies and protocol standards. The current in the era of smart grid, Power Quality problems Detection of signals in noise, optimum receiver literature will be used to study new networks caused by Renewable Generators, and Engineer- principles, M-ary detection, matched filters, concepts and emerging technologies. (Prerequisite: ing Economics issues related to Power Quality. orthogonal signals and representations of random ECE 506/CS 513 and ECE 581/CS 533.) (Prerequisites: ECE 5500 Power System Analysis. processes. MAP and maximum likelihood esti- Also, this course presumes that the student has an ECE 538. Wireless Information Networks mation. Wiener filtering and Kalman filtering. understanding of basic electronics.) Overview of wireless information networks and Channel considerations: prewhitening, fading and personal communications systems: digital cellular, ECE 5511. Transients in Power Systems diversity combining. (Prerequisites: ECE 502 and wireless PBX, cordless phone, wireless LAN, and This graduate level course introduces the student ECE 504 or equivalent.) mobile data, multimedia wireless and directions of to the effects of electromagnetic transients in ECE 5311. Information Theory and Coding the future. Radio propagation modeling for urban distribution systems. Topics include transient anal- This course introduces the fundamentals of and indoor radio channels, coverage interface ysis, lightning and switching surges, mechanisms information theory and discusses applications in and cell size. Modulation techniques for efficient of transient generation, insulation coordina- compression and transmission of data. Measures use of bandwidth resources. Methods to increase tion, grounding, surge protection devices, and of information, including entropy, and their the data rate: antenna diversity and sectorization, shielding. (Prerequisite: ECE 5500 Power System properties are derived. The limits of lossless data adaptive equalization, multirate transmission and Analysis) compression are derived and practical coding multiamplitude phase modulation. Spread spec- ECE 5512. Electromechanical Energy schemes approaching the theoretical limits are pre- trum for digital cellular, personal communications Conversion sented. Lossy data compression tradeoffs are dis- and wireless LAN applications. TDMA, CDMA, This graduate level course will further explore cussed in terms of the rate-distortion framework. ALOHA, and CSMA, DECT, GSM, USDC, alternating current circuits, three phase circuits, The concept of reliable communication through JDC, IEEE 802.11, WINForum, and HIPER- basics of electromagnetic field theory, magnetic noisy channels (channel capacity) is developed. LAN. (Prerequisite: Background in networks. circuits, inductance, and electromechanical energy Techniques for practical channel coding, including Familiarity with probability, statistics and signal conversion. Topics also include ideal transformer, block and convolutional codes, are also covered. processing). iron-core transformer, voltage regulation, efficien- (Prerequisite: background in probability and ran- ECE 539. Selected Topics in Communication cy equivalent circuit, and three phase transform- dom processes such as in ECE502 or equivalent). Theory and Signal Processing ers. Induction machine construction, equivalent ECE 5312. Modern Digital Courses in this group are devoted to the study of circuit, torque speed characteristics, and single Communications advanced topics in in Communication Theory phase motors, synchronous machine construc- This course introduces a rigorous analytical treat- and Signal Processing. tion, equivalent circuit, power relationships ment of modern digital communication systems, phasor diagrams, and synchronous motors will ECE 545/CS 545. Digital Image Processing including digital modulation, demodulation, be covered. Direct current machine construction, See CS 545 course description. and optimal receiver design. Error performance types, efficiency, power flow diagram, and external analysis of these communication systems when ECE 549. Selected Topics in Control characteristics will be discussed. operating over either noisy or band-limited chan- Courses in this group are devoted to the study of ECE 5520. Power System Protection and nels will be conducted. Advanced topics to be advanced topics in the formulation and solution Control covered include a subset of the following: MIMO, of theoretical or practical problems in modern This graduate level course seeks to provide an fading channels, multiuser communications, control. understanding of how interconnected power spread spectrum systems, and/or multicarrier systems and their components are protected from transmission. (Prerequisites: An understanding of ECE 5500. Power System Analysis abnormal events such as faults (short circuits), probability and random processes theory (ECE This graduate level course examines the principles over-voltages, off-nominal frequency and unbal- 502 or equivalent); an understanding of various of Power System Analysis. It will begin with a anced phase conditions. This subject is presented analog and digital (de)modulation techniques review of AC circuit analysis. The course will then from a theoretical viewpoint, however, many (ECE 3311 or equivalent); familiarity with MAT- cover the topics of transmission line parameter practical examples and applications are included LAB programming. calculation, symmetrical component analysis, transformer and load modeling, symmetrical and that emphasize the limitations of existing protec- ECE 535. Telecommunications Transmission unsymmetrical fault analysis, power flow, and tive equipment. Course content is not specific to Technologies power systems stability. (Prerequisites: Knowledge any particular manufacturer’s equipment. This course introduces the principle technologies of circuit analysis, basic calculus and differential The course begins with a brief review of power used to implement the physical networking layer. equations, elementary matrix analysis and basic system operation, three-phase system calculations These include high-speed electronic pulse shapers computer programming.) and the representation (modeling) of power sys- and receivers, optical sources, detectors, fiber tem elements. The modeling of current transform- media, active optical elements, RF devices and ECE 5510. Power Quality This graduate level course provides detailed expla- ers under steady-state and transient conditions systems, and the related protocols and modulation is presented with emphasis on the impact on schemes for reliable and multi-user communica- nations of the physical mechanisms that control phenomena related to Power Quality. It addresses protective devices. A unit on system grounding tions (time, frequency, space and code-division and its impact on protective device operation are multiplexing, error correction coding, spectral concepts that underlie harmonic generation and harmonic flow, and the modeling of voltage sags included. Course emphasis then shifts to protec- reuse, and so on). The course includes laboratory tive devices and their principles of operation. Both experiments. (Prerequisites: ECE 502 or CS 504; and swells. The effects of such disturbances on equipment (transformers, rotating machines, electromechanical and numeric relay designs are undergraduate-level understanding of signal and covered. The final course segments cover specific circuit theory.) lamps, relays and converters) performance are studied by means of actual field cases. Frequency applications such as pilot protection of transmis- ECE 537/CS 577. Advanced Computer response of the grid, resonances and ferroreso- sion lines, generator protection and transformer and Communications Networks nances as well as electromagnetic interference protection. (Prerequisite: ECE 5500 Power System This course covers advanced topics in the theory, are studied. Mitigation methods using advanced Analysis) design and performance of computer and com- transformers connections, static, hybrid and active munication networks. Topics will be selected from filters are modeled using real-life examples. Others such areas as local area networks, metropolitan area networks, wide area networks, queuing

Return to Table of Contents Electrical and Computer Engineering 81 ECE 5521. Protective Relaying load shedding, reclosing and out-of-step relaying. control as well as steady-state and transients stabil- This graduate level course is the first of a two (Prerequisite: ECE 5521 Protective Relaying. ity. Students will learn in detail the principles of course sequence that covers both the principles Note: Credit cannot be awarded for this course traditional reactive power compensation (shunt and practices of power system protective relaying. if credit has already been received for ECE 5520 reactors and capacitors); series compensation and The course seeks to provide an understanding of Power System Protection and Control.) modern static reactive compensation like SVC, how interconnected power systems and their com- STATCOM and other Flexible AC Transmission ECE 5523. Power System Dynamics ponents are protected from abnormal events such Systems (FACTS) devices. The effects of each of This graduate level course is concerned with as faults (short circuits), over-voltages, off-nominal these types of compensation on static and dy- modeling, analyzing and mitigating power system frequency and unbalanced phase conditions. This namic voltage control, reactive power requirement stability and control problems. The course seeks subject is presented from a theoretical viewpoint, and steady-state and transient stability problems to provide an understanding of the electrome- however, many practical examples are included are covered from theoretical as well as practi- chanical dynamics of the interconnected electric that emphasize the limitations of existing protec- cal aspects. Particular attention is given to the power grid. This subject is presented from a tive equipment. Course content is not specific mathematical models and principles of operation theoretical viewpoint; however, many practical to any particular manufacturer’s equipment. The of many types of compensation systems. Basic examples are included. The course begins with a course begins with a brief review of the nature principles of operation and control of High- description of the physics of the power system, of power system operation, power system faults Voltage DC (HVDC) systems and their impact frequency regulation during “steady-state” opera- and other abnormal conditions. The nature and on steady-state and dynamics of power system will tion, dynamic characteristics of modern power objectives of protective relaying are covered next be covered as well. (Prerequisite: ECE 5500 Power systems, a review of feedback control systems, with emphasis on how the power system can be System Analysis.) power system frequency regulation, and a review monitored to detect abnormal conditions. The of protective relaying. This is followed by material ECE 5599. Capstone Project Experience in computational tools needed to analyze system on synchronous machine theory and modeling. Power Systems operation and apply protective relaying are cov- Simulation of power system dynamic response, This project-based course integrates power systems ered next, including the per-unit system, phasors small signal stability, transient stability analysis engineering theory and practice, and provides the and symmetrical components. The modeling using SIMULINK and effects of non-traditional opportunity to apply the skills and knowledge of current transformers under steady-state and power sources on systems dynamics will also be acquired in the Power Systems curriculum. The transient conditions is presented with emphasis on covered. Power system stabilizers, load modeling project is normally conducted in teams of two to the impact on protective devices. A unit on system and under frequency load shedding are covered in four students. Students are encouraged to select grounding and its impact on protective device the final lectures. (Prerequisite: ECE 5500 Power projects with practical significance to their cur- operation is included. Course emphasis then System Analysis and ECE 5511 Transients in rent and future professional responsibilities. The shifts to protective devices and their principles of Power Systems or equivalent background experi- projects are administered, advised, and evaluated operation. Both electromechanical and numeric ence is suggested. Familiarity with the basics of by WPI faculty as part of the learning experience, relay designs are covered. (Prerequisite: ECE 5500 Laplace Transforms, derivatives, transfer functions, but students are also encouraged to seek mentor- Power System Analysis or equivalent background poles and zeros, block diagram and the notion of ship from experienced colleagues in the Power experience is suggested. Familiarity with phasors, feedback with basic understanding power system Systems profession. (Prerequisites: Since the Cap- derivatives, transfer functions, poles and zeros, analysis topics recommended.) stone Project will draw on knowledge obtained block diagram and the notion of feedback with throughout the degree program, it is expected that basic understanding power system analysis or ECE 5530. Power Distribution the student will have completed most or all of similar background is recommended. Note: Credit This graduate level course introduces the funda- the coursework within their plan of study before cannot be awarded for this course if credit has mentals of power distribution systems, apparatus, undertaking the capstone project.) already been received for ECE 5520 Power System and practices suited to new and experienced utility Protection and Control.) distribution engineers. Topics include distribution ECE 559. Selected Topics in Energy Sys- system designs, transformers and connections, tems ECE 5522. Advanced Applications in practical aspects of apparatus and protection, prin- Protective Relaying Courses in this group are devoted to the study of ciples of device coordination, grounding, voltage This graduate level course covers advanced topics advanced topics in energy systems. Typical topics control, and power quality. (Prerequisites: Prior in the principles and practices of power system include optimal power flow, probability methods courses in magnetism and three-phase circuits. An protective relaying. The course seeks to provide an in power systems analysis, surge phenomena, electric machines course would be recommended.) understanding of how protective relays are applied design of electrical apparatus, transient behavior of to protect power system components. While the ECE 5531. Power System Operation and electric machines and advanced electromechanical subject is presented from a theoretical viewpoint, Planning energy conversion. many practical examples are included. Examples This graduate-level course deals with modern op- ECE 566. VLSI Design specific to both new installations and existing, eration, control and planning for power systems. VLSI Design introduces computer engineers and older facilities will be included. Course content Topics include: Characteristics of generating units; computer scientists to the techniques, methodolo- is not specific to any particular manufacturer’s Economic Dispatch; Unit Commitment; Effects gies and issues involved in conceptual and physical equipment. The course begins with applications of of the transmission system on power delivery; design of complex digital integrated circuits. The protective devices to generators. This will include Optimal Power Flow and Location Marginal Pric- course presupposes knowledge of computer sys- distributed generation as well as wind-turbine ing; Power System Security; State Estimation for tems and hardware design such as found in ECE and inverter-connected sources. Transformer Power Systems; Power System Reliability Evalua- 505, but does not assume detailed knowledge of protection is covered next, including application tion. Software tools such as MATLAB and power transistor circuits and physical electronics. (Prereq- procedures for older, electromechanical relays system simulator software will be used both in the uisite: ECE 505 or equivalent.) as well as modern numeric relay designs. A unit classroom and in some homework assignments. on bus protection is covered next, including all ECE 569. Selected Topics in Solid State typical high-speed and time backup bus protec- ECE 5540. Power Transmission Courses in this group are devoted to the study of tion schemes. Transmission line and distribution This graduate level course focuses on the theory advanced topics in solid state, for example: degen- feeder protection is covered in detail including and current professional practice in problems erate semiconductors, many-body theory, elastic both conventional and communications-assisted of electric power transmission. It begins with effects and phonon conduction, and solar cells. To schemes. The course ends with a unit on other a review of the theory of AC electric power reflect changes in faculty research interests, these protection applications such as under frequency transmission networks and addresses a range of courses may be modified or new courses may be challenges related to reactive power and voltage added.

82 Electrical and Computer Engineering Return to Table of Contents ECE 572/CS 514. Advanced Systems systems based on elliptic curves are then devel- ECE 598. Directed Research Architecture oped. Signature algorithms, hash functions, key Each student will work under the direct supervi- This course covers techniques such as caching, distribution and identification schemes are treated sion of a member of the department staff on an hierarchical memory, pipelining and parallelism, as advanced topics. Some advanced mathematical experimental or theoretical problem which may that are used to enhance the performance of com- algorithms for attacking cryptographic schemes involve an extensive literature search, experimental puter systems. It compares and contrasts different are discussed. Application examples will include procedures and analysis. A comprehensive report approaches to achieving high performance in a protocol for security in a LAN and a secure in the style of a technical report or paper and machines ranging from advanced microprocessors smart card system for electronic banking. Special an oral presentation are required. (A maximum to vector supercomputers (CRAY, CYBER). It consideration will be given to schemes which of two registrations in ECE 598 is permitted.) also illustrates how these techniques are applied are relevant for network environments. For all (Prerequisite: Graduate standing.) in massively parallel SIMD machines (DAP, schemes, implementation aspects and up-to-date Connection Machine). In each case the focus is security estimations will be discussed. (Prereq- ECE 599. Thesis on the combined hardware /software performance uisites: Working knowledge of C; an interest in ECE 630. Advanced Topics in Signal achieved and the interaction between applica- discrete mathematics and algorithms is highly Processing tion demands and hardware/software capabilities. desirable. Students interested in a further study of The course will cover a set of important topics (Prerequisites: This course assumes the material the underlying mathematics may register for MA in signal and image analysis: orthogonal signal covered in ECE 505. The student should also 4891 [B term], where topics in modern algebra decomposition, wavelet transforms, analytic sig- have a background in computer programming and relevant to cryptography will be treated.) nals, time-frequency estimation, 2D FT, Hankel operating systems (CS 502). Familiarity with basic ECE 579. Selected Topics in Computer transform and tomographic reconstruction. In probability and statistics such as ECE 502 or MA Engineering addition, the course will each year have selected 541 is recommended.) Courses in this group are devoted to the study of current topics in signal processing, e.g., ambiguity ECE 574. Modeling and Synthesis of advanced topics in computer engineering such functions in RADAR and SONAR, coded wave- Digital Systems Using Verilog and VHDL as real-time intelligent systems, VLSI design and forms, Fourier based beamforming for 2D arrays This is an introductory course on Verilog and high-level languages. and single value decomposition. In place of a final VHDL, two standard hardware description lan- exam, there will be a student project. The course ECE 581/CS 533. Modeling and guages (HDLs), for students with no background is intended for students working in areas such as Performance Evaluation of Network and or prior experience with HDLs. In this course image analysis, NDE, ultrasound, audio, speech, Computer Systems we will examine some of the important features RADAR, SONAR and date compression. Signal/ Methods and concepts of computer and commu- of Verilog and VHDL. The course will enable image theory and applications will be emphasized nication network modeling and system perfor- students to design, simulate, model and synthesize over coding; however, Matlab-based modules for mance evaluation. Stochastic processes; measure- digital designs. The dataflow, structural, and self-paced signal/image visualization and manipu- ment techniques; monitor tools; statistical analysis behavioral modeling techniques will be discussed lation will be part of the course. (Prerequisites: of performance experiments; simulation models; and related to how they are used to design com- ECE 504 Analysis of Deterministic Signals and analytic modeling and queueing theory; M/M, binational and sequential circuits. The use of test Systems, undergraduate course in linear systems Erlang, G/M, M/G, batch arrival, bulk service benches to exercise and verify the correctness of theory and vector calculus.) and priority systems; work load characterization; hardware models will also be described. Course performance evaluation problems. (Prerequisites: ECE 673. Advanced Cryptography Projects: Course projects will involve the model- CS 504 or ECE 502, or equivalent background in This course provides deeper insight into areas ing and sysntesis and testing of systems using probability.) of cryptography which are of great practical and Xilinx tools. We will be targeting Xilinx FPGA theoretical importance. The three areas treated are and CPLDs. Students will need to purchase a ECE 596A and ECE 596B. Graduate detailed analysis and the implementation of cryp- FPGA or CPLD development board for project Seminars toalgorithms, advanced protocols, and modern at- assignments. (Other VHDL tools may be used The presentations in the graduate seminar series tacks against cryptographic schemes. The first part if these are available to the student at their place will be of tutorial nature and will be presented by of the lecture focuses on public key algorithms, in of employment.) Students will have the choice recognized experts in various fields of electrical particular ElGamal, elliptic curves and Diffie- of completing assignments in either Verilog or and computer engineering. All full-time graduate Hellman key exchange. The underlying theory of VHDL. (Prerequisites: Logic Circuits and experi- students will be required to take both seminar Galois fields will be introduced. Implementation ence with programming in a high-level language courses, ECE 596A and ECE 596B, once during of performance security aspects of the algorithms (such as C or Pascal) and a computer architecture their graduate studies in the Electrical and Com- will be looked at. The second part of the course course such as ECE 505.) puter Engineering Department. The course will be deals with advanced protocols. New schemes for given Pass/Fail. (Prerequisite: Graduate standing.) ECE 578/CS 578. Cryptography and authentication, identification and zero-knowledge Data Security ECE 597. Independent Study proof will be introduced. Some complex protocols This course gives a comprehensive introduction Approved study of a special subject or topics se- for real-world application— such as key distribu- to the field of cryptography and data security. lected by the student to meet his or her particular tion in networks and for smart cards—will be The course begins with the introduction of requirements or interests. Can be technical in introduced and analyzed. The third part will look the concepts of data security, where classical nature, or a review of electrical and computer into state-of-the-art cryptoanalysis (i.e., ways to algorithms serve as an example. Different attacks engineering history and literature of importance break cryptosystems). Brute force attacks based on cryptographic systems are classified. Some and permanent value. (Prerequisite: B.S. in ECE on special purpose machines, the baby-step giant- pseudo-random generators are introduced. The or equivalent.) step and the Pohlig-Hellman algorithms will be concepts of public and private key cryptography discussed. (Prerequisites: ECE 578/ CS 578 or are developed. As important representatives for equivalent background.) secret key schemes, DES and IDEA are described. ECE 699. Ph.D. Dissertation The public key schemes RSA and ElGamal, and

Return to Table of Contents Electrical and Computer Engineering 83 Fire Protection Engineering www.wpi.edu/+fpe

Faculty Adjunct FPE Faculty D. A. Lucht, Director Emeritus; build- R. Alpert, Adjunct Professor; Sc.D., ing codes and regulatory reform, building Core FPE Program Faculty Massachusetts Institute of Technology; fire safety analysis and design, professional K. A. Notarianni, Associate Professor combustion gas dynamics, combustion- practice. and Department Head; Ph.D., Carnegie induced instabilities about blunt-body R. Zalosh; Professor Emeritus, Ph.D., Mellon University; Fire detection and projectiles, fire dynamics, reduced-scale Northeastern University; Fire and explo- suppression; high-bay fire protection; fire modeling, enclosure fires; numerical mod- sion hazards associated with flammable policy and risk; uncertainty; performance- eling of the interactions between fire flows gases, liquids, and powders. Fire/explosion based design; engineering tools for the fire and sprinkler droplet sprays. service. protection methods and systems designed N. Kazantsis; Ph.D., University of to deal with these special hazards. Theo- N. A. Dembsey, Professor; Ph.D., Univer- Michigan/Ann Arbor; energy and environ- retical, experimental, and risk-based engi- sity of California at Berkeley; Fire proper- mental systems analysis, chemical process neering tools for addressing these issues. ties of materials and protective clothing safety, risk characterization, regulation of via bench-top scale experimentation; chemicals. Research Interests compartment fire dynamics via residential WPI is a recognized world leader in a scale experimentation, evaluation, develop- W. Krein, Adjunct Assistant Professor; wide range of topics in fire protection ment and validation of compartment fire Fire Protection Engineering and School engineering and related areas. Research is models, performance fire codes, engineer- of Business; organizational behavior, directed toward both theoretical under- ing design tools, and engineering forensic entrepreneurship, corporate financial standings and the development of practical tools. management, mergers and acquisitions, consulting, engineering economics, project engineering methods. WPI faculty and B. J. Meacham, Associate Professor; management. their students create new knowledge that Ph.D., Clark University; risk and public informs and shapes regulatory policy, policy, performance-based design, risk R. Pietroforte, Associate Professor; Ph.D., building design, product manufacturing, concepts in regulation, uncertainty in Massachusetts Institute of Technology; and product performance standards. egress modeling. architectural engineering, construction en- gineering and management, architecture, Specific capabilities and interests include: M. T. Puchovsky, Professor of Practice; prefabrication of building systems and fire and material;, combustion and explo- fire engineering design practices, codes and building design. sion protection; computer modeling; fire standards development, loss control, life performance of structural systems; fire safety code and design, performance-based W. Shields, Adjunct Associate Professor; detection and suppression; fire and smoke design and risk analysis, fire investigation Ph.D., Virginia Tech; Juris Doctorate, dynamics; wildland urban interface fires; and litigation support, fire protection Columbia University School of Law; regulatory policy, risk, and engineering systems. nuclear engineering, law/science interfaces, framework; and firefighter safety and astrophysics and applied mathematics, policy. A. Rangwala, Associate Professor, Ph.D., Defense Nuclear Facilities Safety Board, University of California, San Diego; Assistant General Counsel-Nuclear Programs of Study combustion, flame spread on solid fuels Regulatory Commission. and compartment fire modeling, dust The Department of Fire Protection Engi- explosions, risk assessment of Liquefied J. Tubbs, Adjunct Assistant Professor; neering serves as a crossroads for bringing Natural Gas (LNG) transport and storage, Consulting, large unique building design, together talents from many disciplines to industrial fire protection. smoke control systems, detection and focus on fire and explosion safety prob- alarm, egress from fire. A. Simeoni, Associate Professor; Ph.D., lems. The department features formal de- University of Corsica; modeling, simula- C. Wood, Adjunct Associate Professor; gree and certificate programs in fire protec- tion and experiments of wildfires, heat Licensed attorney, fire protection engineer- tion engineering, continuing education for and mass transfer, fire fighting and land ing, expert witness testimony, fire mod- the practitioner, and research to uncover management. eling and dynamics. Fire investigation, new knowledge about fire behavior and failure analysis of fires and explosions. fire protection methods. Associated FPE Program Faculty L. Albano, Associate Professor; Ph.D., FPE Emeritus The fire protection engineering program Massachusetts Institute of Technology; R. W. Fitzgerald, Professor Emeritus; at WPI adapts previous educational and Performance of structural members, ele- Ph.D., University of Connecticut; struc- employment experiences into a cohesive ments, and systems at elevated tempera- tural aspects of fire safety, building analysis Plan of Study. Consequently, the program tures; structural design for fire conditions; and design for fire safety, marine fire is designed to be flexible enough to meet simplified or design office techniques for safety, building codes, real estate develop- specific and varying student educational fire-structure interaction; relationship be- ment, fire department operations, risk objectives. Students can select combina- tween building construction systems and management. tions of major courses, non-major courses, fire service safety.

84 Fire Protection Engineering Return to Table of Contents thesis and project topics that will prepare Master’s Program For the Ph.D. them to proceed in the career directions The M.S. program is a graduate level The degree of doctor of philosophy is they desire. The curriculum can be tailored program in Fire Protection Engineering conferred on candidates in recognition to enhance knowledge and skill in the gen- and Policy that is structured to be equally of high scientific attainments and the eral practice of fire protection engineering, effective for full-time or part-time distance ability to conduct original research. Ph.D. in fire protection engineering specialties learning study. The M.S. program is a high students must complete a minimum of 90 (such as industrial, chemical, energy, de- level graduate program designed to refine semester hours of graduate work after the sign, or testing), or in the more theoretical critical thinking skills necessary for making bachelor’s degree (or 60 semester hours and research-oriented sphere. you an industry leader. after the master’s). This includes at least 15 Practicing engineers or others already semester hours of fire protection engineer- ­employed and wishing to advance their Ph.D. Program ing course credits and 30 hours of disserta- technical skills may enter the program The Ph.D. degree in the department of tion research. Fire Protection Engineering will focus on a as part-time students or take off-campus Doctoral students must successfully program that produces scholars capable of courses via WPI’s Quality Online Courses complete the fire protection engineering creating new knowledge for the field. Our (see page 9) The master’s degree may be qualifying examination, a research pro- Ph.D. graduates will function at a high completed on a part-time basis in less than posal and public seminar, and the disserta- level no matter where they work or go in two years, depending on the number of tion defense. courses taken each semester. the profession. WPI offers both master’s and doctoral Admission Requirements Graduate Internships degrees as well as the advanced certificate A unique internship program is available High school graduates applying for the and graduate certificate in fire protection to fire protection engineering students, Combined B.S./Master’s Program must engineering. allowing them to gain important clinical meet normal undergraduate admission experiences in practical engineering and WPI offers combined BS/MS programs for criteria and submit a two-page essay research environments. Students are able students wishing to complete two degrees articulating their interest in the field. to earn income while maintaining their in a condensed time frame. Applicants for the master’s or certificate student status. Internships are generally programs should have a B.S. in engineer- full time for one year and provide the Graduate Certificate ing, engineering technology or the physical student a chance to try out various areas of The graduate certificate program in Fire sciences. Applicants with no FPE work practice, generate income, gain knowledge Protection Engineering provides qualified experience should submit a two-page essay and experience, and make valuable lifetime students with an opportunity to further articulating their interest in the field. their studies in an advanced field. A com- contacts. pleted undergraduate degree in engineer- Students with science degrees and ing or physical science is the preferred graduates of some engineering technology Research Laboratories prerequisite for admission. Four courses disciplines may be required to take selected Fire Science Laboratory are selected from a range of offerings in undergraduate courses to round out their backgrounds. This brand new and exciting laboratory consultation with an academic advisor. facility supports both fundamental studies Taken together, the courses form a cohe- GRE scores are required for all interna- and large scale engineering studies, experi- sive theme. Options include but are not tional students and all Ph.D. applicants. mentation in fire dynamics, combustion/ limited to: Core Concepts in Fire Protec- explosion phenomena, detection, and tion Engineering, Industrial Applications, Degree Requirements fire and explosion suppression. The Fire Hazard and Risk Assessment, Facility and For the M.S. Propagation Apparatus, cone calorimeter, Building Design, Advanced Protection infrared imaging system, phase doppler Systems, and Fire Protection Management. The program for a master of science in fire protection engineering is flexible and can particle analyzer and room calorimeter are Combined B.S./Master’s be tailored to individual student career also available, with associated gas analysis Program goals. The fire protection engineering mas- and data acquisition systems, making ter’s degree requires 30 semester hours of this a truly unique awe-inspiring place to High school seniors and engineering conduct research. students in their first three years can apply credit. Both a thesis and non-thesis option for this five-year program. This gives high are offered. A 9 credit thesis can replace 9 The wet lab area supports water-based fire school graduates and others the opportu- credits of course work. All M.S. students suppression and demonstration projects. are required to take 9 units of core classes; nity to complete the undergraduate degree Serving as both a teaching and research FP 521, FP 570, FP 553, and at least one in a selected field of engineering and the facility, the lab accommodates undergradu- Fire Protection Integration course; FP 571 master’s degree in fire protection engineer- ate projects as well as graduate students and/or FP 573. The remaining credits 18 ing in five years. Holders of bachelor of in fire protection engineering, mechanical credits are chosen by the student and up to science degrees in the traditional engineer- engineering and related disciplines. ing fields and the master’s degree in fire 9 credits can be taken outside of the Fire protection engineering enjoy extremely Protection discipline (with academic advi- good versatility in the job market. sors approval).

Return to Table of Contents Fire Protection Engineering 85 Fire Modeling Laboratory installation and approval standards are reviewed. warnings and safe product design. Application (Prerequisites: Undergraduate courses in chemis- of course materials is developed through projects The Fire Modeling Laboratory specializes try, fluid mechanics and either thermodynamics or involving actual case studies. (Prerequisite: in computer applications to fire protection physical chemistry.) FP 521, FP 553, FP 570 or special permission of engineering and research. Research activi- the instructor.) FP 554. Advanced Fire Suppression ties include computational fluid dynamics Advanced topics in suppression systems analysis FP 573. Industrial Fire Protection modeling of building and vehicle fires, and design are discussed with an aim toward Principles of fire dynamics, heat transfer and flame spread model development, and developing a performance-based understanding thermodynamics are combined with a general building egress modeling. of suppression technology. Automatic sprinkler knowledge of automatic detection and suppression systems are covered from the standpoint of systems to analyze fire protection requirements for Combustion Laboratory predicting actuation times, reviewing numeri- generic industrial hazards. Topics covered include The WPI Combusion Lab supports stud- cal methods for hydraulic analyses of pipe flow safe separation distances, plant layout, hazard ies of fundamental combustion properties networks and understanding the phenomenology isolation, smoke control, warehouse storage, and involved in water spray suppression. Special sup- flammable liquid processing and storage. Historic as they relate to fire safety. Experimental pression systems are covered from the standpoint industrial fires influencing current practice on set-ups are available for the study of self- of two-phase and non-Newtonian pipe flow and these topics are also discussed. (Prerequisites: FP heating of coal dust; flammable properties simulations of suppression agent discharge and 553, FP 521 or special permission of the instruc- of gasoline containers; cross-correlation mixing in an enclosure. (Prerequisite: FP 553 or tor.) special permission of instructor.) velocimetry and the laminar burning FP 575. Explosion Protection velocity of flammable dusts. FP 555. Detection, Alarm and Principles of combustion explosions are taught Smoke Control along with explosion hazard and protection ap- Course Descriptions Principles of fire detection using flame, heat and plications. Topics include a review of flammabil- All courses are 3 credits unless otherwise noted. smoke detector technology are described. Fire ity limit concentrations for flammable gases and alarm technology and the electrical interface with dusts; thermochemical equilibrium calculations FP 520. Fire Modeling fire/smoke detectors are reviewed in the context of adiabatic closed-vessel deflagration pressures, Modeling of compartment fire behavior is studied of contemporary equipment and installation stan- and detonation pressures and velocities; pressure through the use and application of two types of dards. Smoke control systems based on buoyancy development as a function of time for closed models: zone and field. The zone model studied is and HVAC principles are studied in the context of vessels and vented enclosures; the current status CFAST. The field model studied is FDS. Focus on building smoke control for survivability and safe of explosion suppression technology; and vapor in-depth understanding of each of these models egress. (Prerequisites: FP 553 and FP 521, which cloud explosion hazards. is the primary objective in terms of needed input, can be taken concurrently.) equations solved, interpretation of output and FP 580. Special Problems limitations. Additional fundamental understand- FP 570. Building Fire Safety I Individual or group studies on any topic relating ing of fire models is gained via a student devel- This course focuses on the presentation of qualita- to fire protection may be selected by the student oped model. A working student model is required tive and quantitative means for firesafety analysis and approved by the faculty member who super- for successful completion of the course. Basic in buildings. Fire test methods, fire and building vises the work. Examples include: computational ability is assumed. Basic numerical codes and standards of practice are reviewed in • Business Practice methods are used and can be learned during the the context of a systematic review of firesafety in • Combustion course via independent study. (Prerequisite: FP proposed and existing structures. • People in Fires 521 or permission of the instructor.) • Fire Risk and Regulatory Policy FP 571. Performance-Based Design • Fire Dynamics II FP 521. Fire Dynamics I This course covers practical applications of fire • Fire and Materials This course introduces students to fundamentals protection engineering principles to the design • Forensic Techniques of fire and combustion and is intended to serve of buildings. Both compartmented and non- • Uncertainty in FPE Design and Decision as the first exposure to fire dynamics phenom- compartmented buildings will be designed for Making ena. The course includes fundamental topics in criteria of life safety, property protection, continu- fire and combustion such as thermodynamics of ity of operations, operational management and FP 587. Fire Science Laboratory combustion, fire chemistry, premixed and diffu- cost. Modern analytical tools as well as traditional This course provides overall instruction and sion flames, solid burning, ignition, plumes, heat codes and standards are utilized. Interaction with hands-on experience with fire-science-related release rate curves, and flame spread. These topics architects and code officials, and an awareness of experimental measurement techniques. The objec- are then used to develop the basis for introduc- other factors in the building design process are tive is to expose students to laboratory-scale fire ing compartment fire behavior, pre- and post- incorporated through design exercises and a design experiments, standard fire tests and state-of-the-art flashover conditions and zone modeling. Basic studio. (Prerequisites: FP 553, FP 521 and measurement techniques. The lateral ignition and computational ability is assumed. Basic numerical FP 570, or special permission of the instructor.) flame transport (LIFT) apparatus, state-of-the-art smoke detection systems, closed-cup flashpoint methods are used and can be learned during the FP 572. Failure Analysis course via independent study. (Prerequisites: Un- tests and gas analyzers are among the existing Development of fire investigation and reconstruc- laboratory apparatus. Fire-related measurement dergraduate chemistry, thermodynamics or physi- tion as a basis for evaluating and improving fire- cal chemistry, fluid mechanics and heat transfer.) techniques for temperature, pressure, flow and safety design. Accident investigation theory and veloci ty, gas species and heat fluxes, infrared ther- FP 553. Fire Protection Systems failure analysis techniques such as fault trees and mometry, doppler velocimetry (LDV) and This course provides an introduction to auto- event sequences are presented. Fire dynamics and laser-induced fluorescence (LIF) will be reviewed. matically activated fire suppression and detec- computer modeling are applied to assess possible (Prerequisite: FP 521.) tion systems. A general overview is presented of fire scenarios and the effectiveness of fire protec- relevant physical and chemical phenomena, and tion measures. The product liability aspects of FP 590. Thesis commonly used hardware in automatic sprinkler, failure analysis are presented. Topics include prod- Research study at the M.S. level. ucts liability law, use of standard test methods, gaseous agent, foam and dry chemical systems. FP 690. Ph.D. Dissertation Typical contemporary installations and current

86 Fire Protection Engineering Return to Table of Contents Interactive Media and Game Development

Faculty D. M. O’Donnell, Teaching Professor; Program of Study M.F.A., Brandeis University. Game and E. O. Agu, Associate Professor; Ph.D., level design, narrative, and the impact of The Master of Science in Interactive Univ. of Massachusetts, 2001. Computer new media on society. ­Media and Game Development (IMGD) graphics, wireless networking, and mobile is designed for those interested in the computing. G. D. J. Phillies, Professor; D.Sc., Massa- design of immersive, interactive environ- chusetts Institute of Technology. Tabletop ments. The intended audience includes F. W. Bianchi, Professor; D.A. Ball State strategy games, light-scattering spectros- U. Virtual orchestra, multichannel sound college graduates looking for continued copy, complex fluids, statistical mechanics, education in interactive media, game- design. biophysical chemistry, polymer dynamics, industry professionals looking to assume M. L. Claypool, Professor/Director; surfactants, wavelets. leadership roles, professionals from other Ph.D., Univ. of Minnesota, 1997. Distrib- C. Rich, Professor; Ph.D., Massachusetts fields retooling for the game industry, uted systems, networking, multimedia and Institute of Technology, 1980. Artificial and those seeking scholarship in interac- online games. intelligence and its intersections with tive media. Graduate students in IMGD: J. deWinter, Assistant Professor; Ph.D., human-computer interaction, interactive 1) take core courses that provide a base Univ. of Arizona, 2008. New media theory media and game development, robotics, of knowledge relevant to the design of and praxis, spatial and visual rhetorics, intelligent tutoring systems, knowledge- interactive media; 2) select courses from histories and theories of rhetoric, post- based software tools. Technical, Serious Games, or Management Focus areas that enable tailoring the degree colonial theory, Japanese rhetoric and J. Rosenstock, Assistant Professor; M.F.A., culture. to suit interests and career goals; and 3) School of the Art Institute of Chicago, design, develop, and evaluate a substantial J. Farbrook, Assistant Professor; M.F.A., 2004. Multimedia Performance, Inter- group project and/or undertake a thesis Univ. of Colorado, 2004. Alternative uses active Installation Art, Experimental with novel scholarship as a capstone expe- for video game technology, virtual instal- Electronic Instrument design, Diasporic rience. Graduates with an IMGD graduate lation art, video, sound, and live perfor- Music and Culture, Video/Music hybrids, degree will be qualified to pursue a diverse mance hybrids. and Stencil Art. range of careers in the interactive media, D. Finkel, Professor; Ph.D., Univ. of B. Snyder, Professor of Practice, B.F.A., computer games, or related industries, Chicago, 1971. Computer system perfor- Berklee College of Music. Figurative art, becoming producers, designers, academics, mance evaluation, distributed computing modeling, digital painting. or project leaders in specific subfields such as technology, art, or design. systems, focusing on the performance J. Sonbonmatsu, Associate Professor; of computer networks and distributed Ph.D. U. California Santa Cruz. Conti- Admission Requirements systems. nental philosophy, Marxism, sociology, J. L. Forgeng, Adjunct Associate Profes- critical animal studies, feminist theory. • Statement of purpose that details: - the student’s goals, and sor; Ph.D., University of Toronto, 1991. R. P. H. Sutter, Instructor/Lecturer; B.S. Medieval and Renaissance history, global - the student’s previous industry or New England Institute of Art, 2010. 3D academic experiences. history, , arms and animation, digital sculpting/character armor. • Proof of a four-year degree. Appli- creation, games, augmented reality, tradi- cants who are not participating in the N. T. Heffernan, Associate Professor; tional animation and art. B.S./M.S. program must submit a Ph.D. Carnegie Mellon Univ., 2001. M. O. Ward, Professor; Ph.D., Univ. of final transcript showing that they have Educational data mining, learning sciences Connecticut, 1981. Data and informa- completed a bachelor’s degree or its and technology. tion visualization, spatial data analysis and equivalent before enrolling in the M.S. R. W. Lindeman, Associate Professor; management. program. Sc.D., The George Washington Univ., • Three letters of recommendation from K. Zizza, Professor of Practice; Digital individuals who can comment on the 1999. Immersive human-computer inter- audio, game design. action, haptics, virtual environments. student’s qualification for pursuing A full listing can be found here: graduate study in IMGD. B. J. Moriarty, Professor of Practice; B.A., http://imgd.wpi.edu/faculty.html • Applicants may submit other material Southeastern Massachusetts Univ., 1978. supporting their application, such as a Digital games and culture, virtual commu- portfolio of their work. nities, interactive fiction. More information on admissions can be found here: http://imgd.wpi.edu/gradadmin-requirements.html

Return to Table of Contents Interactive Media and Game Development 87 Degree Requirements The IMGD program also offers a • Performance Evaluation of Distributed B.S./M.S. program for current IMGD Systems (PEDS) Lab. Design and IMGD M.S. students undertake a set undergraduate students. Students enrolled analysis of distributed systems, with a of core courses (9 credit hours) covering in this program may count up to 12 credit special focus on the performance on various aspects of design, supplemented hours of specific undergraduate courses networking.­ by two courses (6 credit hours) support- towards both their B.S. and M.S. degrees. • Image Science Research Group (ISRG). ing a focus area (Serious Games, Techni- Conducts interdisciplinary research into cal, or Management), and two courses (6 Details on the degree requirements for the theory and application of graph- credit hours) of electives. Each student both M.S. and B.S./M.S. students can be ics, visualization, image processing and is required to complete either a Master’s found here: computer vision techniques. thesis (a systematic approach to addressing http://imgd.wpi.edu/gradrequirements.html an identified research question, typically Facilities/Research Labs Course Descriptions done individually) or a Master’s project A full list of courses for the M.S. and (a substantial development effort that /Research Centers B.S./M.S. programs can be found here: follows a production plan to implement a • IMGD Lab. 27-seat teaching/research http://imgd.wpi.edu/gradcourses.html design vision, typically done in teams) to lab complete the degree requirements (9 credit hours). • Digital Art Studio. Work space for both digital and traditional art Core Courses • Human Interaction in Virtual Environ- Choose 3 of 4 (9 credits) ments (HIVE) Lab). Research lab for IMGD 5100. Human-Computer designing effective interfaces for virtual Interaction reality and games IMGD 5200. History and Future of • Human-Robot Interaction (HRI) Lab. Immersive and Interactive Media Research lab for improving face-to-face IMGD 5300. Design of Interactive interaction between robots and humans. Experiences IMGD 5400. Production Management for Interactive Media Focus Courses (6 credits) Technical Focus, or Serious Games Focus, or Management Focus (see details at http://imgd.wpi.edu/gradrequirements.html) Elective Courses (6 credits) Selected from the courses in the Core and Focus areas, or IMGD 5099 (Special Topics in IMGD). Thesis/Project (9 credits)

88 Interactive Media and Game Development Return to Table of Contents Interdisciplinary Programs

New fields of research and study that com- proposal for an interdisciplinary degree Admissions Requirements bine traditional fields in innovative ways to the Committee on Graduate Studies Admission for the Master’s degree is are constantly evolving. In response to this, & Research (CGSR) that includes the consistent with the admission require- WPI encourages the formation of interdis- details of a program of study and the ments listed in the Graduate Catalog for ciplinary graduate programs to meet new credentials of the members of the group. a Master of Science degree. Appropriate professional needs or the special interests At least one member of the group must be undergraduate bachelor’s degree majors of particular students. from a department or program currently include but are not limited to life science, authorized to award the masters degree. management, engineering, and computer Interdisciplinary Ph.D. No more than half of the total academic Programs science. Students with other backgrounds credit may be taken in any one depart- may be considered with the approval of Interdisciplinary Ph.D. programs are initi- ment. The CGSR may request additional the program administrator. Students need ated by groups of at least three full-time input from the sponsors or appropriate a working knowledge of basic biotech- faculty members who share a common departments. If the CGSR approves the nology, biochemistry, cell biology, and interest in a cross-disciplinary field. A proposal, the sponsoring group serves in chemistry. sponsoring group submits to the Com- place of a department in administration of mittee on Graduate Studies and Research the approved program. Certificates (CGSR) a proposal for an interdisciplinary Current Interdisciplinary Master’s degree Graduate Certificate in Bioscience degree, together with all the details of the programs include Systems Modeling, Management degree requirements and the credentials Construction Project Management, This certificate program is proposed to of the members of the sponsoring group. Impact Engineering, Manufacturing meet the needs of a variety of corporations At least one member of the group must be Engineering Management, Power Systems and individuals who are taking a first step from a department or program currently Management, Systems Engineering. and toward an MS in Bioscience Adminis­ authorized to award the doctorate. Materials Systems Engineering. tration. The framework presents minimum If the CGSR approves the proposal, requirements for the distribution of bio/ the sponsoring group serves in place of Bioscience Administration life-science and management courses, but a department in the administration of Faculty provides flexibility. This certificate is the approved interdisciplinary program. composed of at least 17 credits of Administrative duties include admitting Faculty hold a full time position in a graduate coursework. Refer to the and advising students, preparing and WPI academic department or are adjunct web for more information conducting examinations, and certifying faculty vetted by a WPI academic depart- http://cpe.wpi.edu/gradua15.html the fulfillment of degree requirements. ment head. Degree Requirements WPI currently offers the Interdisciplinary Program of Study Ph.D. in Learning Sciences and Technolo- WPI offers graduate levels studies in the Interdisciplinary Master of Science in gies (see page 93), and Systems Modeling field of Bioscience Administration leading Bioscience Administration (see page 144). to the Master of Science. This program is Admission Students may also design their own designed to offer both business and science All applicants for this program must hold interdisciplinary Ph.D. program in con- education thus meeting an educational a bachelor’s degree from an accredited sultation with faculty members relevant to need in the life sciences and bioresearch college or university recognized by WPI. the proposed project. fields. This degree is applicable for Acceptable bachelor’s degrees include life students seeking employment in pharma- science, management, engineering, and Interdisciplinary Master’s ceutical, biotechnology, and biomedical computer science. Students with other Programs device companies. This program helps backgrounds may be considered with the Interdisciplinary master’s programs require science professionals advance their science approval of the program administrator. at least 30 credits beyond the bachelor’s knowledgebase and also helps them build GRE and GMAT examinations are not degree. They may also include a thesis or the necessary administrative infrastructure required for admission to the program. project requirement. Proposals for such for their field. programs are initiated by groups of at least two faculty members from differ- ent academic departments who share a common interest in a cross-disciplinary field. The sponsoring group submits a

Return to Table of Contents Interdisciplinary Programs 89 Requirements Manufacturing • OBC 531 Managing Organizational Awarding of the degree requires success- Change ful completion of at least 30 credit hours Engineering Management • OIE 541 Operations Risk Management of graduate coursework, not to exceed 14 Faculty • OIE 544 Supply Chain Analysis and credit hours in Biomedical engineering, Design within the Bioengineering or Custom Faculty hold a full time position in a • OIE 546 Managing Technological Science tracks, and no more than 12 credit WPI academic department or are adjunct Innovation hours from any other discipline, includ- faculty vetted by a WPI academic depart- ing required or elective courses or directed ment head. • OIE 548 Productivity Management research credits. Program of Study • MIS 576 Project Management • Engineering (choose 15 credits) • Interdisciplinary Master of Science Curriculum • FP 563 Operations Risk Management The Master of Science in Bioscience in Manufacturing Engineering Administration consists of three track Management • MFE 510 / ME 542 Control and options: Life Science, Bioengineering, and This program is designed to meet the Monitoring of Manufacturing Processes Custom Science. Although the courses demand from professionals who typically • MFE 511 Application of Industrial are not specified in any of the tracks, the have an undergraduate degree in engineer- Robotics number of credit hours completed must ing, work experience in manufacturing, • MFE 520 / MTE 520 / ME 543 Design conform to the breakdown found Table I. and a desire to pursue a master’s degree and Analysis of Manufacturing Processes curriculum with equal emphasis in both Each student must have a Plan of Study • MFE 530 / ME544 Computer- manufacturing engineering and manu- approved by the program administrator Integrated Manufacturing facturing/operations management. They within their first 9 credits. • MFE 540 Design for Manufacturability project their career as continuing to need • MFE 598* Directed Research Table I: Three track options for the Master of a balanced growth in manufacturing engi- Science in Bioscience Administration neering and manufacturing management. Power Systems Life Science Track: Admissions Requirements Management 6-12 Credit Hours in Chemistry/ Students will be eligible for admission Biochemistry into the program if they have earned an Faculty 6-12 Credit Hours in Management undergraduate degree from an accred- Faculty hold a full time position in a 6-12 Credit Hours in Biology/Biotechnology ited university consistent with the WPI WPI academic department or are adjunct 3-9 Credit Hours of electives or directed Graduate Catalog. Students should have a faculty vetted by a WPI academic depart- research bachelor’s degree in science or engineering. ment head. Bioengineering Track: Students with other backgrounds will be Programs of Study considered based on their interest, formal 9-14 Credit Hours in Biomedical Engineering • Interdisciplinary Master of Science in 6-12 Credit Hours in Management education and experience in manufactur- ing. Admission decisions will be made by Power Systems Management 3-12 Credit Hours in Chemistry or Biology the sponsoring faculty based on all factors • Certificate in Power Systems 3-9 Credit Hours of electives or directed Management research presented in the application, including prior academic performance, quality of Power Systems Engineering education Custom Science Track: professional experience, letters of recom- is in high demand in the United States 16-24 Credit Hours selected from Biomedical mendation, etc. and more so in developing nations. WPI Engineering, Biology/Biotechnology, has broadened its offerings of courses in Chemistry/Biochemistry, Computer Degree Requirements Science, Mathematical Science this area, and now offers a new level of 6-12 Credit Hours in Management Interdisciplinary Master of Science flexibility for students and their current in Manufacturing Engineering or prospective employers. In addition, the Management School of Business provides an attractive Transfer Credits Students must complete 30 credit hours of palette of relevant courses to enhance the Consistent with WPI policy in most course work in Manufacturing, Engineer- professional skills of practicing engineers. graduate areas, up to one-third of the ing, and Management related courses as This framework has created programs to degree program (10 credit hours) may be defined by the coordinating faculty. meet industry demands. transferred from an accredited college or Business (choose 12 credits) Admissions Requirements university with approval of the program • OBC 500 Group and Interpersonal Students will be eligible for admission administrator. Dynamics in Complex Organizations into the program if they have earned an • MIS 500 Innovating with Information undergraduate degree from an accredited Systems university consistent with the WPI Gradu- ate Catalog. Normally, an undergraduate

90 Interdisciplinary Programs Return to Table of Contents bachelor’s degree in electrical engineer- Course has shown that graduate students with ing, computer engineering, or computer IDG 599. Capstone Project Experience in some formal preparation in college teach- science is expected. Students with other Power Systems Management ing have a substantial advantage in the backgrounds may be considered with the This project-based course is an interdisciplin- academic job market. Once hired, the new approval of the faculty. GRE examina- ary exercise that integrates the technical aspects faculty members are better prepared to of power systems engineering with challenges of tions are required for all international meeting business goals within the framework of assume their teaching duties and are, con- applicants. the corporate organizational structure. It allows sequently, more productive in developing the students to apply the skills and knowledge their research programs. Similarly, more Degree Requirements acquired throughout the Power Systems Manage- experienced college faculty can also benefit Interdisciplinary Master of Science in ment curriculum. Students are encouraged to from such teaching certificate programs, Power Systems Management select projects with practical significance to their as they may be very well prepared in their current and future professional responsibilities. disciplines, but desire formal training in At least 30 credit ours composed of: Each project is normally conducted in teams • At least 12 credits but no more than of two to four students. They are administered, pedagogy. 15 credits of graduate level coursework advised, and evaluated by WPI faculty as part Program in Power Systems Engineering (course of the learning experience, but students are also encouraged to seek mentorship from experienced Students may take any combination of prefix ECE with course numbers from colleagues in the Power Systems profession. the courses offered. Generally students 5500 through 5599) (Prerequisites: Since the Capstone Project will begin with the 2-credit Seminar in Col- • At least 12 but no more than 14 credits draw on knowledge obtained throughout the lege Teaching (IDG501, description of graduate level coursework in Business degree program, it is expected that the student will have completed most or all of the coursework below) which is usually taught fall, spring (example courses prefixed by BUS, MIS, and summer terms. The full Certificate OBC, OIE, etc.). within their plan of study before undertaking the capstone project.) program is 6 credits, with three 1-credit Electives: additional elective courses taken and Under the direction of the advisors, each Other Certificates culminating in the one-credit Capstone student will select 6 credits of coursework Practicum. at the 4000 level (maximum of two) or The Certificate in College at the graduate level (designated as 500-, Teaching Tuition 5000-, or 600-level) in computer science WPI covers the full cost for graduate Purpose (CS), physics (PH), engineering (BME, students approved by their department WPI offers an innovative program, CHE, CE, ECE (1 only), FP, MFE, head to participate ($299 credit). Adjunct managed by the Colleges of Worcester MTE, ME, RBE, and SYS), mathematics and other faculty teaching at WPI should Consortium, for graduate students wishing (MA), and/or Systems Dynamics (SD) to check with their department heads about to develop skills in college teaching. Many complete the Interdisciplinary Master of departmental policies for supporting the doctoral and even masters’ degree holders Science degree. Certificate program. WPI employees may will devote a least some of their profes- also have tuition benefits that will cover There is no thesis option for this degree. sional time to college-level teaching. The the cost of Certificate courses; contact Hu- Certificate in College Teaching program man Resources for details. The program Certificates offers an opportunity to acquire both is open to all qualified persons wishing to teaching skills and professional recognition Certificate in Power Systems participate at their own expense. Management of high-level preparation to teach. This certificate program is proposed to The Certificate represents a collaborative Information meet the needs of a variety of corporations institutional response to the ever-present Courses are taught at various Consortium and individuals who are taking a first step challenges of promoting exemplary teach- sites, with WPI and Clark continuing toward an MS in Power Systems Manage- ing in today’s complex higher education to be the most common hosts. For ment. The framework presents minimum environments. Most college professors information on specific course descriptions requirements for the distribution of power are never trained to be teachers. Prepara- and availability, see the Consortium web systems and management courses, but tion for the college classroom involves site at www.cowc.org/CCT.htm under provides flexibility for the student. more than a solid base of knowledge in a “Procedures for Students.” discipline; it requires a systematic inquiry This certificate must consist of at least 17 into the pedagogies and processes that Questions credits of graduate coursework. facilitate learning. Our certificate program Contact Chrysanthe Demetry, Ph.D. For more information please consult the is grounded in the latest educational re- Associate Professor of Mechanical WPI web at search of best practices in college teaching, ­Engineering, Materials Science and http://cpe.wpi.edu/protection.html and is designed to enhance the teaching Engineering­ Program and learning experiences for faculty and WPI, 100 Institute Rd students at our member institutions. Worcester, MA 01609 USA Email: [email protected] The primary focus of the Certificate is Tel: (508)831-5195; Fax: (508)831-5178 to prepare graduate students and adjunct faculty for a career in academia. Research

Return to Table of Contents Interdisciplinary Programs 91 Course Admissions Requirements radiation measurement, and radiation safeguards. IDG 501. Seminar in College Teaching Admission to the Nuclear Science and Radiation protection concepts are explored as they 2 credits Engineering graduate certificate program apply to existing and advanced nuclear power gen- This seminar is designed to acquaint graduate erators, including reactor safety, nuclear waste and is consistent with the admissions require- byproducts, regulatory constraints, and accident students with some of the basic principles and ments listed in this catalog for graduate theories of education and with instructional case studies. Prerequisites: graduate standing or practices associated with effective college teach- certificates. Appropriate undergraduate consent of the instructor degree majors include all engineering and ing. This information applies without regard to NSE 540. Nuclear Materials the particular nature of the subject matter being science majors. (3 credits) (offered biennially) taught; the emphasis is on the educational process, This course applies fundamental materials sci- not the disciplinary content. Course activities in- Course Descriptions ence concepts to effects on materials in harsh clude readings, lectures, discussion, and individual NSE510. Introduction to Nuclear Science nuclear environments. An overview is provided and group projects. Topics covered include an in- and Engineering on environments, special nuclear materials, and troduction to learning theories, cognitive develop- (3 credits) (offered annually) constraints in materials selection. Relationships ment and motivation for learning; effective teach- This introductory course provides an overview of are developed between nuclear effects on crystal ing skills such as lecturing, class discussion, active the field of nuclear science and engineering as it structure, microstructure, degraded material per- and cooperative learning, and use of instructional relates to nuclear power and nuclear technologies. formance, and bulk properties of engineering and technology; evaluating student performance; Fundamental concepts relevant to nuclear systems electronic materials. Case studies provide examples and life as a college professor. Students who have are introduced, including radioactivity, radiation of enhancements induced my multiple harsh envi- completed IDG 501 will be prepared for ISG 502 interaction phenomena, chain reaction physics, ronments and mitigation through material design Practicum in College Teaching, which is offered as and transport in engineering materials. Nuclear hardening. Prerequisites: ES2001 or equivalent. an independent study on demand. reactor physics and design concepts are introduced with focus on light water fission reactors. A survey NSE 550. Reactor Design, Operations, Certificate in Nuclear Science of advanced nuclear technologies and applica- and Safety and Engineering tions is provided. Prerequisites: graduate or senior (3 credits) (offered biennially) standing or consent of the instructor. This course provides a systems engineering view Faculty of commercial nuclear power plant technology. The faculty hold a full time position NSE 520. Applied Nuclear Physics Power plant designs and their evolutions are (3 credits) (offered annually) in a WPI academic department or are studied, ranging from early to modern generation This course introduces engineering and science light water reactors, as well as advanced designs adjunct faculty approved by an academic students to the fundamental topics of nuclear families, such alternate moderator and breeder department and the NSE program review physics for applications, basic properties of the reactors. Critical aspects of conventional power committee. nucleus, nuclear radiations, and radiation interac- reactor designs are explored in detail, including tions with matter. The course is divided into four steam supply, reactor core, control, and protection Program of Study and Certificate main sections: (1) introduction to elementary systems. Plant operational characteristics are stud- Requirements quantum mechanics, (2) nuclear and atomic ied, including reactor dynamics, control, feedback, structure, (3) nuclear decays and radiation, and The graduate certificate in nuclear science and fuel cycle management. Critical power plant (4) nuclear matter interactions and nuclear reac- safety aspects of the design and operations are and engineering will require the successful tions. Prerequisites: Physics of mechanics and explored and reinforced with lessons learned from completion of 12 graduate credits with an electrodynamics (PH1110/11 and PH1120/21) major power generator accidents scenarios (includ- overall GPA of 3.00. The courses will be and mathematical techniques up to and including ing Three Mile Island, Chernobyl, and Fukushima selected from the list below. ordinary differential equations (MA2051) Daiichi). Prerequisites: graduate standing or consent of the instructor All students must successfully complete NSE 530. Health Physics four of the five courses listed below: (3 credit) (offered biennially) This course builds on fundamental concepts intro- • NSE510 Introduction to Nuclear duced in NSE510 and applies them to key topics Science and Engineering – 3 credits in health physics and radiation protection. Health physics topics include man-made and natural • NSE520 Applied Nuclear Physics – sources of radiation, dose, radiation biology, 3 credits • NSE530 Health Physics – 3 credits • NSE540 Nuclear Materials – 3 credits • NSE550 Reactor Design and Operations – 3 credits

92 Interdisciplinary Programs Return to Table of Contents Learning Sciences and Technologies

Faculty G. T. Heineman, Associate Professor; Cognitive/Educational Psychology, Ph.D., Columbia University; Component- Computer Science, or Statistics. We will Learning Sciences & Technologies based software engineering, formal also consider applicants whose academic Core Faculty approaches to compositional design background is in Science or Math. N. T. Heffernan, Associate Professor and A. C. Heinricher, Professor; Ph.D., A student may apply to the PhD program Co-Director; Ph.D., Carnegie Mellon Carnegie Mellon University; applied prob- in LS&T after completing a bachelor’s University; Intelligent tutoring agents, ability, stochastic processes and optimal degree (in which case a master’s degree must artificial intelligence, cognitive modeling, control theory first be completed) or a master’s degree in machine learning R. W. Lindeman, Associate Professor; one of the affiliated areas (Computer Sci- J. Gobert, Associate Professor and Co- Ph.D., George Washington University; ence, Cognitive or Educational Psychol- Director; Ph.D., University of Toronto; Human- computer interaction, haptics, ogy or Statistics) or a closely related area. the design of computer-based systems for virtual environments Applicants with other degrees are welcome science learning and assessment; intelligent to apply if they can demonstrate their tutoring for science; individual differences C. Rich, Professor; Ph.D., Massachusetts readiness through other means, such as and their role in design and analysis Institute of Technology; Artificial intel- GRE Subject exams in an affiliated area, or ligence and its intersections with human- through academic or professional experi- I. Arroyo, Assistant Professor; Ed.D., computer interaction, interactive media ence. GRE scores are strongly recom- M.S., University of Massachusetts, Am- and game development, robotics, intel- mended, but not required, for all appli- herst; learning with novel technologies; ligent tutoring systems, knowledge-based cants. Inquiries about the GRE should be multimedia learning; intelligent tutoring software tools made to Dr. Neil Heffernan or Dr. Janice systems; wearable learning and e-Textiles; Gobert. learner characteristics and their relation- C. Ruiz, Associate Professor; Ph.D., ship to learning; connection between affect University of Maryland; Data mining, Degree Requirements and learning; educational data mining and knowledge discovery in databases, machine student modeling. learning For the M.S. R. S.J.d. Baker, Assistant Professor; J. L. Skorinko, Assistant Professor; Ph.D., The student may choose between two Ph.D., Carnegie Mellon University; University of Virginia; social environmen- options to obtain the M.S. degree: thesis educational data mining, learner-computer tal cues, stigmas and stereotyping, percep- or coursework. Students should carefully interaction, gaming the system, student tions of others weigh the pros and cons of these alterna- modeling, intelligent tutoring systems, tives in consultation with their LS&T educational games Program of Study faculty advisor prior to selecting an option. The Learning Sciences and Technologies Completion of the M.S. degree requires J. E. Beck, Assistant Professor; Ph.D., (LS&T) program offers graduate studies 33 graduate credit hours. M.S. LS&T University of Massachusetts, Amherst; toward the MS and PhD degrees. Our students who wish to become doctoral educational data mining, student model- state-of-the-art facilities, faculty and strong candidates in LS&T must first complete ing, Bayesian Networks, student individual relationships with K-12 schools provide their M.S. degree in LS&T following the differences students with the resources to perform thesis option. Learning Sciences & Technologies innovative scientific research at the highest To satisfy the interdisciplinary nature Associated Faculty level. The diverse learning environment of the LS&T program, each M.S. stu- D. C. Brown, Professor; Ph.D., Ohio that characterizes our program promotes dent must complete the following 15 State University; Knowledge-based design easy exchange of ideas, access to all the graduate credit hours that form the core systems, artificial intelligence necessary resources, and encourages requirements. creative solutions to pressing scientific J. K. Doyle, Associate Professor; Ph.D., questions. The LS&T program is based on • Computer Science Requirement University of Colorado/Boulder; judge- three affiliated areas – Computer Science, [6 graduate credit hours] ment and decision making, mental Cognitive and Educational Psychology, Two LS&T Computer Science models of dynamic systems, evaluation of and Statistics – and provides opportunities courses interventions for advanced course work and research for • Cognitive Psychology Requirement K. Fisler, Associate Professor; Ph.D., highly qualified students. [6 graduate credit hours] Indiana University; Interplay of human Two LS&T Cognitive Psychology reasoning and formal logic in the context Admissions Requirements courses of hardware and software systems; current Applicants must apply directly to the • Statistics Requirement projects explore access-control policies and LS&T program. In order to be capable of [3 graduate credit hours] diagrams. performing graduate level work, applicants One LS&T Statistics course; or should have background in at least one CS 567. Empirical Methods for of the core disciplines of LS&T, namely, Human-Centered Computing

Return to Table of Contents Learning Sciences and Technologies 93 No single graduate course can be double For the Ph.D. at Clark University, particularly from counted to satisfy two of the above Students are advised to contact the pro- their Psychology Department, and from requirements. gram director for detailed program guide- independent studies. However, to ensure lines, in addition to the university’s re- depth in LS&T, no more than 9 credit MS in LS&T – Coursework Option quirements for the Ph.D. degree. Students hours can be from disciplines other than In addition to the 15 graduate credit hours who wish to pursue a Ph.D. in LS&T who Cognitive Psychology, Computer Science, as required by the M.S. core requirements, completed their M.S. at WPI in LS&T, and Statistics except by the approval of the a student pursuing the coursework option must have chosen the thesis option. Program Director. must register for an additional six graduate Students can count previously taken courses (totaling 18 graduate credit hours). Fundamentally, it is expected that all LS&T courses towards these requirements. To ensure a sufficient focus on LS&T, two LS&T Ph.D. students master the basics of However, students must still complete 30 of these courses (for a total of 6 graduate Learning Sciences, apply those concepts to graduate credit hours of coursework for credit hours) must be from the LS&T create an innovative technology, and prop- the Ph.D. degree. For example, if a student course list. The remaining four courses erly analyze their work with the appropri- had taken two LS&T Computer Science (for a total of 12 graduate credit hours) ate statistical techniques. Ph.D. students courses as part of an LS&T M.S. degree, are electives that relate to the student’s will receive training through a combina- only one more LS&T Computer Science individual program of study and must be tion of enrolling in courses, satisfying course would be required, but the student selected in consultation with the student’s competency requirements and completing would still have to complete 30 graduate LS&T advisor. a dissertation; all Ph.D. students will be re- viewed by the Core LS&T faculty at least credit hours of coursework for the Ph.D. Note that MS graduate credits cannot be once a year to see that they are making Similarly, students who are transferring in from independent study/research courses satisfactory progress towards these three with an MS degree will be evaluated for except by approval of the LS&T Program components of the Ph.D. program. which requirements they have fulfilled, but Director. will still be required to take 30 graduate Course Requirements credit hours of coursework. MS in LS&T – Thesis Option The Ph.D. degree in LS&T requires an In addition to the 15 graduate credit hours To complete the remaining 6 graduate additional 60 graduate credit hours of as required by the M.S. core requirements, credit hours, the Ph.D. student can regis- work beyond the M.S. degree. Students a student pursuing the thesis option must ter for other graduate courses or indepen- must take a minimum of 30 graduate satisfactorily complete a written thesis. dent studies with approval of the student’s credit hours of course work, including Any Core or Associated LS&T faculty may LS&T advisor. independent study, and 30 graduate credit serve as the thesis advisor. A thesis consist- hours of research. Competency Requirements ing of a research or development project In addition to successful completion of worth a minimum of 9 graduate credit To satisfy the interdisciplinary nature of their coursework, Ph.D. students must hours must be completed and presented the LS&T program, each Ph.D. student demonstrate competency in two core areas: to the LS&T faculty. A thesis proposal must complete the following 24 graduate Data Analysis and Communication (spe- must be approved by the Core LS&T credit hours. To count towards the course cifically, Speaking and Writing). Regarding faculty and the student’s advisor before requirements, students must get a mini- Data Analysis, it is expected that students the student can register for more than four mum grade of B for each of the courses. will learn analysis methods relevant to thesis credits. Students receiving a C or below must retake a course in the appropriate area and the Learning Sciences. We have selected To complete the remaining 9 graduate receive a B or higher. these two areas as they are fundamental to credit hours, the student must register for success as an empirical scientist and will an additional three graduate courses. To • Computer Science Requirement form the basis of LS&T graduates’ future ensure a sufficient focus on LS&T, two [9 graduate credit hours] careers. of these courses (for a total of 6 graduate Three LS&T Computer Science Competency in both Data Analysis and credit hours) must be from the LS&T courses Communication will be assessed as fol- course list. The remaining course (of 3 • Cognitive Psychology Requirement lows: Students will be expected to conduct graduate credit hours) is an elective that [9 graduate credit hours] a pilot research study towards their gradu- relates to the student’s individual program Three LS&T Cognitive Psychology ate research. Students will submit a short of study and must be selected in consulta- courses paper (10-20 pages) to the Core LS&T tion with the student’s LS&T advisor. As • Statistics Requirement faculty who will write a set of questions to for the coursework option, M.S. graduate [6 graduate credit hours] be asked during a public presentation by credits cannot be from independent study/ the graduate student of the pilot research research courses except by approval of the LS&T Statistics courses, or project. Possible venues for this include LS&T Program Director. CS 567. Empirical Methods for Human-Centered Computing the AIRG (Artificial Intelligence Research No Combined BS/M.S. Degree All students are required to submit a Group) or the Learning Sciences Seminar. The LS&T program does not offer a program of study that describes their Students will be graded by at least two combined B.S./M.S. degree. planned course work; their LS&T advisor Core LS&T faculty on their responses to must approve the program. These classes the LS&T questions, their data analysis, can include graduate classes at WPI, classes and communication skills at handling

94 Learning Sciences and Technologies Return to Table of Contents spontaneous questions during the talk. • CS 565 User Modeling PSY/SEME 503. Research Methods for the This requirement will be handled by the • CS 566 Graphical Models for Reasoning Learning Sciences Core LS&T faculty. Under Uncertainty This course covers research methods used in the Learning Sciences. Students will gain expertise Students must complete this competency • CS 567 Empirical Methods for Human- and understanding of think-aloud studies, cogni- requirement prior to defending their Centered Computing tive task analysis, quantitative and qualitative Ph.D. proposal. Furthermore, competency • CS 568 Artificial Intelligence for field observations, log file analysis, psychometric, requirements must be completed within Adaptive Educational Technology cognitive, and machine-learning based modeling, the automated administration of measures by four semesters after students begin as LS&T Cognitive Psychology Courses computer, and issues of validity, reliability, and Ph.D. students, except by permission of • PSY 501 Foundations of the statistical inference specific to these methods. Stu- the Program Director. Learning Sciences dents will learn how and when to apply a variety • PSY 502 Learning Environments of methods relevant to formative, performance, Dissertation Requirements and summative assessment in both laboratory and in Education Within six semesters of being admitted to field settings. Readings will be drawn primarily the LS&T Ph.D. program, each student • PSY 503 Research Methods for the from original source materials (e.g. journal articles must form a dissertation committee, and Learning Sciences and academic book chapters), in combination • PSY 504 Meta-cognition, Motivation, with relevant textbook chapters. (Prerequisites: write and defend a dissertation proposal. SS 2400, Methods, Modeling, and Analysis in Any deviation from the timetable for and Affect Social Science, comparable course, or instructor the dissertation must be approved by the • PSY 505 Advanced Methods and discretion.) Program Director. Any Core or Associ- Analysis for the Learning and PSY/SEME 504. Meta-cognition, ated LS&T faculty may serve as a research Social Sciences Motivation, and Affect advisor. LS&T Statistics Courses This course covers three key types of constructs A student’s dissertation committee is • MA 511 Applied Statistics for Engineers that significantly impact learning and performance and Scientists in real-world settings, including but not limited to composed of at least four members, as educational settings. Students will gain under- approved by the LS&T Core faculty. The • MA 540/4631 Probability and Math- standing of the main theoretical frameworks, and committee must contain at least one Core ematical Statistics I major empirical results, that relate individuals’ LS&T faculty member and one faculty • MA 541/4632 Probability and Math- meta-cognition, motivation, and affect to real- member external to WPI. To reinforce the ematical Statistics II world outcomes, both in educational settings and other areas of life. Students will learn how theories interdisciplinary nature of the degree, at • MA 542 Regression Analysis least two of the three cooperating depart- and findings in these domains can be concretely • MA 546 Design and Analysis of Experi- used to improve instruction and performance, ments (Computer Science, Social Science ments and complete final projects that require applying and Policy Studies and Mathematical research in these areas to real-world problems. Sciences) must have a faculty member on • MA 547 Design and Analysis of Obser- Students will do critical readings on research on the dissertation committee. The disserta- vational and Sampling Studies this topic. (Prerequisites: None) • MA 554 Applied Multivariate Analysis tion committee will be responsible for PSY 505. Advanced Methods and Analysis approving the dissertation proposal and • MA 556 Applied Bayesian Statistics for the Learning and Social Sciences final report. This course covers advanced methods and analysis for the learning and social sciences, focusing on Students must enroll in at least 30 credits Course Descriptions All courses are 3 credits unless otherwise noted. contemporary modeling and inference methods for their dissertation. Before presenting for the types of data generated in these forms and defending their dissertation proposal, PSY/SEME 501. Foundations of the of research. This course will enable students to students may only enroll in 15 gradu- Learning Sciences choose, utilize, and make inferences from analyti- ate research credit hours. Students are This course covers readings that represent the cal metrics that are appropriate and/or character- expected to defend their dissertation foundation of the learning sciences, including: istic to these domains, properly accounting for Foundations (Constructivism, Cognitive Ap- within six semesters of the acceptance of the characteristic forms of structure found in data prenticeship, & Situated Learning); Approaches typically collected for research in the learning and their dissertation proposal. In addition to (Project-based Learning, Model-based reasoning, social sciences. Some of the topics covered will the minimum of 30 graduate credit hours Cognitive Tutors); and Scaling up educational in- include ROC analysis and the use of A’ for assess- of research, the dissertation culminates in terventions. The goal of this course is for students ing student models, learning curve and learning the student submitting the document itself to develop an understanding of the foundations factor analysis, social network and dyad analysis, and a public defense of the research. and approaches to the Learning Sciences so that and appropriate methods for tracking student they can both critically read current literature, as learning and behavior in longitudinal data. Read- Courses well as build on it in their own research. (Prerequi- ings will be drawn from original source materials sites: None) (e.g. journal articles and academic book chapters). LS&T Computer Science Courses (Prerequisites: PSY503, Research Methods for the PSY/SEME 502. Learning Environments • CS 509 Design of Software Systems Learning Sciences, comparable course, or instruc- in Education tor discretion.) • CS 534 Artificial Intelligence In this class, students will read and review both • CS 538 Knowledge Based Systems classic and critical current journal articles about • CS 539 Machine Learning learning technologies developed in the Learn- ing Sciences. This course is designed to educate • CS 540 Artificial Intelligence in Design students on current technological approaches to • CS 546 Human-Computer Interaction curricular design, implementation, and research in • CS 548 Knowledge Discovery and the Learning Sciences. (Prerequisites: None) Data Mining

Return to Table of Contents Learning Sciences and Technologies 95 Manufacturing Engineering www.wpi.edu/+mfe

Faculty J. M. Sullivan Jr., Professor of Mechanical ing, environmental engineering, manufac- Engineering; D.E., Dartmouth College turing engineering, materials science and R. D. Sisson Jr., George F. Fuller engineering, mechanical engineering, or Professor; Director, Manufacturing and B. Tulu, Assistant Professor of Man- agement, Ph.D. Claremont Graduate management. Students with other back- Materials Engineering; Ph.D., Purdue grounds will be considered based on their University. Materials process modeling University, medical informatics, informa- tion security, telemedicine, personal health interest, formal education and experience and control, manufacturing engineering, in manufacturing. corrosion, and environmental effects on records, systems analysis and design metals and ceramics. A. Zeng, Associate Professor and Director Degree Requirements of Industrial Engineering; Ph.D., Y. K. Rong, John Woodman Higgins For the M.S. Professor; Associate Director, Manufactur- Pennsylvania State University The Manufacturing Engineering (MFE) ing and Materials Engineering; Ph.D., program is intended to be flexible in order University of Kentucky. CAD/CAM, Faculty Research Interests to meet student needs. Many MFE gradu- manufacturing process and systems. Current research areas include tolerance analysis, CAD/CAM, production systems ate students work full time as engineers, D. Apelian, Howmet Professor of analysis, machining, fixturing, delayed others are graduate teaching and research Engineering; Director, Metal Processing dynamical systems, nonlinear chatter, assistants. Some of the courses are offered Institute; Sc.D., Massachusetts Institute surface metrology, fractal analysis, surface in the evenings. of Technology. Solidification processing, functionality, metals processing and manu- The M.S. Degree in MFE requires 30 cred- spray casting, molten metal processing, facturing management, axiomatic design, it hours of graduate studies. The 30 credits aluminum foundry processing, plasma and abrasive processes, electronic medical consist of a minimum of 12 credit hours processing, and knowledge engineering in records, lean in health care and health of coursework, plus 18 credit hours of any materials processing. dynamics. combination of coursework, independent I. Bar-On, Professor; Ph.D., Hebrew Uni- study, directed research or thesis that com- versity of Jerusalem. Mechanical behavior Programs of Study plies with the following constraints: if there of materials, fracture and fatigue of metals, The Manufacturing Engineering (MFE) is a thesis, it must be at least 6 and no more ceramics and composites, reliability and lie Program offers two graduate degrees: than 12 credits; there can be no more than prediction, and electronic packaging. the master of science and the doctor of 9 credits of directed research; and the total C. A. Brown, Professor; Director, Surface philosophy. Full- and part-time study is number of credits from the Management Metrology Lab; Director, Haas Technical available. Department cannot exceed 14. Center; Ph.D., P.E., University of Vermont. The graduate programs in manufactur- The minimum of 12 credit hours of Surface metrology, machining, fractal ing engineering provide opportunities for coursework must include a minimum of analysis, sports engineering, tribology, students to study current manufacturing two credits each in at least four of the eight axiomatic design and abrasive processes. techniques while allowing each student the core areas. The coursework should be se- M. S. Fofana, Associate Professor; Ph.D., flexibility to customize their educational lected in consultation with an advisor from University of Waterloo, Canada, 1993; program. Course material and research the MFE faculty. All full-time students are Nonlinear chatter dynamics, delay systems, activities often draw from the tradi- required to participate in the non-credit CAD/CAM, CIM/Networked manufac- tional fields of computer science, controls seminar course MFE 500. turing systems. engineering, electrical and computer The eight core areas, and corresponding engineering, environmental engineering, suggested courses that students can select S. A. Johnson, Associate Professor; industrial engineering, materials science Ph.D.,Cornell University from to fulfill the requirements in each of and engineering, mechanical engineering, these areas, are listed below. Courses that M. M. Makhlouf, Professor; Director, and management. The program’s intention appear in more than one core area can only Aluminum Casting Research Laboratory; is to build a solid and broad foundation in be used to fulfill the requirements in one. Ph.D., WPI. Solidification of Metals, the manufacturing theories and practices, and application of heat, mass and momentum allow for further concentrated study in a 1. Manufacturing Systems transfer to modeling and solving engineer- selected specialty. 1.1. MFE 531 Computer Integrated ing materials problems, and processing of Manufacturing ceramic materials. Admission Requirements 1.2. OIE 544 Supply Chain Analysis D. Strong, Professor of Management; Candidates for admission must meet WPI’s and Design Ph.D., Carnegie-Mellon University; Director requirements and should have a bach- 1.3. OIE 548 Productivity Management of the Management Information Systems elor’s degree in science, engineering, or 1.4. OIE 555 Lean Process Design (MIS) Program; MIS and work flows, data management, preferably in such fields as 1.5. MIS 573 System Design and integration and role changes; MIS quality computer science/engineering, electrical/ Development control engineering, industrial engineer- issues, data and information quality. 1.6. MIS 584 Business Intelligence

96 Manufacturing Engineering Return to Table of Contents 2. Manufacturing Processes BME 560 Physiology for Engineers Metal Processing Institute (MPI) 2.1. MFE 520 Design and analysis of Suggested courses from other cores: The Metal Processing Institute (MPI) is an Manufacturing Processes MIS 573 System Design and Develop- industry-university alliance. Its mission is 2.2. MFE 511 Industrial Robotics ment can be taken as part of Manufac- to design and carry out research projects Or any graduate Manufacturing Engi- turing Systems identified in collaboration with MPI’s neering or Materials Science and Engi- MIS 584 Business Intelligence can be industrial partners in the field of near and neering course on a manufacturing process taken as part of Manufacturing Systems net shape manufacturing. MPI creates 3. Control Systems OIE 555 Lean Process Design can be knowledge that will help enhance the pro- ductivity and competitiveness of the metal 3.1. MFE 510 Control and Monitoring taken as part of Manufacturing Systems processing industry, and develops the of Manufacturing Processes MFE 520 Design and Analysis of industry’s human resource base through 3.2. MFE 511 Industrial Robotics Manufacturing Processes can be taken as part of Design the education of WPI students and the dis- Or any graduate course in the Dynamics semination of new knowledge. More than OIE Quantitative Methods can be taken and Controls section of Mechanical 120 private manufacturers participate in as part of Statistics and Quality Engineering the Institute, and their support helps fund 4. Design OIE Designing and Managing Six- fundamental and applied research that Sigma Processes can be taken as part of 4.1. MFE 541 Design for addresses technological barriers facing the Statistics and Quality Manufacturability industry. The MPI researchers also develop A course taken from the Financial 4.2. MFE 520 Design and Analysis of and demonstrate best practices and state- Processes core Manufacturing Processes of-the-art processing techniques. For the Ph.D. 4.3. ME 545 Computer-aided Design Center for eHealth Innovation and The doctoral (Ph.D.) program in MFE is and Geometric Modeling Process Transformation (CeHIPT) a research degree with no required courses. 5. Materials The Center for eHealth Innovation and All candidates must pass a comprehensive Any graduate course in Materials Process Transformation is an interdisci- exam. All candidates must complete at Science and Engineering plinary center involving faculty from the least one year in residence, have a disserta- 6. Financial Processes Management and Mechanical Engineering tion proposal accepted, then complete the Departments. The goal of the center is to 6.1. ACC 501 Financial Accounting dissertation and defend it successfully. use and expand engineering and manage- 6.2. FIN 502 Finance The dissertation is based on original ment information systems knowledge to 6.3. FIN 508 Economics of the Firm research. A broad range of research topics improve health care delivery using lean 6.4. FIN 509 Domestic and Global is possible, including investigation into the manufacturing, quality improvement, and Economic Environment of Business fundamental science on which manu- systems design approaches. The center 6.5. ACC 514 Business Analysis for facturing processes are based, material team studies health care delivery inno- Technological Managers (prereq- science, manufacturing engineering educa- vations and the dynamics of change as uisites: ACC 501, FIN 502, OIE tion, metrology, quality, machine tool related to the implementation and use of 505, MKT 506 and FIN 508) dynamics, manufacturing processes, design electronic medical records, telemedicine, 7. Statistics and Quality Assurance methodology and production systems, and lean processes, and personal health records. 7.1. OIE 505 Quantitative Methods health systems research. The CAM Lab includes several UNIX and 7.2. MKT 506 Principles of Marketing MFE Seminar PC-based engineering graphics worksta- 7.3. OIE 558 Designing and Managing Seminar speakers include WPI faculty tions used for CAD, solid modeling, Six-Sigma Processes and students as well as manufacturing kinematic analysis, FEA, CIM and expert Or any graduate Mathematical Sciences experts and scholars from around the system development, and a number of course on statistics world. Registration for, attendance at and computers set up for data acquisition and 8. Health Systems Engineering participation in the seminar course, MFE real-time control. The lab has been devel- MIS 571. Database Applications 500, is required for full-time students. The oping techniques and systems for process Development seminar series provides a common forum (machining and heat treatment) model- for all students to discuss current issues in ing and simulation, production planning, MIS 579 E-Business Applications manufacturing engineering. tolerance analysis, and fixture design. OIE 541 Operations Risk Management SD 550 Foundation: Managing Research Facilities and The HAAS Technical Center at WPI, Complexity supported in partnership with HAAS Laboratories ­Automation (Oxnard, California), includes SD 551 Modeling and Experimental eleven CNC machine tools and four Analysis of Complex Problems The program has access to extensive research facilities through the Computer simulators, linked to the Web, and eight CS 505 Social Implications of Aided Manufacturing (CAM) Lab, the workstations in the manufacturing design Computing HAAS Technical Center, the Production studio. The center supports teaching and and Machine Dynamics Lab, the Robotics research on computer-controlled machin- Lab and the Surface Metrology Lab. ing, as well as the fabrication of equipment

Return to Table of Contents Manufacturing Engineering 97 for projects and research. The machines MFE 510/ME 542. Control and Monitoring MFE 541/ME5441. Design For are selected to accommodate a wide variety of Manufacturing Processes Manufacturability(2 Credits) of applications and include two vertical Covers a broad range of topics centered on control The problems of cost determination and evalua- machining centers and a lathe with live and monitoring functions for manufacturing, tion of processing alternatives in the design-man- including process control, feedback systems, data ufacturing interface are discussed. Approaches for tooling, as well as smaller lathes and mills. collection and analysis, scheduling, machine-com- introducing manufacturing capability knowledge The Production and Machine puter interfacing and distributed control. Typical into the product design process are covered. An Dynamics­ Lab uses a variety of tech- applications are considered with lab work. emphasis is placed on part and process simplifica- tion, and analysis of alternative manufacturing niques, including innovative computerized MFE 511. Application of Industrial methods based on such parameters as: anticipated modeling and computer-controlled data Robotics volume, product life cycle, lead time, customer acquisition, to understand the vibrations (Concurrent with ME 4815) This course requirements, and quality yield. Lean manufactur- that occur during machining, which limit introduces the student to the field of industrial ing and Six-Sigma concepts and their influence on automation. Topics covered include robot specifi- productivity and part quality. design quality are included as well. Note: Students cation and selection, control and drive methods, cannot receive credit for this course if they have The Robotics Lab equipment includes part presentation, economic justification, safety, taken the Special Topics version of the same a number of industrial robots set up for implementation, product design and program- course (MFE594M). ming languages. The course combines the use of deburring, welding, assembly and metrol- lecture, project work and laboratories that utilize MFE 594. Special TOPICS ogy; a Coordinate Measurement Machine industrial robots. Theory and application of Theoretical and experimental studies in subjects (CMM) with data acquisition and GD&T robotic systems will be emphasized. of interest to graduate students in manufacturing software; a machining area with CNC engineering. (Prerequisite: Consent of instructor.) MFE 520/MTE520/ME 543. Design and The description of each Special Topics course is at- machine tools; and a range of special- Analysis of Manufacturing Processes ized automation equipment interfaced to tached to the course number as seen on the course The first half of the course covers the axiomatic schedule posted on the Registrar’s web site. PLCs. design method, applied to simultaneous product and process design for concurrent engineering, MFE 598. Directed Research The Surface Metrology Lab has two with the emphasis on process and manufactur- 3 to 6 credits scanning laser microscopes as well as con- ing tool design. Basic design principles as well as ventional profilers. The lab has developed qualitative and quantitative methods of analysis MFE 599. Thesis Research new texture measurement techniques and of designs are developed. The second half of the Maximum 3 credits analysis methods and has pioneered the course addresses methods of engineering analysis MFE/MTE/ME 5841. Surface Metrology development of application of scale-sensi- of manufacturing processes, to support machine This course emphasizes research applications of tool and process design. Basic types of engineering advanced surface metrology, including the mea- tive fractal analysis, to study how surface analysis are applied to manufacturing situations, texture, or roughness, influences behavior surement and analysis of surface roughness. Sur- including elasticity, plasticity, heat transfer, me- face metrology can be important in a wide variety and how surface texture is influenced by chanics and cost analysis. Special attention will be of situations including adhesion, friction, catalysis, manufacturing processes, wear, fracture, given to the mechanics of machining (traditional, heat transfer, mass transfer, scattering, biological disease, growth and corrosion. The Surface nontraditional and grinding) and the production growth, wear and wetting. These situations impact Metrology Lab collaborates with labs in of surfaces. Students, work in groups on a series practically all the engineering disciplines and the United States, Canada, Europe and of projects. sciences. The course begins by considering basic Chile on projects including food science, MFE 531/ME 5431. Computer Integrated principles and conventional analyses, and meth- Manufacturing (2 Credits) ods. Measurement and analysis methods are criti- skin, pavement friction, hard drive stiction, cally reviewed for utility. Students learn advanced abrasive finishing, adhesion, and more. An overview of computer-integrated manufac- turing (CIM). As the CIM concept attempts methods for differentiating surface textures that to integrate all of the business and engineering are suspected of being different because of their Course Descriptions functions of a firm, this course builds on the performance or manufacture. Students will also All courses are 3 credits unless otherwise noted. knowledge of computer-aided design, computer- learn methods for making correlations between aided manufacturing, concurrent engineering, surface textures and behavioral and manufacturing MFE 500. Current Topics in Manufacturing parameters. The results of applying these methods Seminar management of information systems and opera- tions management to demonstrate the strategic can be used to support the design and manufac- 0 credits importance of integration. Emphasis is placed ture of surface textures, and to address issues in This seminar identifies the typical problems on CAD/CAM integration. Topics include, part quality assurance. Examples of research from a involved in a variety of manufacturing operations, design specification and manufacturing quality, broad range of applications are presented, includ- and generic approaches for applying advanced tooling and fixture design, and manufacturing ing, food science, pavements, friction, adhesion, technologies to implement operations. Topical information systems. This course includes a group machining and grinding. Students do a major areas of application and development such as in- term project. (Prerequisites: Background in manu- project of their choosing, which can involve either telligent materials processing, automated assembly, facturing and CAD/CAM, e.g., ME 1800, ES an in-depth literature review, or surface measure- MRP and JIT scheduling, vision recognition sys- 1310, ME 3820.) Note: Students cannot receive ment and analysis. The facilities of WPI’s Surface tems, high-speed computer networks, distributed credit for this course if they have taken the Special Metrology Laboratory are available for making computer control of manufacturing processes and Topics version of the same course (MFE593D/ measurements for selected projects. Software for flexible manufacturing systems may be covered. MFE594D). advanced analysis methods is also available for use This seminar is coordinated with the under- in the course. No previous knowledge of surface graduate program in manufacturing engineering. metrology is required. Students should have some Required for all full-time students. background in engineering, math or science.

98 Manufacturing Engineering Return to Table of Contents www.me.wpi.edu/MPE Materials Process Engineering

Faculty Degree Requirements Electives (3 credits) To ensure flexibility in this program, each R. D. Sisson, Jr., George F. Fuller Profes- For the M.S. sor, Director of Manufacturing and Mate- student will select 3 credits of electives rials Engineering: Ph.D. Purdue University Course Requirements from any graduate-level course at WPI. For the master of science in materials pro- Electives are typically selected from the Y. K. Rong, John Woodman Higgins cess engineering, the student is required topics listed here; however, electives from Professor, Associate Director of Manufac- to complete a minimum of 30 graduate mathematics, chemistry, physics, computer turing and Materials Engineering; Ph.D., credit hours as follows: science, social science, or any engineer- University of Kentucky ing program may be acceptable. Courses Faculty from Management, Manufacturing Materials Science and in nanotechnology and MEMS are also Engineering, Materials Science & Engi- Engineering Graduate Courses available. neering and Mechanical Engineering work (9 or more credits) with this program. Also see those programs MPE Project (3 credits) for complete faculty listings. • MTE 511 Structure and Properties of Each student must complete the MPE Engineering Materials project. This may be a team or inde- Program of Study • MTE 512 Properties and Performance pendent project sponsored by industry. The founders of Worcester Polytechnic of Engineering Materials The project must address several issues Institute made their fortunes in the mate- • MTE 526 Advanced Thermodynamics in business analysis, operations, process rials processing industries of wire drawing • MTE 532 X-Ray Diffraction and design and quality, as well as the process- (Ichabod Washburn) and tin smithing Crystallography ing/structure/property relationships in the process being studied. The culmination of (John Boynton). Since classes began in • MTE 540 Analytical Methods in this project will be a business plan and/or 1868, WPI has prepared young men and Materials Engineering women for careers in materials processing. a research proposal or a new product. The • MTE 550 Phase Transformations in final report is presented in a seminar or Many WPI alumni and faculty members Materials have established materials processing class in materials science, manufacturing • MTE 561 Mechanical Behavior and companies including Norton Company, engineering, or management. Fracture of Materials Wyman-Gordon, and PresMet. • MTE 5844 Corrosion and Corrosion Project Overview WPI’s new Materials Process Engineering Control After at least twenty graduate credits have (MPE) Master of Science graduate degree • Any other MTE 5XX course been successfully completed, the student program continues this outstanding legacy registers for the 3-credit project with one by providing engineers, scientists and Manufacturing Engineering or more faculty advisors. The project managers with the knowledge, skills and Graduate Courses is completed over a 14-week semester. experience to become the entrepreneurs, (6 credits) Ideally, the project is completed by a trend setters and executives in the materi- • ME 542/MFE 510 Control and team of three; however, smaller or larger als processing industry in the 21st century. Monitoring of Manufacturing Processes teams will be considered. Working with a This 30-credit program offers the oppor- • ME 543/MFE 520 Design and Analysis faculty advisor, the team develops a clear tunity for serious professionals to become of Manufacturing statement of the goals and objectives of leaders by selecting courses from three • MFE 531 Computer Integrated the project. Weekly meetings with the programs: Manufacturing advisor with written and oral reports are required. The culmination of the project Manufacturing Engineering • MFE 541 Design for Manufacturability is a business plan and/or a research Materials Science and Engineering • MFE 5841 Surface Metrology: Measure- proposal or a new product. The project Management/Industrial Engineering ment and Analysis of Surface Textures should integrate the skills obtained and Admission Requirements • Any other MFE 5XX course knowledge acquired in the student’s Management/Industrial coursework as well as industrial experience. Admission requirements include a B.S. in engineering or science and at least Engineering Graduate Courses three years of industrial experience. The (9 credits) program is designed to be completed in These credits may be selected from any three to four years while working full time. graduate management graduate courses. Classes are offered on campus one evening Typically, students will select from Opera- or two afternoons per week. Many classes tions and Industrial Engineering (OIE) or in management are available through Entrepreneurship (ETR) topics. However WPI’s Corporate Online Graduate courses from other topical areas in man- Programs. agement may be selected.

Return to Table of Contents Materials Process Engineering 99 Materials Science and Engineering www.me.wpi.edu/MTE

Faculty T. El-Korchi, Professor of Civil and Envi- M. M. Makhlouf, Professor; Director, ronmental Engineering, Ph.D., University Aluminum Casting Research Laboratory; R. D. Sisson Jr., George F. Fuller of New Hampshire. Civil engineering, Ph.D., Worcester Polytechnic Institute. Professor; Director, Manufacturing and statistics, strength of materials, structural Solidification of Metals, the application Materials Engineering; Ph.D., Purdue design, construction materials, structural of heat, mass and momentum transfer to University. Materials process modeling analysis, structural materials, pavement modeling and solving engineering materi- and control, manufacturing engineering, analysis, design and management. als problems, and processing of ceramic corrosion, and environmental effects on materials. metals and ceramics. R. N. Katz, Research Professor; Ph.D., Massachusetts Institute of Technology. S. Shivkumar, Professor; Ph.D., Stevens Y. K. Rong, John Woodman Higgins Ceramics Science and Technology, Failure Institute of Technology. Biomedical Mate- Professor; Associate Director, Manufactur- Analysis, Design Brittle Material Technol- rials, Plastics, Materials Processing. ing and Materials Engineering; Ph.D., ogy Assessment, Mechanical Behavior of L. Wang, Research Professor of Mechani- University of Kentucky. CAD/CAM, Ceramic & Metal Matrix Composites. manufacturing process and systems. cal Engineering; Ph.D., Drexel University. D. A. Lados, Associate Professor of Me- Casting technology, aluminum casting D. Apelian, Alcoa/Howmet Professor of chanical Engineering; Director, Integrative alloy development and characterization, Engineering; Director, Metal Processing Materials Design Center (IMDC); Ph.D., heat treatment, molten metal processing, Institute; Sc.D., Massachusetts Institute Worcester Polytechnic Institute. Fatigue, and solidification processing. of Technology. Solidification processing, fatigue crack growth, and fracture behavior Y. Wang, Assistant Professor of Mechanical spray casting, molten metal processing, of materials - design and optimization aluminum foundry processing, plasma Engineering; Ph.D., University of for automotive, aerospace, marine, and Windsor (Canada). Lithium ion battery, processing, and knowledge engineering in military applications; microstructure materials processing. fuel cell, corrosion and electrochemistry, characterization and microstructure-per- flow battery. D. Backman, Research Professor of formance relationships; solidification and Mechanical Engineering; Massachusetts post-solidification processes (heat treat- Program of Study Institute of Technology. Materials mod- ment) and impact on static and dynamic Programs leading to a degree of master of eling and simulation, design-materials properties; material/process development; science and/or doctor of philosophy. integration, heat treatment, solidification residual stress; plasticity; small and long processing, and aerospace materials and crack growth behavior; fracture mechan- The master of science in materials science processes. ics; fatigue life prediction models; powder and engineering provides students with metallurgy. an opportunity to study the fundamentals I. Bar-On, Professor; Ph.D., Hebrew Uni- of materials science and state-of-the-art versity of Jerusalem. Mechanical behavior B. Li, Research Associate Professor; applications in materials engineering of materials, fracture and fatigue of metals, Manager of the Materials Characteriza- and materials processing. The program is ceramics and composites, reliability and lie tion Laboratories; PhD., University of designed to build a strong foundation in prediction, and electronic packaging. Science and Technology of China. Surface and interface physics, materials physics, materials science along with industrial ap- R. R. Biederman, Professor Emeritus; growth and structural characterization of plications in engineering, technology and Ph.D., P.E., University of Connecticut. nanostructured materials, nanomaterials processing. Both full- and part-time study Materials science and engineering, micro­ in energy storage and conversion applica- are available. structural analysis, SEM, TEM, and tions, materials characterization, electron Program areas for the doctor of philosophy diffraction­ analysis. microscopy. emphasize the processing-structure-prop- C. A. Brown, Professor; Director, Surface J. Liang, Associate Professor, Ph.D., erty performance relationships in metals, Metrology Lab; Director, Haas Technical Brown University. Nanostructured materi- ceramics, polymers and composites. Cur- Center; Ph.D., P.E., University of Vermont. als, Materials Processing, nanomaterial rent projects are addressing these issues in Surface metrology, machining, fractal Characterization. fuel cell materials, biopolymers, aluminum analysis, sports engineering, tribology, and magnesium casting, the heat-treating axiomatic design and abrasive processes. R. Ludwig, Professor of Electrical and of steels and aluminum alloys and metal Computer Engineering, Ph.D., Colorado­ C. D. Demetry, Associate Professor; matrix composites. State University. Electromagnetic and Director of the Center for Educational acoustic Nondestructive Evaluation Well-equipped laboratories within Wash- Development and Assessment, Ph.D., (NDE), electromagnetic/acoustic sensors,­ burn Shops and Stoddard Laboratories Massachusetts Institute of Technology. electromechanical device modeling, include such facilities as scanning (SEM) Materials science and engineering piezoelectric array transducers, numeri­ and transmission (TEM) electron mi- education, nanocrystalline materials and cal simulation, inverse and optimization croscopes, X-ray diffractometer, process nanocomposites, materials processing, methods for Magnetic Resonance Imaging simulation equipment, a mechanical test- and grain boundaries and interfaces in (MRI). materials.

100 Materials Science and Engineering Return to Table of Contents ing laboratory including two computer- tives. All courses must be approved by the mittee. This person should not be the controlled servohydraulic mechanical student’s advisor and the Materials Gradu- student’s Ph.D. thesis advisor; but that testing systems, metalcasting, particulate ate Committee. advisor may be a member of the MEDQE processing, semisolid processing labo- Satisfactory participation in the materi- Committee. Others on the committee ratories, a surface metrology laboratory, als engineering seminar (MTE 580) is should be the writers of the four sections a metallographic laboratory, a polymer also required for all full-time students. In of the examinations and any other faculty engineering laboratory with differential addition to general college requirements, selected by the chairperson. Faculty from scanning calorimeter (DSC) and thermo all courses taken for graduate credit must other departments at WPI or other col- gravimetric analyzer (TGA), a corrosion result in a GPA of 3.0 or higher. Waiver leges/ universities, as well as experts from laboratory, topographic analysis labora- of any of these requirements must be industry, may be asked to participate in tory and machining force dynamometry. approved by the Materials Science and this examination if the materials engineer- A range of materials processing, fastening, Engineering Graduate Committee, which ing faculty deems that it is appropriate. joining, welding, machining, casting and will exercise its discretion in handling any At least one year prior to completion of heat treating facilities is also available. extenuating circumstances or problems. the Ph.D. dissertation, the student must present a formal seminar to the public de- Examples of Typical Program Admission Requirements scribing the proposed dissertation research The program is designed for college • Materials engineering core courses— project. This Ph.D. research proposal will graduates with engineering, mathematics 18 credits be presented after admission to candidacy. or science degrees. Some undergraduate • Electives—6 credits All materials science and engineering courses may be required to improve the • Thesis—6 credits students in the Ph.D. program must student’s background in materials science • Total—30 credits and engineering. For further information, satisfactorily complete a minor in a see page 11. For the Ph.D. program-related technical area. The minor normally consists of a minimum of three Degree Requirements The number of course credits required for related courses and must be approved by the doctor of philosophy degree, above the Graduate Study Committee and the For the M.S. those for the master of science, is not program head. For the master of science in materials specified precisely. For planning purposes, science and engineering, the student is the student should consider a total of 21 Materials Science and to 30 course credits. The remainder of the required to complete a minimum of 30 Engineering Laboratories graduate credit hours. Requirements work will be in research and independent include MTE 511 and MTE 512 and at study. The total combination of research and Research Centers and coursework required will not be less least 4 of the following courses: MTE 526, Materials Characterization MTE 532, MTE 540, MTE 550, MTE than 60 credits beyond the master of 561. For the remaining 18 credits, the science degree or not less than 90 credits Laboratories student may choose between a thesis or beyond the bachelor’s degree. The Materials Characterization Laboratory coursework option. Admission to candidacy will be granted (MCL) is an analytical user facility, which only after the student has satisfactorily serves the materials community at WPI, Thesis Option passed the Materials Engineering Doctoral offering a range of analytical techniques The student must complete a thesis with a Qualifying/ Comprehensive Examination and support services. MCL is part of minimum of 6 graduate credits. Additional (MEDQE). The purpose of this exam the Materials Science and Engineering thesis credits may substitute for course is to determine if the student’s breadth Program, directed by Professor Richard electives. The remaining graduate credits and depth of understanding of the D. Sisson, Jr. and managed by Professor must consist of additional MTE or other fundamental areas of materials engineering Boquan Li. By using the lab, materials 4000-, 500- or 600-level engineering, is adequate to conduct independent researchers can access major instruments science, management or mathematics research and successfully complete a Ph.D. in the area of electron microscopy (SEM, electives. All courses must be approved dissertation. TEM), x-ray diffraction, optical micros- by the student’s advisor and the Materials copy (conventional and inverted), physical Graduate Committee. The MEDQE consists of both written property determination (hardness and and oral components. The written exam micro indentation hardness), and materi- Non Thesis Option must be successfully completed before the als process (specimen preparation, heat The student must complete a three credit oral exam can be taken. The oral exam treatment, metal evaporation and sputter- capstone project or equivalent that demon- is usually given within two months of ing). All of the instruments are available strates the ability to design, implement, the completion of the written exam. The for hands-on use by students and faculty. and complete an independent professional MEDQE is offered at least one time each Licensed users have 24-hour access to the project. The remaining graduate credits year. instruments. Training is available by ap- must consist of additional MTE or other A member of the materials science and pointment throughout the year. The MCL 4000-, 500- or 600-level engineering, engineering faculty will be appointed to be is also open to researchers from other science, management or mathematics elec- the chairperson of the MEDQE Com- universities and local industries.

Return to Table of Contents Materials Science and Engineering 101 Nanomaterials and copy, or conventional profilometry. The • Computerized data acquisition systems Nanomanufacturing Laboratory purpose of the characterization parameters for solidification studies is to support product and process design, This laboratory is well-equipped for • Thermal analysis units or promote the understanding of adhesion, advanced research in controlled nano- • Liquid metal filtration apparatus friction, wear, fracture, corrosion or other fabrications and nanomanufacturing of • Rheocasting machines texture related phenomena. carbon nanotubes, magnetized nano- • Extensive melting and casting facilities tubes, semiconducting, superconducting, Metal Process Institute • Variety of heat treating furnaces magnetic, metallic arrays of nanowires and The Metal Processing Institute (MPI) is Student scholarships offered by the quantum dots. Nanomaterials fabrication an industry-university alliance dedicated Foundry Education Foundation (FEF) are and engineering will be carried out in this to advancing available technology to the available through ACRC, as are project laboratory by different means, such as metal processing and materials recovery opportunities at international sites. PVD (physical vapor deposition), CVD and recycling industries. Students, profes- The ACRC lab is open throughout the (chemical vapor deposition), PECVD sors and more than 120 industry partners year for project activity and thesis work, as (plasma enhanced CVD), RIE (reac- work together on research projects that well as co-op and summer employment. tive ion etching), ICP etching (induced address technological barriers facing in- http://wpi.edu/+acrc coupled plasma), etc. Material prop- dustry – making member businesses more erty characterizations will be conducted, competitive and productive. including optic, electronic, and magnetic Center for Heat Treating property measurements. Device design, MPI offers educational opportunities and Excellence implementation, and test based on the corporate resources to undergraduate and At the Center for Heat Treating Excel- obtained materials with improved quality graduate students. They include: lence (CHTE) students get to work with will also be done in this laboratory. • International exchanges and intern- industry leaders and WPI faculty to solve ships with several leading universities in business challenges and improve manufac- Polymer Laboratory Europe and Asia. turing processes through applied research. This laboratory is used for the synthesis, • Graduate internship programs leading Students will have the opportunity to work processing and testing of plastics. The to a master’s or doctoral degree, where with over 20 corporate members from equipment includes: thermal analysis ma- the research is carried out at the indus- various parts of the heat treating industry chines Perkin Elmer DSC 4, DSC 7, DTA trial site. - commercial heat treaters, captive heat 1400 and TGA 7; single-screw table-top MPI’s research programs are managed by treaters, suppliers and manufacturers. extruder; injection molding facilities; poly- three distinct research centers: mer synthesis apparatus; oil bath furnaces; Research projects focus on: heat treating ovens; and foam processing • Advanced Casting Research Center • Reducing energy consumption and testing devices. (ACRC) –more information below. • Controlling microstructure and proper- • Center for Heat Treating Excellence ties of metallic components Surface Metrology Laboratory (CHTE) – more information below. • Reducing processing time The Surface Metrology Laboratory is dedi- • Center for Resource Recovery & Recy- • Minimizing production costs cated to the study of surface textures, their cling (CR3) – more information below. • Achieving zero distortion creation and their influence of surface be- For further information please visit the havior or performance. We also study and MPI offices on the third floor of Wash- • Increasing furnace efficiency design the manufacturing processes that burn, Room 326. Or visit our website: Project opportunities, industrial intern- create specific surface textures. We study http://wpi.edu/+mpi. ships, co-op opportunities and summer and develop specialized algorithms that are employment are available through CHTE. used to support texture-related product The Advanced Casting Research http://wpi.edu/+chte and process design, and to advance the un- Center Center for Resource Recovery derstanding of texture-dependent behav- The Advanced Casting Research Center ior. Our experience extends to analyzing (ACRC) brings industry and university and Recycling data sets on scales from kilometers (earth’s together to collaborate on research projects In nature, nothing is wasted. The Center surface) to Angstroms (cleaved mica), in the areas of light metals, non-ferrous for Resource Recovery & Recycling (CR3) although the primary focus is on analyz- alloys and semi-solid processing. The is the premiere industry-university col- ing measured surfaces or profiles (i.e., advancements being made in the ACRC laborative that works towards taking the topographic data) acquired from surfaces laboratories provide solutions to today’s waste from one process and utilizing it in created or modified during manufacture, manufacturing challenges. another, establishing a closed loop system wear, fracture or corrosion. – just as nature would. CR3’s mission is Undergraduate and graduate students The objective of the research on texture to be the ultimate resource in material working in the ACRC laboratories work sustainability. analysis is to develop characterization pa- directly with professional engineers from rameters that reduce large data sets, such as 23 sponsoring companies, as well as WPI Students who work with CR3 will work those acquired by atomic probe microsco- faculty. The lab is equipped with leading- with industry leaders on technological py, scanning profiometry, confocal micros- edge technology: advancements that recover and recycle ma- terials from initial product design, through

102 Materials Science and Engineering Return to Table of Contents manufacture to end-of-life disposition. • Investigating the impact of increased TTT diagrams will be discussed. Major structural The end result: enhanced environmental utilization of recycled materials in high- parameters that effect of performance in materials conservation, and improved energy and performance materials and applications including plastics, metallic alloys, ceramics and glasses will be emphasized. The principal process- cost savings. • Providing practical and integrated de- ing techniques to shape materials and the effects Recent projects include: sign tools and strategies, and of processing on structure will be highlighted. • Near 100% auto recycling rates • Identifying and pursuing implementa- (Prerequisites: senior or graduate standing or tion venues for the developed materials, consent of the instructor.) Note: Students cannot • Dust recovery and recycling improve- receive credit for this course if they have taken the ments processes, and design methodologies Special Topics version of the same course (MTE • Recovery of valuable materials from Industrial and government partners review 594S). and provide insight and guidance to the waste fluorescent MTE 512/ME 5312. Properties and • Transformation of waste streams to research programs, bring industrial per- Performance of Engineering Materials value added materials spective, and assist in identifying strategies (2 credits) for the implementation of the develop- CR3 is an Industry & University Coopera- The two introductory classes on materials science ments in the industry. This setting pro- (MTE 511 and MTE 512) describe the structure- tive Research Center (I/UCRC) and is vides a platform for creating knowledge in property relationships in materials. The purpose supported by the National Science Foun- a well-defined context while being able to of this class is to provide a basic knowledge of the dation (NSF). Partner universities include disseminate it and witness its implementa- principles pertaining to the physical, mechani- cal and chemical properties of materials. The Colorado School of Mines and Katholieke tion and impact in/on actual industrial Universiteit Leuven. primary focus of this class will be on mechanical applications. properties. The thermal, tensile, compressive, For more information: flexural and shear properties of metallic alloys, http://wpi.edu/+cr3 Course Descriptions ceramics and glasses and plastics will be discussed. All courses are 3 credits unless otherwise noted. Fundamental aspects of fracture mechanics and Integrative Materials Design viscoelasticity will be presented. An overview of Center (IMDC) MTE 509. Electron Microscopy dynamic properties such as fatigue, impact and (2 credits) creep will be provided. The relationship between iMdc is a WPI-based research center This course introduces students to the theory, the structural parameters and the preceding dedicated to advancing the state-of-the- fundamental operating principles, and specimen mechanical properties will be described. Basic art-and-practice in sustainable materials- preparation techniques of scanning electron mi- composite theories will be presented to describe process-component design and manufac- croscopy (SEM), transmission electron microsco- fiber-reinforced composites and nanocomposites. turing for high-performance, reliability, py (TEM), and energy dispersive x-ray spectros- Various factors associated with material degrada- copy (EDS). The primary emphasis is placed on and recyclability through knowledge tion during use will be discussed. Some introduc- practical SEM, TEM, and x-ray microanalysis tory definitions of electrical and optical properties creation and dissemination, and through of materials. Topics to be covered include basic will be outlined. (Prerequisites: MTE 511 and education. principles of the electron microscopy; SEM instru- senior or graduate standing or consent of the in- iMdc is formed through an industry-gov- mentation, image formation and interpretation, structor) Note: Students cannot receive credit for qualitative and quantitative x-ray microanalysis in this course if they have taken the Special Topics ernment-university alliance, and its pro- SEM; electron diffraction and diffraction contrast version of the same course (MTE 594P). gram is built in direct collaboration and imaging in TEM. Various application examples with active participation and insight from of SEM and TEM in materials research will be MTE/MFE 520/ME 543. Design and its industrial and government partners. discussed. Lab work will be included. The course Analysis of Manufacturing Processes is available to graduate students. Recommended The first half of the course covers the axiomatic The center is conducting fundamental design method applied to simultaneous product research, which addresses well-identified background: CH 1020, PH 1120, and ES 2001 or equivalent. Note: Students cannot receive credit and process design for concurrent engineering, industrial applications of general interest for this course if they have taken the Special Top- with emphasis on process and manufacturing and relevance to the manufacturing sector. ics version of the same course. tool design. Basic design principles as well as qualitative and quantitative methods of analysis The overarching objective of iMdc’s MTE 511/ME 5311. Structure and of designs are developed. The second half of the research portfolio is to prevent failure and Properties of Engineering Materials course addresses methods of engineering analysis increase high-performance and reliability (2 credits) of manufacturing processes, to support machine of high-integrity structures through: This course, (along with its companion course tool and process design. Basic types of engineering MTE 512 Properties and Performance of Engi- analysis are applied to manufacturing situations • Exploring and advancing the funda- neering Materials), is designed to provide a com- including elasticity, plasticity, heat transfer, me- mental and practical understanding of prehensive review of the fundamental principles of chanics and cost analysis. Special attention will be a wide range of multi-scale metallic and Materials Science and Engineering for incoming given to the mechanics of machining (traditional, composite materials and their respective graduate students. In the first part of this 2 course nontraditional and grinding) and the production processes sequence, the structure in materials ranging from of surfaces. Students, with the advice and consent the sub-atomic to the macroscopic including of the professor, select the topic for their term • Developing new and optimized materi- nano, micro and macromolecular structures will project. als and processing practices, including be discussed to highlight bonding mechanisms, recycling as a design factor crystallinity and defect patterns. Representative • Establishing knowledge-based mi- thermodynamic and kinetic aspects such as diffu- crostructure-properties-performance sion, phase diagrams, nucleation and growth and relationships

Return to Table of Contents Materials Science and Engineering 103 MTE 526/ME 5326. Advanced MTE/ME/BME 554. Composites with onset of “smart” property will be highlighted. Thermodynamics Biomedical and Materials Applications The principles of self-healable materials based on (2 credits) Introduction to fiber/particulate reinforced, smart materials will be discussed. The applica- Thermodynamics of solutions—phase equilib- engineered and biologic materials. This course tion of smart materials in various fields includ- ria— Ellingham diagrams, binary and ternary focuses on the elastic description and application ing sensors, actuators, diagnostics, therapeutics, phase diagrams, reactions between gasses and con- of materials that are made up of a combination packaging and other advanced applications will be densed phases, reactions within condensed phases, of submaterials, i.e., composites. Emphasis will presented. Note: Students cannot receive credit for thermodynamics of surfaces, defects and electro- be placed on the development of constitutive this course if they have taken the Special Topics chemistry. Applications to materials processing equations that define the mechanical behavior of version of the same course (MTE 594). a number of applications including biomaterial, and degradation will be presented and discussed. MTE 558. Plastics (Prerequisites: ES 3001, ES 2001) Note: Students tissue and materials science. (Prerequisites: Un- (2 credits) cannot receive credit for this course if they have derstanding of stress analysis and basic continuum This course will provide an integrated overview of taken the Special Topics version of the same mechanics.) the design, selection and use of synthetic plastics. course (MTE 594T). MTE 555/ME 4860. Food Engineering The basic chemistry associated with polymeriza- MTE 532/ME 5332. X-Ray Diffraction and (2 credits) tion and the structure of commercial plastics will Crystallography An introductory course on the structure, pro- be described. Various aspects of polymer crystalli- (2 credits) cessing, and properties of food. Topics covered zation and glass transition will be outlined. Salient This course discusses the fundamentals of crystal- include: food structure and rheology, plant and aspects of fluid flow and heat transfer during the lography and X-ray diffraction (XRD) of metals, animal tissues, texture, glass transition, gels, processing of plastics will be highlighted. Funda- ceramics and polymers. It introduces graduate emulsions, micelles, food additives, food coloring, mentals of the diverse processing operations used students to the main issues and techniques of starches, baked goods, mechanical properties, to shape plastics and the resulting structures that diffraction analysis as they relate to materials. The elasticity, viscoelastic nature of food products, develop after processing will be discussed. The techniques for the experimental phase identifica- characteristics of food powders, fat eutectics, freez- mechanical behavior of plastics including elastic tion and determination of phase fraction via XRD ing and cooking of food, manufacturing processes, deformation, rubber elasticity, yielding, viscoelas- will be reviewed. Topics covered include: basic cereal processing, chocolate manufacture, micro- ticity, fracture and creep will be discussed. Plastic X-ray physics, basic crystallography, fundamen- bial growth, fermentation, transport phenomena degradation and environmental issues associated tals of XRD, XRD instrumentation and analysis in food processing, kinetics, preserving and with recycling and disposal of plastics will be techniques. (Prerequisites: ES 2001 or equivalent, packaging of food, testing of food. Recommended examined. Typical techniques used in the analysis and senior or graduate standing in engineering or Background: ES 2001 or equivalent. This course and testing of plastics will be described and a science.) Note: Students cannot receive credit for will be offered in 2014-15 and in alternating years working knowledge of various terminologies used this course if they have taken the Special Topics thereafter. in commercial practice will be provided. Note: version of the same course (MTE 594C). Students cannot receive credit for this course if MTE 556/ME 5356. Smart Materials they have taken the Special Topics version of the MTE 540/ME 5340. Analytical Methods (2 credits) same course (MTE 594A). in Materials Engineering A material whose properties can respond to an Heat transfer and diffusion kinetics are applied to external stimulus in a controlled fashion is referred MTE 561/ME 5361. Mechanical Behavior the solution of materials engineering problems. to as a smart or intelligent material. These materi- and Fracture of Materials Mathematical and numerical methods for the als can be made to undergo changes modulus, (2 credits) solutions to Fourier’s and Pick’s laws for a variety shape, porosity, electrical conductivity, physical The failure and wear-out mechanisms for a of boundary conditions will be presented and dis- form, opacity, and magnetic properties based on variety of materials (metals, ceramics, polymers, cussed. The primary emphasis is given heat treat- an external stimulus. The stimuli can include tem- composites and microelectronics) and applications ment and surface modification processes. Topics to perature, pH, specific molecules, light, magnetic will be presented and discussed. Multi-axial failure be covered include solutionizing, quenching, and field, voltage and stress. These stimuli-sensitive theories and fracture mechanics will be discussed. carburization heat treatment. (Prerequisites: ME materials can be utilized as sensors and as vehicles The methodology and techniques for reliability 4840 or MTE 511 and MTE 512 or equivalent.) for the controlled delivery of drugs and other bio- analysis will also be presented and discussed. A molecules in medical applications. Smart materials materials systems approach will be used. (Pre- MTE 550/ME 5350. Phase are also becoming important in other biological requisites: ES 2502 and ME 3023 or equivalent, Transformations in Materials areas such as bio-separation, biosensor design, and senior or graduate standing in engineering or This course is intended to provide a fundamental tissue engineering, protein folding, and micro- science.) Note: Students cannot receive credit for understanding of thermodynamic and kinetic fluidics. The use of stimuli-sensitive materials is this course if they have taken the Special Topics principles associated with phase transformations. receiving increasing attention in the development version of the same course (MTE 593C/MTE The mechanisms of phase transformations will be of damage tolerant smart structures in aerospace, 594C). discussed in terms of driving forces to establish marine, automotive and earth quake resistant a theoretical background for various physical buildings. The use of smart materials is being phenomena. The principles of nucleation and explored for a range of applications including growth and spinodal transformations will be protective coatings, corrosion barriers, intelligent described. The theoretical analysis of diffusion batteries, fabrics and food packaging. The purpose controlled and interface controlled growth will of this course is to provide an introduction to be presented The basic concepts of martensitic the various types of smart materials including transformations will be highlighted. Specific polymers, ceramic, metallic alloys and compos- examples will include solidification, crystallization, ites. Fundamental principles associated with the precipitation, sintering, phase separation and transformation toughening. (Prerequisites: MTE 511 and MTE 512, ME 4850 or equivalent.)

104 Materials Science and Engineering Return to Table of Contents MTE 575/ME 4875. Introduction to MTE/MFE/ME 5841. Surface Metrology MTE 5847 ME 5347. Materials for Nanomaterials and Nanotechnology This course emphasizes research applications of Electrochemical Energy Systems (2 credits) advanced surface metrology, including the mea- (2 credits) This course introduces students to current surement and analysis of surface roughness. Sur- An introductory course on electrochemi- develop­­ ments­ in nanoscale science and face metrology can be important in a wide variety cal engineering, fuel cells and batteries. With technology. The current advance of materials and of situations including adhesion, friction, catalysis, escalating oil prices and increasing environmental devices constituting of building blocks of metals, heat transfer, mass transfer, scattering, biological concerns, increasing attention is being paid to the semiconductors, ceramics or polymers that are growth, wear and wetting. These situations impact development of electrochemical devices to replace nanometer size (1-100 nm) are reviewed. The practically all the engineering disciplines and traditional energy. Here several types of batteries profound implications for technology and science sciences. The course begins by considering basic and fuel cells will be discussed. Topics covered of this research field are discussed. The differences principles and conventional analyses, and meth- include: basic electrochemistry, lithium ion bat- of the properties of matter on the nanometer scale ods. Measurement and analysis methods are criti- tery, proton exchange membrane fuel cell, solid from those on the macroscopic scale due to the cally reviewed for utility. Students learn advanced oxide fuel cell, electrochemical method. Recom- size confinement, predominance of interfacial methods for differentiating surface textures that mended background: ES2001 or equivalent. Note: phenomena and quantum mechanics are studied. are suspected of being different because of their Students cannot receive credit for this course if The main issues and techniques relevant to science performance or manufacture. Students will also they have taken the Special Topics version of the and technologies on the nanometer scale are learn methods for making correlations between same course. considered. New developments in this field and surface textures and behavioral and manufacturing future perspectives are presented. Topics covered parameters. The results of applying these methods MTE 594. Special Topics include: fabrication of nanoscale structures, can be used to support the design and manufac- As arranged characterization at nanoscale, molecular ture of surface textures, and to address issues in Theoretical or experimental studies in subjects of electronics, nanoscale mechanics, new quality assurance. Examples of research from a interest to graduate students in materials science architecture, nano optics and societal impacts. broad range of applications are presented, includ- and engineering. Recommended background: ES 2001 ing, food science, pavements, friction, adhesion, Research machining and grinding. Students do a major Introduction to Materials or equivalent As arranged project of their choosing, which can involve either Additional acceptable courses, 4000 series, may be MTE 580. Materials Science and an in-depth literature review, or surface measure- found in the Undergraduate Catalog. Engineering Seminar ment and analysis. The facilities of WPI’s Surface Reports on the state-of-the-art in various areas Metrology Laboratory are available for making of research and development in materials science measurements for selected projects. Software for and engineering will be presented by the faculty advanced analysis methods is also available for use and outside experts. Reports on graduate student in the course. No previous knowledge of surface research in progress will also be required. metrology is required. Students should have some MTE 5816. Ceramics and Glasses for background in engineering, math or science. Engineering Applications MTE 5844. Corrosion and Corrosion (2 credits) Control This course develops an understanding of the (2 credits) processing, structure, property, performance An introductory course on corrosion; aqueous relationships in crystalline and vitreous ceram- corrosion, stress corrosion cracking and ics. The topics covered include crystal structure, hydrogen effects in metals will be presented. glassy structure, phase diagrams, microstructures, High-temperature oxidation, carburization and mechanical properties, optical properties, thermal sulfidation will be discussed. Discussions focus properties, and materials selection for ceramic on current corrosive engineering problems and materials. In addition the methods for processing research. (Prerequisites: MTE 511 and MTE ceramics for a variety of products will be included. 512 or consent of the instructor.) Note: Students Recommended background: ES2001 or equiva- cannot receive credit for this course if they have lent. Note: Students cannot receive credit for taken the Special Topics version of the same this course if they have taken the Special Topics course. version of the same course.

Return to Table of Contents Materials Science and Engineering 105 Mathematical Sciences www.wpi.edu/+math

Faculty M. Humi, Professor; Ph.D., Weizmann H. Sayit, Assistant Professor; Ph.D., -Cor- Institute of Science, 1969; mathematical nell University, 2005; stochastic optimiza- L. Capogna, Professor and Head; Ph.D., physics, applied mathematics and model- tion, stochastic differential equations, sta- Purdue University, 1996; nonlinear partial ing, Lie groups, differential equations, tistical estimation and inference, financial differential equations. numerical analysis, turbulence and chaos. mathematics, computational finance. J. Abraham, Professor of Practice and Ac- C. J. Larsen, Professor; Ph.D., Carnegie B. Servatius, Professor; Ph.D., Syracuse tuarial Mathematics Coordinator; Fellow, Mellon University, 1996; variational prob- University, 1987; combinatorics, matroid Society of Actuaries, 1991; B.S., Univer- lems from applications such as optimal and graph theory, structural topology, sity of Iowa, 1980. design, fracture mechanics, and image seg- geometry, history and philosophy of M. Blais, Teaching Assistant Professor and mentation, calculus of variations, partial mathematics. Coordinator of Professional Science Mas- differential equations, geometric measure S. Sturm, Assistant Professor; Ph.D. ter’s Programs; Ph.D., Cornell University, theory, analysis of free boundaries and free TU Berlin 2010; Mathematical finance: 2005; mathematical finance. discontinuity sets. stochastic volatility, optimal portfolio M. Bichuch, Assistant Professor;. R. Y. Lui, Professor; Ph.D., University of problems, systemic risk; stochastic analysis: Ph.D.,Carnegie Mellon University, 2010; Minnesota, 1981; mathematical biology, backward stochastic differential equations, mathematical finance, optimal portfolio partial differential equations. large deviations, Malliavin calculus. selection, optimal investment and con- K. A. Lurie, Professor; Ph.D., 1964, D. Tang, Professor; Ph.D., University sumption, optimal control with transac- D.Sc., 1972, A. F. Ioffe Physical-Technical of Wisconsin, 1988; biofluids, biosol- tion costs. Institute, Academy of Sciences of the ids, blood flow, mathematical modeling, P. R. Christopher, Professor;. Ph.D., USSR, Russia; control theory for distrib- numerical methods, scientific computing, Clark University, 1982; graph theory, uted parameter systems, optimization and nonlinear analysis, computational fluid group theory, algebraic graph theory, nonconvex variational calculus, optimal dynamics. -combinatorics, linear algebra. design. B. S. Tilley, Associate Professor; Ph.D., W. Farr, Associate Professor; Ph.D., W. J. Martin, Professor; Ph.D., University Northwestern University, 1994; free- University of Minnesota 1986; ordinary of Waterloo, 1992; algebraic combinator- boundary problems in continuum me- and partial differential equations, dynami- ics, applied combinatorics. chanics, interfacial fluid dynamics, viscous flows, partial differential equations, math- cal systems, local bifurcation theory with U. Mosco, H. J. Gay Professor; Libera ematical modeling, asymptotic methods. symmetry and its application to problems Docenza, University of Rome, 1967; involving chemical reactions or fluid me- partial differential equations, convex analy- D. Vermes, Associate Professor; Ph.D., chanics (or a combination of both). sis, optimal control, variational calculus, University of Szeged, Hungary, 1975; J. D. Fehribach, Associate Professor; fractals. optimal stochastic control theory, non- smooth analysis, stochastic processes with Ph.D., Duke University, 1985; partial dif- B. Nandram, Professor; Ph.D., University discontinuous dynamics, adaptive optimal ferential equations and scientific comput- of Iowa, 1989; survey sampling theory control in medical decision making, mas- ing, free and moving boundary problems and methods, Bayes and empirical Bayes sively parallel data analysis and simula- (crystal growth), nonequilibrium thermo- theory and methods, categorical data tion, portfolio risk management, financial dynamics and averaging (molten carbonate analysis. fuel cells). mathematics. J. D. Petruccelli, Professor and Associate B. Vernescu, Professor; Ph.D., Institute of J. Goulet, Teaching Professor and Department Head; Ph.D., Purdue Univer- Mathaematics, Bucharest, Romania, 1989; Coordinator, Master of Mathematics for sity, 1978; time series (nonlinear models), partial differential equations, phase transi- Educators Program; Ph.D., Rensselaer optimal stoppings (best choice problems), tions and free-boundaries, viscous flow in Polytechnic Institute, 1976; applications statistics. of linear algebra, cross departmental course porous media, asymptotic methods and development, project development, K-12 M. Sarkis, Professor; Ph.D., Courant homogenization. Institute of Mathematical Sciences, 1994; relations with colleges, mathematics of D. Volkov, Associate Professor; Ph.D., domain decomposition methods, numeri- digital and analog sound and music. Rutgers University, 2001; electromagnetic cal analysis, parallel computing, compu- waves, inverse problems, wave propagation A. C. Heinricher, Professor; Ph.D., tational fluid dynamics, preconditioned in waveguides and in periodic structures, Carnegie Mellon University, 1986; applied iterative methods for linear and non-linear electrified fluid jets. probability, stochastic processes and opti- problems, numerical partial differential mal control theory. equations, mixed and non-conforming H. F. Walker, Professor; Ph.D., Courant finite methods, overlapping non-matching Institute of Mathematical Sciences, New grids, mortar finite elements, eigenvalue York University, 1970; numerical analysis, solvers, aeroelasticity, porous media reser- especially numerical solution of large-scale voir modeling. linear and nonlinear systems, uncon-

106 Mathematical Sciences Return to Table of Contents strained optimization, applications to algebra, combinatorics, applied probabili- Professional Master of Science ordinary and partial differential equations ty, stochastic processes, time series analysis, in Financial Mathematics and statistical estimation, computational Bayesian statistics, Bayesian computation, Program and applied mathematics. survey research methodology, categorical data analysis, Monte Carlo methodology, This program offers an efficient, practice- S. Weekes, Associate Professor; Ph.D., oriented track to prepare students for University of Michigan, 1995; numerical statistical computing, survival analysis and model selection. quantitative careers in the financial indus- analysis, computational fluid dynamics, try, including banks, insurance companies, porous media flow, hyperbolic conserva- Programs of Study and investment and securities firms. The tion laws, shock capturing schemes. program gives students a solid background The Mathematical Sciences Department and sufficient breadth in the mathemati- Z. Wu, Assistant Professor; Ph.D., Yale offers four programs leading to the degree cal and statistical foundations needed to University, 2009; Biostatistics, high- of master of science, a combined B.S./ understand the cutting edge techniques of dimensional model selection, linear and Master’s program, a program leading to today and to keep up with future develop- generalized linear modeling, statistical the degree of master of mathematics for ments in this rapidly evolving area over genetics, bioinformatics. educators, and a program leading to the the span of their careers. It also equips degree of doctor of philosophy. V. Yakovlev, Research Associate Professor; students with expertise in quantitative Ph.D., Institute of Radio Engineering and financial modeling and the computa- Electronics, Russian Academy of Sciences, Master of Science in Applied Mathematics Program tional methods and skills that are used to 1991; antennas for MW and MMW implement the models. The mathematical communications, electromagnetic fields This program gives students a broad knowledge is complemented by studies in in transmission lines and along media background in mathematics, placing an financial management, information tech- interfaces, control and optimization of emphasis on areas with the highest de- nology and/or computer science. electromagnetic and temperature fields in mand in applications: numerical methods microwave thermal processing, issues in and scientific computation, mathematical The bridge from the academic environ- modeling of microwave heating, com- modeling, discrete mathematics, math- ment to the professional workplace is putational electromagnetics with neural ematical materials science, optimization provided by a professional master’s project networks, numerical methods, algorithms and operations research. In addition to that involves the solution of a concrete, and CAD tools for RF, MW and MMW these advanced areas of specialization, real-world problem directly originating in components and subsystems. students are encouraged to acquire breadth the financial industry. Students are encour- by choosing elective courses in other fields aged to complete summer internships at Emeritus that complement their studies in applied financial firms. The department may help P. W. Davis, Professor mathematics. Students have a choice of students to find suitable financial intern- ships through the industrial connections G. C. Branche, Professor completing their master’s thesis or project in cooperation with one of the depart- of faculty affiliated with the Center for E. R. Buell, Professor ment’s established industrial partners. Industrial Mathematics and Statistics. Graduates of the program are expected to V. Connolly, Professor The program provides a suitable founda- tion for the pursuit of a Ph.D. degree in start or advance their professional careers W. J. Hardell, Professor applied mathematics or a related field, or in such areas as financial product devel- J. J. Malone, Professor for a career in industry immediately after opment and pricing, risk management, graduation. investment decision support and portfolio B. C. McQuarrie, Professor management. W. B. Miller, Professor Master of Science in Applied Statistics Program Professional Master of Science Research Interests This program gives graduates the knowl- in Industrial Mathematics Active areas of research in the Math- edge and experience to tackle problems of Program ematical Sciences Department include statistical design, analysis and control like- This is a practice-oriented program that applied and computational mathematics, ly to be encountered in business, industry prepares students for successful careers in industrial mathematics, applied statistics, or academia. The program is designed to industry. The graduates are expected to scientific computing, numerical analysis, acquaint students with the theory underly- be generalized problem-solvers, capable ordinary and partial differential equations, ing modern statistical methods, to provide of moving from task to task within an non-linear analysis, electric power systems, breadth in diverse areas of statistics and to organization. In industry, mathematicians control theory, optimal design, composite give students practical experience through need not only the standard mathematical materials, homogenization, computational extensive application of statistical theory to and statistical modeling and computa- fluid dynamics, biofluids, dynamical sys- real problems. tional tools, but also knowledge within other areas of science or engineering. This tems, free and moving boundary problems, Through the selection of elective courses, program aims at developing the analytical, porous media modeling, turbulence and the student may choose a program with modeling and computational skills needed chaos, mathematical physics, mathemati- an industrial emphasis or one with a more by mathematicians who work in industrial cal biology, operations research, linear and theoretical emphasis. nonlinear programming, discrete math- ematics, graph theory, group theory, linear

Return to Table of Contents Mathematical Sciences 107 environments. It also provides the breadth ticipants have the opportunity to develop considered. In any case, an applicant will required by industrial multidisciplinary materials, based on coursework, which need a strong background in mathematics, team environments through courses in may be used in their classes. Throughout which should include courses in under- one area of science or engineering, e.g., the courses, technology is introduced graduate analysis and probability. Students physics, computer science, mechanical whenever possible to help educators with serious deficiencies may be required engineering, and electrical and computer become familiar with the options available to correct them on a noncredit basis. Ap- engineering. for use in the classroom. Examples of this plicants to the Ph.D. program and those include Geometer’s Sketchpad and the TI wishing to be considered for teaching assis- The connection between academic train- CBL for motion and heat. This combina- tantships should submit GRE Mathemat- ing and industrial experience is provided tion of content courses, assessment and ics Subject Test scores if possible; an appli- by an industrial professional master’s proj- evaluation theory courses, and a final cant who finds it difficult to submit a score ect that involves the solution of a concrete, project are perfect for educators looking is welcome to contact the Mathematical real-world problem originating in industry. for a program that emphasizes mathemat- Sciences Department Graduate Admis- The department, through the industrial ics and supports educators in learning how sions Committee ([email protected]) connections of the faculty affiliated with to better evaluate their effectiveness in the to discuss the applicant’s situation. the Center for Industrial Mathematics classroom. For information about admis- and Statistics, may help students identify Candidates for the master of mathematics sions and requirements, see the listing and select suitable industrial internships. for educators degree must have a bachelor’s under STEM for Educators. Graduates of the program are expected to degree and must possess a background start or advance their professional careers Doctor of Philosophy in equivalent to at least a minor in math- in industry. Mathematical Sciences Program ematics, including calculus, linear algebra, and statistics. Students are encouraged to Master of Mathematics for The goal of this program is to produce ac- enroll in courses on an ad hoc basis with- Educators tive and creative problem solvers, capable out official program admission. However, of contributing in academic and indus- This is an evening program designed (at most) four such courses may be taken trial environments. One distinguishing primarily for secondary school mathemat- prior to admission. feature of this program is a Ph.D. project ics teachers. Courses offer a solid founda- to be completed under the guidance of an tion in areas such as geometry, algebra, Degree Requirements external sponsor, e.g., from industry or modeling, discrete math and statistics, a national research center. The intention For the M.S. in Applied while also including the study of mod- of this project is to connect theoretical ern applications. Additionally, students Mathematics knowledge with relevant applications and develop materials, based on coursework, The master’s program in applied math- to improve skills in applying and commu- which may be used in their classes. Tech- ematics is a 30-credit-hour program. The nicating mathematics. nology is introduced when possible to give student’s program must include at least students exposure for future consideration. seven MA numbered courses other than Combined B.S./Master’s 501 or 511. Among these must be Examples include Geometer’s Sketchpad; Program Maple for algebra, calculus and graphics; MA 503, MA 510, and either MA 535 Matlab for analysis of sound and music; This program allows a student to work or MA 530. In addition, students are and the TI CBL for motion and heat. concurrently toward bachelor and master required to complete a Capstone Experi- of science degrees in applied mathematics, ence, which can be satisfied by one of the Master of Science in applied statistics, financial mathematics following options: Mathematics for Educators and industrial mathematics. (a) A six credit master’s thesis. The Master of Science in Mathematics Admission Requirements (b) A three to six credit master’s project. for Educators is designed specifically for (c) A three credit master’s practicum. A basic knowledge of undergraduate middle school, high school and junior (d) A three credit research review report or analysis, linear algebra and differential college in-service educators. The emphasis research proposal. equations is assumed for applicants to the of the program is put on mathematics con- (e) A master’s exam. tent coursework combined with courses master’s programs in applied mathemat- The master’s thesis is an original piece of in assessment and evaluation theory and a ics and industrial mathematics. A strong mathematical research work which focuses culminating project designed by the par- background in mathematics, which should on advancing the state of the mathemati- ticipant. The mathematics content courses, include courses in undergraduate analysis cal art. The master’s project consists of a designed for educators, offer teachers a and linear algebra, is assumed for appli- creative application of mathematics to a solid foundation in areas such as geom- cants to the master’s program in finan- real-world problem. It focuses on problem etry, algebra, modeling, discrete math and cial mathematics. Typically, an entering definition and solution using mathemati- statistics, while also including the study of student in the master of science in applied cal tools. The master’s practicum requires modern applications. In these courses, par- statistics program will have an undergradu- ate major in the mathematical sciences, a student to demonstrate the integration engineering or a physical science; however, of advanced mathematical concepts and individuals with other backgrounds will be

108 Mathematical Sciences Return to Table of Contents methods into professional practice. This 2. 12 credits from core financial math- using mathematical tools. The could be done through a summer intern- ematics courses: master’s practicum requires a student ship in industry or an applied research MA 571 Financial Mathematics I to demonstrate the integration of laboratory. advanced mathematical concepts MA 572 Financial Mathematics II The remaining courses may be cho- and methods into professional sen from the graduate offerings of the MA 573 Computational Methods of practice. This could be done through Mathematical Sciences Department. Financial Mathematics an approved summer internship in industry or an applied research Upper-level undergraduate mathematics MA 574 Portfolio Valuation and Risk laboratory. The capstone course courses or a two-course graduate sequence Management in another department may be taken for in financial mathematics can be MA 575 Market and Credit Risk graduate credit, subject to the approval of chosen from MA 572, MA 573, Management the departmental Graduate Committee. MA 574, or MA 575 and will be Candidates are required to successfully 3. 3 credits chosen from Mathematical an enhanced version of the course complete the graduate seminar MA 557. Sciences graduate courses with extra work assigned. Prior to MA 502-590. the start of the capstone course, a For the M.S. in Applied BS/MS students can count under- student seeking to use the course to Statistics graduate credits MA 4213 Risk satisfy the requirement must declare this intention to the professor of the The master’s program in applied statistics Theory, MA 4235 Mathematical course. is a 30-credit-hour program. Courses Optimization, MA 4237 Probabilistic taken must include MA 540, MA 541, Methods in Operations Research, 6. MA562A and MA562B Professional MA 546, MA 547, 3 credits of MA 559 MA 4473 Partial Differential Master’s Seminar (for no credit) Equations, MA 4632 Probability and and at least three additional departmental For the M.S. in Industrial statistics offerings: MA 509 and courses Mathematical Statistics II towards numbered 542 through 556. Students who electives Mathematics can demonstrate a legitimate conflict in 4. 6 credit block in one of the following The professional master’s degree program scheduling MA 559 will be assigned an complementary areas outside of the in industrial mathematics is a 30-credit- alternative activity by the Mathematical Mathematical Sciences Department: hour program. Students must complete Science Department Graduate Commit- Financial Management, Information four foundation courses: MA 503, tee. In addition the student must complete Technology, or Computer Science. MA 510 and two courses out of MA 508, MA 509, MA 529 and MA 530. Students a Capstone Experience, which can be satis- Students with a degree or substantial must also complete a 12-credit-hour mod- fied by one of the following options: work experience in one of the above ule composed of two courses within the complementary areas can substitute (a) A six credit master’s thesis. department and a sequence of two courses them with other courses subject (b) A three to six credit master’s project. from one graduate program outside the to prior approval by the graduate (c) A three credit master’s practicum. Mathematical Sciences Department. The committee (d) A three credit research review report or department offers a wide selection of mod- research proposal. BS/MS students can count suitable ules to suit students’ interest and expertise. undergraduate courses towards the (e) A master’s exam. In addition, students are required to complementary area requirement complete a 3-credit-hour elective from the Upper-level undergraduate courses may according the number of credits of the Mathematical Sciences Department and a be taken for graduate credit subject to the corresponding graduate courses approval of the departmental Graduate 3-credit-hour master’s project on a prob- Committee. 2 of the complementary area credits lem originating from industry. Candidates can be earned by taking MA579 are required to successfully complete the For the M.S. in Financial Financial Programming Workshop Professional Master’s Seminars MA 562A Mathematics 5. Capstone Project, which may be and MA 562B. The Plan of Study and the The professional M.S. Degree Program in satisfied by one of the following project topic require prior approval by the Financial Mathematics is a 30-credit hour options: departmental Graduate Committee. program. The curriculum consists of the (a) A three to six credit master’s project. Examples of Modules for the M.S. Degree following components: (b) A three credit master’s practicum. in Industrial Mathematics 1. 6 credits from required foundation (c) A three credit capstone course in The courses comprising the 12-credit courses: financial mathematics. module should form a coherent sequence MA 503 Analysis I or MA529 The master’s project consists of a that provides exposure to an area outside Stochastic Processes creative application of mathematics of mathematics and statistics, providing MA 540 Probability and to a real-world problem originating at the same time the mathematical tools Mathematical Statistics I in the financial industry. It focuses required by that particular area. Examples on problem definition and solution of typical modules are:

Return to Table of Contents Mathematical Sciences 109 • Dynamics and control module— Students may complete the degree in as General Comprehensive Examination MA 512, MA 540, ME 522 and little as slightly over two years by taking A student must pass the general compre- ME 523 or ME 527; two courses per semester, 3 semesters per hensive examination (GCE) in order to • Materials module—MA 512, MA 526, year, and doing a project. However, the become a Ph.D. candidate. The purpose and ME 531; program can accommodate other comple- of the GCE is to determine whether a stu- • Fluid dynamics module—MA 512, tion schedules as well. The MME degree dent possesses the fundamental knowledge MA 526, ME 511 and ME 512 may be used to satisfy the Massachusetts and skills necessary for study and research or ME 513; Professional License requirement, provided at the Ph.D. level. It is a written examina- the person holds an Initial License. tion normally offered twice a year, once in • Biomedical engineering module— January and once in August. A full-time MA 512, MA 526, BE/ME 554 and For the Master of Science in student must make the first attempt within BE/ME 558; Mathematics for Educators one year (two years for part-time students) • Machine learning module—MA 540, (MMED) of entering the Ph.D. program. Students MA 541, CS 509 and CS 539; For a complete overview of degree require- entering with master’s degrees are encour- • Cryptography module—MA 533, ments, please see STEM for Educators. aged to take the GCE as early as they can. MA 514, CS 503 and ECE 578. For the Ph.D. Mathematical Sciences Ph.D. Project For the Combined B.S./ The course of study leading to the doctor A student may complete a Ph.D. project Master’s Programs in Applied of philosophy in mathematical sciences involving a problem originating with a Mathematics and Applied -requires the completion of at least 90 sponsor external to the department. The Statistics credit hours beyond the bachelor’s degree purposes of the project are to broaden per- A maximum of four courses may be or at least 60 credit hours beyond the spectives on the relevance and applications counted toward both the undergraduate master’s degree, as follows: of mathematics and to improve skills in and graduate degrees. All of these courses General Courses (credited for communicating mathematics and formu- must be 4000-level or above, and at least students with master’s degrees) 30 credits lating and solving mathematical problems. one must be a graduate course. Three Research Preparation Phase 24-30 credits Students are encouraged to work with industrial sponsors on problems involving of them must be beyond the 7 units of Research-Related Courses applications of the mathematical sciences. mathematics required for the B.S. degree. or Independent Studies 9-18 credits Additionally, students are advised that all Each Ph.D. project requires prior ap- Ph.D. Project 1-9 credits requirements of a particular master’s pro- proval by the project advisor, the external gram must be satisfied in order to receive Extra-Departmental Studies 6 credits sponsor, and the departmental Graduate the degree, and these courses should be Dissertation Research at least 30 credits Committee. selected accordingly. A brief description of other Ph.D. program Ph.D. Preliminary Examination requirements follows below. For further Acceptance into the program means that Successful completion of the preliminary details, students are advised to consult the the candidate is qualified for graduate examination is required before a student document Ph.D. Program Requirements school and signifies approval of the four can register for dissertation research and Administrative Rules for the Department courses to be counted for credit toward credits. The purpose of the preliminary of Mathematical Sciences, available from the both degrees. However, in order to obtain examination is to determine whether a departmental graduate secretary. both undergraduate and graduate credit student’s understanding of advanced areas for these courses, grades of B or better Within a full-time student’s first semester of mathematics is adequate to conduct have to be obtained. of study (second semester for part-time independent research and successfully For the Master of Mathematics students), a Plan of Study leading to the complete a dissertation. The preliminary Ph.D. degree must be submitted to the examination consists of both written for Educators (M.M.E.) departmental Graduate Committee for and oral parts. A full-time student must Candidates for the master of mathematics review and approval. The Plan of Study make the first attempt by the end of his for educators must successfully complete may subsequently be modified with review or her third year (sixth year for part-time 30 credit hours of graduate study, includ- by the departmental Graduate Committee. students) in the Ph.D. program. ing a 6-credit-hour project (see MME 592, MME 594, MME 596). This project will Extra-Departmental Studies Ph.D. Dissertation typically consist of a classroom study with- Requirement The Ph.D. dissertation is a significant in the context of a secondary mathematics A student must complete at least six work of original research conducted under course and will be advised by faculty in the semester hours of courses, 500 level or the supervision of a dissertation advisor, Mathematical Sciences Department. Typi- higher, in WPI departments other than the who is normally a member of the depart- cally, a student will enroll in 4 credit hours Mathematical Sciences Department. mental faculty. The dissertation advisor per semester during the fall and spring, chairs the student’s dissertation committee, with the remaining credit hours taken in which consists of at least five members, the summer. including one recognized expert external to the department, and which must be

110 Mathematical Sciences Return to Table of Contents approved by the departmental Graduate The Center offers undergraduates and MA 505. Complex Analysis Committee. At least six months prior to graduate students the opportunity to gain This course will provide a rigorous and thor- completion of the dissertation, a student real-world experience in the corporate ough- treatment of the theory of functions of must submit a written dissertation pro- world through projects and internships one complex variable. The topics to be covered include complex numbers, complex differentia- posal and present a public seminar on the that make them more competitive in tion, the Cauchy-Riemann equations, analytic research plan described in the proposal. today’s job market. In addition, it helps functions, Cauchy’s theorem, complex integration, The proposal must be approved by the companies address their needs for math- the Cauchy integral formula, Liouville’s theorem, dissertation committee. Upon comple- ematical solutions and enhances their the Gauss mean value theorem, the maximum tion of the dissertation and other program technological competitiveness. modulus theorem, Rouche’s theorem, the Poisson requirements, the student presents the integral formula, Taylor-Laurent expansions, The industrial projects in mathematics dissertation to the dissertation committee singularity theory, conformal mapping with appli- and statistics offered by CIMS provide a cations, analytic continuation, Schwarz’s reflection and to the general community in a public unique education for successful careers in principle and elliptic functions. (Prerequisite: oral defense. The dissertation commit- industry, business and higher education. knowledge of undergraduate analysis.) tee determines whether the dissertation is acceptable. MA 508. Mathematical Modeling Course Descriptions This course introduces mathematical model All courses are 3 credits unless otherwise noted. -building using dimensional analysis, perturba- Mathematical Sciences tion theory and variational principles. Models Computer Facilities Mathematical Sciences are selected from the natural and social sciences MA 500. Basic Real Analysis according to the interests of the instructor and The Mathematical Sciences Department This course covers basic set theory, topology of students. Examples are: planetary orbits, spring- makes up-to-date computing equip- Rn, continuous functions, uniform convergence, mass systems, fluid flow, isomers in organic chem- ment available for use by students in its compactness, infinite series, theory of differentia- istry, biological competition, biochemical kinetics programs. tion and integration. Other topics covered may and physiological flow. Computer simulation of include the inverse and implicit function theorems these models will also be considered. (Prerequisite: Current facilities include a mixed envi- and Riemann-Stieltjes integration. Students may knowledge of ordinary differential equations and ronment of approximately 85 Windows, not count both MA 3831 and MA 500 toward of analysis at the level of MA 501 is assumed.) Linux/Unix and Macintosh workstations their undergraduate degree requirements. MA 509. Stochastic Modeling utilizing the latest in single- and dual- MA 501. Engineering Mathematics This course gives students a background in the processor 32 and 64 bit technology. Access This course develops mathematical techniques theory and methods of probability, stochastic is available to our supercomputer, a 16 used in the engineering disciplines. Preliminary processes and statistics for applications. The CPU SGI Altix 350. The Mathematical concepts will be reviewed as necessary, including course begins with a brief review of basic prob- Sciences Department also has 3 state-of- vector spaces, matrices and eigenvalues. The prin- ability, discrete and continuous random variables, cipal topics covered will include vector calculus, expectations, conditional probability and basic sta- the-art computer labs, one each dedicated tistical inference. Topics covered in greater depth to the Calculus, Statistics, and Financial Fourier transforms, fast Fourier transforms and Laplace transformations. Applications of these include generating functions, limit theorems, basic Mathematics programs. techniques for the solution of boundary value and stochastic processes, discrete and continuous time The department is continually adding new initial value problems will be given. The problems Markov chains, and basic queuing theory includ- treated and solved in this course are typical of ing M/M/1 and M/G/1 queues. (Prerequisite: resources to give our faculty and students knowledge of basic probability at the level of MA the tools they need as they advance in their those seen in applications and include problems of heat conduction, mechanical vibrations and 2631 and statistics at the level of MA 2612 is as- research and studies. wave propagation. (Prerequisite: A knowledge of sumed.) This course is offered by special arrange- ordinary differential equations, linear algebra and ment only, based on expressed student interest. Center for Industrial multivariable calculus is assumed.) Mathematics and Statistics MA 510/CS 522. Numerical Methods MA 503. Lebesgue Measure and This course provides an introduction to a broad (CIMS) Integration range of modern numerical techniques that are www.wpi.edu/+CIMS This course begins with a review of topics nor- widely used in computational mathematics, mally covered in undergraduate analysis courses: science, and engineering. It is suitable for both The Center for Industrial Mathematics open, closed and compact sets; liminf and limsup; mathematics majors and students from other de- and Statistics was established in 1997 to continuity and uniform convergence. Next the partments. It covers introductory-level material for foster partnerships between the university course covers Lebesgue measure in Rn including subjects treated in greater depth in MA 512 and and industry, business and government in the Cantor set, the concept of a sigma-algebra, the MA 514 and also topics not addressed in either of those courses. mathematics and statistics research. construction of a nonmeasurable set, measurable functions, semicontinuity, Egorov’s and Lusin’s Subject areas include numerical methods for The problems facing business and industry theorems, and convergence in measure. Next systems of linear and nonlinear equations, inter- are growing ever more complex, and we cover Lebesgue integration, integral conver- polation and approximation, differentiation and their solutions often involve sophisticated gence theorems (monotone and dominated), integration, and differential equations. Specific Tchebyshev’s inequality and Tonelli’s and Fubini’s topics include basic direct and iterative methods mathematics. The faculty members and P students associated with CIMS have theorems. Finally L spaces are introduced with for linear systems; classical rootfinding methods; emphasis on L2 as a Hilbert space. Other related the expertise to address today’s complex Newton’s method and related methods for non- topics will be covered at the instructor’s discretion. linear systems; fixed-point iteration; polynomial, problems and provide solutions that use (Prerequisite: Basic knowledge of undergraduate piecewise polynomial, and spline interpolation relevant mathematics and statistics. analysis is assumed.) methods; least-squares approximation; orthogonal functions and approximation; basic techniques for numerical differentiation; numerical integration,

Return to Table of Contents Mathematical Sciences 111 including adaptive quadrature; and methods for methods; or algorithms for parallel architectures. MA 525. Optimal Control and Design initial-value problems for ordinary differential (Prerequisite: basic knowledge of linear algebra or with Composite Materials I equations. Additional topics may be included at equivalent background. Knowledge of a higher- Modern technology involves a wide application the instructor’s discretion as time permits. level programming language is assumed.) of materials with internal structure adapted to environmental demands. This, the first course in a Both theory and practice are examined. Error esti- MA 520. Fourier Transforms and two-semester sequence, will establish a theoreti- mates, rates of convergence, and the consequences Distributions cal basis for identifying structures that provide of finite precision arithmetic are also discussed. The course will cover L1, L2, L∞ and basic facts optimal response to prescribed external factors. Topics from linear algebra and elementary from Hilbert space theory (Hilbert basis, Material covered will include basics of the calculus functional analysis will be introduced as needed. projection theorems, Riesz theory). The first part of variations: Euler equations; transversality These may include norms and inner products, or- of the course will introduce Fourier series: the L2 conditions; Weierstrass-Erdmann conditions for thogonality and orthogonalization, operators and theory, the C∞ theory: rate of convergence, Fourier corner points; Legendre, Jacobi and Weierstrass projections, and the concept of a function space. series of real analytic functions, application to the conditions; Hamiltonian form of the necessary (Prerequisite: knowledge of undergraduate linear trapezoidal rule, Fourier transforms in L1, Fourier conditions; and Noether’s theorem. Pontryagin’s algebra and differential equations is assumed, as integrals of Gaussians, the Schwartz class S, maximum principle in its original lumped param- is familiarity with MATLAB or a higher-level Fourier transforms and derivatives, translations, eter form will be put forth as well as its distrib- programming language.) convolution, Fourier transforms in L2, and uted parameter extension. Chattering regimes of characteristic functions of probability distribution MA 511. Applied Statistics for Engineers control and relaxation through composites will be functions. The second part of the course will cover and Scientists introduced at this point. May be offered by special tempered distributions and applications to partial This course is an introduction to statistics for arrangement. differential equations. Other related topics will be graduate students in engineering and the sciences. covered at the instructor’s discretion. (Prerequisite: Topics covered include basic data analysis, issues MA 526. Optimal Control and Design with MA 503.) in the design of studies, an introduction to prob- Composite Materials II Topics presented will include basics of homogeni- ability, point and interval estimation and hypoth- MA 521. Partial Differential Equations zation theory. Bounds on the effective properties esis testing for means and proportions from one This course considers a variety of material in par- of composites will be established using the transla- and two samples, simple and multiple regression, tial differential equations (PDE). Topics covered tion method and Hashin-Shtrikman variational analysis of one and two-way tables, one-way analy- will be chosen from the following: classical linear principles. The course concludes with a number of sis of variance. As time permits, additional topics, elliptic, parabolic and hyperbolic equations and examples demonstrating the use of the theory in such as distribution-free methods and the design systems, characteristics, fundamental/Green’s solu- producing optimal structural designs. The meth- and analysis of factorial studies will be considered. tions, potential theory, the Fredholm alternative, odology given in this course turns the problem of (Prerequisites: Integral and differential calculus.) maximum principles, Cauchy problems, Dirichlet/ optimal design into a problem of rigorous math- Neumann/Robin problems, weak solutions and MA 512. Numerical Differential Equations ematics. This course can be taken independently variational methods, viscosity solutions, nonlinear This course begins where MA 510 ends in the or as the sequel to MA 525. equations and systems, wave propagation, free study of the theory and practice of the numerical and moving boundary problems, homogenization. solution of differential equations. Central topics MA 528. Measure Theoretic Probability Other topics may also be covered. (Prerequisites: include a review of initial value problems, includ- Theory MA 503 or equivalent.) ing Euler’s method, Runge-Kutta methods, multi- This course is designed to give graduate students interested in financial mathematics and stochastic step methods, implicit methods and predictor- MA 522. Hilbert Spaces and Applications analysis the necessary background in measure- corrector methods; the solution of two-point to PDE theoretic probability and provide a theoretical boundary value problems by shooting methods The course covers Hilbert space theory with spe- foundation for Ph.D. students with research and by the discretization of the original problem cial emphasis on applications to linear ODs and interests in analysis and mathematical statistics. to form systems of nonlinear equations; numerical PDEs. Topics include spectral theory for linear op- Besides classical topics such as the axiomatic stability; existence and uniqueness of solutions; erators in n-dimensional and infinite dimensional foundations of probability, conditional prob- and an introduction to the solution of partial Hilbert spaces, spectral theory for symmetric com- abilities and independence, random variables and differential equations by finite differences. Other pact operatos, linear and bilinear forms, Riesz and their distributions, and limit theorems, this course topics might include finite element or boundary Lax-Milgram theorems, weak derivatives, Sobolev focuses on concepts crucial for the understanding element methods, Galerkin methods, collocation, spaces H1, H2, Rellich compactness theorem, weak of stochastic processes and quantitative finance: or variational methods. (Prerequisites: graduate or and classical solutions for Dirichlet and Neumann conditional expectations, filtrations and martin- undergraduate numerical analysis. Knowledge of a problems in one variable and in Rn, Dirichlet gales as well as change of measure techniques and higher-level programming language is assumed.) variational principle, eigenvalues and eigenvectors. the Radon-Nikodym theorem. A wide range of Other related topics will be covered at the instruc- MA 514. Numerical Linear Algebra illustrative examples from a topic chosen by the tor’s discretion. (Prerequisite: MA 503.) This course provides students with the skills instructor’s discretion (e.g financial mathematics, necessary to develop, analyze and implement MA 524. Convex Analysis and signal processing, actuarial mathematics) will be computational methods in linear algebra. The Optimization presented. (Prerequisite:MA500 Basic Real Analy- central topics include vector and matrix algebra, This course covers topics in functional analysis sis or equivalent.) vector and matrix norms, the singular value that are critical to the study of convex optimiza- MA 529. Stochastic Processes decomposition, the LU and QR decomposi- tion problems. The first part of the course will This course is designed to introduce students to tions, Householder transformations and Givens include the minimization theory for quadratic continuous-time stochastic processes. Stochastic rotations, and iterative methods for solving linear and convex functionals on convex sets and processes play a central role in a wide range of systems including Jacobi, Gauss-Seidel, SOR cones, the Legendre-Fenchel duality, variational applications from signal processing to finance and conjugate gradient methods; and eigenvalue inequalities and complementarity systems. The and also offer an alternative novel viewpoint to problems. Applications to such problem areas as second part will include optimal stopping time several areas of mathematical analysis, such as least squares and optimization will be discussed. problems in deterministic control, value functions partial differential equations and potential theory. Other topics might include: special linear systems, and Hamilton-Jacobi inequalities and linear and The main topics for this course are martingales, such as symmetric, positive definite, banded or quadratic programming, duality and Kuhn-Tucker maximal inequalities and applications, optimal sparse systems; preconditioning; the Cholesky de- multipliers. Other related topics will be covered at stopping and martingale convergence theorems, composition; sparse tableau and other least-square the instructor’s discretion. (Prerequisite: MA 503.)

112 Mathematical Sciences Return to Table of Contents the strong Markov property, stochastic integra- MA 541/4632. Probability and tions. Topics from observational studies include: tion, Ito’s formula and applications, martingale Mathematical Statistics II prospective and retrospective studies; overt and representation theorems, Girsanov’s theorem and This course is designed to provide background in hidden bias; adjustments by stratification and applications, and an introduction to stochastic principles of statistics. Topics covered include es- matching. Topics from sampling studies include: differential equations, the Feynman-Kac formula, timation criteria: method of moments, maximum simple random sampling and associated estimates and connections to partial differential equations. likelihood, least squares, Bayes, point and interval for means, totals, and proportions; estimates for Optional topics (at the instructor’s discretion) estimation, Fisher’s information, Cramer-Rao subpopulations; unequal probability sampling; include Markov processes and Poisson-and lower bound, sufficiency, unbiasedness, and ratio and regression estimation; stratified, cluster, jump-processes. (Prerequisite: MA 528. Measure- completeness, Rao-Blackwell Theorem, efficiency, systematic, multistage, double sampling designs, Theoretic Probability Theory, which can be taken consistency, interval estimation pivotal quantities, and, time permitting, topics such as model- concurrently (or, with special permission by the Neyman-Person Lemma, uniformly most power- based sampling, spatial and adaptive sampling. instructor, MA 540)). ful tests, unbiased, invariant and similar tests, (Prerequisite: knowledge of basic probability and likelihood ratio tests, convex loss functions, risk statistics, at the level of MA 511 is assumed.) MA 530. Discrete Mathematics functions, admissibility and minimaxity, Bayes This course provides the student of mathematics MA 548. Quality Control decision rules. (Prerequisite: knowledge of the or computer science with an overview of discrete This course provides the student with the basic material in MA 540 is assumed.) structures and their applications, as well as the ba- statistical tools needed to evaluate the quality of sic methods and proof techniques in combinator- MA 542. Regression Analysis products and processes. Topics covered include the ics. Topics covered include sets, relations, posets, Regression analysis is a statistical tool that utilizes philosophy and implementation of continuous enumeration, graphs, digraphs, monoids, groups, the relation between a response variable and one quality improvement methods, Shewhart control discrete probability theory and propositional cal- or more predictor variables for the purposes of charts for variables and attributes, EWMA and culus. (Prerequisites: college math at least through description, prediction and/or control. Successful Cusum control charts, process capability analysis, calculus. Experience with recursive programming use of regression analysis requires an appreciation factorial and fractional factorial experiments for is helpful, but not required.) of both the theory and the practical problems that process design and improvement, and response often arise when the technique is employed with surface methods for process optimization. Ad- MA 533. Discrete Mathematics II real-world data. Topics covered include the theory ditional topics will be covered as time permits. This course is designed to provide an in-depth and application of the general linear regression Special emphasis will be placed on realistic ap- study of some topics in combinatorial mathemat- model, model fitting, estimation and prediction, plications of the theory using statistical com- ics and discrete optimization. Topics may vary hypothesis testing, the analysis of variance and puter packages. (Prerequisite: knowledge of basic from year to year. Topics covered include, as time related distribution theory, model diagnostics and probability and statistic, at the level of MA 511 is permits, partially ordered sets, lattices, matroids, remedial measures, model building and valida- assumed.) matching theory, Ramsey theory, discrete pro- tion, and generalizations such as logistic response gramming problems, computational complexity of MA 549. Analysis of Lifetime Data models and Poisson regression. Additional topics algorithms, branch and bound methods. Lifetime data occurs frequently in engineering, may be covered as time permits. Application of where it is known as reliability or failure time theory to real-world problems will be emphasized MA 535. Algebra data, and in the biomedical sciences, where it is using statistical computer packages. (Prerequisite: Fundamentals of group theory: homomorphisms known as survival data. This course covers the knowledge of probability and statistics at the level and the isomorphism theorems, finite groups, basic methods for analyzing such data. Topics of MA 511 and of matrix algebra is assumed.) structure of finitely generated Abelian groups. include: probability models for lifetime data, cen- Structure of rings: homomorphisms, ideals, factor MA 546. Design and Analysis of soring, graphical methods of model selection and rings and the isomorphism theorems, integral Experiments analysis, parametric and distribution-free infer- domains, factorization. Field theory: extension Controlled experiments—studies in which treat- ence, parametric and distribution-free regression fields, finite fields, theory of equations. Selected ments are assigned to observational units—are the methods. As time permits, additional topics such topics from: Galois theory, Sylow theory, Jordan- gold standard of scientific investigation. The goal as frailty models and accelerated life models will Hölder theory, Polya theory, group presentations, of the statistical design and analysis of experiments be considered. Special emphasis will be placed on basic representation theory and group characters, is to (1) identify the factors which most affect a realistic applications of the theory using statistical modules. Applications chosen from mathematical given process or phenomenon; (2) identify the computer packages. (Prerequisite: knowledge of physics, Gröbner bases, symmetry, cryptography, ways in which these factors affect the process or basic probability and statistics at the level of error-correcting codes, number theory. phenomenon, both individually and in combina- MA 511 is assumed.) tion; (3) accomplish goals 1 and 2 with minimum MA 540/4631. Probability and MA 550. Time Series Analysis cost and maximum efficiency while maintaining Mathematical Statistics I Time series are collections of observations made the validity of the results. Topics covered in this Intended for advanced undergraduates and sequentially in time. Examples of this type of data course include the design, implementation and beginning graduate students in the mathematical abound in many fields ranging from finance to analysis of completely randomized complete sciences, and for others intending to pursue the engineering. Special techniques are called for in block, nested, split plot, Latin square and repeated mathematical study of probability and statistics. order to analyze and model these data. This course measures designs. Emphasis will be on the ap- Topics covered include axiomatic foundations, the introduces the student to time and frequency plication of the theory to real data using statistical calculus of probability, conditional probability and domain techniques, including topics such as computer packages. (Prerequisite: knowledge of independence, Bayes’ Theorem, random variables, autocorrelation, spectral analysis, and ARMA basic probability and statistics at the level of discrete and continuous distributions, joint, and ARIMA models, Box-Jenkins methodology, MA 511 is assumed.) marginal and conditional distributions, covari- fitting, forecasting, and seasonal adjustments. ance and correlation, expectation, generating MA 547. Design and Analysis of Time permitting, additional topics will be chosen functions, exponential families, transformations Observational and Sampling Studies from: Kalman filter, smoothing techniques, of random variables, types of convergence, laws of Like controlled experiments, observational stud- Holt-Winters procedures, FARIMA and GARCH large numbers the Central Limit Theorem, Taylor ies seek to establish cause-effect relationships, models, and joint time-frequency methods such series expansion, the delta method. (Prerequisite: but unlike controlled experiments, they lack the as wavelets. The emphasis will be in application knowledge of basic probability at the level of ability to assign treatments to observational units. to real data situations using statistical computer MA 2631 and of advanced calculus at the level of Sampling studies, such as sample surveys, seek to packages. (Prerequisite: knowledge of MA 511 is MA 3831/3832 is assumed.) characterize aspects of populations by obtain- assumed. Knowledge of MA 541 is also assumed, ing and analyzing samples from those popula- but may be taken concurrently.)

Return to Table of Contents Mathematical Sciences 113 MA 552. Distribution-Free and Robust MA 559. Statistics Graduate Seminar and Crank-Nicholson finite difference schemes Statistical Methods 1 credit for fixed and free boundary value problems, their Distribution-free statistical methods relax the This seminar introduces students to issues and convergence and stability. The second part of the usual distributional modeling assumptions of trends in modern statistics. In the seminar, stu- course covers Monte Carlo simulation methods, classical statistical methods. Robust methods are dents and faculty will read and discuss survey and including random number generation, variance re- statistical procedures that are relatively insensitive research papers, make and attend presentations, duction techniques and the use of low discrepancy to departures from typical assumptions, while and participate in brainstorming sessions toward sequences. (Prerequisites: MA 571 and program- retaining the expected behavior when assump- the solution of advanced statistical problems. ming skills at the level of MA 579, which can be tions are satisfied. Topics covered include, time taken concurrently.) permitting, order statistics and ranks; classical MA 560. Graduate Seminar MA 574. Portfolio Valuation and distribution-free tests such as the sign, Wilcoxon 0 credits Risk Management signed rank, and Wilcoxon rank sum tests, and as- Designed to introduce graduate students to study Balancing financial risks vs returns by the use of sociated point estimators and confidence intervals; of original papers and afford them opportunity to asset diversification is one of the fundamental tests pertaining to one and two-way layouts; the give account of their work by talks in the seminar. tasks of quantitative financial management. This Kolmogorov-Smirnov test; permutation methods; MA 562 A and B. course is devoted to the use of mathematical bootstrap and Monte Carlo methods; M, L, and Professional Master’s Seminar optimization and statistics to allocate assets, to R estimators, regression, kernel density estimation 0 credits construct and manage portfolios and to measure and other smoothing methods. Comparisons will This seminar will introduce professional master’s and manage the resulting risks. The fist part of the be made to standard parametric methods. (Prereq- students to topics related to general writing, course covers Markowitz’s mean-variance optimi- uisite: knowledge of MA 541 is assumed, but may presentation, group communication and inter- zation and efficient frontiers, Sharpe’s single index be taken concurrently.) viewing skills, and will provide the foundations and capital asset pricing models, arbitrage pricing MA 554. Applied Multivariate Analysis to successful cooperation within interdisciplinary theory, structural and statistical multi-factor mod- This course is an introduction to statistical meth- team environments. All full-time students will be els, risk allocation and risk budgeting. The second ods for analyzing multivariate data. Topics covered required to take both components A and B of the part of the course is devoted to the intertwining are multivariate sampling distributions, tests and seminar during their professional master’s studies. of optimization and statistical methodologies in estimation of multivariate normal parameters, modern portfolio management, including resa- MA 571. Financial Mathematics I multivariate ANOVA, regression, discriminant mpled efficiency, robust and Bayesian statistical This course provides an introduction to many of analysis, cluster analysis, factor analysis and princi- methods, the Black-Litterman model and robust the central concepts in mathematical finance. The pal components. Additional topics will be covered portfolio optimization. focus of the course is on arbitrage-based pricing as time permits. Students will be required to of derivative securities. Topics include stochastic MA 575. Market and Credit Risk Models analyze real data using one of the standard pack- calculus, securities markets, arbitrage-based pric- and Management ages available. (Prerequisite: knowledge of MA ing of options and their uses for hedging and risk The objective of the course is to familiarize 541 is assumed, but may be taken concurrently. management, forward and futures contracts, Euro- students with the most important quantita- Knowledge of matrix algebra is assumed.) pean options, American options, exotic options, tive models and methods used to measure and MA 556. Applied Bayesian Statistics binomial stock price models, the Black-Scholes- manage financial risk, with special emphasis on Bayesian statistics makes use of an inferential Merton partial differential equation, risk-neutral market and credit risk. The course starts with the process that models data summarizing the results option pricing, the fundamental theorems of introduction of metrics of risk such as volatil- in terms of probability distributions for the model asset pricing, sensitivity measures (“Greeks”), and ity, value-at-risk and expected shortfall and with parameters. A key feature is that in the Bayesian Merton’s credit risk model. (Prerequisite: MA 540, the fundamental quantitative techniques used in approach, past information can be updated with which can be taken concurrently.) financial risk evaluation and management. The new data in an elegant way in order to aid in next section is devoted to market risk including MA 572. Financial Mathematics II decision making. Topics included in the courses: volatility modeling, time series, non-normal heavy The course is devoted to the mathematics of fixed statistical decision theory, the Bayesian inferential tailed phenomena and multivariate notions of income securities and to the financial instruments framework (model specification, model fitting and codependence such as copulas, correlations and and methods used to manage interest rate risk. model checking); computational methods for pos- tail-dependence. The final section concentrates The first topics covered are the term-structure of terior simulation integration; regression models, on credit risk including structural and dynamic interest rates, bonds, futures, interest rate swaps hierarchical models, and ANOVA; time permit- models and default contagion and applies the and their uses as investment or hedging tools and ting, additional topics will include generalized mathematical tools to the valuation of default in asset-liability management. The second part of linear models, multivariate models, missing data contingent claims including credit default swaps, the course is devoted to dynamic term-structure problems, and time series analysis. (Prerequisites: structured credit portfolios and collateralized debt models, including risk-neutral interest rate trees, knowledge of MA 541 is assumed.) obligations. (Prerequisite: knowledge of MA 540 the Heath-Jarrow-Morton model, Libor market assumed but can be taken concurrently.) MA 557 Graduate Seminar in Analysis models, and forward measures. Applications of and Applied Mathematics these models are also covered, including the pric- MA 579. Financial Programming 1 credit ing of non-linear interest rate derivatives such as Workshop This seminar introduces students to modern caps, floors, collars, swaptions and the dynamic 1 or 2 credits. issues in Analysis and Applied Mathematics. hedging of interest rate risk. The course concludes The objective is to elevate the students’ computer During the seminar, students and faculty will with the coverage of mortgage-backed and asset- programming skills to the semi-professional level present and discuss recent research papers from backed securities. (Prerequisite: MA 571.) required in quantitative finance. Participants learn through hands-on experience by working on a the literature. Students will gain insights about MA 573. Computational Methods of structured set of mini projects from computation- current advances In the mathematical sciences and Financial Mathematics al finance under the guidance of an experienced their applications. Most realistic quantitative finance models are too trainer and the faculty in charge. The program- complex to allow explicit analytic solutions and ming language used may be C++, MATLAB, R/S, are solved by numerical computational methods. VB or another language widely used in quantita- The first part of the course covers the application tive finance and may alternate from year to year. of finite difference methods to the partial dif- (Prerequisite: Intermediate scientific programming ferential equations and interest rate models arising skills.) in finance. Topics included are explicit, implicit

114 Mathematical Sciences Return to Table of Contents MA 584/BCB 504. Statistical Methods in MA 599. Thesis MME 523. Analysis with Applications Genetics and Bioinformatics 1 or more credits 2 credits This course provides students with knowledge and Research study at the master’s level. This course introduces students to mathematical understanding of the applications of statistics in analysis and its use in modeling. It will emphasize modern genetics and bioinformatics. The course MA 698. Ph.D. Project topics of calculus (including multidimensional) generally covers population genetics, genetic 1 or more credits in a rigorous way. These topics will be motivated epidemiology, and statistical models in bioinfor- Ph.D. project work. by their usefulness for understanding concepts of matics. Specific topics include meiosis modeling, MA 699. Dissertation the calculus and for facilitating the solutions of stochastic models for recombination, linkage and 1 or more credits engineering and science problems. Projects involv- association studies (parametric vs. nonparamet- Research study at the Ph.D. level. ing applications and appropriate use of technol- ric models, family-based vs. population-based ogy will be an essential part of the course. Topics models) for mapping genes of qualitative and Mathematics for Educators covered may include dynamical systems and dif- quantitative traits, gene expression data analysis, ferential equations; growth and decay; equilibri- DNA and protein sequence analysis, and molecu- MME 518. Geometrical Concepts um; probabilistic dynamics; optimal decisions and lar evolution. Statistical approaches include log- This course focuses primarily on the foundations reward; applying, building and validating models; likelihood ratio tests, score tests, generalized linear and applications of Euclidean and non-Euclidean functions on n-vectors; properties of functions; models, EM algorithm, Markov chain Monte geometries. The rich and diverse nature of the parametric equations; series; applications such as Carlo, hidden Markov model, and classification subject also implies the need to explore other pendulum problems; electromagnetism; vibra- and regression trees. Students may not receive topics, for example, chaos and fractals. The course tions; electronics; transportation; gravitational credit for both MA 584 and MA 4603. (Prerequi- incorporates collaborative learning and the inves- fields; and heat loss. (Prerequisite: MME 532) site: knowledge of probability and statistics at the tigation of ideas through group projects. Possible undergraduate level.) topics include geometrical software and computer MME/SEME 524-25. Probability, Statistics graphics, tiling and tessellations, two- and three- and Data Analysis I, II MA 590. Special Topics dimensional geometry, inversive geometry, graphi- 4 credits Courses on special topics are offered under this cal representations of functions, model construc- This course introduces students to probability, the number. Contact the Mathematical Sciences tion, fundamental relationship between algebra mathematical description of random phenomena, Department for current offerings. and geometry, applications of geometry, geometry and to statistics, the science of data. Students in MA 595. Independent Study transformations and projective geometry, and this course will acquire the following knowledge convexity. and skills: 1 to 3 credits Supervised independent study of a topic of mutual MME 522. Applications of Calculus • Probability models-mathematical models used interest to the instructor and the student. 2 credits to describe and predict random phenomena. Students will learn several basic probability MA 596. Master’s Capstone There are three major goals for this course: to establish the underlying principles of calculus, models and their uses, and will obtain experi- 1 or more credits to reinforce students’ calculus skills through ence in modeling random phenomena. The Master’s Capstone is designed to integrate investigation of applications involving those skills, classroom learning with real-world practice. It can • Data analysis-the art/science of finding patterns and to give students the opportunity to develop consist of a project, a practicum, a research review in data and using those patterns to explain the projects and laboratory assignments for use by report or a research proposal. A written report and process which produced the data. Students first-year calculus students. The course will focus a presentation are required. will be able to explore and draw conclusions heavily on the use of technology to solve problems about data using computational and graphi- MA 598. Professional Master’s Project involving applications of calculus concepts. In ad- cal methods. The iterative nature of statistical 1 or more credits dition, MME students will be expected to master exploration will be emphasized. This project will provide the opportunity to apply the mathematical rigor of these calculus concepts and extend the material studied in the coursework so that they will be better prepared to develop • Statistical inference and modeling-the use of to the study of a real-world problem originating their own projects and laboratory assignments. For data sampled from a process and the prob- in the industry. The project will be a capstone in- example, if an MME student chose to develop a ability model of that process to draw conclu- tegrating industrial experience with the previously lab on convergence of sequence, he/she would be sions about the process. Students will attain acquired academic knowledge and skills. The topic expected to understand the rigorous definition of proficiency in selecting, fitting and criticizing of the project will come from a problem generated convergence and how to apply it to gain sufficient models, and in drawing inference from data. in industry, and could originate from prior intern- and/or necessary conditions for convergence. The • Design of experiments and sampling studies ship or industry experience of the student. The process of developing these first-year calculus – the proper way to design experiments and student will prepare a written project report and assignments will enable the MME students to sampling studies so that statistically valid infer- make a presentation before a committee including increase their own mathematical understanding of ences can be drawn. Special attention will be the faculty advisor, at least one additional WPI concepts while learning to handle mathematical given to the role of experiments and sampling faculty member and representatives of a possible and computer issues which will be encountered by studies in scientific investigation. Through lab industrial sponsor. The advisor of record must their own calculus students. Their understanding and project work, students will obtain practical be a faculty member of the WPI Mathematical of the concepts and applications of calculus will be skills in designing and analyzing studies and Sciences Department. The student must submit further reinforced through computer laboratory experiments. Course topics will be moti- a written project proposal for approval by the assignments and group projects. Applications vated whenever possible by applications and Graduate Committee prior to registering for the might include exponential decay of drugs in the reinforced by experimental and computer lab project. body, optimal crankshaft design, population experiences. One in-depth project per semester growth, or development of cruise control systems. involving design, data collection, and statistical (Prerequisite: MME 532) or probabilistic analysis will serve to integrate and consolidate student skills and understand- ing. Students will be expected to learn and use a statistical computer package such as MINITAB.

Return to Table of Contents Mathematical Sciences 115 MME 526-27. Linear Models I, II will then explore cyclotomy, and the arithmetic in MME 592/SEME 602. Project Preparation 4 credits rings of cyclotomic integers. This will culminate (Part of a 3-course sequence with MME This two-course sequence imparts computational in Gauss’s construction of the regular 5-gon and 594 and MME 596) skills, particularly those involving matrices, to 17-gon and the impossibility of constructing a 2 credits (ISG) deepen understanding of mathematical structure 9-gon or trisecting a 60-degree angle. Finally, Students will research and develop a mathemati- and methods of proof; it also includes discussion solutions of cubics and quartics by radicals will be cal topic or pedagogical technique. The project on a variety of applications of the material devel- studied. All topics will be based on the analysis of will typically lead to classroom implementa- oped, including linear optimization. Topics in this explicit calculations with (generalized) numbers. tion; however, a project involving mathematical sequence may include systems of linear equations, The proposed curriculum covers topics that are research at an appropriate level of rigor will also vector spaces, linear independence, bases, linear part of the folklore for high school mathematics be acceptable. Preparation will be completed in transformations, determinants, eigenvalues and (the impossibility of certain ruler and compass conjunction with at least one faculty member eigenvectors, systems of linear inequalities, linear constructions), but that many teachers know only from the Mathematical Sciences Department and programming problems, basic solutions, duality as facts. There are also many applications of the will include exhaustive research on the proposed and game theory. Applications may include eco- ideas that will allow the teachers to use results and topic. The course will result in a detailed proposal nomic models, computer graphics, least squares ideas from abstract algebra to construct for their that will be presented to the MME Project Com- approximation, systems of differential equations, students problems that have manageable solutions. mittee for approval; continuation with the project graphs and networks, and Markov processes. MME 531. Discrete Mathematics is contingent upon this approval. (Prerequisite: MME 532) 3 credits MME 594/SEME 604. Project MME 528. Mathematical Modeling This course deals with concepts and methods Implementation and Problem Solving which emphasize the discrete nature in many 2 credits (ISG) 2 credits problems and structures. The rapid growth of this Students will implement and carry out the project This course introduces students to the process of branch of mathematics has been inspired by its developed during the project preparation course. developing mathematical models as a means for wide range of applicability to diverse fields such as Periodic contact and/or observations will be made solving real problems. The course will encompass computer science, management, and biology. The by the project advisor (see MME 592 Project several different modeling situations that utilize a essential ingredients of the course are: Preparation) in order to provide feedback and to variety of mathematical topics. The mathematical Combinatorics -The Art of Counting. Topics ensure completion of the proposed task. Data for fundamentals of these topics will be discussed, but include basic counting principles and methods the purpose of evaluation will be collected by the with continued reference to their use in finding such as recurrence relations, generating functions, students throughout the term, when appropriate. the solutions to problems. Problems to be covered the inclusion-exclusion principle and the pigeon- If the project includes classroom implementa- include balance in small group behavior, traffic hole principle. Applications may include block tion, the experiment will last for the duration of flow, air pollution flow, group decision making, designs, latin squares, finite projective planes, coding a semester. transportation, assignment, project planning and theory, optimization and algorithmic analysis. the critical path method, genetics, inventory con- MME 596/SEME 606. Project Analysis and trol and queueing. (Prerequisite: MME 532) Graph Theory. This includes direct graphs and Report networks. Among the parameters to be examined 2 credits (ISG) MME 529. Numbers, Polynomials and are traversibility, connectivity, planarity, duality Students will complete a detailed statistical Algebraic Structures and colorability. analysis of any data collected during the project 2 credits implementation using techniques from MME This course enables secondary mathematics MME 532. Differential Equations 524-525 Probability, Statistics, and Data Analysis. teachers to see how commonly taught topics 2 credits The final report will be a comprehensive review of such as number systems and polynomials fit into This course would have concepts and techniques the relevant literature, project description, project the broader context of algebra. The course will for both Ordinary and Partial Differential Equa- implementation, any statisical results and conclu- begin with treatment of arithmetic, working tions. Topics from ordinary differential equations sions. Project reports will be subject to approval through Euclid’s algorithm and its applications, include existence and uniqueness for first order, by the MME Project committee and all students the fundamental theorem of arithmetic and single variable problems as well as separation will be required to present their project to the its applications, multiplicative functions, the of variables and linear methods for first order mathematical sciences faculty. Course completion Chinese remainder theorem and the arithmetic problems. Second order, linear equations would be is contingent upon approval of the report and of Z/n. This information will be carried over solved for both the homogeneous and non homo- satisfactory completion of the presentation. to polynomials in one variable over the rational geneous cases. The phenomena of beats and reso- and real numbers, culminating in the construc- nance would be analyzed. The Laplace Transform tion of root fields for polynomials via quotients would be introduced for appropriate second order of polynomial rings. Arithmetic in the Gaussian nonhomogeneous problems. Partial Differential integers and the integers in various other quadratic Equations would focus on boundary value prob- fields (especially the field of cube roots of unity) lems arising from the Heat and Wave equations in will be explored through applications such as the one variable. Fourier Series expansions would be generation of Pythagorean triples and solutions to used to satisfy initial conditions and the concepts other Diophantine equations (like finding integer- of orthogonality and convergence addressed. sided triangles with a 60 degree angle). The course

116 Mathematical Sciences Return to Table of Contents www.me.wpi.edu Mechanical Engineering

Faculty cal systems, acoustic and vibration control, A. H. Hoffman, Professor; Ph.D., Uni- smart materials and structures, sensor and versity of Colorado, 1970; Biomechanics, J. Yagoobi, George I. Alden Professor actuator networks in distributed processes, biomaterials, biomedical engineering, and Department Head; Ph.D., University control of mechanical systems rehabilitation engineering, biofluids and of Illinois @ Champaign-Urbana, 1984; continuum mechanics Enhancement of heat transfer in macro, C. Demetry, Associate Professor; Ph.D., micro, and nano-scales, liquid vapor phase Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Z. Hou, Professor; Ph.D., California change, electrohydrodynamics, impinging 1993; Pedagogical research, materials Institute of Technology, 1990; Vibration jets, drying science and engineering education, and control, structural dynamics, struc- educational technology, outcomes of K-12 tural health monitoring, smart materials D. Apelian, Howmet Professor, Director outreach, nanocrystalline materials and adaptive structures, stochastic of the Metals Processing Institute; Sc.D., mechanics, solid mechanics, finite M. F. Dimentberg, Professor; Ph.D., Massachusetts Institute of Technology, elements, earthquake engineering 1972; Solidification processing, spray Moscow Institute of Power Engineering, casting, molten metal processing, 1963; Applied mechanics, random vibra- D. Lados, Associate Professor; Ph.D., aluminum foundry processing, plasma tions, nonlinear dynamics, rotordynamics, Worcester Polytechnic Institute, 2004; processing and knowledge engineering in mechanical signature analysis, stochastic Design and optimization of materials for materials processing mechanics fatigue, fatigue crack growth, and fracture resistance, fracture mechanics, residual G. Fischer, Assistant Professor, Ph.D., H. K. Ault, Associate Professor; Ph.D., stress, plasticity, solidification Worcester Polytechnic Institute, 1988; Johns Hopkins University, 2008; Medical Geometric modeling, mechanical design, robotics, computer assisted surgery, robot J. Liang, Associate Professor, Ph.D. CAD, kinematics, biomechanics and control, automation, sensors and actuators (Electrical Engineering), Brown University 2004; Nonfabrication through non- rehabilitation engineering M. S. Fofana, Associate Professor, Ph.D., lithographic approaches; heteroepitaxial University of Waterloo, Waterloo, Canada, I. Bar-On, Professor; Ph.D., Hebrew growth of high quality quantum dots 1993; Delay dynamical systems, nonlinear University of Jerusalem, 1984; Clean and semiconductor thin films on nano­ machine-tool chatter, stochastic nonlinear energy, economic impact of alternative patterned substrates for electronic, optic, dynamics, reliability dynamics and control energy systems, fuel cell technology, cost and biomedical applications modeling, fatigue and fracture of ceramics, of medical ambulance, design and manu- metals and composites facturing of combat feeding systems, CNC Y. Liu, Assistant Professor, Ph.D., Univer- machining dynamics and control, and sity of Maryland, 2011, Optical inter- J. J. Blandino, Associate Professor; Ph.D. sustainable lean manufacturing systems rogation and control of micro/nanoscale California Institute of Technology, 2001; dynamics in biomedical applications Fluid mechanics and heat transfer in mi- C. Furlong, Associate Professor; Ph.D., crodevices, plasma diagnostics, electric and WPI, 1999; MEMS and MOEMS, nano- M. M. Makhlouf, Professor; Ph.D., chemical propulsion, propulsion system technology, mechatronics, laser applica- Worcester Polytechnic Institute, 1990; design for precision formation flying tions, holography, computer modeling of Solidification of metals, heat, mass and dynamic systems momentum transfer in engineering ma- C. A. Brown, Professor; Ph.D., University terials problems, processing of ceramics N. A. Gatsonis, Director, Aerospace of Vermont, 1983; Surface metrology, materials machining, grinding, mechanics of skiing, Engineering Program; Ph.D., Massa- axiomatic design chusetts Institute of Technology, 1991; S. S. Nestinger, Assistant Professor, Ph.D., Development of numerical simulation University of California, Davis, 2009; M. Chierichetti, Assistant Professor; methods and modeling of nonequilibrium, Intelligent mechatronic and embedded Ph.D., Georgia Institute of Technology, multi-component, multi-scale, gaseous systems and their applications 2012; Aerospace structures, static to and plasma flows; continuum/atomistic R. L. Norton, Milton Prince Higgins dynamic structural analysis, improvement simulation of macro-, micro- and nano- of structural and aerodynamic models II Professor Emeritus; Honorary Ph.D., scale fluid transport processes, develop- WPI, 2012; M.S., Tufts University, 1970; R. V. Cowlagi, Assistant Professor, Ph.D., ment of plasma diagnostics and micro- Mechanical design and analysis, dynamic Georgia Institute of Technology, 2011, fluidic devices, spacecraft propulsion and signal analysis, computer- aided engineer- Control of autonomous systems with micro-propulsion; spacecraft/environment ing, computer-aided design, finite element complex capabilities interactions method, vibration analysis, engineering M. A. Demetriou, Professor; Ph.D., J. R. Hall, Adjunct Teaching Professor; design, biomedical engineering University of Southern California, 1993; Ph.D., University of Florida, 1962; Dy- Control of intelligent systems, control of namic signal analysis, vibration analysis, fluid-structure interaction systems, fault engineering instrumentation detection and accommodation of dynami-

Return to Table of Contents Mechanical Engineering 117 D. J. Olinger, Associate Professor; Ph.D., Y. Wang, Assistant Professor; Ph.D., Admission Requirements Yale University, 1990; Fluid mechanics, University of Windsor, 2008; Fuel cell and aero- and hydrodynamics, fluid structure battery technology, ultrahigh energy den- For the M.S. program, applicants should interaction, fluid flow control, renewable sity electrodes for lithium ion batteries have a B.S. in mechanical engineering or energy in a related field (i.e., other engineering disciplines, physics, mathematics, etc.). C. D. Onal, Assistant Professor; Ph.D., Areas of Research and Carnegie Mellon University, 2009; Uncon- Areas of Study The standards are the same for admission into the thesis and non-thesis options of ventional approaches to robotics, fluidic Active areas of research in the Mechanical the M.S. program. At the time of applica- and shape memory actuation of soft mate- Engineering Department include: theoreti- tion to the master’s program, the student rials or mechanisms, printable robotics cal, numerical and experimental work in must specify his/her option (thesis or non- rarefied gas and plasma dynamics, electric R. J. Pryputniewicz, K. G. Merriman thesis) of choice. Professor; Ph.D., University of Connecticut, propulsion, multiphase flows, turbulent 1976; MEMS and nanotechnology, laser flows, fluid-structure interactions, struc- For the Ph.D., a bachelor’s or master’s applications, holography, fiber optics, tural analysis, nonlinear dynamics and degree in mechanical engineering or in computer modeling of dynamic systems, control, random vibrations, biomechanics a related field (i.e., other engineering bioengineering and biomaterials, materials processing, disciplines, physics, mathematics, etc.) is mechanics of granular materials, laser required. P. M. Rao, Assistant Professor, Ph.D., holography, MEMS, computer-aided en- The Mechanical Engineering Depart- Stanford University, 2013, Design and gineering systems, reconfigurable machine scalable synthesis of nanowire array com- ment reserves its financial aid for graduate design, compliant mechanism design, and students in the Ph.D. program or in the posite materials for solar energy conversion other areas of engineering design. and storage thesis option of the M.S. program. The graduate curriculum is divided into M. W. Richman, Associate Professor, five distinct areas of study: Degree Requirements Graduate Committee Chair; Ph.D., • Fluids Engineering Cornell University, 1984; Mechanics of M.S. Program • Dynamics and Controls granular flows, powder compaction, When applying to the master of science powder metallurgy • Structures and Materials program, students must specify their • Design and Manufacturing intention to pursue either the thesis or Y. Rong, Professor and Associate Director non-thesis M.S. option. Both the thesis Manufacturing & Materials Engineering; • Biomechanical Engineering and non-thesis options require the comple- Ph.D., University of Kentucky, 1989; These areas are parallel to the research tion of 30 graduate credit hours. Stu- Manufacturing systems and processes, heat interests of the mechanical engineer- dents in the thesis option must complete treatment process modeling and simula- ing faculty. Graduate courses introduce 12 credits of thesis research (ME 599), tion, CAD/CAM, computer-aided fixture students to fundamentals of mechanical whereas students in the non-thesis option design and verification engineering while simultaneously provid- ing the background necessary to become may complete up to 9 credits of directed B. J. Savilonis, Professor; Ph.D., State involved with the ongoing research of the research (ME 598). The result of the University of New York at Buffalo, 1976; mechanical engineering faculty. research credits (ME 599) in the thesis op- Thermofluids, biofluids and biomechanics, tion must be a completed master’s thesis. energy, fire modeling Students also receive credit for special top- The number of directed research credits ics under ME 593 and ME 693, and inde- S. S. Shivkumar, Professor; Ph.D., (ME 598) completed in the non-thesis pendent study under ISP. Faculty members option can range from 0 to 9. Stevens Institute of Technology 1987; often experiment with new courses under Plastics, materials science and engineering, the special topics designation, although no In the thesis option, the distribution of biomaterials, food engineering course may be offered more than twice in credits is as follows: R. D. Sisson, Jr., George F. Fuller Profes- this manner. Except for certain 4000-level • 9 graduate credits in mechanical sor; Ph.D., Purdue University, 1975; courses permitted in the B.S./ Master’s engineering Materials process modeling and control, program, no undergraduate courses may • 12 credits of thesis research (ME 599) manufacturing engineering, corrosion, be counted toward graduate credit. • 3 graduate credits in mathematics ­environmental effects on metals and • 6 graduate credits of electives within or ceramics Programs of Study outside of mechanical engineering J. M. Sullivan, Jr., Professor, Associate The Mechanical Engineering Department In the non-thesis option, the distribution Department Head; D.E., Dartmouth Col- offers two graduate degree options: of credits is as follows: lege, 1986; Development of graphics tools • Master of Science • 18 graduate credits in mechanical and mesh generation, numerical analysis • Doctor of Philosophy engineering (includes a maximum of 9 of partial differential equations, medical credits of directed research—ME 598) image visualization and analysis software • 3 graduate credits in mathematics development • 9 graduate credits of electives within or outside of mechanical engineering

118 Mechanical Engineering Return to Table of Contents In either option, all full-time students are participation and consists of a 30-minute Coursework: required to register for the graduate semi- presentation by the student followed by a Courses in M.E. nar (ME591) every semester. 30-minute open discussion. At least one (incl. Special Topics week prior to the defense each member and ISP) 15 credits Academic Advising of the examining committee must receive Courses in or outside Upon admission to the M.S. program, a copy of the thesis. One additional copy of M.E. 15 credits each student is assigned or may select a must be made available for members of Dissertation Research temporary advisor to arrange an academic the WPI community wishing to read the (ME 699) 30 credits plan covering the first 9 credits of study. thesis prior to the defense. Public notifica- Other: This plan must be made before the first tion of the defense must be given by the Additional coursework registration. Prior to registering for addi- mechanical engineering graduate secretary. Additional Dissertation tional credits, the student must specify an The examining committee will determine Research (ME 699) 30 credits academic advisor with whom the remain- the acceptability of the student’s thesis and Supplemental Research ing course of study is arranged. The plan oral performance. The thesis advisor will (ME 598, ME 698) }______must be approved by the mechanical determine the student’s grade. engineering graduate committee. TOTAL 90 credits Changing M.S. Options For students proceeding from master’s to For students in the thesis option, the Students in the non-thesis M.S. option Ph.D. degree, the 60 credits should be academic advisor is the thesis advisor. Prior may switch into the thesis option at any distributed as follows: to completing more than 18 credits, every time by notifying the mechanical engineer- Coursework: student in the thesis option must form a ing graduate committee of the change, (incl. Special Topics thesis committee that consists of the thesis provided that they have identified a thesis and ISP) 12 credits advisor and at least two other mechanical advisor, formed a thesis committee, and engineering faculty members from WPI Dissertation Research have worked out a Plan of Study with with knowledge of the thesis topic. (ME 699) 30 credits their thesis advisor. Subject to the thesis The schedule of academic advising is as advisor’s approval, directed research credits Other: follows: (ME 598) earned in the non-thesis option Additional coursework • Temporary advisor—meets with student may be transferred to thesis research cred- Additional Dissertation prior to first registration to plan the first its (ME 599) in the thesis option. Research (ME 699) 18 credits 9 credits of study. Supplemental Research Any student in the thesis option M.S. • Academic advisor—selected by student (ME 598, ME 698) }______program may request a switch into the TOTAL 60 credits prior to registering for more than 9 non-thesis option by submitting the credits. For thesis option students, the request in writing to the mechanical engi- In either case, the result of the dissertation academic advisor is the thesis advisor. neering graduate committee. Before acting research must be a completed doctoral • Plan of Study—arranged with academic on such a request, the graduate committee dissertation. Only after admission to can- advisor prior to registering for more will require and seriously consider written didacy may a student receive credit toward than 9 credits. input from the student’s thesis advisor. dissertation research under ME 699. Prior • Thesis committee (thesis option Departmental financial aid given to the to admission to candidacy, a student may only) —formed prior to registering for thesis-option students who are permitted receive up to 18 credits of predissertation more than 18 credits. Consists of the to switch to the non-thesis option will research under ME 698. All full-time thesis advisor and at least two other automatically be withdrawn. Subject to students are required to register for the mechanical engineering faculty members the approval of the mechanical engineer- graduate seminar (ME 591)every semester. from WPI. ing graduate committee, a maximum of 9 This schedule ensures that students are credits of thesis research (ME 599) earned Academic Advising well advised throughout the program, by a student in the thesis option may be Upon admission to the Doctoral Program, and that students in the thesis option are transferred to directed research credit (ME each student is assigned or may select a ­actively engaged in their research at the 598) in the non-thesis option. temporary advisor to arrange an academic early stages of their programs. plan covering the first 9 credits of study. Ph.D. Program This plan should be arranged before the Thesis Defense The course of study leading to the Ph.D. first day of registration. Each student in the thesis option must degree in mechanical engineering requires Prior to registering for any additional cred- defend his/her research during an oral the completion of 90 credits beyond the its, the student must identify a permanent defense, which is administered by an bachelor’s degree, or 60 credits beyond the dissertation advisor who assumes the role examining committee that consists of master’s degree. For students proceeding of academic advisor and with whom a suit- the thesis committee and a representative directly from B.S. degree to Ph.D. degree, able dissertation topic and the remaining of the mechanical engineering gradu- the 90 credits should be distributed as Plan of Study are arranged. Prior to com- ate committee who is not on the thesis follows: pleting 18 credits, the student must form committee. The defense is open to public

Return to Table of Contents Mechanical Engineering 119 a dissertation committee that consists of Dissertation Proposal The Combined Bachelor’s/ the dissertation advisor, at least two other Each student must prepare a brief written Master’s Program mechanical engineering faculty members, proposal and make an oral presentation The Mechanical Engineering Department and at least one member from outside the that demonstrates a sound understanding offers a B.S./Master’s program for current- department. These committee members of the dissertation topic, the relevant litera- ly enrolled WPI undergraduates. Students should be selected because of their abili- ture, the techniques to be employed, the in the B.S./Master’s program may choose ties to assist in the student’s dissertation issues to be addressed, and the work done either the thesis or non-thesis M.S. option. research. on the topic by the student to date. The The department’s rules for these programs proposal must be made within a year of The schedule of advising is as follows: vary somewhat from the Institute’s rules. admission to candidacy. Both the written • Temporary advisor—meets with student For students in the B.S./Master’s program, and oral proposals are presented to the dis- prior to first registration to plan first 9 a minimum of six credits and a maximum sertation committee and a representative credits of study. of twelve credits may be counted toward from the mechanical engineering graduate • Dissertation advisor—selected by both the undergraduate and graduate committee. The prepared portion of the student prior to registering for more degrees. At least six must be from graduate oral presentation should not exceed 30 than 9 credits. course credits (including graduate-level minutes, and up to 90 minutes should be independent study and special topics • Program of study—arranged with allowed for discussion. If the dissertation courses), and none may be from courses Dissertation advisor prior to registering committee and the graduate committee lower than the 4000-level. No extra work for more than 9 credits. representative have concerns about either is required in the 4000-level courses. A • Dissertation committee—formed by the substance of the proposal or the stu- grade of B or better is required for any student prior to registering for more dent’s understanding of the topic, then the course to be counted toward both degrees. than 18 credits. Consists of dissertation student will have one month to prepare advisor, at least two M.E. faculty, and at a second presentation that focuses on the The application for the B.S./Master’s least one outside member. areas of concern. This presentation will last program must include a list of courses that This schedule ensures that students are 15 minutes with an additional 45 min- the applicant proposes to count toward well advised and actively engaged in utes allowed for discussion. Students can both his/her undergraduate and graduate their research at the early stages of their continue their research only if the proposal degrees. In most cases, the list consists of programs. is approved. courses that the applicant will take in the senior year. Admission to Candidacy Dissertation Defense Applications will not be considered if they Admission to candidacy will be granted Each doctoral candidate is required to are submitted prior to the second half of when the student has satisfactorily passed defend the originality, independence and the applicant’s junior year. Ideally, applica- a written exam intended to measure fun- quality of research during an oral dis- tions (including recommendations) should damental ability in three of the following sertation defense that is administered by be completed by the early part of the last five curriculum areas: fluids engineering, an examining committee that consists of term (usually D-term) of the junior year. dynamics and controls, structures and the dissertation committee and a repre- materials, design and manufacturing, and sentative of the mechanical engineering Acceptance into the B.S./Master’s program biomechanical engineering. The three graduate committee who is not on the means that the candidate is qualified for areas are selected by the student. The dissertation committee. The defense is graduate school, and signifies approval of exam is given in January. For students open to public participation and consists the courses listed for credit toward both who enter the program with a bachelor’s of a 45-minute presentation followed by the undergraduate and graduate degrees. degree, the exam must be taken after three a 45-minute open discussion. At least one However, admission is contingent upon semesters if they began their studies in the week prior to the defense, each member of the completion of six graduate credits fall, and after two semesters if they began the examining committee must receive a (from the submitted list) with grades of B in the spring. For students who enter the copy of the dissertation. At the same time, or better in each. If grades of C or lower program with a master’s degree, the exam an additional copy must be made avail- are obtained in any other listed courses, must be taken after one semester if they able for members of the WPI community then they are not counted toward the began in the fall, and after two semesters wishing to read the dissertation prior to graduate degree, but the applicant is still if they began in the spring. Students in the defense, and public notification of the admitted to the program. the M.S. program who plan to apply for defense must be given by the mechani- Students in the B.S./Master’s program who fall admission to the Ph.D. program are cal engineering graduate secretary. The choose the thesis M.S. option are encour- strongly advised to take the candidacy examining committee will determine the aged to pick a thesis area of research that is exam in January before that fall. The de- acceptability of the student’s dissertation closely related to the subject of their major tails of the examination procedure can be and oral performance. The dissertation qualifying project. Those students in the obtained from the mechanical engineering advisor will determine the student’s grade. B.S./Master’s program who complete their graduate committee. B.S. degrees in May and choose the thesis option are encouraged to begin their thesis research during the summer immediately following graduation.

120 Mechanical Engineering Return to Table of Contents A detailed written description of the B.S./ naces. The laboratories are provided with Ceramic and Powder Processing Master’s program in mechanical engineer- modern instrumentation for research and Laboratory ing can be obtained from the mechanical education in the field of materials science, This laboratory and the one below cover a engineering graduate secretary. such as mechanical properties facilities, suite of five rooms that total almost 2,000 metallographic equipment, thermal analy- sq. ft. between WB337-342 of Washburn Mechanical Engineering ses (DTA and TGA), optical and electron Shops. The lab is equipped with a variety Laboratories and Centers microscopy facilities, and instrumentation of powder preparation, processing and for rheological characterization of metallic characterization equipment, as well as The Mechanical Engineering Depart- alloys in the semi-solid condition. Several equipment for green body consolidation ment provides a multidisciplinary research workstations running commercial model- and sintering. Equipment includes roller and education environment combining ing packages are also available. These mills, mixers, a low temperature drying elements of mechanical engineering, include Procast and Magma for simulation oven, freeze dryer, cold press, various manufacturing engineering and materi- of casting processes and Thermocalc®, a sintering furnaces capable of up to 1700C als science. The facilities are housed in thermodynamic simulation software wide- in air and controlled atmospheres, a dif- the Higgins Laboratories and Washburn ly used for undergraduate and graduate ferential thermal analyzer, X-ray sedigraph, Shops. education in the field of materials science. and equipment for electrical property and At ACRC, WPI undergraduate students density measurements. Aerodynamics Test Facility are offered unique learning opportunities The laboratory houses a low-speed, closed- through participation in actual research CNC Laboratory return wind tunnel, with a test-section of activities under supervision of graduate The CNC laboratory is located in the 2' x 2' x 8'. The tunnel speed is continu- students and research staff members. Washburn Shops Room 108 and covers ously variable up to 180 ft/s. The tempera- 3,140 sq. ft. The focus of the CNC labs is ture in the tunnel can be controlled via Center for Holographic Studies and to support the mission of WPI, by creat- a controller and a heat exchanger in the Laser micro-mechaTronics ing, discovering, and conveying knowledge settling chamber. The tunnel is equipped The laboratories of CHSLT cover over at the frontiers of inquiry in CNC ma- with a two-component dynamometer. 2,800 sq. ft and are completely equipped chining and education, as well as linking Aerodynamic flows are studied in this and fully operational for educational and that new knowledge to applications; help laboratory with the aid of traditional pres- research activities. These activities range students achieve self sufficiency in the use sure, temperature, and velocity sensors, as from fundamental studies of laser light of CNC tools and technologies, so they well as advanced optical instrumentation. interaction with materials to sophisticated can conceive, design, and create their own applications in metrology. Research at the CNC machined parts for their projects. Biomechanics/Rehabilitation CHSLT is externally funded in areas relat- The vision of the CNC labs is to be the Engineering Laboratories ing to electronic packaging, high density premier laboratory for CNC engineer- The Biomechanics and Rehabilitation separable electronic interconnections ing education and research (applied and Engineering Laboratories (HL 124, 127, for high speed digital applications, radar fundamental) in the world. Originally the 129) provide 2000 sq. ft. of modern technology, microelectronics, microme- Haas machines included a VF3, a VFOE laboratory space that supports courses with chanics, submarine technology, jet engine and the SL20, that were entrusted to WPI a focus on the design of assistive devices to technology, MEMS, nanotechnology and in 2001 were swapped out in July of 2004. aid persons with disabilities, biomechanics picotechnology, to name a few. The labora- They were again replaced in the Fall of and biofluids Major Qualifying Projects tories are furnished with the state-of-the- 2007 with two new vertical machining (MQPs) and graduate student research. art equipment. This equipment includes centers and a new lathe: VF4, and VF2SS, The laboratories also house the offices of several systems containing He-Ne , both with 5 axis capabilities, and a TL15 the WPI Assistive Technology Resource Ar-ion lasers, Nd:YAG lasers, nanosecond with a sub spindle. Also included in the Center and the WPI EPICS program (En- high energy pulsed laser, and diode lasers, CNC Laboratory are a DoAll vertical knee gineering projects in Community Service). as well as supporting instrumentation sys- mill, DoAll 13 manual lathe, Southbend Major equipment includes a two-axis MTS tems. In addition, the Nano-Indentation tool room lathe, ordinary shop equipment Model 858 Mini Bionex testing machine, (NIN) system is being developed for stud- and tooling (drill press, arbor press, stand a benchtop tissue testing machine, a force ies of mechanical properties of materials in grinder, etc.), along with a Starrett DCC plate and a hot wire anemometry system. sub-micron geometries. The strengths of CMM, Starrett Manual CMM, O.S. the CHSLT lie in a comprehensive utiliza- Casting Laboratory Walker Machining Magnet and a Hahn tion of laser technology, optics, computa- The Advanced Casting Research Center of Engineering force-feedback grinder. tional methods, mechanical engineering, MPI (WB 009) is a laboratory dedicated The machine tools facilitate the realiza- materials science and engineering, and to research and development of advanced tion, i.e. fabrication, of parts that students computer data acquisition and process- casting processes and to the improvement have designed on computers. The machine ing. Building off of these strengths, greatly of currently practiced casting processes. tools are important for supporting WPI’s diversified projects in a number of areas of The ACRC research facilities covers 1,637 project based-education. The machine current interest are being conducted using sq. ft. and include a casting laboratory tools are also be used in manufacturing the Center’s own unique and innovative with induction and resistance melting fur- engineering research, as well as to produce methods. naces, besides specialized heat treating fur- apparatus to support research efforts in other fields.

Return to Table of Contents Mechanical Engineering 121 Computational Fluid and and serial interface connector. This system Discovery Classroom and Laboratory Plasmadynamics Laboratory is used to test cooperative coverage control The Discovery Classroom (HL 218) is an CFPL is a modern computational facility algorithms developed by Prof. Hussein’s educational facility unique to WPI. In this housed in HL236. It is used for gradu- research group. 1,000 plus sq. ft. facility a state-of-the-art ate research and undergraduate projects The CaN-MuVe laboratory also has the multimedia classroom is combined with an in computational fluids, gas and plasma following general purpose items: ATX adjoining experimental laboratory to cre- dynamics. The CFPL includes worksta- power supply, a Quanser Q4 hardware in ate an environment which emphasizes an tions, peripherals and data storage devices. the loop board and a WinCon 5.0 real- integrated approach to engineering educa- CFPL has also a Linux cluster located in time rapid control prototyping software. tion. Classroom exercises, which combine HL231, a specially designed computer analytical, computational, and experi- facility. CFPL has access to Direct Simula- Design Studio mental approaches in solving engineering tion Monte Carlo, Particle-in-Cell, fluid The Higgins Design Studio (HL 234) and problems, are made possible through this dynamics, and MHD codes as well as the Computer Classroom (HL 230) are both facility. For example, experiments can be visualization and data reduction software. part of the Keck Design Center on the set-up in a small portable wind tunnel in second floor of Higgins Laboratories. the Discovery Classroom Laboratory. The Control and Navigation of Lecture/laboratories in a variety of mechani- wind tunnel is then easily moved into the Multi-Vehicles Laboratory cal design and manufacturing courses are multi-media classroom for direct use in The CaN-MuVe Laboratory, a 400 square conducted in these labs. The labs are also engineering lectures. Quantitative data feet facility housed in HL312, focuses on available to students for general-purpose from the wind tunnel experiments are im- the construction, testing, and development computational work on projects and course- mediately compared in-class to predictions of autonomous multi-vehicle systems for ­work when not being used for instruction. from aerodynamic-based software, and exploration missions. Exploration includes to concurrently developed theory from the navigation and acoustic imaging of The 1600 sq. ft. Higgins Design Studio lectures. The wind tunnel can then moved underwater environments using under- contains nineteen (19) high-end Linux back into the Discovery Classroom Labo- water vehicles, surface vessels, and ground workstations (Dell Precision, 2 Duo core ratory for follow-up, hands-on laboratory robots. CPUs, 4GB RAM, 24” Monitor) running exercises by the students. Other fluid software for mechanical design including dynamic and heat transfer apparatus such The main project now underway in parametric solid modeling (Pro/Engineer, as a hydrodynamic bench, a laminar flow the laboratory is the construction of an Unigraphics, Ideas), structural, thermal, table, and heat transfer experiments (radial autonomous underwater vehicle. All major fluid and dynamic analysis (ANSYS, and axial conduction, forced convection, vehicle electronics are available. These Abaqus, Nastran, Patran, Fluent, Comsol) tube-in-tube heat exchangers, and radia- include a PC104-based computer core. It and general purpose applications (­Tecplot,­ tion apparatus) are also housed in the labo- was chosen to handle the main processing Mathematica, MatLab, Maple). The ratory, and used in a similar manner. The requirements of the vehicle. The particular Design Studio is connected to the campus American Society of Engineers (ASME) main board chosen is the Cheetah (made network to allow for design collaboration has awarded WPI a national Curriculum by VersaLogic), which is a 1.6 GHz Intel through teleconferencing and exchange Innovation Award – Honorable Mention Pentium M equipped module that is 3.6” of design models to design partners and in 2001 for this approach. by 3.8”. This microcomputer contains 1 manufacturing facilities. Auxiliary equip- GB of RAM, and 8GB solid state hard ment includes two laser printers and and 2 Fluid and Plasmadynamics Laboratory disk as well as a 60 GB spinning drive. E-size color printer/plotter. In 2007-2008, The FPL is located in HL314 and covers Windows XP Embedded will be run on the Design Studio supported ES3323 500 sq. ft. It consists of several vacuum the processor. An analogue & digital Advanced CAD (80-90 students) and chambers and specialized test facilities for input/output module for the PC104 bus is ME3820 Computer-Aided Manufacturing the investigation of onboard propulsion, also available. (50-60 students). In addition, approxi- electrospray sources (for both propulsion A 12 A brushless motor and an ElectriFly mately 50 MQP teams and many Masters and nano-fabrication applications), plume/ V-pitch propeller have been purchased and PHD students utilized the lab. The spacecraft interactions and microfluid- for testing. Eight Groupner bow thrusters lab is also the primary location for the new ics research. The laboratory includes an are also available for testing. Currently, a program in Scientific and Engineering 18-inch diameter, 30-inch tall stainless student group is working on the assembly software Applications training program. steel vacuum chamber equipped with a and manufacturing of the thruster system, The 1440 sq. ft. Computer Classroom 6-inch diffusion pump backed by a 17 cfm and the vehicle structure and body. The contains forty (40) Windows XPDell Op- mechanical pump. The system is capable laboratory is equipped with a testing water tiplex 745 workstations (Intel E6300 Dual of an ultimate pressure in the low 10-6 tank, and the research group has permis- core CPU, 2GB of RAM, 20” monitor)) Torr range. This chamber is used primarily sions to use WPI’s swimming pool for and two laser printers. In addition to all of for study of electrospray sources. testing purposes. the software available on the WPI campus For microfluidics research, FPL includes The lab is also equipped with two iRobot network, locally installed software includes a calibrated flow system for delivery of Create systems (http://www.irobot.com/us/) Solidworks, AuotCAD, Matlab, Maple, liquid flowrates in the range of 75 – 250 that include the iRobots, batteries, char- Mathcad, TK Solver, Thermal Analysis micrograms/sec for studies of two phase gers, docks, command modules, virtual software and VisualStudio.Net. flows in microchannels. Imaging of walls, BAMs, gumstix, wifistix, robostix

122 Mechanical Engineering Return to Table of Contents these flows is accomplished with a high- Real-Time Control Software along with ing source detection schemes as applied to resolution monochrome progressive scan their dedicated PCs. To validate real-time biochemical source detection and contain- Pulnix-1325 camera with computer based vibration control experiments the ISSM ment, and intrusion detection in enclosed image-capture and processing software. lab has a TMC® active vibration isolation spaces. Added to these mobile robots, is FPL includes a variety of tools and special- table (TMC® model 63-563), four single- an autonomous battery-powered helicop- ized instrumentation including oscillo- channel ACX®-EL1224 high voltage/ ter equipped with its own IMU unit and scopes, precision source meter, electrom- low amps power amplifiers, one double- has the ability to communicate with the eter and digital multimeters. Data from channel Krohn-hite® (model 7602M) iRobot® mobile sensor network in order to these instruments is collected and stored power amplifier, one six-channel rack create a heterogeneous sensor network. on computer using a LabView based data mounted PCB® (model 790A06) power acquisition system. amplifier for piezoceramic patch actuation Mechanical Aerospace Engineering and an HP dynamic signal analyzer (model Controls Laboratory Fluid Dynamics Laboratory 35665A). Five BK precision® (model The MAEC lab is located in an 880 sq. ft. This 400 sq. ft. laboratory is housed in 1761) power supplies and a Kepco® power facility in HL 248 and serves the experi- HL 311. It is used for graduate research supply (model ATE 55-10DM) are avail- mental component of the controls and and educational activities in fluid dynam- able to provide a range of power supply re- advanced dynamics courses. It has four sta- ics. It houses a low speed, low turbulence quirements, and five BK precision® (model tions each equipped with a dSPACE ACE wind tunnel facility with a one-foot square 5492) digital multimeters are available for 1104 kit with DS1104 R&D Controller test section which is used for experiments testing of electronic components. Board, an Instek® function generator on low Reynolds number aerodynamics (model CFG-8219A), a Comdyna (GP-6) Acceleration, velocity and strain measure- related to biologically inspired flight, and analog computer and a Tektronix (model ments, are made possible via accelero- fluid-structure interaction. These systems TDS2012) digital storage oscilloscope. meters. ISSM has five miniature (0.5g) are of practical importance in many aero- ceramic shear ICP accelerometers (PCB® and hydrodynamic systems, such as mciro- Mechanical Testing Laboratory model U352C22), a four-channel PCB® air vehicles and flow-induced vibration of The 1,497 sq. ft. Mechanical Testing signal conditioner (model 442C04) with flexible cables Standard equipment such as Laboratory (WB 113) has three state- gain 1x, 10x, 100x, and one PCB® dual- vibration shakers, hot-wire anemometry of-the art Instron materials test systems. mode vibration amplifier (velocity or systems, spectral analyzers, digital oscil- They are Instron 8502, Instron 8511, and position) single channel (model 443B01). loscopes and data acquisition systems are Instron 5500 with an Instron environmen- A PCB® ICP microphone is also available also used in the laboratory. tal chamber. The three systems can be used for pressure measurements. to evaluate the mechanical properties and Heat Treating and Furnace Laboratory For calibration and signal conditioning, performance of metals, plastics, compos- This laboratory (WB 345) is equipped ISSM has a Krohn-hite® Low-Pass/High- ites, textiles, ceramics, rubber, biomedical, with a variety of furnaces for the heat Pass Butterworth/Bessel 4-Channel Filter and adhesives. treatment of metals and ceramics. In addi- (model 3364), a PCB® handheld shaker The two 8500 series servo-hydraulic tion, the CHTE quenching laboratory is for accelerometer calibration, a 4-channel testing systems are designed for use in housed in this space and is equipped with PCB® line-powered sensor signal condi- dynamic/fatigue testing of a wide range a variety of fully instrumented quench tioner with gain 1x,10x and 100x, one of materials and components. They can probes and data acquisition systems. PCB® modally tuned Impact Hammer kit apply loads to the specimen in the range of for vibration testing, and one dual-mode up to +/- 250 kN. Test specimens can be Intelligent Systems, Structures and PCB® vibration amplifier (velocity or posi- cycled from very low rates to frequencies Machines Laboratory tion) single-channel (model 443B101). In as high as 200 Hz or more. Displacement The ISSM is a 400 sq. ft. facility housed in addition, ISSM has an Agilent® 20Mhz amplitudes range from a few micro-meters HL312, has state-of-the art data acquisi- Function/Arbitrary waveform generator to over 250 mm. Specifically, the Fast- tion and control capabilities for experi- (model 33220A) and dedicated worksta- TrackTM 8800™ Digital Controller with mental verification of control algorithms as tions for control design and implemen- multi-axis fatigue testing capabilities and applied to autonomous systems, intelligent tation accessing Matlab® ’s Real-Time high performance HS488 GPIB interface, machines and smart structures . Applica- Workshop, Optimization, Linear Matrix offers an expandable architecture ideal tions include structural, structural-acous- Inequalities and Robust Control toolboxes. for the most demanding applications. tic, fluid-structure, thermal, thermoacous- In addition, the ISSM lab has seven Additionally, high speed, digital elec- tic and mechatronics systems as applied in iRobot® Create programmable robots tronics provide the tight, continuously aerospace, mechanical, chemical and civil equipped each with a bluetooth adapter self-correcting action required to assure the engineering. module (BAM) for complete wireless controlled parameter conforms precisely to Equipment include a dSPACE® ACE- control and their own advanced power the desired test program. 1103 kit with DS1103 PPC Controller system batteries. A bluetooth USB radio The Instron 5500 testing system provides Board (8 analog outputs, 20 analog inputs, provide remote communication with the comprehensive, versatile solutions for 6 encoder inputs), a dSPACE® ACE kit ® iRobot Create programmable robot and the broadest range of materials testing 1102 and two QUANSER® Hardware- the BAM. This wireless mobile sensor in-The-loop Board with WinCon 4.1 network is used for verification of mov-

Return to Table of Contents Mechanical Engineering 123 requirements. It features advanced digital Microflow Laboratory Optical and Electron Metallography electronics, combined with robust load This 400 sq. ft. laboratory is housed in Laboratories frames and drive systems, to provide high HL311. It consists of a vacuum chamber The Materials Characterization Labora- accuracy and reliable performance. The and specialized equipment for the inves- tory (MCL) includes 327 sq. ft. housed in system utilizes important safety features tigation of gaseous and plasma micro- HL047 offers a range of analytical tech- and innovative test and control software to flows, with application to microsensors, niques in the area of electron microscopy make even the most complex testing ap- microdevices, and micropropulsion. The (JEOL 7000F LV and JEOL 840 scanning plications easy to set up and operate. laboratory includes an 18-inch diameter, electron microscopes, and JEOL 100 CXII The Instron environmental chamber 30-inch tall stainless steel vacuum cham- transmission electron microscope), x-ray provides advanced high/low temperature ber. The MFL includes a variety of tools diffraction (GE-XRD-5 diffractometer), and environmental systems. It features and specialized instrumentation includ- and optical microscopy (conventional and special window design to ensure optimal ing oscilloscopes, precision source meter, inverted), physical property determination performance from Instron’s optical exten- electrometer and digital multimeters. (hardness and micro indentation hard- someters, and covers a temperature range ness), and materials processing (specimen Nanofabrication and from -150 to 600°C (-240 to 1110°F). It preparation, heat treatment, metal evapo- is designed for use in both static and dy- Nanomanufacturing Laboratory ration and sputtering). This new laboratory located in the Wash- namic testing of a wide range of materials The JEOL-7000F thermal field-emission burn Shops (WB337) is equipped with and components including plastics, metals, gun SEM (HL047) has a unique in-the- facilities for advanced research in the areas elastomers, paper, textiles and composites. lens TFEG design, enabling high probe of bottom-up nanofabrication through current at lower voltage in a small spot uniform self-assembly, nano-bioscience, MEMS Fabrication Laboratory size. It is equipped with an Oxford Energy and characterization of nanomaterials and The MEMS Fabrication Laboratory is 250 Energy Dispersive X-ray Microanaly- biomaterials. located on the ground floor in the Higgins sis System with Analytical Drift Detector. Laboratory. The 558 sq. ft. laboratory is furnished The high probe current and the high x-ray This state-of-the-art process facility has with the following equipment: Anod- detection efficiency of the Analytical Drift been developed as a center of excellence in ization, electrodeposition, electroless Detector make the routine analytical work device technologies for silicon and various deposition workstations, a chemical vapor much faster. The JEOL-840 (WB245) is compound semiconductor materials. The deposition system, Fisher Scientific Iso- a general purpose high-performance, low facility will cover education and research in temp tissue culture incubator, UV-visible cost scanning electron microscope with areas of microelectronics, optoelectronics, spectrophotometer, BAS electrochemical excellent Secondary Electron Imaging and integrated sensors, and MEMS technology workstation, Millipore filtration system, Backscattered Electron Imaging resolu- based devices. Standard equipment to synthesize and tion. The specimen chamber can accom- process nanomaterials and biomaterials modate a specimen of up to 100 mm in The MEMS Fabrication Laboratory is a such as a chemical fume hood, a water pu- diameter. The 840 SEM is equipped with Class 100 facility with approximately 500 rification system, an analytical balance, a Kevex energy dispersive x-ray spectroscopy square feet of floor space, including the micro centrifuge, low temperature storage, system, making it suitable for microstruc- gowning area. It is equipped with instru- water baths, stirring hotplates, a pH meter, tural and chemical analysis of advanced mentations to support photolithography, a ultrasonic cleaner, and a programmable materials. thermal deposition and oxidation, wet heavy duty muffle furnace. chemistry, metrology, and wafer bonding. The JEOL-100CXII (WB248) is a con- The MEMS Fabrication Laboratory has, The research carried out in the laboratory ventional TEM, optimized for diffraction in place, protocols for handling a broad includes; Fabrication of highly-ordered contrast imaging and electron diffrac- range of chemicals and gases. nanomaterials, such as metal nanowires, tion studies. It operates at energy up to metal and ceramic nanodots, carbon nano- 100kV. A double tilt holder is available A separate, but contiguous, research tubes, protein nanotubes, and organic- with +-60 degrees of X tilt and +-36 de- laboratory has characterization facilities ceramic nanocomposites; Investigation of grees of Y tilt. The TEM is used for micro- that include microscopy, profilometry, the cell-nanostructured substrata interac- structural and crystallographic studies of a and optoelectronic holography (OEH). tions to understand how nanostructured wide variety of materials including metal Further characterization facilities are avail- extracellular matrix molecules regulate cell alloys, polymers, nanostructured materials, able through the laboratories using SEM, growth and differentiation; Study of the and biomaterials. AFM, and X-Ray Diffraction that provide mechanical, thermal, electrical and optical The GE-XRD-5 diffractometer (WB231) necessary metrology capabilities for the properties of uniform and complex nano- is a polycrystalline diffraction system, devices that are fabricated. materials for novel applications. which can be used for crystal structure de- The MEMS Fabrication Laboratory is termination, precise lattice parameter mea- one of the most secure laboratories on surements, phase diagram determination, campus and has the capability to serve a determination of crystalline size and strain, diverse community of users and research quantitative analysis of powder mixtures, disciplines.

124 Mechanical Engineering Return to Table of Contents and residual stress analysis. A variety of Robotics Laboratory is named, are run The cornerstone of this facility is a 50 in software, including background modeling, primarily during the laboratory sessions diameter, 72 in long stainless steel vacuum peak searching, curve fitting et al and x-ray of the Industrial Robotics course and chamber which will enable the creation tube targets are available to provide a wide graduate researchers. In addition to a small of a vacuum environment for use in the x-ray analysis capability. manual milling area, the two largest CNC characterization of electric and chemical milling machines in the Haas Technical thruster performance, investigation of A suite of optical microscopes (WB245, Center are housed in the Robotics Labora- neutral and ionized gas plume expansion 342) are available for microstructural tory. Students working in groups and in a vacuum, and testing of avionics for characterization needs, which include one under the supervision of the lab man- nanosatellites designed to operate in a Nikon EPIPHOT inverted microscope ager regularly perform complex project vacuum environment. with a Nikon Digital Sight DS-U1 digital machine work using both the manual and image collecting system, two aus JENA The pumping system for the VTF includes CNC machine tools. inverted microscopes, three Nikon con- a rotary mechanical pump, positive ventional optical microscopes, one Leitz Industrial Robots: The robots in the labo- displacement blower combination capable Metallux II conventical microscope, and ratory include: two Fanuc A510b SCARA of providing substantial pumping speed one Unitron ME-1510 microscope. robots with RH controls, two Adept One (>560 liters/sec ) at low vacuum (10-2 - SCARA robots with VALII controls, one 10-3 Torr). This pump pair can be used Three Rockwell hardness testers, one Puma 761 Clean Room edition six axis for tests requiring relatively high mass Shimadzu HMV-2000 digital microin- jointed robot with a Unimate controller, flow rates, such as plume measurements dentation hardness tester, and a Buehler and one Asea IRB60. on micro-chemical thrusters. For tests of MMT-3 digital microindentation hardness electric thrusters where lower pressures tester (WB342) are available for hardness Surface Metrology Laboratory (higher vacuum) are required, the mechan- evaulaton of materials from soft Al alloys This laboratory is located in WB243 and ical pump would be used initially to pump to hard steel and ceramics. covers 153 sq. ft. The lab is dedicated the system down to the milli-Torr pressure A full set of specimen preparation tools to advancing the understanding of the range. Pumping would then transition to are available. These include cutting, formation, behavior, measurement and a 20” cryopump which can provide up to slicing, mounting, grinding and polish- analysis of surface roughness. The lab has 10,000 liters/s (on N2) at pressures less ing. The available machines including pioneered technological development and than 10-6 Torr. one Buehler 12”-wheel cut-off machine, industrial applications of scale-sensitive two Mark V CS600 cutters(WB253), fractal analyses, a method invented and Course Descriptions two Buehler Isomet 11-1180 low speed patented by Prof. Brown and co-workers. All courses are 3 credits unless otherwise noted. saw(WB341), two Buehler Simplimet II The lab has studied a broad range of mounting presses(WB253), one Buehler surfaces including hard drives, cutting General: EcometIV automatic grinder-polisher, tools, skin, teeth, food, rocks, skis, pills, ME 5000. Applied Analytical Methods in two Buehler Metaserv 2000 grinder- pavements, tires, bullets, and industrial Engineering polishers, three Ecomet 5 two-speed diamonds. The lab has developed ad- (2 credits) grinder-polishers, 3 Century E-plus vanced techniques for differentiating The emphasis of this course is on the modeling of grinder-polisher, three Buehler Vibromet surfaces based on texture measurements physical phenomena encountered in typical engi- neering problems, and on interpreting solutions I polishers, and one Buehler Electromet 4 and for finding the scales at which the dif- in terms of the governing physics. In this manner, polisher-etcher(WB341). ferentiation can be made. the course will expose students to a range of Graduate and students typically work techniques that are useful to practicing engineers Polymer Engineering Laboratory and researchers. Physical examples will be drawn together on a variety of projects. Recent The equipment include Perkin Elmer from fluid mechanics, dynamics, and structural projects include characterizing scratches on Thermal Analysis systems Model DSC4, mechanics. The course will introduce analytical teeth supported by the NSF, surface of pill DSC7, DTA1400, and TGA7; single techniques as they are required to study such phe- compacts supported by Pfizer, fractog- nomena. Depending on the examples chosen, the screw tabletop extruder, injection molding raphy of chocolate, and the structure of techniques covered may include partial differential facilities, polymer synthesis apparatuses, ground ski bases. Current projects include equations, power series, Fourier series, Fourier oil bath furnaces, heat treating ovens, and the measurement of paper, granite, skin, integrals, Laplace transform methods, Green’s foam processing and testing devices. Functions, Sturm-Liouville theory, linear algebra, teeth, works of art, and grinding wheels, and calculus of variations. (Prerequisites: differen- Robotics Laboratory and the determination of uncertainty, and tial equations at the undergraduate level.) Students The Robotics Laboratory, a 1,915 sq. noise control and management in surface cannot receive credit for this course if they have ft. facility, is located on the first floor measurements. taken either the Special Topics (ME 593A) version of the same course or ME 500. of the Washburn Building (WB107). It Vacuum Test Facility (VTF) is equipped with a variety of industrial Also located in the Aerospace Labora- robots, machine tools and other equip- tory is the Vacuum Test Facility (VTF). ment. The industrial robots, for which the The VTF is designed to support ongoing research and educational activities requir- ing a controlled vacuum environment.

Return to Table of Contents Mechanical Engineering 125 ME 5001. Applied Numerical Methods in methods. Parallel computing. (Prerequisite: Fluid ME 611. Turbulence Engineering dynamics and introductory course in numerical (3 credits) (2 credits) methods.) Students cannot receive credit for this Material to be covered: introduction and motiva- A study of important numerical and computa- course if they have taken the Special Topics (ME tion, statistical techniques for analysis, mean flow tional methods for solving engineering science 593P) version of the same course or ME612. dynamics (Reynolds decomposition), Kol- problems. The course will include methods for ME 5104. Turbomachinery mogorov’s theory, instrumentation, classical tur- solving linear and nonlinear equations, interpola- bulent flows—shear layers, jets, wakes, boundary (2 credits) tion strategies, evaluating integrals, and solving layers and pipe flow. (Prerequisites: Fundamentals This course is an introduction to the fluid me- ordinary and partial differential equations. Finite of mechanics and thermodynamics, graduate chanics and thermodynamics of turbomachinery difference methods will be developed in full for level course in fluid mechanics and knowledge of for propulsion and power generation applica- the solution of partial differential equations. The advanced mathematics.) tions. Axial and centrifugal compressors will be course materials emphasize the systematic genera- discussed as well as axial and radial flow turbines. tion of numerical methods for elliptic, parabolic, Analysis of the mean line flow in compressor and Dynamics and Controls: and hyperbolic problems, and the analysis of their turbine blade rows and stages will be discussed. ME 501/RBE 501. stability, accuracy, and convergence properties. The blade-to-blade flow model will be presented (3 credits) The student will be required to write and run and axisymmetric flow theory introduced. Three- Foundations and principles of robotic manipula- computer programs. Students cannot receive dimensional flow, i.e. secondary flows, will also be tion. Topics include computational models of credit for this course if they have taken the Special discussed. Students cannot receive credit for this objects and motion, the mechanics of robotic Topics (ME 593M) version of the same course or course if they have taken the Special Topics (ME manipulators, the structure of manipulator control ME 515. 593H) version of the same course. systems, planning and programming of robot ac- tions. The focus of this class is on the kinematics Fluids Engineering: ME 5105. Renewable Energy and programming of robotic mechanisms. Im- ME 5101. Advanced Fluid Dynamics (2 credits) portant topics also include the dynamics, control, (2 credits) The course provides an introduction to renewable sensor and effector design, and automatic plan- An introduction to graduate level fluid dynamics. energy, outlining the challenges in meeting the ning methods for robots. The fundamental tech- Topics covered include: concept of continuum; energy needs of humanity and exploring possible niques apply to arms, mobile robots, active sensor the conservation equations for systems and solutions in some detail. Specific topics include: platforms, and all other computer-controlled control volumes; the Navier-Stokes equations; use of energy and the correlation of energy use kinematic linkages. The primary applications unidirectional steady and transient flows; vorticity with the prosperity of nations; historical energy include robotic arms and mobile robots, and lab dynamics and rotating flows; laminar boundary usage and future energy needs; engineering projects would involve programming of represen- layers; separation; potential flows; introduction to economics; electricity generation from the wind; tative robots. An end-of-term team project would turbulence; Stokes flow; lubrication flow; surface wave/ocean energy, geo-thermal and solar-thermal allow students to program robots to participate tension and surface driven flows. Students cannot energy; overview of fuel cells, biofuels, nuclear in challenges or competitions. (Prerequisite: RBE receive credit for this course if they have taken energy, and solar-photovoltaic systems and their 500 or equivalent.) the Special Topics (ME 593F) version of the same role and prospects; distribution of energy and the course or ME 511. energy infrastructure; energy for transportation; ME 5200. Mechanical Vibrations energy storage. Pre-requisites; ES3001, ES3004 or (2 credits) ME 5102. Advanced Gas Dynamics equivalents. Students cannot receive credit for this The course provides fundamentals for vibration (2 credits) course if they have taken the Special Topics (ME analysis of linear discrete and continuous dynamic An introduction to kinetic theory of gases and its 593R) version of the same course. systems, A vibrating system is first modeled application to equilibrium flows and flows with mathematically as an initial value problem (IVP) chemical, vibrational and translational nonequi- ME 513. Thermodynamics or a boundary-initial value problem (BIVP) by the librium. Topics in kinetic theory also include the (3 credits) Newton-D’Alembert method and/or the Lagrange Boltzmann Equation and its relation to the con- Review of the zeroth, first and second laws of energy approach and then solved for various types tinuum equations of gas dynamics. A major focus thermodynamics and systems control volume. of system. Explicit solutions for dynamic response of the course is exploring how results for equilib- Applications of the laws to heat engines and their of a linear single-degree-of-freedom (SDOF) sys- rium flow of a perfect gas (e.g. flows in nozzles, implications regarding the properties of materials. tem, both damped and undamped, is derived for normal and oblique shocks, expansion waves) are Equations of state and introduction to chemical free-vibration caused by the initial conditions and modified for an imperfect gas with nonequilib- thermodynamics. forced vibration caused by different excitations. rium. The models of flow with nonequilibrium ME 516. Heat Transfer Modal analysis is presented to solve for vibra- are then applied to the study of different flows of tion response of both multi-degree-of-freedom (3 credits) engineering interest including hypersonic flows (MDOF) systems and continuous systems with Review of governing differential equations and (e.g. re-entry vehicles), propagating shock waves distributed parameters. As the basis of modal boundary conditions for heat transfer analysis. (explosions), and chemically reacting flows. Stu- analysis, the natural frequencies and vibration Multidimensional and unsteady conduction, in- dents cannot receive credit for this course if they modes of a linear dynamic system are obtained cluding effects of variable material properties. An- have taken the Special Topics (ME 593G) version in advance by solving an associated generalized alytical and numerical solution methods. Forced of the same course or ME 512. eigenvalue problem and the orthogonal proper- and free convection with laminar and turbulent ties of the vibration modes with respect to the flow in internal and external flows. Characteristics ME 5103. Computational Fluid Dynamics stiffness and mass matrices are strictly proved. of radiant energy spectra and radiative properties (2 credits) Computational methods for vibration analysis are of surfaces. Radiative heat transfer in absorbing Computational methods for incompressible and introduced. Applications include but are not lim- and emitting media. Systems with combined compressible viscous flows. Navier Stokes equa- ited to cushion design of falling packages, vehicles conduction, convection and radiation. Conden- tions in general coordinates and grid generation traveling on a rough surface, multi-story building sation, evaporation, and boiling phenomena. techniques. Finite volume techniques including subjected to seismic and wind loading, and vibra- (Prerequisite: Background in thermodynamics, discretization, stability analysis, artificial viscosity, tion analysis of bridges subjected to traffic loading. fluid dynamics, ordinary and partial differential explicit and implicit methods, flux-vector split- Students cannot receive credit for this course if equations, and basic undergraduate physics.) ting, Monotonic advection schemes and multigrid they have taken the Special Topics (ME 593V) version of the same course or ME522.

126 Mechanical Engineering Return to Table of Contents ME 5202. Advanced Dynamics mobile sensor networks, swarms, heterogeneous ME 621. Dynamics and Signal Analysis (2 credits) systems). Topics may include, but are not limited (3 credits) Basic concepts and general principles of classical to, multi-robot control and connectivity, path A laboratory-based course which applies Fourier kinematics and dynamics of particles, systems of planning and localization, sensor fusion and robot and cepstral signal analysis techniques to me- particles and rigid bodies are presented with appli- informatics, task-level control, and robot software chanical engineering problems. The theory and cation to engineering problems with complicated system design and implementation. These topics application of the Fourier series, Fast Fourier three-dimensional kinematics and dynamics. Deri- will be pursued through independent reading, Transform (FFT) and the cepstrum to the analysis vation of the governing equations of motion using class discussion, and a course project. The course of mechanical and acoustical systems is presented. Principle of Virtual Work and Lagrange equations will culminate in a group project focusing on a Digital sampling theory, windowing, aliasing, is described together with the direct Newton ap- collaborative/cooperative multi-robot system. The filtering, noise averaging and deconvolution are proach. Applications include: swings-effect and its project may be completed through simulation discussed. Limitations of and errors in imple- use in engineering, illustrating in particular limit or hands-on experience with available robotic mentation of these techniques are demonstrated. cycles and their stability and reversed-swings con- platforms. Groups will present their work and Students will perform weekly experiments in the trol of vibrations of pendulum; various examples complete two professional-quality papers in IEEE Structural Dynamics and Vibration Laboratory, of gyroscopic effects; and especially introductory format. (Prerequisites: Linear algebra, differential which reinforce the theories presented in lectures. rotordynamics including transverse vibrations equations, linear systems, controls, and mature Application will include structures, acoustics, (whirling) and potential instability of rotating programming skills, or consent of the instructor.) rotating machinery and cams. shafts. Students cannot receive credit for this Students cannot receive credit for this course if course if they have taken the Special Topics (ME they have taken the Special Topics (ME 593S) Structures and Materials: version of the same course. 593D) version of the same course or ME 527. ME 5303/CE 5303. Applied Finite Element ME 523. Applied Linear Control ME 5205/RBE 580. Biomedical Robotics Methods in Engineering (3 credits) (2 credits) (2 credits) Modeling of complex systems used in various areas This course will provide an overview of a multi- This course is devoted to the numerical solution of engineering. Analytical description of dynamic tude of biomedical applications of robotics. Ap- of partial differential equations encountered in physical systems, time and frequency domain plications covered include: image-guided surgery, engineering sciences. Finite element methods are representations. System characteristics such as percutaneous therapy, localization, robot-assisted introduced and developed in a logical progres- controllability, observability and stability. Design surgery, simulation and augmented reality, labora- sion of complexity. Topics covered include matrix of feedback controllers using state-space methods tory and operating room automation, robotic structural analysis variation form of differential including pole placement and optimal control. rehabilitation, and socially assistive robots. Specific equations, Ritz and weighted residual approxima- State observers and introduction to Kalman filters. subject matter includes: medical imaging, coor- tions, and development of the discretized domain Performance limitation of control systems and dinate systems and representations in 3D space, solution. Techniques are developed in detail for trade-offs in control design. Design of control robot kinematics and control, validation, haptics, the one- and two-dimensional equilibrium and synthesis is performed using Matlab/Simulink. teleoperation, registration, calibration, image pro- transient problems. These numerical strategies Term projects focus on design, analysis and cessing, tracking, and human-robot interaction. are used to solve actual problems in heat flow, implementation of current engineering control Topics will be discussed in lecture format followed diffusion, wave propagation, vibrations, fluid me- problems. (Prerequisites: Differential equation and by interactive discussionof related literature. The chanics, hydrology and solid mechanics. Weekly fundamentals of linear algebra.) course will culminate in a team project covering computer exercises are required to illustrate the one or more of the primary course focus areas. concepts discussed in class. Students cannot ME 5203. Introduction to Control of Recommended background: Linear algebra, ME/ receive credit for this course if they have taken Nonlinear Dynamical Systems RBE 501 or equivalent Students cannot receive the Special Topics (ME 593E) version of the same (2 credits) credit for this course if they have taken the Special course or ME 533 or CE 524. Introduction to nonlinear dynamical systems. Topics (ME 593U) version of the same course. Overview of stability concepts and examination ME 5304. Laser Metrology and of various methods for assessing stability such as ME 6201. Advanced Topics in Vibration Nondestructive Testing linearization and Lyapunov methods. Introduction (2 credits) (2 credits) to various design methods based on linearization, The course presents advanced topics in vibrations Demands for increased performance and efficiency sliding modes, adaptive control, and feedback of machines and structures: dynamic stability of components in the nano/micro-, meso-, and linearization. Demonstration and performance analysis for linear nonconservative systems with macro-scales, impose challenges to their engi- analysis on engineering systems such as flexible applications to aeroelasticity and rotordynamics neering design, study, and optimization. These robotic manipulators, mobile robots, spacecraft such as whirling of shafts with internal energy challenges are compounded by multidisciplinary attitude control and manufacturing systems. dissipation; introduction into theory of nonlin- applications to be developed inexpensively in short Control synthesis and analysis is performed using ear and parametric vibrations in machines and time while satisfying stringent design objectives. Matlab®/Simulink®. (Prerequisites: differential structures; probabilistic approach in dynamics As a consequence, effective quantitative engineer- equations, fundamentals of linear algebra and con- – analysis of random vibrations with applications ing methodologies, such as optical techniques, are cepts of control theory at the undergraduate level.) to reliability evaluation in earthquake engineer- frequently used in the study and optimization of Students cannot receive credit for this course if ing, offshore engineering, etc. Use of random advanced components and systems. In this course, they have taken the Special Topics (ME 593N) vibration analyses is illustrated for on-line condi- modern laser metrology techniques are discussed version of the same course or ME 623. tion monitoring for machines and structures and their practical applications to solve problems, (mechanical signature analysis), such as detecting with emphasis on nondestructive testing (NDT), ME 5204/RBE 510. Multi-Robot Systems instability and evaluating stability margin for a are illustrated with laboratory demonstrations. (2 credits) nonconservative system from its on-line measured Topics covered include wave and Fourier optics, This course covers the foundation and principles signal. Introduction into general vibration theory classic and holographic interferometry, speckle of multi-robot systems. The course will cover the makes the course self-contained (background in techniques, solid-state lasers, fiber optics, CCD development of the field and provide an overview ME 522 preferable but not necessary). Students cameras, computer vision, camera calibration on different control architectures (deliberative, cannot receive credit for this course if they have methods, and image processing and data reduc- reactive, behavior-based and hybrid control), taken the Special Topics (ME 593B) version of the tion algorithms as required in quantitative fringe control topologies, and system configurations same course. analysis. Detail examples of nondestructive testing (cellular automata, modular robotic systems, and coherent optical metrology in solid mechan-

Return to Table of Contents Mechanical Engineering 127 ics, vibrations, heat transfer, electromagnetics, mechanical properties will be described. Basic sufficent for them to understand the workings of and reverse engineering are given. Students are composite theories will be presented to describe such programs and the ability to use such program required to work on projects depending on their fiber-reinforced composites and nanocomposites. to build models and perform analyses of contact/ background and interests. Recommended back- Various factors associated with material degrada- impact problems. Topics will include explicit ground: mechanics, materials, physics, knowledge tion during use will be discussed. Some introduc- time integration, penalty and constraint contact of a high-level computer programming language. tory definitions of electrical and optical properties methods, under-integrated elment forumulations, Students cannot receive credit for this course if will be outlined. (Prerequisites: senior or graduate hourglass control, developing finite element mod- they have taken the Special Topics (ME 593J) ver- standing or consent of the instructor.) Note: Stu- els and performing and interpreting finite element sion of the same course or ME 534. dents cannot receive credit for this course if they analysis results. have taken the Special Topics version of the same ME 531. Applied Elasticity course (MTE 594P). ME 5340/MTE 540. Analytical Methods in (3 credits) Materials Engineering This course is intended for students with under- ME 5326/MTE 526. Advanced (3 credits) graduate backgrounds in mechanics of materials. Thermodynamics Heat transfer and diffusion kinetics are applied to It includes two- and three-dimensional states of (2 credits) the solution of materials engineering problems. stress, linear and nonlinear measures of strain, and Thermodynamics of solutions—phase equilib- Mathematical and numerical methods for the generalized Hooke’s Law. Also covered are exact ria— Ellingham diagrams, binary and ternary solutions to Fourier’s and Pick’s laws for a variety solutions for bending and torsion: thick-walled phase diagrams, reactions between gasses and of boundary conditions will be presented and dis- pressure vessels, rotating disks, stress functions for condensed phases, reactions within condensed cussed. The primary emphasis is given heat treat- two- and three-dimensional problems and bend- phases, thermodynamics of surfaces, defects ment and surface modification processes. Topics to ing and torsion of unsymmetric beams. and electrochemistry. Applications to materials be covered include solutionizing, quenching, and processing and degradation will be presented and carburization heat treatment. (Prerequisites: ME ME 5311/MTE 511. Structure and discussed. (Prerequisites: ES 3001, ES2001) Note: 4840 or MTE 510 or equivalent.) Properties of Engineering Materials Students cannot receive credit for this course if (2 credits) they have taken the Special Topics version of the ME 5350/MTE 550. Phase Transformations This course, (along with its companion course same course (MTE 594T). in Materials MTE 512 Properties and Performance of Engi- (3 credits) neering Materials), is designed to provide a com- ME 5332/MTE 532. X-Ray Diffraction and This course is intended to provide a fundamental prehensive review of the fundamental principles of Crystallography understanding of thermodynamic and kinetic Materials Science and Engineering for incoming (2 credits) principles associated with phase transformations. graduate students. In the first part of this 2-course This course discusses the fundamentals of crystal- The mechanisms of phase transformations will be sequence, the structure in materials ranging from lography and X-ray diffraction (XRD) of metals, discussed in terms of driving forces to establish a the sub-atomic to the macroscopic including ceramics and polymers. It introduces graduate theoretical background for various physical phe- nano, micro and macromolecular structures will students to the main issues and techniques of nomena. The principles of nucleation and growth be discussed to highlight bonding mechanisms, diffraction analysis as they relate to materials. The and spinodal transformations will be described. crystallinity and defect patterns. Representative techniques for the experimental phase identifica- The theoretical analysis of diffusion controlled thermodynamic and kinetic aspects such as diffu- tion and determination of phase fraction via XRD and interface controlled growth will be presented. sion, phase diagrams, nucleation and growth and will be reviewed. Topics covered include: basic The basic concepts of martensitic transformations TTT diagrams will be discussed. Major structural X-ray physics, basic crystallography, fundamen- will be highlighted. Specific examples will include parameters that effect of performance in materials tals of XRD, XRD instrumentation and analysis solidification, crystallization, precipitation, including plastics, metallic alloys, ceramics and techniques. (Prerequisites: ES 2001 or equivalent, sintering, phase separation and transformation glasses will be emphasized. The principal process- and senior or graduate standing in engineering or toughening. (Prerequisites: MTE 510, ME 4850 ing techniques to shape materials and the effects science.) Note: Students cannot receive credit for or equivalent.) of processing on structure will be highlighted. this course if they have taken the Special Topics (Prerequisites: senior or graduate standing or version of the same course (MTE 594C). ME 5356/MTE 556. Smart Materials consent of the instructor.) Note: Students cannot (2 credits) receive credit for this course if they have taken the ME 5327/CE 527. Impact Strength of A material whose properties can respond to an Special Topics version of the same course (MTE Materials external stimulus in a controlled fashion is referred 594S). (3 credits) to as a smart or intelligent material. These materi- This course provides the student with a basic als can be made to undergo changes modulus, MTE 512/ME 5312. Properties and understanding of the mechanics of impact and shape, porosity, electrical conductivity, physical Performance of Engineering Materials contact as well as the behavior of materials form, opacity, and magnetic properties based on (2 credits) subjected to dynamic loadings. Topics will include an external stimulus. The stimuli can include tem- The two introductory classes on materials science elastic and plastic stress waves in rods; longitu- perature, pH, specific molecules, light, magnetic (MTE 511 and MTE 512) describe the structure- dinal, torsional and flexure waves; shock waves; field, voltage and stress. These stimuli-sensitive property relationships in materials. The purpose impulsively loaded beams and plates; impact of materials can be utilized as sensors and as vehicles of this class is to provide a basic knowledge of the rough bodies in three dimensions, impact of bod- for the controlled delivery of drugs and other bio- principles pertaining to the physical, mechani- ies with compliance, impact of slender deformable molecules in medical applications. Smart materials cal and chemical properties of materials. The rods, continuum modeling of contact regions and are also becoming important in other biological primary focus of this class will be on mechanical progressive collapse of structures. areas such as bio-separation, biosensor design, properties. The thermal, tensile, compressive, tissue engineering, protein folding, and micro- flexural and shear properties of metallic alloys, ME 5329/CE 529. Impact Finite Element fluidics. The use of stimuli-sensitive materials is ceramics and glasses and plastics will be discussed. Analysis receiving increasing attention in the development Fundamental aspects of fracture mechanics and (3 credits) of damage tolerant smart structures in aerospace, viscoelasticity will be presented. An overview of Modern practical contact/impact problems like marine, automotive and earth quake resistant dynamic properties such as fatigue, impact and the design of automobiles, aircraft, ships packag- buildings. The use of smart materials is being creep will be provided. The relationship between ing, etc. depend on the use of nonlinear dynamic explored for a range of applications including the structural parameters and the preceding large-deformation high-strain rate explicit finite protective coatings, corrosion barriers, intelligent element computer programs. The purpose of this batteries, fabrics and food packaging. The purpose course is to provide the student with background

128 Mechanical Engineering Return to Table of Contents of this course is to provide an introduction to sciences. The course begins by considering basic ME 542/MFE 510. Control and Monitoring the various types of smart materials including principles and conventional analyses, and meth- of Manufacturing Processes polymers, ceramic, metallic alloys and compos- ods. Measurement and analysis methods are criti- (3 credits) ites. Fundamental principles associated with the cally reviewed for utility. Students learn advanced Covers a broad range of topics centered on control onset of “smart” property will be highlighted. The methods for differentiating surface textures that and monitoring functions for manufacturing, principles of self-healable materials based on smart are suspected of being different because of their including process control, feedback systems, data materials will be discussed. The application of performance or manufacture. Students will also collection and analysis, scheduling, machine-com- smart materials in various fields including sensors, learn methods for making correlations between puter interfacing, and distributed control. Typical actuators, diagnostics, therapeutics, packaging surface textures and behavioral and manufacturing applications are considered with lab work. and other advanced applications will be presented. parameters. The results of applying these methods Note: Students cannot receive credit for this can be used to support the design and manufac- ME 543/MFE 520. Design and Analysis of course if they have taken the Special Topics ver- ture of surface textures, and to address issues in Manufacturing Processes sion of the same course (MTE 594X). quality assurance. Examples of research from a (3 credits) broad range of applications are presented, includ- The first half of the course covers the axiomatic ME 5358/MTE 558. Plastics ing, food science, pavements, friction, adhesion, design method, applied to simultaneous product (2 credits) machining and grinding. Students do a major and process design for concurrent engineering, This course will provide an integrated overview of project of their choosing, which can involve either with the emphasis on process and manufactur- the design, selection and use of synthetic plastics. an in-depth literature review, or surface measure- ing tool design. Basic design principles as well as The basic chemistry associated with polymeriza- ment and analysis. The facilities of WPI’s Surface qualitative and quantitative methods of analysis tion and the structure of commercial plastics will Metrology Laboratory are available for making of designs are developed. The second half of the be described. Various aspects of polymer crystalli- measurements for selected projects. Software for course addresses methods of engineering analysis zation and glass transition will be outlined. Salient advanced analysis methods is also available for use of manufacturing processes, to support machine aspects of fluid flow and heat transfer during the in the course. No previous knowledge of surface tool and process design. Basic types of engineering processing of plastics will be highlighted. Funda- metrology is required. Students should have some analysis are applied to manufacturing situations, mentals of the diverse processing operations used background in engineering, math or science. including elasticity, plasticity, heat transfer, me- to shape plastics and the resulting structures that chanics and cost analysis. Special attention will be develop after processing will be discussed. The ME 634. Holographic Numerical Analysis given to the mechanics of machining (traditional, mechanical behavior of plastics including elastic (3 credits) nontraditional and grinding) and the production deformation, rubber elasticity, yielding, viscoelas- Recent advances in holographic analysis of body of surfaces. Students, with the advice and consent ticity, fracture and creep will be discussed. Plastic deformations are discussed. Included in the course of the professor, select the topic for their term degradation and environmental issues associated are topics covering sandwich holography, opto- project. with recycling and disposal of plastics will be electronic fringe interpolation technique, theory examined. Typical techniques used in the analysis of fringe localization, use of projection matrices ME 5431/MFE 531. Computer Aided and testing of plastics will be described and a and the fringe tensor theory of holographic strain Manufacturing working knowledge of various terminologies used analysis. The application of interactive computer (2 credits) in commercial practice will be provided. Note: programs for holographic analysis of engineering An overview of computer-integrated manufac- Students cannot receive credit for this course if and biological systems will be outlined. Lectures turing (CIM). As the CIM concept attempts they have taken the Special Topics version of the are supplemented by laboratory demonstrations to integrate all of the business and engineering same course (MTE 594A). and experiments. (Prerequisites: Matrix algebra, functions of a firm, this course builds on the vector calculus and consent of instructor.) knowledge of computer-aided design, computer- ME 5361/MTE 561. Mechanical Behavior aided manufacturing, concurrent engineering, and Fracture of Materials Design and Manufacturing: management of information systems and opera- (2 credits) tions management to demonstrate the strategic The failure and wear-out mechanisms for a ME 5401. Computer-Aided Design and Geometric Modeling importance of integration. Emphasis is placed variety of materials (metals, ceramics, polymers, on CAD/CAM integration. Topics include, part (2 credits) composites and microelectronics) and applications design specification and manufacturing quality, This course covers topics in computer-aided will be presented and discussed. Multi-axial failure tooling and fixture design, and manufacturing geometric design and applications in mechanical theories and fracture mechanics will be discussed. information systems. This course includes a group engineering. The objectives of the course are to The methodology and techniques for reliability term project. (Prerequisites: Background in manu- familiarize the students with complex geomet- analysis will also be presented and discussed. A facturing and CAD/CAM, e.g., ME 1800, ES ric modeling and analytical techniques used in materials systems approach will be used. (Pre- 1310, ME 3820.) Note: Students cannot receive contemporary computer-aided design systems. requisites: ES 2502 and ME 3023 or equivalent, credit for this course if they have taken the Special Topics to be covered may include complex curve and senior or graduate standing in engineering or Topics version of the same course (ME 593D/ and surface generation, solid modeling, assem- science.) Note: Students cannot receive credit for MFE 594D). this course if they have taken the Special Topics bly and mechanism modeling, transformations, version of the same course (MTE 593C/MTE analytic geometry, offsets and intersections of ME 5441/MFE 541. Design for 594C). complex shapes, graphics standards and data Manufacturability transfer, rendering techniques, parametric design (2 credits) ME 5370/MTE 5841/MFE 5841. Surface and geometric optimization, numerical methods The problems of cost determination and evalua- Metrology for geometric analysis and graphics design pro- tion of processing alternatives in the design-man- (3 credits) gramming. Prerequisites: calculus, linear algebra, ufacturing interface are discussed. Approaches for This course emphasizes research applications of introductory computer programming, and ability introducing manufacturing capability knowledge advanced surface metrology, including the mea- to utilize a solid modeling CAD system. Students into the product design process are covered. An surement and analysis of surface roughness. Sur- cannot receive credit for this course if they have emphasis is placed on part and process simplifica- face metrology can be important in a wide variety taken the Special Topics (ME 593C) version of the tion, and analysis of alternative manufacturing of situations including adhesion, friction, catalysis, same course or ME 545. methods based on such parameters as: anticipated heat transfer, mass transfer, scattering, biological volume, product life cycle, lead time, customer growth, wear and wetting. These situations impact practically all the engineering disciplines and

Return to Table of Contents Mechanical Engineering 129 requirements, and quality yield. Lean manufactur- ME 554/MTE 554/BME 554. Composites ME 598. Directed Research ing and Six-Sigma concepts and their influence on with Biomedical and Materials (credits TBD) design quality are included as well. Note: Students Applications For M.S. students wishing to gain research experi- cannot receive credit for this course if they have (3 credits) ence peripheral to their thesis topic, or for Ph.D. taken the Special Topics version of the same Introduction to fiber/particulate reinforced, students wishing to gain research experience course (MFE 594M). engineered and biologic materials. This course peripheral to their dissertation topic.. ME 641. Cam Design focuses on the elastic description and application of materials that are made up of a combination of ME 599. Thesis Research (3 credits) submaterials, i.e., composites. Emphasis will be (credits TBD) Basic and advanced methods of cam design for placed on the development of constitutive equa- For master’s students wishing to obtain research high-speed production machinery and automo- tions that define mechanical behavior of a number credit toward their thesis. (Prerequisite: Consent tive applications will be addressed. Classical as of applications including: biomaterial, tissue, and of Thesis Advisor.) well as polynomial and spline-based methods will material science. (Prerequisites: Understanding of be used to design cam contours. Issues of cam ME 693. Advanced Special Topics stress analysis and basic continuum mechanics.) manufacturing and vibrations as related to cam (credits TBD) dynamic behavior will be discussed. Practical ME 559/BME 558. Biofluids and Arranged by individual faculty with special exper- aspects of cam design will be exercised through Biotransport tise, these courses cover advanced topics that are projects and laboratory assignments. (Recom- (3 credits) not covered by the regular mechanical engineering mended background: Undergraduate level courses The emphasis of this course is on modeling fluid course offerings. Exact course descriptions are dis- in kinematics and vibrations. Familiarity with the flow within the cardiovascular and pulmonary sys- seminated by the Mechanical Engineering Depart- techniques of dynamic signal analysis [ME 621] tems, and the transport processes that take place ment well in advance of the offering. (Prerequisite: would be helpful.) in these systems. Applications include artificial Consent of instructor.) heart valves, atherosclerosis, arterial impedance Biomechanical Engineering: ME 698. Pre-Dissertation Research matching, clinical diagnosis, respiration, aerosol (credits TBD) ME 550/BME 550. Tissue Engineering and particle deposition. Depending upon class Intended for doctoral students wishing to obtain (3 credits) interest, additional topics may include reproduc- dissertation-research credit prior to admission to This biomaterials course focuses on the selection, tive fluids, animal propulsion in air and water, and candidacy. (Prerequisite: Consent of Dissertation processing, testing and performance of materi- viscoelastic testing. (Recommended preparation: Advisor.) als used in biomedical applications with special A first course in biofluids equivalent to ME/BME emphasis upon tissue engineering. Topics include 4606.) ME 699. Dissertation Research material selection and processing, mechanisms (credits TBD) and kinetics of material degradation, cell-material Other Activities: Intended for doctoral students admitted to candi- interactions and interfaces; effect of construct ar- ME 591. Graduate Seminar dacy wishing to obtain research credit toward their chitecture on tissue growth; and transport through (0 credits) dissertations. (Prerequisite: Consent of Disserta- engineered tissues. Examples of engineering tissues Seminars on current issues related to various tion Advisor.) for replacing cartilage, bone, tendons, ligaments, areas of mechanical engineering are presented by skin and liver will be presented. (Recommended authorities in their fields. All full-time mechanical preparation: A first course in biomaterials equiva- engineering students are required to register and lent to ME/BME 4814 and a basic understanding attend. of physiology and cell biology.) ME 593. Special Topics ME 552/BME 552. Tissue Mechanics (credits TBD) (3 credits) Arranged by individual faculty with special This biomechanics course focuses on advanced expertise, these courses survey fundamentals in techniques for the characterization of the structure areas that are not covered by the regular mechani- and function of hard and soft tissues, and their re- cal engineering course offerings. Exact course lationship to physiological processes. Applications descriptions are disseminated by the Mechanical include tissue injury, wound healing, the effect of Engineering Department well in advance of the pathological conditions upon tissue properties and offering. (Prerequisite: Consent of instructor.) design of medical devices and prostheses. (Recom- mended preparation: A first course in biomechan- ics equivalent to ME/BME 4504.)

130 Mechanical Engineering Return to Table of Contents www.wpi.edu/+physics Physics

Faculty V. H. Tüzel, Assistant Teaching Professor; BioPhysics/Soft-Matter Ph.D., University of Minnesota; Inverse G. S. Iannacchione, Associate Professor problems, mathematical biology, con- Biomaterials – hydration effects on and Department Head; Ph.D., Kent State tinuum and fluid mechanics, mechanics of protein dynamics, thermodynamics of University; Soft condensed matter physics/ Biopolymers, level-set method. proteins and DNA, self-assembly of complex fluids, liquid-crystals, calorimetry, biomaterials, dielectric relaxation spec- and order-disorder phenomena. Q. Wen, Assistant Professor, Ph.D., Brown troscopy, relaxation calorimetry, resonant University. Experimental biophysics, me- P. K. Aravind, Professor and Associate ultrasound spectroscopy, studies of tissue chanical properties of tissue cells and bio- cells, theory and simulations of biopoly- Head; Ph.D., Northwestern University; logical materials, cell-ECM interactions. Quantum information theory. mers and molecular motors, cell mechanics A. Zozulya, Professor; Ph.D., Lebedev and intra-cellular transport, physics of the N. A. Burnham, Associate Professor; Physics Institute; Nonlinear optics, pho- cytoskeleton (cellular skeleton). Ph.D., University of Colorado; Mechani- torefractive materials, pipes. cal properties of nanostructures, instru- Biomechanics – biologically inspired mentation for nanomechanics. robotics, physics of biological motion, cel- Research Areas lular structure and motion. F. A. Dick, Assistant Teaching Professor, NanoScience and Engineering Ph.D., Worcester Polytechnic Institute; Polymers – molecular properties of small Nuclear and particle physics, astrophysics Cold atoms – Bose-Einstein Condensa- sample volumes and single molecules, and planetary science. tion of bosons and fermions, atom wave polymer and bio-macromolecular solu- guides and interferometers. tions, surfactants, colloids. D. C. Medich, Assistant Professor; Ph.D., University of Massachusetts – Lowell; Quantum Information – Foundations of Liquid Crystals – thermotropic/lyotropic/ Nuclear science and engineering, medical quantum mechanics, quantum algorithms. colloidal systems, phase transitions and and health physics, radiation biology. critical phenomena, cooperative behavior Wavefunction Engineering – nanostruc- and self-assembly, quenched random disor- G. D. J. Phillies, Professor; D.Sc., MIT. tures, finite-element modeling of quantum der effects, calorimetry instrumentation. Theoretical statistical mechanics, polymer systems and wells, field theory. Complex Fluids – theory and simula- dynamics, the glass transition, complex Optics: Photonics – Nonlinear optics, fluids. tions, diffusion and transport properties, fiber optics, optical properties of rough light scattering spectroscopy of liquids and M. B. Popovic, Assistant Research Profes- surfaces and of thin metal films. polymer melts, mesoscale simulations of sor, Ph.D., Boston University; Biomechan- Optics: Spectroscopy – laser spectrosco- liquids, capillary wave theory, theory and ics and robotics, complex system dynam- py of impurity ions in glasses, quasielastic/ simulation of phase transitions in multi- ics, nuclear and particle physics. inelastic light scattering and excitation/ component mixtures. R. S. Quimby, Associate Professor; Ph.D., modulation spectroscopy of superlattices, Glasses – theory and simulation, thermo- University of Wisconsin – Madison; Opti- thin films, surface phenomena. dynamics, relaxations. cal properties of solids, laser spectroscopy, Optics: Lasers – development of infrared fiber optics. fiber lasers and materials, mid-IR and FIR Program of Study L. R. Ram-Mohan, Professor; Ph.D., Pur- quantum cascade laser design. WPI physics graduate program prepares due University; Field theory, many body Semiconductors – optical properties of students for careers in research that require problems, solid state physics, and finiteele- superlattices, heterostructure laser design, a high degree of initiative and responsibil- ment modeling of quantum systems. spintronics in diluted magnetic semicon- ity. Prospective employers are industrial S. Sarkar, Assistant Teaching Professor; ductors, devices. laboratories, government or non-profit Ph.D., University of Nebraska; Spectro- research centers, as well as colleges or Magnetic Solids – Magnetic impuri- universities. scopic ellipsometry, polymers and ties in semiconductors: diluted magnetic biomacromolecules, surface chemistry, semiconductors and the onset of ferromag- WPI’s physics courses are generally sched- colloidal separations, material synthesis netism in spintronic materials. uled during the mornings but with suffi- and fabrication. cient flexibility to accommodate part-time Nanomechanics – Mechanical properties I. Stroe, Assistant Professor; Ph.D., Clark students. Special topics courses in areas of of nanostructures, instrumentation and University; Experimental biophysics, pro- faculty research interest are often avail- metrology for nanomechanics. tein structure, dynamic, and functionality. able. To improve the course offerings and opportunities for graduate students, the E. Tüzel, Assistant Professor; Ph.D., Uni- Departments of Physics at WPI and Clark versity of Minnesota; Statistical mechanics and polymer physics applied to biology and materials science.

Return to Table of Contents Physics 131 University share their graduate courses. Graduate Certificate in Nuclear take the examination during their first year Please visit the Clark University Physics Science and Engineering (NSE) of graduate school, and are expected to Department web pages for more informa- take the examination by the end of their The Graduate Certificate in Nuclear Sci- tion on their offerings. second year. There is no penalty for failing ence & Engineering requires the successful or not taking the examination during the completion of 12 graduate credits with Master of Science in Physics first year. Students who fail the examina- an overall GPA of 3.0. Credits are chosen (M.S.) tion during their second year must pass from the NSE510-50 course listing or by All experimental and theoretical research the examination when it is next offered. approval of the NSE Program Committee. areas are available for the M.S. Physics The Qualifying Examination will include, degree. Both thesis and exam options Admission Requirements but is not limited to, material taken from available though most students pursue the PH 511, PH 514-515, PH 522 and PH thesis route if this is their terminal degree. B.S. in physics preferred. However, ap- 533. Each student’s academic work is plicants with comparable backgrounds will reviewed on an annual basis by the Phys- Master of Science in Physics also be considered. ics Department Graduate Committee. for Educators (MPED) Continuation of student status is based The Master of Science in Physics for Edu- Degree Requirements on satisfactory progress toward a degree, cators is designed specifically for middle For the M.S. coursework, research, teaching, and service school, high school, and community The M.S. degree in physics requires 30 se- to the Department. Renewals of research college in-service educators. The emphasis mester hours of credit: 6 or more in thesis and teaching assistantships are dependent of the program is put on courses in phys- or directed research with the remainder in on satisfactory performance of required ics content designed for educators and is approved courses and independent studies, duties. combined with courses in assessment and to include PH 511, PH 514, PH 515, evaluation theory and a participant-de- PH 522 and PH 533 (15 semester hours). Course Descriptions signed project. The physics content courses The thesis option requires the completion All courses are 3 credits unless otherwise noted. are intended to give educators a deep but and defense of a M.S. thesis as well as a Note: Students must maintain a minimum of a applicable understanding of physics that seminar presentation based on the thesis 3.0 GPA to be in good standing. makes advanced physics topics easily ac- research. The seminar and defense may be PH 500. Independent Study (ISG) cessible to educators and the students they done in conjunction. The non-thesis op- (credits are arranged: 1-3) teach. Topics covered will include modern tion requires a satisfactory performance on Various specialized topics and/or research areas physics, methods in physics and physics the Qualifying Examination. from one to two graduate students. Arranged for citizens and leaders. Support for degree individually with the faculty. candidates extends beyond the specific For the Master of Science in PH 511. Classical Mechanics coursework and projects as participants Physics for Educators (MPED) Lagrangian and Hamiltonian formulations. will become part of a network of physicists For a complete overview of degree require- Rigid body motion. Poisson brackets, Hamilton- Jacobi theory. (Prerequisite: B.S. in physics or which ranges from local individuals to a ments, please see STEM for Educators. much broader community. The program equivalent.) may be used to help middle and high For the Ph.D. PH 514. Quantum Mechanics I school educators move from Initial to The doctor of philosophy degree requires Schrodinger wave equation, potential wells and Professional Licensure in Massachusetts. 90 credit hours, including 42 in approved barriers, harmonic oscillator, hydrogen atom, For information about admissions and angular momentum and spin. (Prerequisite: B.S. courses or directed study (which must in physics or equivalent.) requirements, see the listing under STEM include PH 511, PH 514-515, PH 522 for Educators. and PH 533, or their equivalents), 30 of PH 515. Quantum Mechanics II dissertation research, and completion and Perturbation theory, scattering theory, Born ap- Doctor of Philosophy in Physics proximation, quantum theory of radiation, the defense of a Ph.D. thesis. Courses taken to Dirac equation. (Prerequisite: PH 514.) (Ph.D.) satisfy M.S. degree requirements may be Research areas focus on the specialties counted against the required 42 credits of PH 522. Thermodynamics and Statistical Mechanics of the faculty for both experimental and courses, but completion of a M.S. degree is theoretical work. Students who complete Ensemble theory; canonical, microcanonical, and not required. grand canonical ensembles. Quantum statistical 30 credits and successfully pass the Quali- One year of residency and passage of a mechanics, Bose-Einstein and Fermi-Dirac statis- fying exam are eligible to earn an M.S. in tics. (Prerequisite PH 511.) route to their Ph.D. qualifying examination are required. PH 533. Advanced Electromagnetic Theory A minimum of 60 credits must be earned Classical electrodynamics including boundary- at WPI. value problems using Green’s functions. Maxwell’s The Qualifying Examination for the equations, electromagnetic properties of matter, doctor of philosophy degree is usually wave propagation and radiation theory. (Prerequi- site: B.S. in physics or equivalent.) administered each year at the beginning of the second semester. Ph.D. aspirants who enter after the bachelor’s degree may

132 Physics Return to Table of Contents PH 554. Solid State Physics MPE 530. Modern Physics uncertainty, linear best fit to data, and identifica- Phonons and specific heat of solids; electronic (2 credits) tion of systematic and random errors. Prepara- conductivity and band theory of solids; Fermi and Broad coverage of the three central areas of tion of high-quality experiment reports is also Bose gases; magnetic interactions. (Prerequisite: modern physics that emphasize the wonder and emphasized. Representative experiment subjects PH 514.) interconnections at the conceptual level appropri- are: mechanical motions and vibrations; free and ate for secondary school educators. Topics include: driven electrical oscillations; electric fields and PH 561 Atomic Force Microscopy. Quantum Physics (postulates, Schrödinger and potential; magnetic materials and fields; electron Atomic force microscopes (AFMs) are instruments Dirac formalisms, implications and interpreta- beam dynamics; optics; diffraction-grating that allow three-dimensional imaging of surfaces tions), Special and Introduction to General spectroscopy; radioactive decay and nuclear energy with nanometer resolution and are important en- Relativity (the four-vector, space-time, invari- measurements. abling tools for nanoscience and technology. The ants, time dilation and length contraction), and student who successfully completes this course will MPE 572. Physics Research Experience Thermo/Statistical Physics (macroscopic variables, understand the functional principles of AFMs, for Teachers equation of state, state functions, response func- be able to run one, and interpret the data that are (3 credits) tions, microscopic variables, statistical approach, collected. The recommended background for this Provides educators with hands-on research experi- ensembles, the partition function). course is a bachelor’s degree in science or engineer- ence either in the research programs in Physics ing. Students who have successfully completed PH MPE 540. Differential Equations in Nature at WPI or other venues but under the oversight 2510, the undergraduate version of this course, (2 credits) of the physics faculty. The goal is to support the may not earn credit for PH 561. Emphasizes connections and interconnections active involvement of educators in research in order to translate their research experience into PH 597. Special Topics with the mechanical, electromagnetic, and modern areas as well as mathematical areas of new classroom activities and build long term col- (credits are arranged: 1-3) oscillations, waves, and optics utilizing differential laborative relationships between the researcher(s), PH 598. Directed Research equations at a level appropriate for secondary educator(s), and potentially the educator(s’) (varies) school educators. Topics include: Free, damped, students. Research activities can range from A directed and coherent program of research that, and driven-damped oscillations, waves, Dop- experimental to theoretical to computational in most cases, will eventually lead to thesis or pler Effect, optics, interference and diffraction. and can involve multiple educators and/or their dissertation research. This is also used for Directed Examples are drawn from a wide range of physical students with some expectation that the activity Research Rotation (for 3 credit hours) for first phenomena to illustrate each concept. To develop may lead to a publication. year students who have not yet taken the Qualify- this content, homogeneous and non-homoge- MPE 574. Physics for Citizens and Leaders neous differential equations of the first and second ing Examination in order to explore the available (3 credits) order will be employed. Thick contextual meaning research opportunities. Emphasizes physics concepts and connections to will be drawn to support mathematical founda- society. Educators will explore and understand the PH 599. M. S. Thesis Research tion and vice versa to allow for deeper “authentic” important connections between society and the (varies) learning. Each student will work under the supervision of a relevant physics concepts and their context. The member of the department on an experimental or MPE 550. Computational Methods goal is for the educator to be able to apply critical theoretical problem. in Physics thinking of the application of physics to impor- (2 credits) tant societal issues. Topics can range from energy PH 699. Ph.D. Dissertation Topics are chosen to illustrate various numerical options, climate change, technology assessment (varies, no more than 30) techniques useful for educators and students to and risk, ethical use of science. Required in the last semester or two for the writ- illustrate physics concepts and develop a sense of MPE 576. Physics in Popular Culture ing and defending of a Ph.D. dissertation. physical intuition through simulations and model- (3 credits) ing. It is not intended to be a course on numerical MPE 510. Classical Mechanics Covers myths and misconceptions of physics in methods; rather it will be aimed at the application (2 credits) popular culture (i.e. movies, books, TV, web, etc.). of numerical methods to physical models. Various Broad coverage emphasizing interconnections of The goal of this independent study is for the edu- programming languages/platforms are utilized in a mechanical description of the universe utilizing cator to be able to identify how the representation each example to highlight the general nature and both algebraic and calculus language at a level of physics in popular media perpetuates important to provide choices matching students program- appropriate for secondary school educators. Top- myths and misconceptions that impact reasoning ming backgrounds. ics include: vectors and vector manipulation to and critical thinking, sometimes in a profoundly describe motion, Newton’s laws of motion; work MPE 560. Experimental Methods in Physics negative way. Emphasis is placed on utilizing these and energy concepts; energy and momentum con- (2 credits) representations as teaching/learning moments for servation laws; models of forces and interactions; Hands-on methods of physically testing concepts the specific relevant physical concepts. generalized coordinates and momentum; overview and models of the universe. Technology is utilized of Lagrangian and Hamiltonian formulations. NSE 510. Introduction to Nuclear Science but general methods accessible to barely outfitted and Engineering MPE 520. Electrodynamics lab environments are stressed. Topics covered are This introductory course provides an overview of in a series of subject units, the physical principles (2 credits) the field of nuclear science and engineering as it underlying the phenomena to be observed and the Broad coverage at the appropriate level empha- relates to nuclear power and nuclear technologies. basis for the measurement techniques employed sizing interconnections of the electromagnetic Fundamental concepts relevant to nuclear systems is reviewed. Principles and uses of standard interactions in the universe utilizing both algebraic are introduced, including radioactivity, radiation laboratory instruments (oscilloscopes, meters for and calculus language at a level appropriate for interaction phenomena, chain reaction physics, frequency, time, electrical and other quantities, secondary school educators. Topics include: elec- and transport in engineering materials. Nuclear lock-in amplifiers, etc.) are stressed. In addition tro and magneto statics and dynamics, boundary- reactor physics and design concepts are introduced to systematic measurement procedures and data value problems; Maxwell’s equations; overview with focus on light water fission reactors. A survey recording, strong emphasis is placed on process- of electromagnetic properties of matter and wave of advanced nuclear technologies and applica- ing of the data, preparation and interpretation of propagation (radiation). tions is provided. Prerequisites: graduate or senior graphical presentations, and analysis of preci- standing or consent of the instructor. sion and accuracy, including determination and interpretation of best value, measures of error and

Return to Table of Contents Physics 133 NSE 520. Applied Nuclear Physics NSE 540. Nuclear Materials NSE 550. Reactor Design, Operations, This course introduces engineering and science This course applies fundamental materials sci- and Safety students to the fundamental topics of nuclear ence concepts to effects on materials in harsh This course provides a systems engineering view physics for applications, basic properties of the nuclear environments. An overview is provided of commercial nuclear power plant technology. nucleus, nuclear radiations, and radiation interac- on environments, special nuclear materials, and Power plant designs and their evolutions are tions with matter. The course is divided into four constraints in materials selection. Relationships studied, ranging from early to modern generation main sections: (1) introduction to elementary are developed between nuclear effects on crystal light water reactors, as well as advanced designs quantum mechanics, (2) nuclear and atomic structure, microstructure, degraded material per- families, such alternate moderator and breeder structure, (3) nuclear decays and radiation, and formance, and bulk properties of engineering and reactors. Critical aspects of conventional power (4) nuclear matter interactions and nuclear reac- electronic materials. Case studies provide examples reactor designs are explored in detail, including tions. Prerequisites: Physics of mechanics and of enhancements induced my multiple harsh envi- steam supply, reactor core, control, and protection electrodynamics (PH1110/11 and PH1120/21) ronments and mitigation through material design systems. Plant operational characteristics are stud- and mathematical techniques up to and including hardening. Prerequisites: ES2001 or equivalent. ied, including reactor dynamics, control, feedback, ordinary differential equations (MA2051) and fuel cycle management. Critical power plant safety aspects of the design and operations are NSE 530. Health Physics explored and reinforced with lessons learned from This course builds on fundamental concepts intro- major power generator accidents scenarios (includ- duced in NSE510 and applies them to key topics ing Three Mile Island, Chernobyl, and Fukushima in health physics and radiation protection. Health Daiichi). Prerequisites: graduate standing or physics topics include man-made and natural consent of the instructor sources of radiation, dose, radiation biology, radiation measurement, and radiation safeguards. Radiation protection concepts are explored as they apply to existing and advanced nuclear power gen- erators, including reactor safety, nuclear waste and byproducts, regulatory constraints, and accident case studies. Prerequisites: graduate standing or consent of the instructor

134 Physics Return to Table of Contents www.wpi.edu/academics/robotics/ Robotics Engineering

Faculty R. Cowagli, Assistant Professor; Ph.D., R. W. Lindeman, Associate Professor; Georgia Institute of Technology; Ph.D., George Washington; Human- M. A. Gennert, Professor, Robotics autonomous aerial and terrestrial vehicles, computer interaction, haptics, virtual Engineering Program Director; Sc.D., integrated perception and planning and environments. Massachusetts Institute of Technology control, human-robot interaction. 1987; Image processing, image under ­ W. R. Michalson, Professor; Ph.D., standing, artificial intelligence, robotics. D. Cyganski, Professor; Ph.D., Worcester Worcester Polytechnic Institute; Satellite Polytechnic Institute; Optimization and navigation, real-time embedded com- F. J. Looft, Professor, Electrical and security of Internet communications, puter systems, digital music and audio Computer Engineering Department distributed and fault-tolerant computing, signal processing, simulation and system Head, Robotics Engineering Program CORBA, machine vision, automatic target modeling. Associate Director; Ph.D., Michigan; recognition. Instrumentation, digital and analog S. S. Nestinger, Assistant Professor;­ systems, signal processing, biomedical M. A. Demetriou, Professor, Ph.D., Uni- Ph.D., University of California/Davis, engineering, microprocessor systems and versity of Southern California; Control of 2009; Intelligent mechatronic and embed- architectures, space-flight systems. intelligent systems, control of fluid-struc- ded systems and their applications. ture interaction systems, fault detection K. A. Stafford, Associate Teaching Professor, C. Onal, Assistant Professor; Ph.D. and accommodation of dynamical systems, Carnegie Mellon University, 2009; Soft Robotics Resource Center Director,­ acoustic and vibration control, smart ma- Robotics Engineering Program Associate robotics, printable robotics, bio-inspira- terials and structures, sensor and actuator tion, control theory, micro/nano-robotics. Director; M.S., Air Force Institute of networks in distributed processes, control Technology; Robotics systems design. of mechanical systems. T. Padir, Assistant Professor; Ph.D., Purdue University; Modeling and control H. K. Ault, Associate Professor; Ph.D., R. J. Duckworth, Associate Professor; Worcester Polytechnic Institute; Geomet- of robotic systems, kinematics and Ph.D., Nottingham University; Embedded dynamics of robot manipulators, redun­ ric modeling, mechanical design, CAD, computer system design, computer kinematics, biomechanics, rehabilitation dancy resolution and trajectory planning, architecture, real-time systems, wireless automated system design, machine vision. engineering. instrumentation, rapid prototyping, logic S. Barton, Assistant Professor; Ph.D. synthesis. C. Rich, Professor; Ph.D., Massachusetts University of Virginia, 2012; human-robot Institute of Technology; Artificial intel- G. Fischer, Assistant Professor, Ph.D., ligence and its intersections with human- interaction in music composition and Johns Hopkins University; Medical performance, design of robotic musical computer interaction, interactive media robotics, computer assisted surgery, robot and game development, robotics, intel- instruments, music perception and control, automation, sensors and actuators. cognition, audio production. ligent tutoring systems, knowledge-based M. S. Fofana, Associate Professor, Ph.D., software tools. D. Berenson, Assistant Professor; Ph.D., University of Waterloo, Waterloo, Canada; Carnegie Mellon University, 2011; Motion Y. Rong, John Woodman Higgins Delay dynamical systems, nonlinear Professor and Associate Director planning, robotic manipulation, medical machine-tool chatter, stochastic nonlinear robotics. Manufacturing & Materials Engineering; dynamics, reliability dynamics and control Ph.D., University of Kentucky; C. A. Brown, Professor; Ph.D., University of medical ambulance, design and manu- Manufacturing systems and processes, of Vermont, 1983; Surface metrology,­ facturing of combat feeding systems, CNC heat treatment process modeling and machining, grinding, mechanics of skiing, machining dynamics and control, sustain- simulation, CAD/CAM, computer-aided axiomatic design. able lean manufacturing systems. fixture design and verification. D. C. Brown, Professor; Ph.D., Ohio C. Furlong, Associate Professor; Ph.D., C. L. Sidner, Research Professor; Ph.D., State; Knowledge-based design systems, Worcester Polytechnic Institute; MEMS Massachusetts Institute of Technology, artificial intelligence. and MOEMS, nanotechnology, mecha- 1979. Discourse processing, collaboration, tronics, laser applications, holography, S. Chernova, Assistant Professor; Ph.D., human-robot interaction, intelligent user computer modeling of dynamic systems. Carnegie Mellon University, 2009; Arti- interfaces, natural language processing, ficial intelligence, autonomous systems, A. H. Hoffman, Professor; Ph.D., artificial intelligence. robot learning, human-robot interaction, University of Colorado; Biomechanics, J. Skorinko, Associate Professor; Ph.D. adjustable autonomy, multirobot­ systems. biomaterials, biomedical engineering, University of Virginia, 2007; Social psy- rehabilitation engineering, biofluids, M. J. Ciaraldi, Professor of Practice; chology, decision-making, interpersonal continuum mechanics. M.S., Rochester Institute of Technology, interactions. University of Rochester; Robotics educa- X. Huang, Associate Professor; Ph.D., tion, software engineering, real-time and Virginia Tech; Reconfigurable comput- embedded systems. ing, VLSI integrated circuits, networked embedded systems.

Return to Table of Contents Robotics Engineering 135 E. Torres-Jaza, Assistant Professor; Ph.D., prospective project topic before the end of aid the student’s research program. An oral Massachusetts Institute of Technology, the first semester in the program. The plan presentation before the Thesis Commit- 2007. Biomimetric framework for robot- of study must be approved by the student’s tee and a general audience is required. In ics – developing algorithms related to advisor and the RBE Graduate Program addition, all WPI thesis regulations must robots in contact with their environment, Committee, and must include the follow- be followed. microfabrication of dense arrays of sensors ing minimum requirements: Non-Thesis Options (especially tactile), design of compliant 1. Robotics Core (15 credits)* actuators, and fabrication of robotic ele- As an alternative to a research-based thesis, ments (such as arms and legs). • Foundations (9 credits) students may elect a project or practicum RBE 500 Foundations of Robotics to include a design/research component Program of Study RBE/ME 501 Robot Dynamics in their graduate program. For an M.S. RBE 502 Robot Control M.S. Program Degree in Robotics Engineering this can • Core (6 credits) be accomplished by completing a 6 credit The Robotics Engineering Program offers capstone design project RBE 598 or a Any RBE 500+ other than the above. the M.S. degree with thesis and non-thesis practicum RBE 596. The capstone design (*) At least 15 credits are needed. Any (course-work only) options. The program must demonstrate significant graduate- additional credits accrued from these strives to educate men and women to: level work involving Robotics Engineering. courses will be counted as Electives. • Have a solid understanding of the The capstone design project must include fundamentals of Computer Science, 2. Engineering Context (3 credits): substantial analysis and/or design related Electrical and Computer Engineering, 3 credits hours selected from the follow- to robotics engineering and will conclude Mathematics, and Mechanical Engineer- ing courses: with a substantial written report submitted ing underlying robotic systems. ETR 592 New Venture Management to the advisor. • Have an awareness of the management and Entrepreneurship A practicum provides students an oppor- and systems contexts within which MIS 576 Project Management tunity to put into practice the principles robotic systems are engineered. MKT 563 Marketing of Emerging that have been studied in previous courses. Technologies • Develop advanced knowledge in selected It will generally be conducted off campus OBC 511 Interpersonal and areas of robotics, culminating in a cap- and will involve a real-world robotics- Leadership Skills for Technological stone research or design experience. engineering situation. Overall conduct Managers of the practicum will be supervised by Admission Requirements OIE 546 Managing Technological a WPI RBE faculty member; an on-site Students will be eligible for admission to Innovation liaison will direct day-to-day activity. For a the program if they have earned an under- Courses prefixed by SYS at the 500 student from industry, the practicum may graduate degree in Computer Engineering, level or above. be sponsored by his or her employer. The Computer Science, Electrical Engineering, 3. Capstone/Thesis (6-9 credits): project must include substantial analysis Mechanical Engineering or a related field A 6 credit hour capstone design project/ and/or design related to robotics engineer- from an accredited university consistent practicum or a 9 credit hour thesis. ing and will conclude with a substantial with the WPI graduate catalog. Admission written report submitted to the advisor will also be open to qualified WPI students 4. Electives (3-6 credits): and on-site liaison. who opt for a five-year Bachelors-Masters Sufficient course work selected from program, with the undergraduate major in courses at the 500 level or above with a Transfer Credit Computer Science, Electrical & Computer prefix of RBE, CS, ECE, MA, ME, or A student may petition for permission Engineering, Mechanical Engineering, SYS to total 30 credit hours. Courses at to use graduate courses taken at other Robotics Engineering or a related field. the 4000 level may also be taken as elec- accredited, degree-granting institutions Admission decisions will be made by the tives with the prior approval of the RBE to satisfy RBE graduate degree require- Robotics Engineering Graduate Program Graduate Committee. ments. A maximum of 12 graduate Committee based on all of the factors Thesis Option credits, with a grade of B or better, may be satisfied by courses taken elsewhere and presented in the application. The M.S. thesis consists of 9 credit hours not used to satisfy degree requirements at of work, normally spread over at least one other institutions. Petitions are subject to Degree Requirements academic year. A thesis committee will be approval by the RBE Graduate Commit- set up during the first semester of thesis For the M.S. tee, and are then filed with the Registrar. work. This committee will be selected The M.S. program in Robotics Engineer- Transfer credit will not be allowed for by the student in consultation with the ing requires 30 credit hours of work. undergraduate-level courses taken at other major advisor and will consist of the thesis Students may select a non-thesis option, institutions. In general, transfer credit will advisor, who must be a full-time WPI RBE which requires a 6-credit capstone design/ not be allowed for any WPI undergradu- faculty member, and two other faculty practicum, or a thesis option which ate courses used to fulfill undergraduate members, at least one of whom is a WPI requires a 9-credit thesis. All entering degree requirements; however, note that RBE faculty member, whose expertise will students must submit a plan of study there are exceptions in the case of students identifying the courses to be taken and a enrolled in the BS/MS program.

136 Robotics Engineering Return to Table of Contents A student with one or more WPI master’s courses and 3 credit hours of Systems En- Summary of Credit Requirements degrees who is seeking an RBE master’s gineering courses. This requirement may degree from WPI may petition to apply up be satisfied as part of the M.S. in Robotics Enter Enter to 9 prior credits toward satisfying require- Engineering or other M.S. program. All with with ments for the subsequent degree. Petitions entering students must submit a plan of M.S. B.S. are subject to approval by the RBE Gradu- study identifying the courses to be taken M.S. Degree Requirements – 36 ate Committee. and a prospective research area before the Coursework 12 12 end of the first semester in the program. Students who take graduate courses at Additional Courses/Research 18 12 The plan of study must be approved by WPI prior to formal admission to the RBE the student’s advisor and the RBE Gradu- Dissertation 30 30 graduate program may petition to apply ate Program Committee, and must include up to 9 graduate credits to fulfill the RBE Total 60 90 the following minimum requirements. graduate degree requirements. Once again, Diagnostic Examination petitions are subject to approval by the For students proceeding from Master’s Doctoral students must complete the RBE Graduate Committee. to Ph.D. degree, the 60 credits should be Diagnostic Examination requirement distributed as follows: by the end of their second year of Ph.D. For the Ph.D. 1. Coursework, including Special Topics study. The Diagnostic Examination, which The Ph.D. program in Robotics Engineer- and Independent Study (12 credits). If evaluates each student’s level of academic ing strives to educate men and women to: not already included in the M.S. degree, preparation and identifies any shortcom- • Have an advanced understanding of the credits must include: ings in the student’s background, consists the Computer Science, Electrical and - Management: 3 credit hours at the of two parts: a Written Examination and Computer Engineering, Mathematics, 500 level or above. Directed Research. and Mechanical Engineering underlying - Systems Engineering: 3 credit hours robotic systems. selected from courses prefixed by SYS Written Examination • Apply tools and concepts from Manage- at the 500 level or above. The Written Examination part of the ment and Systems Engineering to realize 2. RBE 699 Dissertation Research (30 Diagnostic Examination consists of the robotics systems and exercise profes- credits). following elements: sional leadership. 3. Other. Additional coursework, Indepen- 1. A basic skills examination which covers • Make significant research contributions dent Study, RBE 598 Directed Research - Engineering mathematics, and in selected areas of robotics. or RBE 699 Dissertation Research (18 - Principles of Computer Science, Admission Requirements credits). Electrical and Computer Engineering, Students will be eligible for admission to For students proceeding from Bachelor’s and Mechanical Engineering at the the program if they have earned an under- to Ph.D. degree, the 90 credits should be advanced undergraduate level. graduate or graduate degree in Computer distributed as follows: 2. Advanced skills examinations in two Engineering, Computer Science, Electrical 1. RBE M.S. Degree Requirements (36 areas selected from Computer Science, Engineering, Mechanical Engineering, credits). Electrical and Computer Engineering, Robotics Engineering, or a related field 2. Coursework, including Special Topics Mechanical Engineering, and Systems from an accredited university. Applicants and Independent Study (12 credits). Engineering at the graduate level. must supply a Statement of Purpose, three 3. RBE 699 Dissertation Research (30 All students must take the basic skills ex- Letters of Recommendation, and Gradu- credits). amination. The areas of the advanced skills ate Record Examination scores. The GRE 4. Other. Additional coursework, Indepen- examination are selected with the approval requirement may be waived for WPI dent Study, RBE 598 Directed Research of the Research Advisor. The Written students and alumni, or at the discretion or RBE 699 Dissertation Research (12 Examination is administered and evaluated of the Robotics Engineering Graduate credits). by the Graduate Committee. Program Committee when supplied with additional supporting materials such as Professional Development The student may pass, fail, or be required published papers or a record of work expe- Requirement to do additional work. This result is rience. Admission decisions will be made A doctoral candidate must demonstrate determined by the Graduate Committee by the Robotics Engineering Graduate professional development by participat- in consultation with the Research Advi- Program Committee based on all of the ing in an activity requiring responsibility sor. A grade of Pass concludes the Written information presented in the application. and leadership. Sample activities include: Examination. A grade of Fail results in dis- corporate internship, visiting position missal from the Ph.D. program. A grade Degree Requirements at an external research laboratory, co- of Conditional Pass requires the student to The Ph.D. program in Robotics Engi- advising a WPI Junior or Senior project complete any remedial work identified by neering requires 60 credit hours of work (IQP or MQP). The activity must be the Graduate Committee and the Research beyond the M.S. degree or 90 credit hours pre- and post-approved by the Graduate Advisor before re-evaluation. Remedial beyond the B.S degree. Coursework must Committee. work may include retaking identified sec- include 3 credit hours of Management tions of the Written Examination.

Return to Table of Contents Robotics Engineering 137 Directed Research The Dissertation Proposal must be defend- Faculty The Directed Research part of the Di- ed in a public presentation, immediately This is a joint program administered agnostic Examination tests the student’s followed by private questioning from the by the Computer Science, Electrical & ability to conduct research. The student Dissertation Committee. The Dissertation Computer Engineering, and Mechani- must register for one semester comprising Committee then determines the outcome cal Engineering departments, comprising at least three credits of Directed Research of the Proposal Defense. It may accept faculty members who are interested in ro- (RBE 598) with the Research Advisor. the proposal, reject the proposal and botics graduate education and research and recommend pursuit of a different topic, Before the Directed Research begins, the who hold advanced degrees. The Robotics or require the student do additional work student must notify the Graduate Com- Engineering undergraduate and graduate before reconsidering the proposal. The mittee that it is part of the Diagnostic Ex- programs share the Director and Associate time frame for the student to do additional amination and identify the general area of Directors. work on the Dissertation Proposal is deter- the work. The Graduate Committee will mined by the Dissertation Committee. then approve a Co-advisor for the Directed BS/MS in Robotics Research. At the end of the Directed Dissertation Engineering Research semester, the student will submit All Ph.D. students must complete and The requirements for the M.S. in Robot- a written report and deliver a presentation orally defend a Dissertation prepared ics Engineering are structured so that about the research. The Research Advisor under the supervision of the Research undergraduate students are able to pursue and Co-advisor will evaluate the work to Advisor. The research described in the Dis- a five-year Bachelors/Masters program, in determine if the student has shown suffi- sertation must be original and constitute which the Bachelors degree is awarded in cient research potential to become a Ph.D. a contribution to knowledge in the major any major offered at WPI and the Masters Candidate. field of the candidate. degree is awarded in Robotics Engineering. The student may pass, fail, or be required The Dissertation must be defended in a WPI allows the double counting of up to to do additional work. This result is public presentation, immediately followed 12 credits for students pursuing a 5-year determined by the Advisors. A grade of by private questioning from the Disserta- Bachelors-Masters program. This overlap Pass concludes the Directed Research. A tion Committee. The Dissertation Com- can be achieved through the following grade of Fail results in dismissal from the mittee then determines the outcome of the mechanisms: Ph.D. program. A grade of Conditional Dissertation Defense, certifying the quality • Up to three graduate courses in RBE, Pass requires the student to complete any and originality of the research, and the CS, ECE, or ME taken by the student remedial work before re-evaluation. The satisfactory execution of the Dissertation. may be counted towards meeting the result is independent of the actual project It may accept the Dissertation with or engineering/science/elective require- grade. without revisions, reject the Dissertation, ments of the student’s undergraduate Upon successful completion of the Writ- or require the student do additional work major, subject to approval by his/her ten Examination and Directed Research before reconsidering the Dissertation. The major department. parts of the Diagnostic Examination, the time frame for the student to complete student becomes a “Ph.D. Candidate”. additional work is determined by the Dis- • Up to two 4000-level undergraduate sertation Committee. courses taken by the student in his/her Dissertation undergraduate major program may be Dissertation Committee Admission counted towards the requirements of the Within one semester after the successful Students will be eligible for admission to Masters Degree in Robotics Engineer- completion of the Diagnostic Examina- the program if they have earned an under- ing if they can be placed in one of the tion, the student, in consultation with the graduate or graduate degree in Computer requirement categories listed above and Research Advisor, assembles a Dissertation Engineering, Computer Science, Electrical are approved by the Robotics Engineer- Committee. The committee consists of Engineering, Mechanical Engineering, ing Graduate Program Committee. the Research Advisor and three additional Robotics Engineering, or a related field • Up to three credits can be earned to- members, at least one of whom must be from an accredited university. Applicants wards fulfillment of the capstone design from outside the WPI RBE Program. The must supply a Statement of Purpose, three requirement by double counting a se- Dissertation Committee is responsible for Letters of Recommendation, and Gradu- nior undergraduate project if it involves approving the Dissertation Proposal and ate Record Examination scores. The GRE substantial use of Robotics Engineering the Dissertation. requirement may be waived for WPI at an advanced level, subject to approval students and alumni, or at the discretion by the Robotics Engineering Gradu- Dissertation Proposal of the Robotics Engineering Graduate ate Program Committee. In this case, The Dissertation Proposal describes the Program Committee when supplied with students may satisfy the capstone design student’s proposed research. The Dis- additional supporting materials such as requirement by completing 3 credits sertation Proposal should be sufficiently published papers or a record of work expe- of capstone design project RBE 598 detailed to convince the Dissertation rience. Admission decisions will be made or practicum RBE 596, not necessar- Committee of the student’s understand- by the Robotics Engineering Graduate ily related to the senior undergraduate ing of the problem domain along with the Program Committee based on all of the project. significance of the proposed work. information presented in the application.

138 Robotics Engineering Return to Table of Contents Summary of Credit Requirements RBE 526/CS 526. Human-Robot Interaction MS Thesis MS Non-Thesis BS/MS This course focuses on human-robot interaction Robotics Core 15 15 15 and social robot learning, exploring the leading re- Engineering Context 3 3 3 search, design principles and technical challenges we face in developing robots capable of operating Electives 3 6 6 in real-world human environments. The course Thesis 9 — — will cover a range of multidisciplinary topics, Capstone Design / Practicum — 6 6 including physical embodiment, mixed-initiative interaction, multi-modal interfaces, human-robot Double Count — — (12) teamwork, learning algorithms, aspects of social Total 30 30 18 cognition, and long-term interaction. These topics will be pursued through independent reading, class discussion, and a final project. (Prerequisites: RBE 502. Robot Control Mature programming skills and at least under- Course Descriptions This course demonstrates the synergy between the graduate level knowledge of Artificial Intelligence, All courses are 3 credits unless otherwise noted. control theory and robotics through applications such as CS 4341. No hardware experience is RBE 500. Foundations of Robotics and provides an in-depth coverage of control required.) of manipulators and mobile robots. Topics may Mathematical foundations and principles of RBE 540. Sensitive Robotics processing sensor information in robotic systems. include kinematic and dynamic models, trajec- tory and motion planning, feedback control, This course introduces an approach to robot- Topics include an introduction to probabilistic ics called Sensitive Robotics. This approach concepts related to sensors, sensor signal process- compliance and force control, impedance control, control of redundant manipulators, control of allows robots to perform complex tasks by using ing, multi-sensor control systems and optimal large array of sensors that provide information estimation. The material presented will focus on underactuated robots, adaptive robot control, integrated force and motion control, digital relevant to the task at hand. The course studies the types of control problems encountered when the hardware and software implications of this a robot must operate in an environment where implementation of control laws, model identifica- tion and parameter estimation techniques. Course approach. At the hardware level, we discuss the sensor noise and/or tracking errors are significant. mechanical and electrical characteristic of the Techniques for assessing the stability, controllabil- projects will emphasize modeling, simulation and practical implementation of control systems for sensors and actuators, the design consideration ity and expected accuracy of multi-sensor control of arms and limbs, and the hardware architecture and tracking systems will be presented. Lab robotic applications. (Prerequisites: Linear algebra; Differential equations; Linear systems and control alternatives. At the software level, we discuss the projects will involve processing live and synthetic implications that the hardware changes have in the data, robot simulation, and projects involving the theory as in ECE 504 or consent of the instruc- tor.) software architecture, and the control algorithms. control of robot platforms. (Prerequisites: Differ- Machine learning techniques, needed to deal with ential Equations (MA 2051 or equivalent), Linear RBE 510/ME 5204. Multi-Robot Systems large array of sensors, are also covered. The case Algebra (MA 2071 or equivalent) and the ability 2 credits of robotic manipulation (sensitive manipulation) to program in a high-level language.) This course covers the foundation and principles is introduced as an example of this approach and RBE/ME 501. Robot Dynamics of multi-robot systems. The course will cover the it is expanded to walking, flying and swimming Foundations and principles of robotic manipula- development of the field and provide an overview robots. (Prerequisites: RBE 500) on different control architectures (deliberative, tion. Topics include computational models of RBE/CS 549. Computer Vision reactive, behavior-based and hybrid control), objects and motion, the mechanics of robotic This course examines current issues in the com­ control topologies, and system configurations manipulators, the structure of manipulator control puter implementation of visual perception. Topics (cellular automata, modular robotic systems, systems, planning and programming of robot include image formation, edge detection, seg- mobile sensor networks, swarms, heterogeneous actions. The focus of this class is on the kinemat- mentation, shape-from-shading, motion, stereo, systems). Topics may include, but are not limited ics and programming of robotic mechanisms. texture analysis, pattern classification and object to, multi-robot control and connectivity, path Important topics also include the dynamics, recognition. We will discuss various representa- planning and localization, sensor fusion and robot control, sensor and effector design, and automatic tions for visual information, including sketches informatics, task-level control, and robot software planning methods for robots. The fundamen- and intrinsic images. (Prerequisites: CS 534, system design and implementation. These topics tal techniques apply to arms, mobile robots, CS 543, CS 545, or the equivalent of one of these will be pursued through independent reading, active sensor platforms, and all other computer- courses.) controlled kinematic linkages. The primary ap- class discussion, and a course project. The course plications include robotic arms and mobile robots will culminate in a group project focusing on a and lab projects would involve programming of collaborative/cooperative multi-robot system. The representative robots. An end of term team project project may be completed through simulation would allow students to program robots to partici- or hands-on experience with available robotic pate in challenges or competitions. (Prerequisite: platforms. Groups will present their work and RBE 500 or equivalent.) complete two professional-quality papers in IEEE format. (Prerequisites: Linear algebra, differential equations, linear systems, controls, and mature programming skills, or consent of the instructor.) Students cannot receive credit for this course if they have taken the Special Topics (ME 593S) version of the same course.

Return to Table of Contents Robotics Engineering 139 RBE 580/ME 5205. Biomedical Robotics RBE 596. Robotics Engineering Practicum RBE 598. Directed Research 2 credits This practicum provides an opportunity to put For M.S. or Ph.D. students wishing to gain This course will provide an overview of a multi- into practice the principles studied in previous research experience peripheral to their thesis topic, tude of biomedical applications of robotics. Ap- courses. It will generally be conducted off campus M.S. students undertaking a capstone design plications covered include: image-guided surgery, and will involve real-world robotics engineering. project, or doctoral students wishing to obtain percutaneous therapy, localization, robot-assisted Overall conduct of the practicum will be super- research credit prior to admission to candidacy. surgery, simulation and augmented reality, labora- vised by a WPI RBE faculty member; an on-site (Prerequisite: Consent of research advisor.) tory and operating room automation, robotic liaison will direct day-to-day activity. For a student RBE 599. Thesis Research rehabilitation, and socially assistive robots. Specific from industry, an internship may be sponsored by For master’s students wishing to obtain research subject matter includes: medical imaging, coor- his or her employer. The project must include sub- credit toward the thesis. (Prerequisite: Consent of dinate systems and representations in 3D space, stantial analysis and/or design related to Robotics thesis advisor.) robot kinematics and control, validation, haptics, Engineering and will conclude with a substantial teleoperation, registration, calibration, image pro- written report. A public oral presentation must RBE 699. Dissertation Research cessing, tracking, and human-robot interaction. also be made, to both the host organization and For Ph.D. students wishing to obtain a research Topics will be discussed in lecture format followed a committee consisting of the supervising faculty credit towards the dissertation. Prerequisite: by interactive discussion of related literature. The member, the on-site liaison and one additional Consent of research advisor. course will culminate in a team project covering WPI faculty member. This committee will verify one or more of the primary course focus areas. successful completion of the internship. (Prerequi- (Prerequisites: Linear algebra, ME/RBE 501 or site: Consent of practicum faculty advisor.) equivalent.) Students cannot receive credit for this RBE 597. Independent Study course if they have taken the Special Topics (ME Approved study of a special subject or topics se- 593U) version of the same course. lected by the student to meet his or her particular RBE 595. Special Topics requirements or interests. (Prerequisite: B.S. in Arranged by individual faculty with special exper- CS, ECE, ME, RBE or equivalent and consent of tise, these courses survey fundamentals in areas advisor.) that are not covered by the regular Robotics Engi- neering course offerings. Exact course descriptions are disseminated by the Robotics Engineering Pro- gram well in advance of the offering. (Prerequisite: Consent of instructor.

140 Robotics Engineering Return to Table of Contents STEM for Educators

Faculty Program of Study Master of Science in Majors in the STEM for Educators pro- Physics for Educators Learning Sciences and Technologies gram are designed specifically for middle This degree blends together an emphasis J. Gobert, Associate Professor and Co- school, high school and community on courses in physics content with core Director; Ph.D., University of Toronto; college in-service educators. The majors assessment and evaluation theory courses the design of computer-based systems for emphasize coursework in the content area and a participant-designed project. The science learning and assessment, intelligent (math or physics) along with classes in physics content courses are designed tutoring for science, individual differences. core assessment and evaluation theory, and to give educators a deep but applicable N. T. Heffernan, Associate Professor and a participant-designed project. Educators understanding of physics that both make Co-Director; Ph.D., Carnegie Mellon will find that this combination of course- advanced physics topics easily accessible to University. Intelligent tutoring agents, work held during afternoon and evening educators and appropriate to their roles of artificial intelligence, cognitive modeling, times will both fit their needs as busy guiding their students. The physics con- machine learning. professionals and broaden knowledge and tent is organized into three parts: Depth (e.g. Mechanics and Topics in Modern I. Arroyo, Assistant Professor; Ed.D., skills that will support what they do in Physics), Methods (e.g. Computational M.S., University of Massachusetts, Am- their classrooms. The program may satisfy and Experimental Physics Methods), and herst; learning with novel technologies; Massachusetts Professional Licensure Breadth (e.g. Research Experience for Edu- multimedia learning; intelligent tutoring requirements for middle and high school cators and Physics in Popular Culture). systems; wearable learning and e-Textiles; educators. Support for degree candidates extends learner characteristics and their relation- Master of Science in beyond the specific coursework and ship to learning; connection between affect Mathematics for Educators projects as participants will become part and learning; educational data mining and of a network of physicists which ranges student modeling. This degree blends together an emphasis on courses in mathematics content with from local individuals to a much broader J. E. Beck, Assistant Professor; Ph.D., core assessment and evaluation theory community. University of Massachusetts, Amherst; courses and a participant-designed project. machine learning, educational data The math content courses, designed for Admission Requirements mining, intelligent tutoring systems, educators, offer a solid foundation in Candidates for any major in the Master human learning and problem solving. areas such as geometry, algebra, modeling, in STEM for Educators programs must discrete math and statistics. They addition- have a Bachelor’s degree, a background Mathematics: ally include the study of modern applica- equivalent to at least a minor in one of J. Goulet, Teaching Professor and tions. Participants have the opportunity to the STEM areas of interest and either a Coordinator, Master of Mathematics for develop materials, based on coursework, teacher certification in a STEM field or a Educators Program; Ph.D., Rensselaer which may be used in their own class- full-time teaching position in one of these Polytechnic Institute, 1976; applications rooms. Technology is introduced when- disciplines. Applicants can be teaching at of linear algebra, cross departmental course ever possible to help educators become any grade level. development, project development, K-12 familiar with the options available for use relations with colleges, mathematics of in classrooms. Examples of this include Degree Requirements digital and analog sound and music. Geometer’s Sketchpad and the TI CBL for Each of the programs within STEM for B. Servatius, Professor; Ph.D., Syracuse motion and heat. Educators requires 30 credit hours of University, 1987; combinatorics, matroid *For information about the Master of work. As part of this, participants must and graph theory, structural topology, Mathematics for Educators program, take 9 credits in core assessment and evalu- geometry, history and philosophy of please look under the Mathematical ation theory, 15 credits in the content area mathematics. Sciences page. specific to the major, and 6 credits for the participant-designed project. All courses Physics in these programs are based on a three- G. S. Iannacchione, Associate Professor semester year where most participants take and Department Head; Ph.D., Kent State one to two classes per semester. University; soft condensed matter physics/ complex fluids, liquid-crystals, calorimetry, and order-disorder phenomena. F. Dick, Assistant Teaching Professor; Ph.D., Worcester Polytechnic Institute; nuclear and particle physics, astrophysics and planetary science.

Return to Table of Contents STEM for Educators 141 Course Requirements Math Content Courses Physics Content Courses 15 credit hours of content area courses are The physics content, a total of 15 credit Core Assessment and Evaluation required. Full course descriptions are listed hours, is satisfied with 8 credits in physics Theory Courses under mathematics. depth, 4 credits in physics methods, and To fulfill the 9 credits in core assessment 3 credits in physics breadth. Full course MME 518 – Geometrical Concepts (3 cr) and evaluation theory, participants must descriptions are listed under physics. take a minimum of one course from each MME 522 – Applications of Calculus Depth Courses of the three sections below. Full course (2 cr) MPE 510 – Classical Mechanics (2 cr) descriptions are listed under the appropri- MME 523 – Analysis with Applications ate department. (2 cr) MPE 520 – Electrodynamics (2 cr) (a) Learning Theory, Environments, and MME/SEME 524 – Probability, Statistics MPE 530 – Modern Physics (2 cr) Cognition: and Data Analysis I (2 cr) MPE 540 – Differential Equations in 1) SEME/PSY 501 – Foundations of Nature (2 cr) the Learning Sciences (3 cr) MME/SEME 525 – Probability, Statistics and Data Analysis II (2 cr) Methods Courses 2) SEME/PSY 502 – Educational MPE 550 – Computational Methods in Learning Environments (3 cr) MME 526 – Linear Models I (2 cr) Physics (2 cr) 3) SEME/PSY 504 – Meta-cognition, MME 527 – Linear Models II (2 cr) MPE 560 – Experimental Methods in Motivation, and Affect (3 cr) MME 528 – Mathematical Modeling and Physics (2 cr) (b) Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis Problem Solving (2 cr) Breadth Courses and Assessment: MME 529 – Numbers, Polynomials and MPE 572 – Physics Research Experience 4) SEME/MME 524 – Probability, Algebraic Structures (2 cr) for Teachers (3 cr) Statistics and Data Analysis I (2 cr) MME 531 – Discrete Mathematics (3 cr) MPE 574 – Physics for Citizens and 5) SEME/MME 525 – Probability, (Note that MME/SEME-524/525 are ­Leaders (3 cr) Statistics and Data Analysis II (2 cr) also listed under Core Assessment and MPE 576 – Physics in Popular Culture 6) SEME/CS 565 – User Modeling Evaluation Theory. Only one of these two (3 cr) (3 cr) courses can be double counted towards the content area.) 7) SEME/CS 566 – Graphical Models Culminating Project Courses for Reasoning Under Uncertainty Six (6) credit hours are required. Full (3 cr) course descriptions are listed under 8) SEME/CS 567 – Empirical mathematics. ­Methods for Human-Centered SEME 602/MME 592 – Project Computing (3 cr) ­Preparation/Design (2 cr) (c) Current Education and Education SEME 604/MME 594 – Project Research Issues: ­Implementation (2 cr) 9) SEME/MME 562 – Issues in SEME 606/MME 596 – Project Analysis ­Education (3 cr) and Report (2 cr) 10) SEME/PSY 503 – Research ­Methods for the Learning Sciences (3 cr) 11) SEME/CS 568 – Artificial I­ntelligence for Adaptive ­Educational Tech. (3 cr)

142 STEM for Educators Return to Table of Contents System Dynamics

Faculty Program of Study a variety of elective choices in system dynamics covering methodological topics O. V. Pavlov, Associate Professor; Ph.D., The System Dynamics Program offers a and application areas. Students must work University of Southern California, 2000; graduate certificate in System Dynamics, with a faculty advisor to delineate a Plan economics of information systems, politi- a master of science in System Dynamics, of Study for their certificate program. To cal economy, system dynamics, compu- and an interdisciplinary master of science be counted towards the certificate, the tational economics, complex economic in systems modeling. Individuals may also plan must be developed no later than the dynamics; [email protected]. utilize WPI’s interdisciplinary Ph.D. pro- completion of the second course. Further M. J. Radzicki, Associate Professor; gram to create a unique doctoral program details about the certificate requirements Ph.D., University of Notre Dame du Lac, incorporating system dynamics research. are available at 1985; economic growth, environmental Through these programs, graduate http://cpe.wpi.edu/online/sd-gradcert.html and energy policy, fiscal and monetary students create and learn from their own policy, combining post keynesian eco- models in a variety of research areas. Admission nomics and institutional economics with Graduate Certificate Program Students will be eligible for admission system dynamics; [email protected] into the graduate certificate program if in System Dynamics they have earned an undergraduate degree K. Saeed, Professor; Ph.D., Massachusetts System dynamics is a computer simula- from an accredited university consistent Institute of Technology, 1981; sustainable tion-based approach to the construction with the WPI Graduate Catalog. Students economic development, system dynamics; and analysis of mathematical models of should have a bachelor’s degree in sci- organizational development, political economic, social, and physical systems. ence or engineering. Students with other economy; health care delivery; saeed@wpi. System dynamics modeling is applied backgrounds will be considered based on edu in a variety of application areas such as their interest, formal education, and work biology, ecology, economics, business, experience. Admission decisions will be Adjunct Faculty public policy, etc. There is a strong and made by the System Dynamic graduate K. Chichakly, Ph.D., University of Ver- growing demand for graduate-level train- program committee based on all factors mont; Lead Programmer, ISEE Systems ing in systems modeling in industry and presented in the application, including R. Eberlein, Ph.D., Massachusetts Insti- government organizations. To meet this prior academic performance, quality of tute of Technology; consultant, Astutesd need WPI has developed a program of professional experience, letters of recom- several on-line graduate classes in system mendation, etc. A. Ford, Professor; Ph.D., Washington dynamics. State University; regional planning Master of Science The System Dynamics Program offers J. M. Lyneis, Ph.D., University of a graduate certificate program to create in System Dynamics Michigan, 1974; system dynamics, project meaningful training in system dynamics The Masters Degree program in System dynamics and management, economic dy- for people who may not seek a graduate Dynamics prepares students for the profes- namics, market and industry behavior, (de) degree, or who might wish to acquire sional practice of system dynamics com- regulation, forecasting, business strategy; basic training in the area prior to puter simulation modeling, which includes [email protected] entering a degree program. This graduate an understanding of the endogenous J. Morecroft, Ph.D., Massachusetts Insti- certificate can be pursued entirely on line feedback relationships that cause observed tute of Technology, 1979; Senior Fellow, through courses implemented by WPI’s patterns of behavior in socio-technical- Management Science and Operations, Corporate Online Graduate Programs. economic systems, and knowledge of the London Business School For information about the ADLN option, use of simulation modeling for experimen- please contact Diane Poirier (dpoirier@ tal analysis aimed at solving a variety of K. Warren, Ph.D., London Business wpi.edu). The structure and requirements problems in the private and public policy School, 1995; Chairman, Global Strategy for the program are detailed below. domains. This training will enable students Dynamics to look across disciplinary boundaries to Requirements discern the impacts of well-intentioned The Graduate Certificate in System policies and technological solutions Dynamics consists of 15 credit hours of holistically. It will also prepare students graduate study (5 courses). to understand the policy implementation process in various organizational settings Students take one or both of our Foun- and create confidence in the success of dation Courses (SD550 and SD551) policy interventions. Many companies are depending on their experience, and fill currently supporting the training of their out the remainder of their program with

Return to Table of Contents System Dynamics 143 middle level managers in systems thinking BS/MS in System Dynamics Systems modeling subsumes both formal and system dynamics because they regard The requirements for the proposed and computer simulation-based ap- it as essential for senior management roles Masters degree in System Dynamics are proaches to the construction and analysis in industry and the public sector. The structured so that undergraduate stu- of mathematical models of economic, WPI Masters in System Dynamics will dents would be able to pursue a five year social, and physical systems. It builds on offer an enhanced level of training for such Bachelors/Masters degree, in which the methodologies such as feedback control roles. Combined with an undergraduate Bachelors degree is awarded in any major theory, optimization, numerical methods degree in engineering, the life sciences, the offered at WPI and the Masters degree is and computer simulation. Moreover, humanities, or social science, a Masters awarded in System Dynamics. systems modeling is applied in a variety Degree in System Dynamics will enable a of application areas such as management, decision maker to more fully understand WPI allows the double counting of up to biology, ecology, economics, etc. Students cross-disciplinary issues, thus making him 12 credits for students pursuing a 5-year of systems modeling study not only the or her an innovative contributor to their Bachelors-Masters Degree program. This basic courses in System Dynamics, but also respective work settings. The WPI Masters overlap can be achieved through the fol- explore its methodological underpinnings Degree in System Dynamics may be pur- lowing mechanisms: in other disciplines and apply the methods sued on-line. For more information, go to • Up to two system dynamics graduate to other disciplines, preparing them to http://cpe.wpi.edu/online/sd-master.html. courses taken by the student may be mobilize the modeling concepts they learn counted towards meeting the social to problem solving in the real world. Degree Requirements science requirement of the student’s To meet this need, the departments of The. M.S. degree in system dynamics undergraduate major. Mathematical Sciences and Social Science consists of 30 credit hours of course work • Up to four graduate courses taken by & Policy Studies have established an (10 courses). At least 21 of these credits the student may be counted towards interdisciplinary master’s degree in systems must be in system dynamics. Courses meeting the mathematics/engineering/ modeling. This interdisciplinary 30 credit- are selected from three bins: foundation science/elective requirements of the stu- hour program utilizing courses taught in courses (6 credits), methodological courses dent’s undergraduate major, subject to Mathematical Sciences, System Dynamics, (9-12 credits), and application courses (6-9 approval by his/her major department. and electives taught in engineering, science credits). The remaining 9 credits may be and management departments. additional system dynamics courses or may • Up to two 4000 level undergraduate courses taken by the student in his/her be taken from a list of approved courses Admission in mathematics, organizational behavior, undergraduate major program may be Students should have a bachelor’s degree in finance, and public planning. Up to 6 counted towards the requirements of science or engineering. Students with other credit hours my be completed as super- the Masters Degree in System Dynam- backgrounds will be considered based vised project work. All entering students ics if they can be placed in one of the on their interest, formal education, and must submit a plan of study identifying requirement categories listed above work experience. Many students pursuing courses to be taken before the end of the and approved by the System Dynamics a 5-year bachelors/masters program also first semester in the program. The plan Program Director. enroll for a masters in systems modeling of study must be approved by the faculty • Up to three credits can be earned by along with a bachelors in a major of their advisor. Further details about the M.S. double counting a junior and/or senior choice to prepare for meeting the chal- requirements are available at undergraduate project if it involves lenges of their future careers. http://cpe.wpi.edu/online/sd-master.html substantial use of system dynamics at an advanced level, subject to approval by Degree Requirements Admission the System Dynamics graduate program Students must complete 30 credit hours Students will be eligible for admission committee. of coursework: 15 credit hours in system to the program if they have earned an dynamics and 15 credit hours in mathe- undergraduate degree from an accredited Interdisciplinary Master’s matical modeling and an applications area university consistent with the WPI gradu- Degree in Systems Modeling (e.g. industrial engineering, management, ate catalog. Admission will also be open There is a strong and growing demand infrastructure planning, telecommunica- to qualified WPI students who opt for a for graduate-level training in systems tions planning, power systems). Up to 6 five-year Bachelors-Masters Degree, with modeling. Interest in system dynamics of these latter credit hours may be done the undergraduate major based on a stu- and formal mathematical modeling in as supervised project work. New students dent’s interests. Admission decisions will industry and government organizations must submit a Plan of Study identifying be made by the System Dynamics graduate increases every year. Many employees of the courses to be taken and a prospective program committee based on all of the fac- these organizations, and those seeking project topic before the end of the first tors presented in the application. career changes, desire to improve their skills in these methodologies. In addition, semester in the program. If the student has these modeling methods are growing as a earned a Graduate Certificate in System research tool and many prospective Ph.D. Dynamics from WPI, the Plan of Study students desire to build skills in them. must be submitted with the application materials. The Plan of Study must be ap- proved by the administering faculty who will serve as advisors.

144 System Dynamics Return to Table of Contents Interdisciplinary Doctorate becoming a doctoral candidate; and SD 551. Modeling and Experimental in System Dynamics fourth, defending the dissertation. The Analysis of Complex Problems requirements stated below apply to This course deals with the hands on detail related The System Dynamics Program offers students already having a master’s degree to analysis of complex problems and design of doctoral studies under the WPI policy for change through building models and and are focused on 60 credits of graduate interdisciplinary category described on experimenting with them. Topics covered include: work beyond the MS degree. page 89. slicing complex problems and constructing refer- Summary of Post-Master’s Degree ence modes; going from a dynamic hypothesis Administering Faculty to a formal model and organization of complex Credits models; specification of parameters and graphical Interdisciplinary doctoral programs involv- Graduate coursework functions; experimentations for model under- ing System Dynamics have been formed in Credits: 18 max standing, confidence building, policy design and coordination with faculty in the ME, CS, Pre-qualifying exam coursework policy implementation. Modeling examples will CEE, ECE, and MA departments. draw largely from public policy agendas. (Prereq- Graduate coursework uisites: SD 550 System Dynamics Foundation: Admission Credits: 6 min Managing Complexity.) Post-qualifying exam coursework Admission criteria for the doctoral program SD 552. System Dynamics for Insight are outlined on page 11. Applicants to the Dissertation The objective of this course is to help students SSPS interdisciplinary doctoral program Credits: 18 max appreciate and master system dynamics’ unique must have prior BS and MS degrees. A Post-qualifying exam, pre-candidacy way of using of computer simulation models. The GRE is required, but can be waived in exam dissertation credits course provides tools and approaches for building and learning from models. The course covers the special cases with consent of the sponsor- Dissertation use of molecules of system dynamics structure ing group. Credits: 12 min to increase model building speed and reliability. Post-candidacy exam dissertation In addition, the course covers recently developed The Doctoral Committee and eigenvalue-based techniques for analyzing models credits to make at least 30 Plan of Study as well as more traditional approaches. (Prereq- dissertation credits totally Each program of study is tailored to the uisites: SD 550 System Dynamics Foundation: Graduate coursework or Managing Complexity and SD 551 Modeling and interests of the student and the interests Experimental Analysis of Complex Problems.) of the participating faculty members. The dissertation credits first step in establishing a program is the Credits: Balance SD 553. Model Analysis and selection of a doctoral program committee Post-candidacy exam credits to make Evaluation Techniques at least 60 total credits This course focuses on analysis of models rather of no less than three faculty members, with than conceptualization and model development. at least one faculty member from each Total Post-MS Credits: 60 It provides techniques for exercising models, participating department. improving their quality and gaining added Course Descriptions insights into what models have to say about a A Plan of Study, of at least 60 credit hours, problem. Five major topics are covered: use of All courses are 3 credits unless otherwise noted. is then developed with the help of the subscripts, achieving and testing for robustness, student’s doctoral program committee SD 550. System Dynamics Foundation: use of numerical data, sensitivity analysis, and to meet the degree requirements and the Managing Complexity optimization/calibration of models. The subscripts interests of the student and the participat- Why do some businesses grow while others discussion provides techniques for dealing with ing faculty. Minimum and typical require- stagnate or decline? What causes oscillation and detail complexity by changing model equations ments for the Plan of Study are discussed amplification – the so called “bullwhip” – in but not adding additional feedback structure. Ro- bust models are achieved by using good individual below. supply chains? Why do large scale projects so commonly over overrun their budgets and sched- equation formulations and making sure that they ules? This course explores the counter-intuitive work together well though automated behavioral Requirements for the Interdisciplinary dynamics of complex organizations and how experiments. Data, especially time series data, are System Dynamics Doctorate at WPI managers can make the difference between success fundamental to finding and fixing shortcomings In addition to meeting the general require- and failure. Students learn how even small changes in model formulations. Sensitivity simulations ments of the doctoral degree at WPI, in organizational structure can produce dramatic expose the full range of behavior that a model can students in the interdisciplinary System changes in organizational behavior. Real cases and exhibit. Finally, the biggest section, dealing with optimization and calibration of models develops Dynamics doctoral program must also take computer simulation modeling combine for an in-depth examination of the feedback concept in techniques for both testing models against data a qualifying examination prior to earning complex systems. Topics include: supply chain and developing policies to achieve specified goals. 18 credit hours of work. dynamics, project dynamics, commodity cycles, Though a number of statistical issues are touched upon during the course, only a basic knowledge There are four stages toward an inter­ new product diffusion, and business growth and decline. The emphasis throughout is on the unify- of statistics and statistical hypothesis testing is disciplinary doctorate involving System ing concepts of system dynamics. required. (Prerequisites: SD 550 System Dynamics Dynamics: first, submitting an approved Foundation: Managing Complexity and SD 551 Plan of Study to the Registrar; second, Modeling and Experimental Analysis of Complex passing a qualifying examination; third, Problems, or permission of the instructor.) defending a dissertation proposal and

Return to Table of Contents System Dynamics 145 SD 554. Real World System Dynamics and recessions. Students work with selected public electric vehicles to reduce urban air pollution The In this course students tackle real-world issues policy problems relevant to the generic latent students conclude the course with a class project working with real managers on their most pressing structures discussed in the course. Pre-requisites: to improve one of the models from the text. The concerns. Many students choose to work on issues SD 550 System Dynamics Foundation: Managing improvements may be implemented with either in their own organizations. Other students have Complexity, SD 551 Modeling and Experimental the Stella or the Vensim software. (Prerequisite: select from a number of proposals put forward by Analysis of Complex Problems SD 550 System Dynamics Foundation: Managing managers from a variety of companies seeking a Complexity.) SD 558. Introduction to Agent-Based system dynamics approach to important issues. Modeling SD 562. Project Dynamics Students experience the joys (and frustrations) of The purpose of this course is to provide students This course will introduce students to the funda- helping people figure out how to better man- with an introduction to the field of agent-based mental dynamics that drive project performance, age their organizations via system dynamics. computer simulation modeling in the social sci- including the rework cycle, feedback effects, and Accordingly the course covers two important ences. The course begins with an outline of the inter-phase “knock-on” effects. Topics covered in- areas: consulting (i.e. helping managers) and the history of the field, as well as of the similarities clude dynamic project problems and their causes: system dynamics standard method - a sequence and differences between agent-based computer the rework cycle and feedback effects, knock-on of steps leading from a fuzzy “issue area” through simulation modeling and system dynamics com- effects between project phases; modeling the increasing clarity and ultimately to solution rec- puter simulation modeling. An important goal of dynamics: feedback effects, schedule pressure and ommendations. The course provides clear project the course is to provide students with guidelines staffing, schedule changes, inter-phase dependen- pacing and lots of support from the instructors for deciding when it is preferable to apply agent- cies and precedence; strategic project manage- and fellow students. It is recommend that students based modeling, and when it is preferable to ment: project planning, project preparation, risk take SD 552 Real World System Dynamics to- apply system dynamics modeling, to a particular management, project adaptation and execution ward the end of their system dynamics coursework problem. Through a series of example models and cross project learning; multi-project issues. A as it provides a natural transition from coursework homework exercises students are introduced to simple project model will be created, and used in to system dynamics practice. (Prerequisites: SD the software that is used in the course. Generally assignments to illustrate the principles of “strategic 550 System Dynamics Foundation: Managing speaking, as the course progresses students will be project management.” Case examples of different Complexity and SD 551 Modeling and introduced to increasingly complicated agent- applications will be discussed. (Prerequisite: Experimental Analysis of Complex Problems.) based models and exercises so that their modeling SD 550 System Dynamics Foundation: Managing SD 556. Strategic Modeling and Business skills will grow. The goal is to increase students’ Complexity.) Dynamics modeling skills so that they will eventually be The performance of firms and industries over able to create their own agent-based models from SD 565. Macroeconomic Dynamics There are three parts to this course. The first time rarely unfolds in the way management scratch. The remainder of the course is devoted acquaints a student with dynamic macroeconomic teams expect or intend. The purpose of strategic to examining models of socioeconomic phenom- data and the stylized facts seen in most macro- modeling and business dynamics is to investigate ena that reside within two broad categories of economic systems. Characteristics of the data dynamic complexity by better understanding how agent-based models: cellular automata models and related to economic growth, economic cycles, the parts of an enterprise operate, fit together and multi-agent models. Along the way the cross-cat- and the interactions between economic growth interact. By modeling and simulating the relation- egory, cross-disciplinary, principles of agent-based and economic cycles that are seen as particularly ships among the parts we can anticipate potential modeling (micro-level agents following simple important when viewed through the lens of problems, avoid strategic pitfalls and take steps to rules leading to macro-level complexity, adapta- system dynamics will be emphasized. The second improve performance. We study a variety of busi- tion, evolving structure, emergence, non-ergodici- acquaints a student with the basics of macroeco- ness applications covering topics such as cyclicality ty) are emphasized. nomic growth and business cycle theory. This is in manufacturing, market growth and capital SD 560. Strategy Dynamics accomplished by presenting well-known models investment. The models are deliberately small and This course provides a rigorous set of frameworks of economic growth and instability, from both the concise so their structure and formulations can be for designing a practical path to improve perfor- orthodox and heterodox perspectives, via system presented in full and used to illustrate principles mance, both in business and non-commercial dynamics. The third part attempts to enhance a of model conceptualization, equation formula- organizations. The method builds on existing student’s ability to build and critique dynamic tion and simulation analysis. We also review strategy concepts, but moves substantially beyond macroeconomic models by addressing such topics some larger models that arose from real-world them, by using the system dynamics method to as the translation of difference and differential applications including airlines, the oil industry, understand and direct performance through time. equation models into their equivalent system the chemicals industry and fast moving consumer Topics covered include: strategy, performance and dynamics representation, fitting system dynamics goods. Students work with selected business policy resources; resources and accumulation; the ‘Stra- models to macroeconomic data, and evaluating problems based on generic structures discussed in tegic Architecture’; resource development; rivalry (formally and informally) a model’s validity for the the lessons. Prerequisite: SD 550 System Dynam- and the dynamics of competition; strategy, policy purpose of theory selection. (Prerequisites: ics Foundation: Managing Complexity and information feedback; resource attributes; SD 550 System Dynamics Foundation: Managing SD 557. Latent Structures, Unintended intangible resources; strategy, capabilities and Complexity.) Consequences, and Public Policy organization; industry dynamics and scenarios. This course addresses policy resilience and unin- Case studies and models are assigned to students SS 590. Special Topics in Social Science tended consequences arising out of actions that for analysis. and Policy Studies are not cognizant of the latent structure causing (credits: 1-4) SD 561. Environmental Dynamics the problem. An attempt is made to identify the Individual or group studies on any topic relating Environmental Dynamics introduces the system generic systems describing such latent structures. to social science and policy studies selected by the dynamics students to the application in environ- The latent structures discussed include a selection student and approved by the faculty member who mental systems. The course materials include the from capacity constraining and capacity enabling supervises the work. (Prerequisites: permission of book Modeling the Environment, a supporting systems, resource allocation, and economic cycles the instructor. website, lectures and the corresponding power of various periodicities. Problems discussed in point files. Students learn system dynamics with lessons include pests, gang violence, terrorism, examples implemented with the Stella software. political instability, professional competence in The course includes a variety of small models organizations, urban decay, and economic growth and case applications to watershed manage- ment, salmon restoration, and incentives for

146 System Dynamics Return to Table of Contents http://cpe.wpi.edu/syeng.html Systems Engineering

Faculty cal field or industry enhances the student’s Graduate Certificate Admissions ability to comprehend the scope and Requirements Faculty hold a full time position in a magnitude of the complexity of systems Candidate Qualifications WPI academic department or are adjunct engineering. faculty vetted by a WPI academic depart- The ideal candidate for these certifi- ment head. Admissions Requirements cate programs will have at least a BS in Engineering or Computer Science with a F. J. Looft, Academic Director Systems Admission for the Master’s degree and GPA of 3.0 or higher from an accredited Engineering; Professor; Ph.D., Michigan. graduate certificates is consistent with the university, as well as: Digital and analog systems, microprocessor admission requirements listed in the Grad- and embedded systems, space-flight uate Catalog for a Master of Science de- • An introductory understanding of statis- systems, robots and robotic systems, robot gree. Appropriate undergraduate bachelor’s tics and probability sensors, alternative energy systems, systems degree majors include but are not limited • A strong background in engineering engineering capstones and education. to Computer Science, Electrical Engineer- and/or computer systems D. Gelosh, Program Director Systems ing, Mechanical Engineering, Biomedical Students with other backgrounds may Engineering; Ph.D., University of Engineering, or Computer Engineering apply by demonstrating their readiness Pittsburgh; advancing the overall state of from an accredited university. Admission through other means (e.g. a degree in practice for systems engineering. is determined by a review of the applica- engineering or science with broad, techni- tion by faculty from both the Electrical & cal, computer science-related experience). J. P. Monat, Professor of Practice and Computer Engineering Department and Students with a previous MS degree in En- Director, Corporate and Professional the Computer Science Department. gineering or Computer Science and with Education; Ph.D., Stanford University; a GPA of 3.0 or higher will be considered systems thinking, emergence and self- Graduate Certificate for the ACP. organization, system optimization, risk A graduate certificate provides qualified management, decision analysis, project students with an opportunity to further Degree Requirements management. their studies in an advanced field. Courses Core Requirement (9 credits) R. Swarz, Adjunct Professor are selected from a range of offerings and • SYS 501 – Concepts of Systems give a firm foundation in the field of sys- Engineering (3 credits) S. S. Virani, Teaching Assistant Professor; tems engineering. Ph.D., University of Alabama; modeling • SYS 510 – Systems Architecture based systems engineering (MBSE), Graduate Certificate in Systems (3 credits) engineering education and team mental Engineering • SYS 511 – Systems Integration and Test models. Minimum of 17 credits. For more infor- (3 credits) mation, please consult the WPI web. Management Requirement (6 credits) Programs of Study Complete one of the following two courses: • Master of Science in Systems Graduate Certificate in Systems Engineering Fundamentals Engineering • MIS 576 Project Management 12 credits. For more information, please (3 credits) or • Graduate Certificate in Systems consult the WPI web. Engineering • OIE 541 Operations Risk Management • Graduate Certificate in Systems Graduate Certificate in Systems (3 credits) Engineering Fundamentals Engineering: Program Protection Planning Complete one from courses below: WPI offers graduate levels studies in the The graduate certificate in Systems • MIS 576 – Project Management field of systems engineering leading to an Engineering: Program Protection Plan- (3 credits) Master of Science as well as graduate level ning consists of six courses, five in systems certificates. These programs are designed engineering and one elective. For more • MIS 582 – Information Security to exemplify the WPI tradition of theory information, consult the WPI web site. Systems and Management (3 credits) and practice and incorporate input from • OIE 541 – Operations Risk Advanced Certificate in Systems Management (3 credits) engineers currently practicing systems en- Engineering: Program Protection Planning gineering. The programs integrate content The advanced graduate certificate in • OIE 554 – Global Operations Strategy from engineering, science, and manage- Systems Engineering: Program Protection (3 credits) ment. The MS degree is designed to Planning consists of six courses, five in • SD 550 – System Dynamics provide students with advanced knowledge systems engineering and one elective. For Foundation: Managing Complexity of engineering systems and management more information, consult the WPI web (3 credits) supplemented with a technology focus. site. Professional employment in a technologi-

Return to Table of Contents Systems Engineering 147 Depth Requirements (6 credits) This course will study and contrast various im- SYS 579. Special Topics portant architectural frameworks, representations, Complete two additional 3-credit Systems SYS 585. Systems Engineering Capstone Engineering graduate courses tools, and methodologies in order to provide scalable and flexible approaches for enterprises Experience Elective Courses (6 credits) operating in dynamic and complex environments. One of the central priorities in WPI’s educational Enterprise-level system architecting tools will be philosophy is the application of academic skills Capstone Experience (3 credits discussed and demonstrated. At a minimum, the and knowledge to real-world problems. The cap- minimum) DoDAF, FEAF, Zachman, and TOGAF archi- stone project represents a substantive evaluation tectural frameworks will be discussed in depth. and application of coursework covered in the pro- Course Descriptions Other topics will include analysis of architectural gram. Students are encouraged to select projects with practical significance for the advancement All courses are 3 credits unless otherwise noted. alternatives to meet physical and logical objectives and providing information and systems assurance of their company’s competitive position as well as SYS 501. Concepts of Systems Engineering in an environment that takes people, processes, their own personal development. The project is Systems Engineering is a multifaceted discipline, and technology into account. Modeling tools administered, advised, and evaluated by WPI as involving human, organizational, and various such as UML/SysML and the use of model-driven part of the learning experience, but students are technical variables that work together to create architectures will be presented. Validation of the encouraged to seek mentorship from experienced complex systems. This course is an introduction architecture with stakeholders will be discussed. colleagues in the Systems Engineering profession. and overview of the methods and disciplines that Methods of identifying risks and opportunities The presence of or degree of participation from a systems engineers use to define, develop, and associated with the architectural choice will be mentor is made at the discretion of the student or deploy systems. It includes specific integrated explored. Practical examples will be included for the organization sponsoring the program. examples, projects, and team building exer- illustration. (Prerequisite: SYS501 Concepts of SYS 597. Independent Study cises to aid in understanding and appreciating Systems Engineering or another introductory Approved study of a special subject or topics se- fundamental principles. Topics covered include; course in Systems Engineering) lected by the student to meet his or her particular Introduction to Systems Engineering; Require- requirements or interests. Independent study ments Development; Functional Analysis and SYS 511. Systems Integration, Validation and Verification students will work under the direct supervision of Requirements Allocation; System Architecture a WPI ECE, ME or CS faculty member. and System Design; Integration, Verification This course examines the use of Systems Engineer- and Validation; Trade Studies; Systems Analysis, ing principles and best practices with respect to SYS 598. Directed Research Modeling and Simulation; Specialty Engineering; systems and systems-of-systems verification and Directed research students will work under the Risk Management; and Technical Planning and validation (V&V). V&V processes, activities direct supervision of a WPI ECE, ME or CS Management. (Prerequisite: an undergraduate and methods as they apply across the product faculty member on an experimental or theoretical degree in engineering or science, or permission of lifecycle will be examined. Case studies, papers problem which may involve an extensive literature the instructor) and exercises will be used to examine the success search, experimental procedures and analysis. A and failure of verification, validation and test pro- comprehensive report in the style of a techni- SYS 510. Systems Architecture and Design cesses. Course topics include 1) How early systems cal report or paper and an oral presentation are engineering activities and solution sets affect inte- required. gration, verification, validation and test; 2) V&V activities relative to product development phases; SYS 599. Thesis 3) Modeling quality, cost, time and risk; 4) Test- (Prerequisite: Accepted to Systems Engineering ing and non-testing methods; 5) V&V planning, MS degree program.) execution and reporting; 6) Systems integration; and 7) V&V of critical and complex systems.

148 Systems Engineering Return to Table of Contents Index

Academic Standards 16 Fellowships 15 Online Graduate Programs 9 Admission 11, 12 Financial Information 15 Operations Design and Leadership 40 Advanced Graduate Certificates 7 Fire Protection Engineering 84 Alumni Tuition Incentive 20 Ph.D. 5 Application Requirements 14 Geotechnical Engineering 56 Physics 131 Applying to WPI 11 Gordon Library 24 Plan of Study 18 Audit 20 Grading System 16 Power Systems Management 90 Graduate and Advanced Graduate Printing Services 25 Biochemistry 52 Certificates 7 Project, Thesis, and Dissertation Bioinformatics and Computational Graduate Certificate Program 7 Advising 18 Biology 26 Graduate Programs 4 Biology and Biotechnology 28 Registration 19 Biomedical Engineering 31 Health and Accident Insurance 20 Research Assistantships 15 Bookstore 23 Housing 25 Robotics Engineering 135 BS/MS program 6 Business School of 38 IELTS 11 School of Business 38 Information Technology 40 Social Science & Policy Studies 143 Career Development Center 23 Information Technology Resources 23 Sports and Recreation 25 Certificate in College Teaching 91 Insurance 20 STEM for Educators 147 Certificate in Nuclear Science and Interactive Media and Game Structural Engineering 55 Engineering 92 Development 87 Student ID Cards 25 Certificate in Power Systems Engineering 78 Interdisciplinary Master’s and Doctoral Student Loans 16 Certificate in Power Systems Programs 6 Student Services 23 Management 91 Interdisciplinary Programs 89 Systems Engineering 147 Chemical Engineering 48 International Graduate Student Services 25 Systems Modeling 144 Chemistry and Biochemistry 52 Internships 15 System Dynamics 143 Civil and Environmental Engineering 55 Class Cancellation 23 Late Fees 20 Teaching Assistantships 15 Collaborative for Entrepreneurship and Learning Sciences and Technologies 93 Technology Support and Instruction 24 Innovation 39 Leave of Absence 20 Theses 23 Combined Bachelor/Master’s Program 6 Library 24 TOEFL: 11 Computer and Communications Transcripts 19 Networks 62 Mail Services 25 Transfers and Waivers 12 Computer Science 64 Management 40 Transportation Engineering 56 Computer Security 73 Manufacturing Engineering 96 Tuition Payments & Billing 20 Conditional Admission 12 Manufacturing Engineering Tuition Rate 20 Confirmation of Admission 12 Management 90 Construction Project Management 56 Marketing and Technological Innovation 40 WPI Police 23 Corporate and Professional Education 9 Master Builder 56 Course Changes: Add/Drop/Withdrawal 20 Master of Business Administration 5, 39 Master of Engineering 5 Dean of Graduate Studies 25 Master of Mathematics for Educators­ Dean of Students 25 (M.M.E.) 5 Deferred Enrollment 12 Master of Science 5 Degree Requirements 21 Master of Science in Mathematics for Directions 150 Educators 5 Dissertations 23 Master of Science in Physics for Educators 6 Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) 5 Materials Science and Engineering 100 Driving Directions 150 Mathematical Sciences 106 Mechanical Engineering 117 Educator Discounts 15 Monthly Payment Plan 20 Electrical and Computer Engineering 74 Engineering and Construction 56 Environmental Engineering 56

Return to Table of Contents Index 149 Notice of Disclaimer Rehabilitation Act of 1973, and other state offering post-graduate instruction. In WPI reserves the right to make changes and federal laws, WPI does not discrimi- addition, undergraduate programs leading in policy, regulations, tuition and fees nate on the basis of race, color, age, sex, to majors in computer science, chemical, subsequent to the publication of this ancestry, religion, national origin, sexual civil, electrical, industrial, manufacturing material. For a current description of the orientation, family status, disability or and mechanical engineering are accredited WPI policies and procedures, tuition and membership in the armed services, in by the Engineering Accreditation Com- fees, please contact the Graduate Studies recruiting and admitting students, award- mission of the Accreditation Board for and Enrollment Office. ing financial aid, recruiting and hiring Engineering and Technology (ABET). faculty and staff, or in operating any of its The Chemistry and Biochemistry Depart- Notice of Nondiscriminatory programs and activities. ment and its program are approved by the American Chemical Society for a major Policy as to Students Notice of Accreditation It is the policy of WPI that each qualified in chemistry. The School of Business is WPI is accredited as an institution by individual shall have equal opportunity accredited by The Association to Advance the New England Association of Schools in education, employment and services at Collegiate Schools of Business (AACSB). and Colleges Inc., a nongovernmental, WPI. As a matter of practice and policy, nationally recognized organization whose and in accordance with the Civil Rights affiliated institutions include elementary Act of 1964, Title IX of the Education schools through collegiate institutions Amendments of 1972, Section 504 of the

Driving Directions To WPI’s Worcester Campus 100 Institute Road, Worcester, MA The top map will guide you to I-290. Exit at 17 if eastbound or 18 if westbound. Using the bottom map, follow the arrows to the WPI campus.

150 Directions Return to Table of Contents